MSTP Pamphlet 5-0.

MAGTF Planners Reference Manual

MAGTF Staff Training Program

(MSTP)

U.S. Marine Corps

October 2010
This page intentionally left blank.
 UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS
MSTP Center (C 467) MCCDC
3300 Russell Road
Quantico, Virginia 22134-5069

15 October 2010

FOREWORD

1. PURPOSE. The MAGTF Planners Reference Manual provides general planning considerations and
planning factors that may be helpful to a Marine Air-Ground Task Force (MAGTF) staff during the
conduct of planning.

2. SCOPE. This manual is intended for use by MAGTF staffs. It is designed to facilitate the planning
effort by presenting general planning factors and considerations that may be used in an Operational
Planning Team (OPT). This manual does not negate the need for a careful Mission, Enemy, Terrain and
Weather, Troops available, and Time available (METT-T) analysis. The data presented in the manual is
intended to be a starting point only, and should be tailored to satisfy the requirements identified in the
METT-T analysis.

3. SUPERSESSION. MSTP Pamphlet 5-0.3 of 2 March 2010.

4. CHANGES. Recommendations for improvements to this pamphlet are encouraged from commands as
well as from individuals. The attached User Suggestion Form can be reproduced and forwarded to:

Director, MAGTF Staff Training Program

2042 South Street
Quantico, Virginia 22134-5001

Recommendations may also be submitted electronically to:

MSTP_OPSO@nmci.usmc.mil

5. CERTIFICATION. Reviewed and approved this date.

Glenn T. Starnes
Colonel, U.S. Marine Corps
Director
MAGTF Staff Training Program Center
Marine Corps Combat Development Command
Quantico, Virginia
Throughout this pamphlet, masculine nouns and pronouns are used for the sake of simplicity. Except
where otherwise noted, these nouns and pronouns apply to either sex.
 USER SUGGESTION FORM

From:
To: Director, MAGTF Staff Training Program, 2042 South Street, Quantico, Virginia 22134-5001

1. In accordance with the foreword, individuals are encouraged to submit suggestions concerning this
pamphlet directly to the above addressee

Page _____________________________ Article/Paragraph No. __________________________

Line No. __________________________ Figure/Table No. ______________________________

Nature of Change: Add Delete

Change Correct

2. Proposed Text: (Verbatim, double-spaced; continue on additional pages as necessary).

3. Justification/Source:

NOTE:
1. Only one recommendation per page.
2. Locally reproduced forms may be used for e-mail submissions to:
opso@mstp.quantico.usmc.mil
This page intentionally left blank.
____________________________________________________________
MSTP Pamphlet 5-0.3
Record of Changes

Change Date of
Entry Date Organization Signature
No. Change
This page intentionally left blank.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Table of Contents
_________________________________________________________________________________________

Part I Organizations ................................................................................................................. 1

1001 Marine Expeditionary Force and Major Subordinate Command Locations ..................................... 1
1001a Infantry and Artillery Regiment Locations ................................................................................... 1
1001b Air Group Locations ..................................................................................................................... 2
1002 Marine Corps Component Headquarters Locations ......................................................................... 2
1003 Marine Corps Forces Command Organization ................................................................................. 3
1004 Marine Corps Forces Pacific Organization ...................................................................................... 3
1005 I Marine Expeditionary Force Organization ..................................................................................... 4
1005a 1st Marine Division ...................................................................................................................... 4
1005b 3rd Marine Aircraft Wing ............................................................................................................. 5
1005c 1st Marine Logistics Group .......................................................................................................... 5
1006 II Marine Expeditionary Force Organization ................................................................................... 6
1006a 2nd Marine Division ..................................................................................................................... 6
1006b 2nd Marine Aircraft Wing ............................................................................................................ 7
1006c 2nd Marine Logistics Group ......................................................................................................... 7
1007 III Marine Expeditionary Force Organization .................................................................................. 8
1007a 3rd Marine Division ...................................................................................................................... 8
1007b 1st Marine Aircraft Wing .............................................................................................................. 9
1007c 3rd Marine Logistics Group .......................................................................................................... 9
1008 Marine Corps Forces Reserve Organization ................................................................................... 10
1008a 4th Marine Division .................................................................................................................... 10
1008b 4th Marine Aircraft Wing ........................................................................................................... 11
1008c 4th Marine Logistics Group ........................................................................................................ 11
1009 Notional Marine Expeditionary Unit Organization ........................................................................ 12
1010 Maritime Prepositioning Force ....................................................................................................... 12
1010a Maritime Prepositioning Ship Squadron Locations .................................................................... 13
1010b Phases of a Maritime Prepositioning Force Operation ............................................................... 13
1010c Naval Amphibious Group 1, 2, and 3 Organizations .................................................................. 14
1011 Marine Air Command and Control System Organization .............................................................. 14
1012 Engineer Forces .............................................................................................................................. 15
1012a Combat Engineer Battalion ......................................................................................................... 15
1012b Engineer Support Battalion ......................................................................................................... 16
1012c Marine Wing Support Squadron ................................................................................................. 17
1012d Naval Mobile Construction Battalion ......................................................................................... 18
1013 US Army Forces ............................................................................................................................. 19
1013a The New Modular Army ............................................................................................................. 19
1013b Heavy Brigade Combat Team ..................................................................................................... 20
1013c Infantry Brigade Combat Team ................................................................................................... 21
1013d Stryker Brigade Combat Team .................................................................................................... 22
1013e Army Aviation Units ................................................................................................................... 23
1013f Army Multiple Launch Rocket System Battalion (Fires Brigade)............................................... 23
1013g Army Engineers ........................................................................................................................... 24
1013h The Army Maneuver Enhancement Brigade (ME Brigade) ........................................................ 26
1013i The Modular Armys Sustainment System .................................................................................. 27
1013j The Armys Health Service Support System ............................................................................... 31
1013k Battlefield Surveillance Brigade (BFSB) .................................................................................... 31
1013l Army Civil Affairs and Psychological Operations Forces........................................................... 32
1014 Military Police Forces ..................................................................................................................... 34
1014a Military Police Organic to the MEF ............................................................................................ 34
1014b Army Military Police ................................................................................................................... 35

i
 1015 Special Forces Operations .............................................................................................................. 36
1015a US Army Special Operations Forces .......................................................................................... 36
1015b Marine Corps Special Operations Command ............................................................................. 38

Part II Equipment Capabilities .............................................................................................. 41

2001 Ground Weapons ............................................................................................................................ 41
2001a Vehicle-Mounted Weapon Systems ............................................................................................ 42
2001b Crew-Served Weapons ............................................................................................................... 42
2001c Vehicle Summary ....................................................................................................................... 42
2001d Tactical Trailers ........................................................................................................................... 46
2001e Vehicle Armor Kits ..................................................................................................................... 46
2001f Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) and Countermine Vehicles .................................... 46
2002 Fixed-Wing Aircraft ....................................................................................................................... 48
2003 Rotary-Wing Aircraft ..................................................................................................................... 50
2004 Unmanned Vehicle Systems............................................................................................................ 52
2004a Unmanned Aircraft Systems ........................................................................................................ 52
2004b Unmanned Ground Vehicles........................................................................................................ 54
2005 Marine Air Command and Control System Radars ........................................................................ 55
2006 Marine Air Defense ........................................................................................................................ 55
2007 Communications Equipment .......................................................................................................... 56
2007a Ground Single Channel Radio .................................................................................................... 56
2007b Enhanced Position Location and Reporting System (E-PLRS) AN/VSQ-2C ............................. 57
2007c AN/MRC-142 Multi-Channel Radio .......................................................................................... 57
2007d AN/TRC-170 Multi-Channel Radio ........................................................................................... 58
2007e AN/GRC-239 Tropo/Satellite Support Radio (TSSR) ................................................................. 58
2007f AN/TSC-191 Wireless Point to Point Link, Version D (WPPL-D)............................................. 58
2007g SHF SATCOM Terminal System ............................................................................................... 58
2007h Lightweight Multi-Band Satellite Terminal (LMST), AN/USC-65(V)1 and (V)2 ..................... 58
2007i PHOENIX Tactical SHF Satellite Terminal (TSST) AN/TSC-156............................................. 59
2007j EHF Satellite Communications Terminal AN/TSC-154 SMART-T ........................................... 59
2007k Global Broadcast Service (GBS) Transportable Ground Receiver Suite (TGRS) AN/TSR-9 .... 59
2007l Secure Wide Area Network (SWAN) .......................................................................................... 60
2007m Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal (SPIRIT) II ........................... 60
2007n Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal (SPIRIT-LITE) .................... 60
2007o MAGTF Modular Command and Control Center ....................................................................... 60
2007p AN/TSQ-227 Digital Technical Control (DTC) Van .................................................................. 61
2007q MAGTF Telephone/Message Switches ...................................................................................... 62
2007r MAGTF Multiplexers .................................................................................................................. 62
2007s MAGTF Data/Messaging ............................................................................................................ 63
2008 Amphibious Ships .......................................................................................................................... 63
2009 Landing Craft ................................................................................................................................. 64
2010 Navy Surface Ships ........................................................................................................................ 65
2011 Navy Air Defense ........................................................................................................................... 65
2011a Navy Platform Air Defense ........................................................................................................ 65
2011b Navy Aviation Air Defense Weapons ........................................................................................ 66
2012 Army Air Defense .......................................................................................................................... 66
2013 Maritime Prepositioning Force ....................................................................................................... 67
2014 Joint Support Systems .................................................................................................................... 67
2015 Intelligence Surveillance, and Reconnaissance Assets ................................................................... 68
2015a Ground Reconnaissance ............................................................................................................. 68
2015b Unmanned Aerial Vehicles ......................................................................................................... 69
2015c Fixed-wing Aircraft .................................................................................................................... 70
2015d Ground or Sea Sensors ............................................................................................................... 71
2015e Ground Surveillance Radars ........................................................................................................ 71
2015f Persistent Surveillance System .................................................................................................... 72

ii
Part III Battlespace and Time ................................................................................................. 73
3001 Aviation Forward Operating Base Considerations ......................................................................... 73
3001a Forward Operating Bases ........................................................................................................... 73
3001b Forward Operating Base Classifications ..................................................................................... 73
3001c Refueling Systems ...................................................................................................................... 73
3001d Maritime Prepositioning Force Support ..................................................................................... 73
3001e MALSP Support Packages ......................................................................................................... 73
3002 Marine Expeditionary Force Laydown ........................................................................................... 74
3003 Notional Marine Expeditionary Force Command Post Layout ...................................................... 74
3004 Rear Area Operations ..................................................................................................................... 74
3005 Tactical Control and Fire Support Coordinating Measures ............................................................ 74
3006 Notional Offensive Operations Schematic ..................................................................................... 76
3007 Notional Defensive Operations Schematic ..................................................................................... 77
3008 Types of Defenses .......................................................................................................................... 77
3008a Mobile Defense .......................................................................................................................... 77
3008b Position Defense ......................................................................................................................... 77
3009 Historical Planning Ratios for Array of Friendly Units ................................................................. 78
3010 Mine Countermeasures Terminology and Responsibilities ............................................................ 78
3011 Weather Conditions Sea States .................................................................................................... 79
3012 Opposed Rates of Advance Tables ................................................................................................. 79
3013 Deployment Operations Team Requirements ................................................................................ 80

Part IV Staff Planning Factors and Considerations ......................................................... 81

4001 Casualty Rate Estimation ............................................................................................................... 81
4002 Planning for Enemy Prisoner of War, Actual or Suspected Insurgents and Civilian Detainees...... 81
4003 MAGTF Health Service Support .................................................................................................... 81
4003a Basic Concepts ............................................................................................................................ 81
4003b HSS within the MAGTF.............................................................................................................. 82
4003c Reorganization since Desert Storm and OIF ............................................................................... 84
4003d Logistical and Operational Considerations for the New Medical Battalion ................................ 85
4003e Patient Movement Concept ........................................................................................................ 87
4003f Medical Regulating (MEDREG) Concept .................................................................................. 87
4003g The Army Health Service Support (HSS) System ....................................................................... 89
4003h U.S. Air Force Health Service Support (HSS) System .............................................................. 91
4004 Return to Duty Estimate Considerations ........................................................................................ 92
4005 Human Waste and Solid Waste Planning Factors .......................................................................... 92
4006 Intelligence Considerations ............................................................................................................ 92
4006a Planning and Direction ............................................................................................................... 92
4006b Collection ................................................................................................................................... 93
4006c Processing, Exploitation and Production ..................................................................................... 93
4006d Dissemination and Utilization .................................................................................................... 93
4007 Aircraft Sortie Rates ....................................................................................................................... 94
4008 Marine Air Command and Control System .................................................................................... 94
4008a Forms of Control ........................................................................................................................ 94
4008b Theater Air-Ground System (TAGS) .......................................................................................... 95
4008c Notional Aviation Communications Architecture ...................................................................... 96
4008d Movement and Set Up ................................................................................................................ 96
4008e Service Function Comparisons ................................................................................................... 97
4009 Artillery Planning Factors and Considerations ............................................................................... 97
4009a Artillery Organization for Combat ............................................................................................. 97
4009b Fundamentals of Organizing for Combat ................................................................................... 97
4009c Establishing Command Relationships ........................................................................................ 97
4009d Tactical Missions (Inherent Responsibilities) ............................................................................ 97
4009e Essential Fire Support Tasks ...................................................................................................... 98
4009f Artillery Cannon and Rocket Characteristics ............................................................................. 98
4009g Notional Artillery Ammunition Requirements (Infantry-Heavy Threat) .................................... 98

iii
4009h Notional Artillery Ammunition Requirements (Armor-Heavy Threat) ...................................... 99
4009i Notional Artillery Ammunition Requirements (Composite Infantry/Armor Threat) ................ 100
4009j Ammunition Transportation ..................................................................................................... 100
4009k Artillery Employment Considerations in Built-Up Areas ............................................................ 102
4010 Scatterable Mines (SCATMINES) and Other Type Mine Information ........................................ 102
4010a Types of SCATMINE and Self-Destruct Times ....................................................................... 102
4010b Situational SCATMINE Employment Planning Time ............................................................. 103
4010c Field Artillery SCATMINE (FASCAM) Fire Planning ........................................................... 103
4010d SCATMINE Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 103
4010e SCATMINE Life Cycle ............................................................................................................ 103
4010f SCATMINE Limitations .......................................................................................................... 104
4011 Counterfire Radars ....................................................................................................................... 104
4011a AN/TPQ-46 and AN/TPQ-37 Characteristics .......................................................................... 104
4011b AN/TPQ-46A Probabilities of Detection .................................................................................. 104
4011c AN/TPQ-37 Probabilities of Detection .................................................................................... 105
4011d AN/TPQ-47 Light weight Counter -Mortar Radar .................................................................... 105
4012 The Targeting Process .................................................................................................................. 106
4012a Decide, Detect, Deliver, and Assess ......................................................................................... 106
4012b Joint Targeting Process ............................................................................................................. 108
4012c Joint Air Tasking Cycle ............................................................................................................ 109
4012d Targeting Process Comparison ................................................................................................. 110
4013 Naval Surface Fire Support Planning Factors .............................................................................. 110
4014 NBC Defense Planning Factors and Considerations .................................................................... 110
4014a Mission-Oriented Protective Postures ...................................................................................... 110
4014b Chemical Agent Persistency at 70 degrees Fahrenheit ............................................................. 111
4014c Chemical Agent Persistency at 80 degrees Fahrenheit ............................................................. 111
4014d Chemical Agent Persistency at 90 degrees Fahrenheit ............................................................. 111
4014e Detailed Equipment/Troop Decontamination Water Requirements ......................................... 111
4014f NBC Defense First-Aid Equipment .......................................................................................... 111
4014g NBC Defense Reference Publications ...................................................................................... 111
4015 Engineer Bridging Considerations ............................................................................................... 112
4015a Marine Corps Bridge Equipment (Ribbon Bridge and MGB) .................................................. 112
4015b Bailey M2 Bridge ..................................................................................................................... 114
4015c Armored Vehicle-Launched Bridge (AVLB) ............................................................................ 115
4016 Engineer Breaching Considerations ............................................................................................. 115
4016a Breaching Tips ......................................................................................................................... 115
4016b Breaching Sequence ................................................................................................................. 116
4016c Breach Complexity .................................................................................................................... 116
4016d Breaching and Clearing Methods ............................................................................................. 116
4016e Breaching and Clearing Equipment .......................................................................................... 117
4017 Engineer Obstacle Considerations ................................................................................................ 117
4017a Minefield Design ...................................................................................................................... 118
4017b Hand Emplacement .................................................................................................................. 118
4017c Demolitions .............................................................................................................................. 118
4018 Engineer Survivability Considerations ......................................................................................... 119
4019 Engineer Bulk Fuel Considerations .............................................................................................. 120
4019a Amphibious Assault Fuel System ............................................................................................. 120
4019b Tactical Airfield Fuel Dispensing System ................................................................................ 120
4019c Helicopter Expedient Refueling System (HERS) ...................................................................... 121
4019d Expedient Refueling System (ERS) .......................................................................................... 121
4019e Hose Reel System (HRS) ......................................................................................................... 121
4019f SIXCON Fuel Module System and Water Module System....................................................... 121
4019g Ground Expedient Refueling System (GERS)........................................................................... 121
4019h Bulk Fuel Planning Considerations ........................................................................................... 121
4020 Engineer Expeditionary Airfield Considerations ......................................................................... 121
4021 Engineer Water Storage/Production Considerations .................................................................... 123

iv
4021a Tactical Water Purification System (TWPS) ............................................................................. 123
4021b Lightweight Water Purification System (LWPS) ...................................................................... 123
4021c Load Handling System Compatible Water Tank Rack (Hippo) ................................................ 123
4021d Water Supply Support System .................................................................................................. 124
4022 Movement Control Concept ......................................................................................................... 124
4023 Movement Control Planning Factors ........................................................................................... 125
4023a Time-Distance Factors .............................................................................................................. 125
4023b Distance Factors ....................................................................................................................... 125
4023c Time Factors ............................................................................................................................. 125
4023d Distance, Rate, and Time Calculations ..................................................................................... 125
4023e Finding an Unknown Factor of Distance, Rate, or Time .......................................................... 126
4023f Arrive and Clear Time Calculations ......................................................................................... 126
4024 Movement Planning Data ............................................................................................................. 128
4024a Unopposed Foot March ............................................................................................................ 128
4024b Unopposed Vehicle Movement Speed ...................................................................................... 128
4024c Opposed Vehicle Movement Speed (Delaying) ....................................................................... 128
4024d Opposed Vehicle Movement Speed (Defending) ..................................................................... 129
4024e Typical Pass Times for a Tactical Road March (U.S. Army) ................................................... 129
4024f Movement Planning .................................................................................................................. 129
4025 Logistics Concept ......................................................................................................................... 130
4026 Logistics Planning Factors ........................................................................................................... 130
4026a Marine Expeditionary Force Daily Supply Requirements ........................................................ 130
4026b Class I (Food) ........................................................................................................................... 131
4026c Class I (Water) .......................................................................................................................... 131
4026d Class II (PMD) ......................................................................................................................... 132
4026e Class III (P): 0.51 PMD ............................................................................................................ 132
4026f Class IV (PMD) ........................................................................................................................ 132
4026g Class V (W) .............................................................................................................................. 133
4026h Class VI (PMD) (After D+60) .................................................................................................. 133
4026i Class VIII (PMD) ..................................................................................................................... 133
4027 Maritime Prepositioning Force Employment Considerations ...................................................... 134
4028 Maritime Prepositioning Force (Enhanced) Capabilities ............................................................. 134
4028a Expeditionary Airfield .............................................................................................................. 134
4028b Naval Mobile Construction Battalion ....................................................................................... 134
4028c Fleet Hospital ........................................................................................................................... 134
4029 Maritime Prepositioning Force Engineer Equipment (Extract) .................................................... 134
4030 Maritime Prepositioning Force Offload Planning Data ................................................................ 135
4030a Time Requirements .................................................................................................................. 135
4030b Lighterage Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 135
4030c Causeway Ferry Capabilities .................................................................................................... 135
4030d Bulk Fluid Offload Times ........................................................................................................ 135
4031 Typical Principle End Items on MPSRON to Support a MEB ................................................. 137
4032 Command, Control, Communications, and Computers Planning Considerations ........................ 137
4032a Common Questions .................................................................................................................. 137
4032b Planning Activities ................................................................................................................... 139
4032c Technical Management and Direction ...................................................................................... 140
4032d Other Planning Functions ......................................................................................................... 141
4032e Exercise Timeline ..................................................................................................................... 141
4033 Information Operations Considerations ....................................................................................... 142
4033a Basic Considerations ................................................................................................................ 142
4033b Deception ................................................................................................................................. 143
4033c Psychological Operations ......................................................................................................... 143
4033d Electronic Warfare .................................................................................................................... 143
4033e Physical Destruction ................................................................................................................. 143
4033f Information Assurance ............................................................................................................. 143
4033g Operations Security .................................................................................................................. 143

v
 4033h Special Information Operations ................................................................................................ 143
4033i Civil Affairs .............................................................................................................................. 143
4033j Public Affairs ........................................................................................................................... 143
4033k Legal Considerations ................................................................................................................ 143

Part V Key Terms and Graphics ......................................................................................... 145

5001 Command Relationships .............................................................................................................. 145
5001a Combatant Command (Command Authority) (COCOM) ......................................................... 146
5001b Operational Control (OPCON) .................................................................................................. 146
5001c Tactical Control (TACON)........................................................................................................ 146
5001d Support ..................................................................................................................................... 146
5001e Other Authorities ...................................................................................................................... 146
5002 Possible Command Relationships for MAGTF Units .................................................................. 147
5003 Tactical Tasks Definitions ............................................................................................................ 147
5004 Selected Key Map Symbology ..................................................................................................... 149
5004a Unit Symbol Modifiers ............................................................................................................. 150
5004b Friendly Unit Symbols ............................................................................................................. 150
5004c Tactical Mission Graphics ........................................................................................................ 152

Appendix A References ........................................................................................................ 153

A-1 Useful Web Pages ......................................................................................................................... 153
A-2 Planning Quick Reference Matrix ................................................................................................. 155
A-3 Combat Service Support Considerations in Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield ................ 159
A-4 Combat Service Support Considerations in the Problem Framing ................................................ 161
A-5 Combat Service Support Considerations in Course of Action Development ................................ 163
A-6 Combat Service Support Considerations in Course of Action Wargaming................................... 163
A-7 Combat Service Support Considerations in Course of Action Comparison/Decision ................... 164
A-8 Comparison of the Marine Corps Planning Process with Other Planning Processes .................... 164
A-9 Frequency Bands ........................................................................................................................... 165
A-10 Customary Metric Conversion Factors.......................................................................................... 165

Appendix B Abbreviations ................................................................................................... 167

B-1 National Distinguishing Letters .................................................................................................... 167
B-2 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................ 167

Appendix C Operations Orders Formats (Pull-Out Pages) .......................................... 171

Operation Plan/Order Format ...................................................................................................................... 173
Guide for the Task Organization Annex ...................................................................................................... 174

Figures
1-1 Marine Expeditionary Force and Major Subordinate Command Locations ..................................... 1
1-2 Infantry and Artillery Regiment Locations ...................................................................................... 1
1-3 Air Group Locations ........................................................................................................................ 2
1-4 Marine Corps Component Headquarters Locations ......................................................................... 2
1-5 Marine Corps Forces Command Organization ................................................................................. 3
1-6 Marine Corps Forces Pacific Organization ...................................................................................... 3
1-7 I Marine Expeditionary Force Organization ..................................................................................... 4
1-8 1st Marine Division Organization ..................................................................................................... 4
1-9 3rd Marine Aircraft Wing Organization ............................................................................................ 5
1-10 1st Marine Logistics Group Organization ......................................................................................... 5
1-11 II Marine Expeditionary Force Organization ................................................................................... 6
1-12 2nd Marine Division Organization .................................................................................................... 6
1-13 2nd Marine Aircraft Wing Organization ........................................................................................... 7
1-14 2nd Marine Logistics Group Organization ........................................................................................ 7
1-15 III Marine Expeditionary Force Organization .................................................................................. 8
1-16 3rd Marine Division Organization ..................................................................................................... 8

vi
1-17 1st Marine Aircraft Wing Organization ............................................................................................ 9
1-18 3rd Marine Logistics Group Organization ......................................................................................... 9
1-19 Marine Forces Reserve Organization .............................................................................................. 10
1-20 4th Marine Division Organization .................................................................................................... 10
1-21 4th Marine Aircraft Wing Organization .......................................................................................... 11
1-22 4th Marine Logistics Group Organization and Unit Locations ....................................................... 11
1-23 Notional Marine Expeditionary Unit Organization ........................................................................ 12
1-24 Maritime Prepositioning Ship Squadron Organization .................................................................. 12
1-25 Maritime Prepositioning Locations (MPS Squadrons and MCPP-N) ............................................ 13
1-26 Phases of a Maritime Prepositioning Force Operation ................................................................... 13
1-27 Amphibious Groups 1, 2 and 3 Organization ................................................................................. 14
1-28 Marine Air Command and Control System (MACCS) Organization ............................................. 14
1-29 Combat Engineer Battalion Organization ....................................................................................... 15
1-30 Engineer Support Battalion Organization ...................................................................................... 16
1-31 Marine Wing Support Squadron Organization ............................................................................... 17
1-32 Naval Mobile Construction Battalion Organization ....................................................................... 18
1-33 Army Heavy Brigade Combat Team Organization ........................................................................ 20
1-34 Army Infantry Brigade Combat Team Organization ....................................................................... 21
1-35 Army Stryker Brigade Combat Team Organization ........................................................................ 22
1-36 Army Multiple Launch Rocket System Battalion Organization ..................................................... 23
1-37 Army Modular Engineer Battalion Organization ............................................................................ 24
1-38 Army Maneuver Enhancement Brigade Organization .................................................................... 26
1-39 Army Sustainment Brigade Organization (typical configuration)................................................... 28
1-40 Brigade Support Battalion Organization ......................................................................................... 31
1-41 Battlefield Surveillance Brigade Organization ................................................................................ 32
1-42 Civil Affairs battalion (and CA brigade HQ and HQ company), USACAPOC(A) organization.... 33
1-43 Tactical PSYOP battalion, USACAPOC(A) organization .............................................................. 34
1-44 ARSOF Civil Affairs and PSYOPS units........................................................................................ 34
1-45 Standard FMF Military Police organizations .................................................................................. 35
1-46 Army General Support Military Police company organization ....................................................... 36
1-47 ARSOF Force Structure ................................................................................................................. 37
1-48 US Army Special Forces Group organization ............................................................................... 38
1-49 MARFORSOC organization ........................................................................................................... 39
1-50 MSOC organization ........................................................................................................................ 40
2-1 Launching an RQ-7 Shadow ........................................................................................................... 53
2-2 Dragon Runner ................................................................................................................................ 54
2-3 Dragon Runner (upgrade)................................................................................................................ 54
2-4 MK-3 RONS working arm .............................................................................................................. 55
2-5 MK-3 RONS ................................................................................................................................... 55
2-6 AN/MRC-142 UHF Multi-Channel Radio ...................................................................................... 57
2-7 Phoenix TSST ................................................................................................................................. 59
2-8 AN/TSQ-239 COC configurations .................................................................................................. 61
2-9 Digital Technical Control (DTC) Van............................................................................................. 61
2-10 AN/PPS-5D Ground Surveillance Radar ........................................................................................ 71
2-11 AN/PPS-5E Ground Surveillance Radar ......................................................................................... 72
2-12 Surveillance Radar Hawk ................................................................................................................ 72
3-1 Marine Expeditionary Force Laydown ........................................................................................... 74
3-2 Notional Marine Expeditionary Force Command Post Layout ...................................................... 74
3-3 Notional Offensive Operations Schematic ..................................................................................... 76
3-4 Notional Defensive Operations Schematic ..................................................................................... 77
3-5 Mine Countermeasures Responsibilities ........................................................................................ 78
4-1 Initial Medical Regulating Concept ............................................................................................... 88
4-2 Mature Medical Regulating Concept ............................................................................................. 88
4-3 Return to Duty Estimate Considerations ........................................................................................ 92
4-4 Notional Aviation Communications Architecture .......................................................................... 95
4-5 Theater Air-Ground System ........................................................................................................... 96

vii
 4-6 AN/TPQ-46A Mortar, Artillery, and Rocket Detection Averages ............................................... 105
4-7 AN/TPQ-37 Mortar, Artillery, and Rocket Detection Averages .................................................. 105
4-8 Marine Corps Targeting Methodology ......................................................................................... 106
4-9 Joint Targeting Process ................................................................................................................ 108
4-10 Joint Air Tasking Cycle ............................................................................................................... 109
4-11 Targeting Process Comparison ..................................................................................................... 110
4-12 Ribbon/Assault Float Bridge ........................................................................................................ 112
4-13 Kings Law of River Crossing ..................................................................................................... 113
4-14 Bailey Bridge ............................................................................................................................... 114
4-15 Armored Vehicle-Launched Bridge (AVLB) ................................................................................ 115
4-16 Breaching Sequence ..................................................................................................................... 116
4-17 Minefield Design .......................................................................................................................... 118
4-18 Current USMC tactical fuel systems (overview)........................................................................... 120
4-19 Movement Control Diagram ........................................................................................................ 124
4-20 Time and Distance Factors ........................................................................................................... 126
4-21 Logistics Concept Diagram .......................................................................................................... 130
5-1 Command Relationships for MAGTF Units ................................................................................ 147
5-2 Unit, Installation, and Site Symbol Frames .................................................................................. 150
5-3 Unit Symbols ................................................................................................................................ 151
5-4 Tactical Mission Graphics ............................................................................................................ 152
A-1 Comparison of the Marine Corps Planning Process to Other Planning Processes ....................... 164

Tables
1-1 Selected Combat Engineer Battalion Equipment ........................................................................... 15
1-2 Selected Engineer Support Battalion Equipment ........................................................................... 16
1-3 Selected Marine Wing Support Squadron Equipment .................................................................... 17
1-4 Selected Naval Mobile Construction Battalion Equipment ............................................................ 18
1-5 Selected Army Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Equipment ............................................... 20
1-6 Selected Army Infantry Brigade Combat Team (IBCT) Equipment ............................................... 21
1-7 Selected Stryker Brigade Combat Team (SBCT) Equipment ......................................................... 22
1-8 Army Aviation Units ....................................................................................................................... 23
1-9 Selected Army Multiple Launch Rocket System Battalion Equipment ......................................... 23
1-10 Summary of standard Army Engineer companies ........................................................................... 24
1-11 Selected equipment items organic to standard Army engineer units ............................................... 25
1-12 Army Combat Service Support Command Echelons ...................................................................... 27
1-13 Army Truck Companies .................................................................................................................. 30
1-14 Civil Affairs unit regional orientation ............................................................................................. 33
1-15 Selected equipment items, Military Police company (MSC Type) ................................................. 35
1-16 Selected equipment items, Army general support Military Police company................................... 36
1-17 Potential MP I/R Battalion Configurations and Capabilities........................................................... 36
1-18 Special Forces Group Regional Orientation ................................................................................... 37
1-19 Special Forces Operational detachments ........................................................................................ 37
2-1 Vehicle-Mounted Weapon Systems ............................................................................................... 41
2-2 Infantry Crew-Served Weapons ..................................................................................................... 42
2-3 The Light Fleet ............................................................................................................................... 42
2-4 High Mobility multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles ............................................................................. 42
2-5 Medium Tactical Vehicle Replacement (MTVR) Family of Trucks .............................................. 43
2-6 Logistics Vehicle System (LVS) Family of Trucks ....................................................................... 45
2-7 Tactical Trailer Summary................................................................................................................ 46
2-8 Vehicle Armor Kits ......................................................................................................................... 46
2-9 Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) and Countermine Vehicles ........................................ 47
2-10 General Fixed-Wing Aircraft Capabilities ..................................................................................... 48
2-11 Rotary-Wing Aircraft Capabilities ................................................................................................. 50
2-12 Aircraft Glossary ............................................................................................................................ 51
2-13 Unmanned Aerial System WASP ................................................................................................ 52
2-14 Unmanned Aerial System RQ-11B RAVEN ............................................................................... 52

viii
2-15 Unmanned Aerial System SCAN EAGLE ................................................................................... 53
2-16 Unmanned Aerial System RQ-7 SHADOW ................................................................................ 53
2-17 Unmanned Aerial System PREDATOR....................................................................................... 54
2-18 Unmanned Aerial System GLOBAL HAWK .............................................................................. 54
2-19 Marine Air Command and Control Radar Systems ........................................................................ 55
2-20 Marine Air Defense Capabilities - Weapons ................................................................................... 55
2-21 Marine Air Defense Capabilities Sensors..................................................................................... 56
2-22 Marine Air Defense Capabilities Command and Control ............................................................ 56
2-23 Ground Single Channel Radio Capabilities .................................................................................... 56
2-24 AN-MRC-142 Multi-Channel Radio .............................................................................................. 57
2-25 AN/TRC-170 Multi-Channel Radio ............................................................................................... 58
2-26 AN/GRC-239 Tropo/Satellite Support Radio (TSSR) .................................................................... 58
2-27 SATCOM Terminal Capabilities .................................................................................................... 58
2-28 AN/USC-65(V)1 and (V)2 Lightweight multi-band satellite terminal (LSMT) ............................. 59
2-29 AN/TSC-154 SMART-T Satellite Communication Terminal ......................................................... 59
2-30 Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal (SPIRIT) II ............................. 60
2-31 Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal Lightweight
Integrated Telecommunications Equipment (Trojan SPIRIT-LITE) AN/TSQ-226 .................... 60
2-32 MAGTF Telephone/Message Switches .......................................................................................... 62
2-33 MAGTF Muliplexers ...................................................................................................................... 62
2-34 MAGTF data/messaging systems ................................................................................................... 62
2-35 Frequency Ranges ........................................................................................................................... 62
2-36 Amphibious Ships .......................................................................................................................... 63
2-37 Amphibious Ship Well Deck Capabilities ...................................................................................... 64
2-38 Landing Craft Capabilities ............................................................................................................. 64
2-39 Landing Craft Air Cushion Capabilities ......................................................................................... 64
2-40 Navy Surface Ships ........................................................................................................................ 65
2-41 Navy Platform Air Defense Capabilities ........................................................................................ 66
2-42 Navy Aviation Air Defense Weapons ............................................................................................ 66
2-43 Army Air Defense Capabilities ...................................................................................................... 66
2-44 Maritime Prepositioning Force Capabilities ................................................................................... 67
2-45 Maritime Prepositioning Force Ships and Steaming Times ........................................................... 67
2-46 Ground Reconnaissance Assets ...................................................................................................... 68
2-47 Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Assets ................................................................................................... 69
2-48 Fixed-Wing Aircraft Assets ........................................................................................................... 70
2-49 Ground or Sea Assets ..................................................................................................................... 71
2-50 Ground Surveillance Radars ........................................................................................................... 71
2-51 Persistent Surveillance Systems ..................................................................................................... 72
3-1 Refueling System Capabilities ....................................................................................................... 73
3-2 Maritime Prepositioning Force Support ......................................................................................... 73
3-3 MALSP Support Packages ............................................................................................................. 73
3-4 Planning Ratios for Array of Friendly Units .................................................................................. 78
3-5 Sea States Beaufort Scale ............................................................................................................ 79
3-6 Division Opposed Rates of Advance (km/day) .............................................................................. 79
3-7 Brigade and Below Opposed Rates of Advance (km/day) ............................................................. 79
4-1 Taxonomy of Care (Army-Air Force Care Levels vs. Navy-Joint Care Levels) ............................. 82
4-2 Capabilities of MAGTF HSS Elements ......................................................................................... 83
4-3 Capability Comparison between the Forward Surgical Team (FST Army), the Mobile Field Surgical
Team (MFST Air Force) and the Forward Resuscitative Surgical Team (FRSS Navy) ........... 84
4-4 Medical Battalion, FMF, reorganization ........................................................................................ 85
4-5 Tactical MEDEVAC/CASEVAC aircraft ....................................................................................... 87
4-6 Army Medial Units ........................................................................................................................ 89
4-7 Human and Solid Waste Planning Factors ..................................................................................... 92
4-8 Aircraft Sortie Rates ....................................................................................................................... 94
4-9 Forms of Control Exercised by Marine Air Command and Control System Agencies .................. 94
4-10 Marine Air Command and Control System Agency Planning Factors ........................................... 96

ix
4-11 Service Function Comparisons ....................................................................................................... 97
4-12 Artillery Tactical Missions (Inherent Responsibilities) .................................................................. 97
4-13 Essential Fire Support Tasks .......................................................................................................... 98
4-14 Artillery Cannon and Rocket Characteristics ................................................................................. 98
4-15 Notional artillery ammunition requirements (Infantry-Heavy Threat) ........................................... 98
4-16 Artillery Battalion Infantry-Heavy Mission Equivalents ............................................................... 99
4-17 Notional artillery ammunition requirements (Armor-Heavy Threat) ............................................. 99
4-18 Artillery Battalion Armor-Heavy Mission Equivalents ................................................................ 100
4-19 Notional artillery ammunition requirements (Composite Infantry/Armor Threat) ....................... 100
4-20 Artillery Battalion Infantry/Armor Mission Equivalents ............................................................. 100
4-21 Ordnance Classification Data (155-mm only) ............................................................................... 101
4-22 General Ammunition Transportation ........................................................................................... 101
4-23 Artillery Employment Considerations in Built-Up Areas ............................................................ 101
4-24 Types of SCATMINE and Self-Destruct Times .......................................................................... 102
4-25 Situational SCATMINE Employment Planning Times ................................................................ 103
4-26 FASCAM/SCATMINE Minefield Density and Size ................................................................... 103
4-27 SCATMINE Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 103
4-28 Counterfire Radar Characteristics ................................................................................................ 104
4-29 AN/TPQ-46A Probabilities of Detection ..................................................................................... 104
4-30 AN/TPQ-37 Probabilities of Detection ........................................................................................ 105
4-31 Actions during the Joint Air Tasking Cycle Phases ..................................................................... 109
4-32 NM-42/MK-45 5-inch/54 Caliber Gun System Capabilities ......................................................... 110
4-33 Mission-Oriented Protective Postures .......................................................................................... 110
4-34 Chemical Agent Persistency at 70 degrees Fahrenheit ................................................................. 111
4-35 Chemical Agent Persistency at 80 degrees Fahrenheit ................................................................. 111
4-36 Chemical Agent Persistency at 90 degrees Fahrenheit ................................................................. 111
4-37 Equipment/Troop Decontamination Water Requirements ........................................................... 111
4-38 NBC Defense First-Aid Equipment (Individual Issue) ................................................................ 111
4-39 Ribbon/Assault Float Bridge Assembly ....................................................................................... 113
4-40 Number of Bridge Sets in Major Commands ............................................................................... 113
4-41 River Crossing Capabilities .......................................................................................................... 113
4-42 Raft Crossing Capabilities for Longer Span ................................................................................. 113
4-43 Ribbon Raft Capabilities ............................................................................................................... 113
4-44 Medium Girder Bridge Assembly Requirements .......................................................................... 114
4-45 M2 Bailey Bridge ......................................................................................................................... 114
4-46 Estimated Time for Assembly (Hours) ........................................................................................ 114
4-47 Armored Vehicle-Launched Bridge Systems ............................................................................... 115
4-48 Breaching Complexity and Time Factors ..................................................................................... 116
4-49 Explosive Breaching and Clearing ............................................................................................... 116
4-50 Mechanical Breaching and Clearing ............................................................................................ 117
4-51 Breaching and Clearing Equipment in a Marine Division ........................................................... 117
4-52 Weapons Ranges to Determine Obstacle Coverage by Fire ......................................................... 117
4-53 Time to Hand Emplace Minefield ................................................................................................ 118
4-54 Company Hours for Hand Emplacement ..................................................................................... 118
4-55 Destruction of Operational Targets .............................................................................................. 118
4-56 Time Required for the M9 ACE or M7G Dozer to Complete a Fighting Position ....................... 119
4-57 Amphibious Assault Fuel System ................................................................................................ 120
4-58 Time to Construct Various Tank Farm Configurations ................................................................ 121
4-59 Time to Construct Various Expeditionary Airfield Configurations ............................................. 122
4-60 Time to Construct Expeditionary Airfield Parking Hides for Various Aircraft ........................... 122
4-61 Comparison of the TWPA and ROWPU Water Purification Systems ......................................... 123
4-62 Water Supply Support System Allowances .................................................................................. 124
4-63 Example Clear and Arrive Times 1 .............................................................................................. 127
4-64 Example Clear and Arrive Times 2 .............................................................................................. 128
4-65 Example Clear and Arrive Times 3 .............................................................................................. 128
4-66 Movement Planning for Unopposed Foot March ......................................................................... 128

x
4-67 Movement Planning for Unopposed Vehicle Movement ............................................................. 128
4-68 Movement Planning for Enemy Delaying Vehicle Movement .................................................... 128
4-69 Movement Planning for Enemy Defending Vehicle Movement .................................................. 129
4-70 Typical Pass Times for a Tactical Road March ............................................................................ 129
4-71 Movement Planning ..................................................................................................................... 129
4-72 Marine Expeditionary Force Daily Supply Requirements ............................................................ 130
4-73 Class I (Food) Planning Factors for LCAC Cargo Movement ..................................................... 131
4-74 Class I (Water) Requirements for Temperate Zones .................................................................... 131
4-75 Class I (Water) Requirements for Tropical Zones ........................................................................ 131
4-76 Class I (Water) Requirements for Arctic Zones ........................................................................... 131
4-77 Class I (Water) Requirements for Arid Zones .............................................................................. 132
4-78 Class III Requirements (Gal) ........................................................................................................ 132
4-79 Class III (POL) MEF-Level Planning Factors .............................................................................. 132
4-80 Class IV Requirements ................................................................................................................. 132
4-81 Class VI Requirements (After D+60) ........................................................................................... 133
4-82 Class V (W) Example of planned vs. actual usage ....................................................................... 133
4-83 Class VIII Requirements .............................................................................................................. 133
4-84 Maritime Prepositioning Force Engineer Equipment (Extract) .................................................... 134
4-85 Maritime Prepositioning Force Offload Time Requirements ....................................................... 136
4-86 Lighterage Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 136
4-87 Causeway Ferry Capacities .......................................................................................................... 136
4-88 Bulk Fluid Offload Times ............................................................................................................ 136
4-89 Typical Major Principle End Items aboard a MPSRON to Support a MEB ................................ 137
4-90 Exercise Timeline ......................................................................................................................... 141
5-1 Command Relationships ............................................................................................................... 145
5-2 Unit Size and Installation Indicators ............................................................................................ 150
5-3 Fill Colors .................................................................................................................................... 150
A-1 Frequency Bands .......................................................................................................................... 165
A-2 Conversion Factors ....................................................................................................................... 165

xi
This page intentionally left blank.

xii
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part I

Organizations
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1001. Marine Expeditionary Force and Major Subordinate Command Locations

Figure 1-1. Marine Expeditionary Force and Major Subordinate Commands locations
a. Infantry and Artillery Regiment Locations

25
23 2
24
1
6
5
14 RCT OEF
8
11 Note 2: Detached 4
from I or II MEF
10 (-)
7 12

3
Note 3: III MEF
elements on
Okinawa to
Note 1: Shaded move to Guam
units are part of the
Selected Marine
Corps Reserve

Figure 1-2. Infantry and Artillery Regiment locations

1
b. Air Group Locations

Figure 1-3. Air Group locations

1002. Marine Corps Component Headquarters Locations

Figure 1-4. Marine Corps Component Headquarters locations

Note: Marine Corps component command responsibilities/locations are currently under review.

2
1003. Marine Corps Forces Command Organization
Same Marine COMMANDER
General Officer U.S. MARINE CORPS
FORCES COMMAND
Wearing Three Hats
COMMANDING GENERAL COMMANDER
FLEET MARINE FORCE U.S. MARINE CORPS
ATLANTIC BASES ATLANTIC

COMMANDING GENERAL MARINE CORPS

FORCES
II MARINE INSTALLATIONS
ASSIGNED
EXPEDITIONARY FORCE EAST

2nd MEF 22nd, 24th & 26th

HEADQUARTERS EXPEDITIONARY
GROUP UNITS (MEU)

2nd MARINE 2nd MARINE AIR

DIVISION WING

2nd MARINE OTHER

LOGISTICS ASSIGNED
GROUP FORCES

Figure 1-5. Marine Corps Forces Command organization

1004. Marine Corps Forces Pacific Organization

Same Marine COMMANDER COMMANDING GENERAL
General Officer U.S. MARINE CORPS FLEET MARINE FORCE
FORCES PACIFIC PACIFIC
Wearing Four Hats
COMMANDER COMMANDER
U.S. MARINE CORPS U.S. MARINE CORPS
BASES PACIFIC FORCES KOREA

MARINE CORPS
FORCES
INSTALLATIONS COMMANDING GENERAL COMMANDING GENERAL
ASSIGNED
WEST I MARINE III MARINE
EXPEDITIONARY FORCE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE

1st MEF 11th, 13th & 15th 3rd MEF 31st

HEADQUARTERS EXPEDITIONARY HEADQUARTERS EXPEDITIONARY
GROUP UNITS (MEU) GROUP UNIT (MEU)

1st MARINE 3rd MARINE AIR 3rd MARINE 1st MARINE AIR
DIVISION WING DIVISION WING

1st MARINE OTHER 3rd MARINE OTHER

LOGISTICS ASSIGNED LOGISTICS ASSIGNED
GROUP FORCES GROUP FORCES

Figure 1-6. Marine Corps Forces Pacific organization

3
1005. I Marine Expeditionary Force Organization

Figure 1-7. I Marine Expeditionary Force organization

a. 1st Marine Division

1

1
HQ 1 1 5 7 1 1 3 3 1
1
29P 29P 29P

HQ H&S HQ HQ HQ HQ H&S H&S H&S H&S H&S

A 1 1 1 5 1 7 1 11 A A A A A

(4 platoons) Btrys. A, B & C

1/11, I 3/12
A 2 1 2 5 2 7 B B B B B
B
2 11
(4 platoons)
B 3 1 3 5 3 7 Btrys. E, F & G C C C C C
2/11, K 3/12
C

MP (4 platoons) 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 11 D D D D D
29P ABV
(4 platoons) Btrys. I, K & M 29P
F
3/11, L 3/12
E E E
(4 platoons) E (+) SPT
5 11 To activate
in FY 11
HIMARS
F
Btrys. R, S & T 5/11
Note 1: All 1st MarDiv are based at Camp Pendleton, CA except
for those marked 29P, which are based at 29 Palms CA. Firing battery Units rotationally deployed under UDP as of FY11.
Note 2: One each infantry battalion, artillery battery, LAR distribution within UDP deployments are to 3rd Marine Division unless
company, AAV platoon, Recon platoon and engineer platoon 11th Marines is otherwise stated. Other units of the same type/size
is deployed or preparing to deploy with a West Coast MEU. shown for FY11 may be deployed in lieu of the units indicated.

Figure 1-8. 1st Marine Division organization

4
b. 3rd Marine Aircraft Wing

Figure 1-9. 3rd Marine Aircraft Wing organization

c. 1st Marine Logistics Group

1 MLG

Direct General
HQ 1 CL
Support
15 CL
Support
17 CL Forward 7 1
D
SPT

H&S H&S
HQ HQ 1 1 1 HQ

EOD 1
H&S H&S H&S D
11 CL
GS
Miramar CA
A 13
ELEC D
1 CL A SVC
16 CL
Yuma AZ B 23
FOOD D
5 CL B
SVC

LS C
7 CL C

CL = Combat Logistics
Notes: CL Bns. 1, 5 and 7 support 1st, 5th and 7th MP
Marines, respectively. CLB 11, 13 and 15 support (4 platoons &
the 11th, 13th and 15th MEUs, respectively. The 7th 3 sections)
SPT
Engineer Support Battalion and 1st Dental GS
Battalion are directly subordinate to the MLG
commander and do not belong to a CLR. 11 CL 13 CL 15 CL To activate in FY 11

Figure 1-10. 1st Marine Logistics Group organization

5
1006. II Marine Expeditionary Force Organization

Figure 1-11. II Marine Expeditionary Force organization

a. 2nd Marine Division

HQ 2 2 6 8 10 2 2 2 2

HQ H&S HQ HQ HQ HQ H&S H&S H&S H&S

A 1 2 1 6 1 8 1 10 A A A A

(4 platoons) Btrys. A, B &

C 1/10
A 2 2 2 6 2 8 B B B B
B
2 10
(4 platoons)
B 3 2 3 6 3 8 Btrys. E, F & C C C C
G 2/10
C

MP (4 platoons) 3 9 2 9 1 9 3 10 D D D D
ABV
(4 platoons) Btrys. I, K & L
F
3/10, & F 2/12
Firing battery distribution within E E E
(4 platoons) SPT
10th Marines is for FY11 5 10 To activate in FY 11
Units rotationally deployed under UDP as of FY11. Btrys. R, S & T Notes: One each infantry battalion, artillery
UDP deployments are to 3rd Marine Division unless 5/10, & G 2/12 battery, LAR company, AAV platoon, Recon
otherwise stated. Other units of the same type/size platoon and engineer platoon is deployed or
may be deployed in lieu of the units indicated. preparing to deploy with an East Coast MEU.

Figure 1-12. 2nd Marine Division organization

6
b. 2nd Marine Aircraft Wing
2

MWHS 28 MACG CPT 14 CPT 31 BFT 26 JCK 29 JCK 27 MWSG

2 MALS MALS MALS MALS 271 MWSS

MP
MALS-14 VMGR-252 MALS-31 VMFA-115 MALS-26 HMLA-167 MALS-29 HMLA-269 CPT
(4 platoons)
From FY08 2 MACS
272 MWSS
(4 Detachments)
VMA-223 VMA-231 VMFA-122 VMFA-251 HMLA-467 VMM-261 HMLA-567 VMM-162 JCK
Activates in
1 MASS FY11
273 MWSS
VMA-542 VMAQ-1 VMFA-312 VMFA(AW)- VMM-264 VMM-266 VMM-365
28
BFT
224
Converts to VMM-263
(3 Detachments) VMFA FY12
274 MWSS
VMAQ-2 VMAQ-3 VMFA(AW)- VMMT-204 HMH-461 HMH-464
28 MTACS CPT
533
HMH-366
(+1 Detachment) VMFAT-501

VMAQ-4 VMAT-203 HMT-302 (CH-53)

2
Legend Units rotationally deployed to 1st MAW under
VMU-2
CPT Cherry Point, NC UDP. The units indicated will not necessarily
BFT MCAS Beaufort, SC be the ones actually deployed. At any given time any
JCK Jacksonville, NC other unit of the same size/type may be substituted.

Figure 1-13. 2nd Marine Aircraft Wing organization

c. 2nd Marine Logistics Group

2 MLG

Direct General
HQ 2 CL 25 CL
Support
27 CL Forward 8 2
Support SPT D

H&S H&S
HQ HQ 2 2 2 HQ

EOD 2
H&S H&S H&S D
21 CL
GS
Cherry Pt. NC
A 12
ELEC D
2 CL A SVC
23 CL
Beaufort SC B 22
FOOD D
6 CL B
SVC

LS C
8 CL C

CL = Combat Logistics
Notes: CL Bns. 2, 6 and 8 support 2nd, 6th and 8th MP
Marines, respectively. CLB 22, 24 and 26 support (4 platoons &
the 22nd, 24th and 26th MEUs, respectively. The 8th 3 sections)
SPT
Engineer Support Battalion and 2nd Dental Battalion GS
are directly subordinate to the MLG commander
and do not belong to a CLR. 22 CL 24 CL 26 CL

Figure 1-14. 2nd Marine Logistics Group organization

7
1007. III Marine Expeditionary Force Organization

III

3 MHG 31 CE 3 (-) 1 (-) 3 MLG (-)

PERSONNEL (per T/O as of 03-10)

HQ 3 INTEL USMC USN
7 3 (-)
RAD III MEF (total) 27,007 1,744
III MEF CE 3,053 92
3rd MARDIV 10,538 635
5 HQ (-) HQ (-)
1st MAW 7,892 242
3rd MLG 5,524 775
CI
3 SOTG HUMINT
(-) SVC (-) EQUIPMENT (per T/E as of FY11 see note)
6 M88A2 Recovery Vehicles 24 F/A-18 A/C
25 LAV (all variants) 12 F/A-18 D
MP
3 SPT
P&A (-) 64 AAV (all variants) 16 AV-8D
GS
48 155-mm Howitzers (6 spare) 5 EA-6B
2,477 HMMWV (all types) 12 KC-130
A (+) 98 MRAP vehicles (all types) 12 V-22
DS 689 MTVR 7-ton trucks 24 CH-46
P&A = Production and Analysis
Notes: Equipment figures include elements of the 1st Marine 44 MTVR dump trucks 48 CH-53
Division and the 2nd and 3rd Marine Air Wings that rotationally 303 MK-48 LVS power units 18 AH-1
attached to III MEF under the Unit Deployment Program (UDP). 62 M870 low boys 9 UH-1

Figure 1-15. III Marine Expeditionary Force organization

a. 3rd Marine Division

Figure 1-16. 3rd Marine Division organization

8
b. 1st Marine Aircraft Wing

MWHS 18 MACG 12 IW 36 FUT 24(-) HI 17 MWSG

4 MACS MALS MALS MALS 171 MWSS

MP
MALS-12 VMFA(AW)-242 MALS-36 VMGR-152 MALS-24 (-) HMH-362 (-) IW
(4 platoons) Expands to
From FY08 2 MASS full size FY11
172 MWSS
(3 Detachments)
VMFA (UDP) VMFA (UDP) HMM-262 HMM-265 HMH-363 (-)
Converts to Converts to FUT
Expands to
18 VMM FY13 VMM FY13 full size FY11 HMH-463 (-)
Det Converts to VMM FY11
(2 Detachments)
VMA (UDP) VMAQ (UDP) MWSD
18 MTACS HMH (UDP) HMLA (UDP) Wing Support
To activate in FY12

Legend
Notes: 2nd and 3rd MAW round out MAG-12
IW Iwakuni, Japan
and MAG-36 by attaching a variable number
HI MCB (Kaneohe Bay), HI
of air squadrons to them (on a rotating basis)
FUT Futenma, Japan
under the unit deployment program (UDP)
OK Okinawa, Japan

Figure 1-17. 1st Marine Aircraft Wing organization

c. 3rd Marine Logistics Group

3 MLG

Direct General
HQ 3 CL 35 CL
Support
37 CL Forward 9 3
Support SPT D

H&S H&S
HQ HQ 3 3 3 HQ

EOD (-) 3
(-) 33 CL H&S H&S H&S (-) D
GS
Cp Pendleton
To activate ELEC A (+) 11
3 CL in FY 11 (-) (-) B SVC (-) D

Hawaii
36 CL FOOD (-) 21
(-) D
Japan
(-) C
SVC (-)
4 CL
Japan LS (-)
(-) (-) SPT

CL = Combat Logistics
Notes: CL Bns. 3 and 4 support 3rd and 4th Marines,
(-) MP
respectively. CL Bn. 31 supports the 31st Marine To activate
Expeditionary Unit (MEU). The 9th Engineer Support (4 platoons & 1 section) in FY 11
Battalion and 3rd Dental Battalion are directly (-) 31 CL
subordinate to the MLG commander. GS

Figure 1-18. 3rd Marine Logistics Group organization

9
1008. Marine Forces Reserve Organization

Figure 1-19. Marine Forces Reserve organization

a. 4th Marine Division

4

HQ 4 23 24 25 14 4 4 4 4
New Orleans LA San Antonio TX San Bruno CA Kansas City MO Chicopee MA Ft. Worth TX San Diego CA Cp Pendleton CA Tampa FL Baltimore MD

HQ H&S HQ HQ HQ HQ H&S H&S H&S (-) H&S

(note 2)

A 1 23 1 24 1 25 2 14 A A A A

Inactive (note 1) Houston TX Detroit MI Ft. Devens MA Grand Prairie TX

Btrys. D, F & K
(HIMARS) B B B B
B 2 23 2 24 2 25
(3 platoons) Encino CA Chicago IL Garden City NY 3 14
MP C C C
Philadelphia PA
C 3 23 3 24 3 25 Btrys. G, H, I & M
(155-mm)
(3 platoons) New Orleans LA Bridgeton MO Brookpark OH D D D

Notes: 5 14
D (1) Company A, 4th Recon Bn has equipment
Seal Beach CA E E
(3 platoons) but no assigned SMCR personnel. To SPT
Btrys. N, O, P & Q
mobilize it must draw personnel from the
(155-mm)
individual ready reserve (IRR).
E (2) H&S Company, 4th AAV Battalion does not F F

(3 platoons) include a mobility/counter-mobility platoon.

Figure 1-20. 4th Marine Division organization

10
b. 4th Marine Aircraft Wing

Figure 1-21. 4th Marine Aircraft Wing organization

c. 4th Marine Logistics Group

4 MLG

LS
HQ 6 4 4 4 6 4 4
D
6
SPT
Marietta GA Red Bank NJ Fort Lewis WA Charlotte, NC Newport News VA Portland OR San Diego CA Marietta GA Brooklyn NY

HQ H&S H&S H&S H&S H&S A H&S H&S HQ

LS ELEC
A A EOD B A 4
D
SVC
DS

LS
PS B B A C B 14
D
DS GS

LS
C B A 24
GS D DS

B&T
A C B
Opns
A MP B MP C MP
B&T Note: The 6th Communication Battalion
(3 platoons) (3 platoons) (3 platoons) B
GS is under the 4th MLG for administrative
Opns SPT
PS = Personnel Service purposes only. It should be treated as a
LS = Landing Support LS CE asset even though MARFORRES
B&T = Beach & Terminal Eqpt has no MEF-level tactical CE.

Figure 1-22. 4th Marine Logistics Group organization

11
1009. Notional Marine Expeditionary Unit Organization

Figure 1-23. Notional Marine expeditionary unit organization

1010. Maritime Prepositioning Force

Below Figure 1-24. Maritime Prepositioning Ship Squadron organization

CMPF MAGTF

MAGTF
NSE COMPSRON CNCW AAOG

MPS CE GCE
ACB SSO LFSP
SHIPS AAOE AAOE

ACE CSSE
ACU LSO BOG
AAOE AAOE
AACG - Arrival Airfield Control Group
AAOE - Arrival and Assembly Operations Element
EAF NMCB
BMU AAOG - Arrival and Assembly Operations Group AAOE AAOE POG
ACB - Amphibious Construction Battalion
ACU - Assault Craft Unit
BMU - Beachmaster Unit FH
BOG - Beach Operations Group AAOE
NCHB CMPF - Commander, Maritime Prepositioning Force AACG
CNCW - Commander, Naval Coastal Warfare
FH - Fleet Hospital NSE
LFSP - Landing Force Support Party AAOE
LSO - Landward Security Officer
MCC - Movement Control Center NSE - Naval Support Element MCC
NCHB - Navy Cargo Handling Battalion POG - Port Operations Group
NMCB - Naval Mobile Construction Battalion SSO - Seaward Security Officer

12
a. Maritime Strategic Prepositioning Locations (MPS Squadrons & MCPP-N)

Figure 1-25. Maritime strategic prepositioning locations (MPS squadrons & MCPP-N)

b. Phases of a Maritime Prepositioning Force Operation

FIRST MAIN LAST
FIRST
PLANE BODY PLANE TROOP
LAST MAIN
BODY PLANE
AIR
DEPARTS ARRIVES AT APOE ARRIVES MOVEMENT
SLRP ADVANCE Main
Flight
GROUP
PARTY Body
(0-9)
(0-4) Ferry

PLANNING

MARSHALLING MPF MAGTF

COMBAT
READY

ALERT/ EXECUTE/
MOVEMENT
WARNING DEPLOYMENT
ORDER ORDER
N-DAY ARRIVAL AND
C-DAY ASSEMBLY

D-DAY
REGENERATION

MAGTF OPERATIONS
SEA
MOVEMENT OPR
BOARDS FIRST MPS
0+10
RDD
GROUP MPSRON MPSRON ARRIVES LAST MPS T-AVB & T-AH
MOVES (0-4) (0-1) ARRIVES ARRIVE (C+30)
FOLLOW ON
SLRP - Survey, Liaison and Reconnaissance Party T-AVB - Aviation Logistics Support Ship SUSTAINMENT (FOS)
OPP - Offload Preparation Party T-AH - Hospital Ship
RDD - Regulated Delivery Date APOE - Aerial Port of Embarkation

Figure 1-26. Phases of a Maritime Pre-positioning Force operation

13
c. Naval Amphibious Groups 1, 2 and 3 Organization

SURFPAC SURFLANT

ESG-3 Pool ESG-2 Pool

5 LHA/LHD 5 LHA/LHD
ESG 7 (CTF-76) ESG 3 4 LPD ESG 2 4 LPD
4 LSD 6 LSD
Okinawa San Diego Little Creek - Norfolk

PHIBRON 11 PHIBRON 1 PHIBRON 3 PHIBRON 2 PHIBRON 6

1 LHA, 1 LPD, 2 LSD 1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD 1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD 1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD 1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD
Sasebo

PHIBRON 5 PHIBRON 4 PHIBRON 8

1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD 1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD 1 LHD/LHA, 1 LPD, 1 LSD

NAVAL BEACH NAVAL BEACH

TACGRU 1 TACGRU 2
GROUP 1 GROUP 2

TACRON 11 ACU TACRON 21 ACU

ACU ACU

ACB - Amphibious Construction Battalion

ACU - Assault Craft Unit TACRON 12 BMU TACRON 22 BMU
BMU - Beach-master Unit
ESG - Expeditionary Strike Group
TAC - Tactical Air Control ACB ACB

Figure 1-27. Amphibious Groups 1, 2 and 3 organization

1011. Marine Air Command and Control Organization

ACE
Commander

TACC

LAAD & other TAOC

Air Defense Units SADC/RADC MATCD DASC MWCS VMU

EWC MMT DASC (A) ASLT

Command FAC / FAC (A) / ASC (A)

Coordination TAC (A) / SCAR

ACE - aviation combat element MWCS - Marine wing communication squadron

(A) - airborne MMT - Marine air traffic control mobile team
ASC - assault support coordinator RADC - regional air defense commander
ASLT - air support liaison team SADC - sector air defense commander
DASC - direct air support center SCAR - strike coordination and reconnaissance
EWC - electronic warfare coordinator TAC (A) - tactical air coordinator (airborne)
FAC - forward air controller TACC - tactical air command center
LAAD - low altitude air defense TAOC - tactical air operations center
MATCD - Marine air traffic control detachment VMU - Marine UAS squadron

Figure 1-28. Marine Air Command and Control System (MACCS) organization

14
1012. Engineer Forces
a. Combat Engineer Battalion
Note: This diagram reflects the structures of COMBAT ENGINEER *A combat engineer company (ABV) consists
st nd rd of a route clearing platoon (1 off. 67 enl.)
the 1 and 2 CEB only. The 3 CEB has BATTALION operating MRAP vehicles; an assault
only two combat engineer companies and no
combat engineer company (ABV). The 4
th USMC USN breaching platoon operating five M1150
CEB has four combat engineer companies Off Enl Off Enl assault breacher vehicles (B0160); and an
and no combat engineer company (ABV). 41 746 2 26 armored bridge layer platoon operating five
joint assault bridges (JAB).

H&S Combat Engineer Combat Engineer Engineer Support

Company Company Company (ABV)* Company
USMC USN USMC USMC USMC
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
15 101 2 26 5 109 5 121 6 197

Figure 1-29. Combat Engineer Battalion organization (UIC M11401-11407 & M12401-12407)
Major End Items (with TAM #) Quantity Major End Items (with TAM #) Quantity
Combat Ops Center (A0255) 1 5,000# Forklift (LTRF) (B2566) 2
Drone System RQ-11 (Raven) UAS (A3252) 1 Rubber Tire Tractor 644E (TRAM) (B2567) 10
Bomb Service Truck, Buffalo MK-1 (B0035) (MRAP) 1 AMK/MK-23/25 MTVR 7-ton Cargo Trucks (to be armored) 8
Grnd Expednt Refuel Sys (GERS) (small/mdm) (B0036/37) 4/4 AMK/MK-29/30 MTVR 7-ton Dump Trucks (to be armored) 18
277C (B0040) & 316-1679 (B0076) Multi-Terrain Loaders 21 AMK/MK-36 MTVR 7-ton Wrecker (to be armored) 1
IED Investigative Unmanned Ground Veh (IUGV) (B0052) 10 Lt Tactical Cargo/Chassis 1.25-ton Trailers (D0016/17) 78
Multi-Function Robot (MARCBOT) Mk4 M9 (B0056) 2 DASH JERRV 4x4 (D0025) (MRAP) 19
Joint Assault Bridge (JAB) (B0057) 5 Cougar CAT II 6x6 JERRV (D0027) (MRAP) 32
Medium Crawler Tractor (John Deere) 850-J (B0060) 5 M1114 HMMWV Expanded Armament Carrier (D0030) 24
Loader, Scoop Type 624KR (B0063) 10 M1152A1 HMMWV Expanded Capacity (2-door) (D0033) 56
Assault Breacher Vehicle (ABV)* M1150 (B0160) 5 M343 3.5-ton Chassis Trailers (D0080) 35
Air Compressor 260 CFM, trailer mounted (B0395) 5 PLS Flatrack M1077 (D0195) 10
Advanced Portable Mine Detector Set AN/PSS-14 (B0476) 72 HMMWV (M998/M1165) C2 Vehicles (MRC-145/148) 11
M9 Armored Combat Excavator (ACE) (B0589) 12 LVS MK-48/14 Container Hauler (D0209/D0876) 1
3 & 10 KW Generators (30 MEP831 16 MEP1040) 46 LVS MK-48/15 Wrecker/Recovery (D0209/D0877) 1
th
20 KW Generators (MMG-25) (B0930) 14 LVS MK-48/16 5 Wheel (D0209/D0878) 5
30 KW Generators (MEP1060 with an M353 trailer) (B0953) 24 M870A2 40-ton Semi-trailer (D0235) 8
60 & 100 KW Generators (12 MEP1070 2 MEP807) 14 M997A2 HMMWV 4-litter Ambulance (D1001) 1
Motorized Road Grader 130G (B1082) or 120M (B0078) 2 M1035A2 HMMWV 2-litter Ambulance (D1002) 1
Line Charge System (with M353 trailer) (B1298) 38 1.5-ton M105 Cargo (11)/M149 400-gal water (6) Trailers 17
SIXCON Modules (B2085/86) (12 Fuel, 4 Water) 16 MK-153 SMAW Rocket Launchers (E0915) 36
Collapsible 3,000-gal Water Tank (B2130) 44 M249 SAW 5.56-mm LMG (E0960) 43
D7G Medium Tractor (B2462) 5 M2 .50-cal heavy machine gun (E0980) 16
Backhoe Loader (BHL) (B2483) 12 M240B 7.62-mm machine gun (E0989) 49
10,000# Variable Reach Forklift (B2561) 4 MK-19 40-mm grenade machine gun (E0994) 8
Engineer Equipment Trailer M322 (B2565) 2 M88A2 armored recovery vehicle (E1378) 2
Table 1-1. Selected Combat Engineer Battalion equipment (UIC M11401-11407 & M12401-12407)
Selected tasks
Plan, organize and coordinate the assault breaching of obstacles from the high water mark inland.
Limited ability to employ assault bridging and other standard bridge systems.
Expedient repair of existing roads and bridges and limited new construction of combat roads and trails.
Placement and clearing of mines and use of explosive demolitions.
Clear helicopter landing zones and construct expedient airstrips.
The 3rd Combat Assault Battalion on Okinawa has a reinforced combat engineer company with 10 officers and 280 enlisted
(company headquarters, support platoon and five combat engineer platoons). Major equipment items include two GERS (1
medium, 1 small), 6 IED IUGV, 3 tractors (John Deere), 5 624KR scoop loaders, 2 LWPS, 2 260 cu ft air compressors, 1 7.5-ton
crane (LET110), 45 AN/PSS-12 mine detectors, 52 generators, 2 road graders, 15 line charge systems, 3 MC1150E, 3 D7G, 5
backhoes, 5 forklifts, 5 TRAM, 56 HMMWV, 13 MTVR (6 MK-23, 6 MK-29/30, 1 MK-36) and 3 LVS.

15
b. Engineer Support Battalion
ESB Force Structure ENGINEER
No two ESB(s) are alike. The chart
given at right is for the 8th ESB (2nd
SUPPORT BN (ESB)
MLG). The structures of the others USMC USN
are summarized below. Off Enl Off Enl
th th th th
ESB 6 7 8 9 62 1,654 3 20
th st nd rd
MLG 4 1 2 3
H&S 1 1 1 1(-)
H&S Bulk Fuel Engineer Support
Co A 1 1 1 1(+)
Company Company (BFC) Company (ESC)
Co B 1 1 1 -
USMC USN USMC USMC
Co C 1 1 1 - Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
EOD 1 1 1 1(-) 13 148 3 20 6 309 12 535
ESC 1 1 1 1(-)
BFC 3 1 1 1(-) EOD Engineer Bridge
BRC 2 1* 1 1*
Company Co. (A, B & C) Company (BRC)
*Not available before FY11.
USMC USMC USMC
In FY10 the EOD platoon in each Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
ESB was detached from H&S Co. 13 134 5* 145* 4 87
and reorganized as a company.
NOTE: *Company A has no executive officer; Company C has six extra enlisted.

Figure 1-30. Engineer Support Battalion organization (8th ESB, UIC M21311-M21315, M21330 & M27114)
Major End Items (with TAM #) Quantity Major End Items (with TAM #) Quantity
Combat Ops Center (2 M1097 HMMWV w/trailers ea) (A0255) 1 Collapsible 3,000-gal Water Tank (B2130) 75
Bomb Service Truck, Buffalo MK-1 (B0035) (MRAP) 1 MC1150E Full Track Tractor w/angle blade (B2460) 16
Grnd. Expedient Refuel Sys. (GERS) mdm./small (B0036/37) 2/2 MC1155E F-Track Tractor w/multi-purp. bucket (B2464) 8
All Terrain Crane (ATC) MAC-50 (25-ton) (B0038) 4 D7G Medium Tractor (B2462) 25
277C (B0040) & 316-1679 (B0076) Multi-Terrain Loaders 11 Backhoe Loader (BHL) (B2483) 10
Counter IED Robots (various) (B0052 - 0056, E0064 - 0077) 76 10,000# Variable Reach Forklift (B2561) 3
Medium Crawler Tractor (John Deere) 850-J (B0060) 25 Engineer Equipment Trailer M322 (B2565) 13
Loader, Scoop Type 624KR (B0063) (2 in bridge co) 18 5,000# LRTF Forklift (B2566) 7
Lt-Weight Water Purif Sys (LWPS)/3000 LMT (B0071/B2628) 28 Rubber Tire Tractor 644E (TRAM) (B2567) (2 in bridge co) 18
Bridge erection boat w/trailer (B0114/B0115) (bridge co) 21 Tactical Water Purification Sys. (TWPS) (B2605) 24
Medium Girder Bridge, dry gap (MGB) (B0152) (in bridge co) 3 AMK/MK-23/25 MTVR 7-ton Cargo Trucks (to be armored) 8
Floating Bridge, IRB, 80/100T (B0155) (bridge co) 3 AMK/MK-27/28 MTVR 7-ton XLWB Trks (to be armored) 14
Air Compressor 260 CFM, trailer mtd (B0395) (3 in bridge co) 15 AMK/MK-29/30 MTVR 7-ton Dump Trucks (to be armored) 19
High-speed High-Mob. Crane w/pile driver cap (B0443) 4 AMK/MK-36 MTVR 7-ton Wrecker (to be armored) 1
7.5-ton Airmobile Crane LRT-110 (B0446) 2 Lt Tactical Trailers 1.25-ton M1102/Flatbed (D0016/17) 48
Advanced portable Mine Detector AN/PSS-14 (B0476) 54 DASH JERRV 4x4 (D0025) (MRAP) 24
M9 Armored Combat Excavator (ACE) (B0589) 4 Cougar CAT II 6x6 JERRV (D0027) (MRAP) 20
Mobile Fire Suppression Sys. (w/HMMWV) (B0625, B0626) 7 M1152A1 HMMWV Expanded Capacity (2-door) (D0033) 10
Fwd Area Water Point Supply System (FAWPS) (B0676) 11 M1165A1 C2 HMMWV Exp Cap. (D0034) (4 in bridge co) 63
Amphibious Assault Fuel Sys (Bulk Fuel Co) (B0685) 5 M353 3.5-ton Chassis Trailer (D0080) 67
3 & 10 KW Generator (37 MEP831, 78 MEP1040) 115 PLS FLATRACK MK-1077 (D0195) (48 in bridge co) 68
30 KW Generator (MEP1060 with M353 trailer) 61 LVS MK-48 Front Power Unit (FPU) (D0209) 45
60 & 100 KW Generator (33 MEP1070, 31 MEP807A) 64 LVS MK-14 Rear Body Unit (RBU) flat bed (D0876) 6
Motorized Road Graders 120 M (B0078) or 130G (B1082) 11 LVS MK-15 Wrecker/Recovery RBU (D0877) 3
th
Line Charge System (with M353 trailer) (B1298) 13 LVS MK-16 5 Wheel RBU (D0878) 14
SP Roller-Compactor, Vibratory (B1785) 4 LVS MK-18 Ribbon Bridge RBU (D0881) (24 bridge co) 44
Scraper-Tractor Wheeled 621B (B1922) 13 M870A2 40-ton Semi-Trailer (D0235) 18
SIXCON Modules (B2085/86) (15 Fuel/18 Water) 33 1.5-ton Trailers (10 M105A2; 7 M149 water) (D0860/0880) 17
Table 1-2. Selected Engineer Support Battalion equipment (UIC M21311-M21315, M21330 & M27114)
Note: Each floating bridge set includes five ramp bays and 12 interior bays, or 15 ramp bays and 36 interior bays per bridge company.
Selected Engineer Support Battalion Tasks
Surveying and drafting Bulk fuel storage and distribution
Construction and maintenance of expeditionary airfields, camps and MSR Bridging, mine clearing and road construction
Explosive ordnance disposal and explosive/non-explosive demolition Bulk water production, storage and distribution

16
c. Marine Wing Support Squadron
MWSS

USMC USN
Off Enl Off Enl
27 523 5 33

H&S Aviation Operations Aviation Motor Aviation Engineer

Company Company Transport Co Company
USMC USN USMC USMC USMC
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
12 135 5 33 6 172 3 92 6 124

Figure 1-31. Marine Wing Support Squadron organization (UIC M000273-274 & M00373-374)
Major End Items (TAM #) Quantity Major End Items (TAM #) Quantity
Combat Ops Center AM/TSQ-239(V)3 (A0254) 1 Backhoe Loader (BHL) (B2483) 3
Drone System RQ-11 (Raven) UAS (A3252) 1 10,000# Variable Reach Forklifts (B2561) 9
Bomb Service Truck, Buffalo MK-1 (B0035) (MRAP) 1 Engineer Equipment Trailer M322 (B2565) 6
Grnd Expednt Refuel Sys (GERS) (small/mdm) (B0036/37) 3/3 5,000# LRTF Forklift (B2566) 6
All Terrain Crane (ATC) MAC-50 (25-ton) (B0038) 2 Rubber Tire Tractor 644E (TRAM) (B2567) 9
277C (B0040) & 316-1679 (B0076) Multi-Terrain Loaders 3 Tactical Water Purification System (TWPS) (B2605) 4
Medium Crawler Tractor (John Deere) 850-J (B0060) 3 AMK/MK-23/25 MTVR 7-ton Cargo Trucks (to be armored) 18
Loader, Scoop Type 624KR (B0063) 9 AMK/MK-27/28 MTVR 7-ton XLWB Trks (to be armored) 17
Lt-Weight Water Purif Sys (LWPS)/3000 LMT (B0071/B2628) 3 AMK/MK-29/30 MTVR 7-ton Dump Trucks (to be armored) 9
Container Handler (Rubber Tire Kalmar) (B0392) 2 AMK/MK-31 MTVR 7-ton truck tractors (to be armored) 12
Air Compressor 260 CFM, trailer mounted (B0395) 2 AMK/MK-36 MTVR 7-ton Wrecker (to be armored) 2
High-speed High-Mob. Crane w/pile driver (B0443) 2 Lt Tactical Chassis 1.25-ton Trailers (D0017) 15
7.5-ton Air mobile Crane LRT-110 (B0446) 2 DASH JERRV 4x4 (D0025) (MRAP) 4
Advanced portable Mine Detector Set AN/PSS-14 (B0476) 4 Cougar CAT II 6x6 JERRV (D0027) (MRAP) 2
Mobile Fire Suppression Sys. (on M1097A2) (B0625/B0626) 3 M1114 HMMWV Expanded Armament Carrier (D0030) 12
Tactical Airfield Fuel Dispensing System (TAFDS) (B0675) 3 M1152A1 HMMWV Expanded Capacity (2-door) (D0033) 11
3 & 10 KW Generators (6 MEP831, 10 MEP1040) 16 M1165A1 C2 HMMWV Expanded Capacity (D0034) 49
30 KW Generators (MEP1060 w/M353 trailer) 10 M353 3.5-ton Chassis Trailers (D0080) 20
60-100 KW Generators (10 MEP1070, 10 MEP807) 20 PLS Flatrack M1077 (D0195) 10
Motorized Road Grader 130G (B1082) or 120M (B0078) 2 PLS Flatrack Refueling Capability (FRC) (D0211) 6
Helicopter Expedient Refueling System (HERS) (B1135) 3 MK-970 5,000-gal refueler semi-trailers (D0215) (Note 2) 12
SP Roller-Compactor, Vibratory (B1785) 2 M870A2 40-ton Semi-Trailer (D0235) 8
Scraper-Tractor Wheeled 621B (B1922) 2 LVS MK-48/15 Wrecker/Recovery (D0209/D0877) 1
th
SIXCON Modules (B2085/86) (16 Fuel/18 Water) 34 LVS MK-48/16 5 Wheel (D0209/D0878) 4
Runway Sweeper, Truck mounted (B2127) 2 LVS MK-48/18 Ribbon Bridge (D0209/D0881) (Note 3) 5
Collapsible 3,000-gal Water Tank (B2130) 45 1.5-ton Trailers (13 M105A2; 11 M149 water) (D0860/0880) 24
MC1150E Light Tractor w/angle blade (B2460) 2 M997A2 HMMWV 4-litter Ambulance (D1001) 4
D7G Medium Tractor (B2462) 3 P-19 Fire Fighting Truck (D1064) 8
Table 1-3. Selected Marine Wing Support Squadron equipment (UIC M000273-274 & M00373-374)
NOTES: (1) Odd numbered wing support squadrons (MWSS) traditionally supported fixed wing air groups while even numbered squadrons
supported rotary wing. Manpower and equipment levels were adjusted accordingly. However, since FY06 all squadrons have been
configured to support aircraft of all types. Distinctions between fixed and rotary winged MWSS have been abandoned.
(2) 12 MK-31 7-ton tractor/MK-970 refueler combinations plus 6 FRC units have replaced the 5,000-gal ARC trucks and M970 refuelers.
(3) Each MK-18 LVS ribbon bridge RBU can carry two MK-1077 PLS Flatracks or FRC units.
(4) In FY09, the MWSS H&S Company MP Division (Flight Line Security). This reduced the number of man-spaces per MWSS by one
officer and 60 enlisted. In lieu of the MWSS MP divisions each MAW (except the 4th) now has a separate MP company.
Selected Wing Support Squadron Tasks
Expeditionary airfield services to include repair, Construction and maintenance of expedient roads and
communications, lighting and aircraft recovery. expeditionary airfields.
Fuel storage and refueling. Clearing and operating helicopter landing zones.
Water purification, storage and dispensing. Plan, construct, repair and maintain base camps.

17
d. Naval Mobile Construction Battalion
MOBILE NAVAL
CONSTRUCTION BN Strengths shown are for an active component
NMCB. A reserve battalion has 25 officers
USN (including two active cadre) and 597 enlisted
Off Enl (including 13 active cadre and 1 USMCR).
21 559* * Includes one USMC enlisted.

Company H Company A Company B Company C

Battalion Headquarters & Equipment & Horizontal Camp Maintenance & General & Vertical
Headquarters Company Construction Utilities Construction
USN USN USN USN
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
9 71 or 107 3 122 3 122 3 122

Air Detachment The internal organization of an NMCB varies with its mission and the preferences of its commanding
General Construction officer. There will be at least a headquarters company (H) and three line companies (A, B and
(task organized) C) as shown above. Each battalion is also supposed to maintain an air detachment, either as a separate
USN unit or as designated personnel within the existing companies. If there is no separate air detachment there
will be a Company D, serving as either a second general and vertical construction company or as a
Off Enl reinforced air detachment. A few units may organize a Company E. Under-strength battalions may
3 86 shrink to two line companies by merging companies A and B.

Figure 1-32. Naval Mobile Construction Battalion (Seabee) organization

Major End Items Quantity Major End Items Quantity
40-ton Hydraulic Truck-Mounted Crane 2 3,000-gallon onion type water tanks 10
Air Compressor 250 CFM 4 MTVR with 2,000-gal Water Distributor 4
Crawler Mounted Excavator 2 7,000-lb Rough Terrain Forklift 10
Elec. Power Plant (2 30-KW generators/1 trailer) 1 11,000/7,000 DED Wheeled Forklift 4
30-KW Generators (MEP-805) 10 M1035 Ambulance (unarmored) HMMWV 2
60-KW Generators (MEP-806) 3 M1152 Troop/Cargo HMMWV 12
Motorized Road Grader 6x4 8 M1151 armament carrier HMMWV 16
SP Roller-Compactor, Vibratory 8 M1165 troop/shelter carrier HMMWV 4
Wheeled Scoop Loader 125-hp minimum 8 Field Servicing Truck 2
Skid Steer Loader DED with 73-hp minimum 8 Utility Maintenance Truck 4x4 4
Full Track Scoop Loader DED 2.5 cubic yards 4 MTVR Cargo Truck XLWB MK-27/28 16
10-105HP Tractor Crawler w/T-5 straight blade 8 MTVR Dump Truck MK-29/30 16
11-195HP Tractor Crawler HYD w/blade 1 M931 (to become MK-31 MTVR) Truck Tractor 20
21-195HP Tractor Crawler HYD Semi w/blade 1 MTVR Wrecker MK-36 2
LDR/BHKO Wheeled Tractor 4x2 60-hp minimum 8 1.5-ton Cargo Trailer M105A2 8
Scraper-Tractor Earthmoving DED 4x2 18 cu yards 2 400-gallon Water Tank Trailer M149A2 10
Towed Magnetic Sweeper 2 11-34 ton Flatbed Semi-Trailer (for ISO container) 8
125 GPH ROWPU 5 55-ton Low Bed Semi-Trailer 16

Table 1-4. Selected Naval Mobile Construction Battalion equipment

An NMCB provides a full spectrum of general engineering capabilities and limited combat engineering capabilities to a supported
MAGTF. It conducts the following initial engineer operations in support of combat operations through permanent construction
required during security and stability operations:
Battle Damage Repair (BDR)
Construction and maintenance of advance base facilities
Power generation and distribution
Vertical and horizontal construction
Water purification and storage, including water well drilling
The Naval Construction Force (1st Naval Construction Division) includes a total of seven Naval Construction regiments (three
active and four reserve) commanding a total of 21 construction battalions (9 active and 12 reserve). A Seabee company or air
detachment normally supports a MEU. A battalion supports a MEB and a regiment a MEF.

18
1013. US Army Forces
a. The New Modular Army
In 2003, the US Army began a transition from its Force XXI organizational model (adopted just after the end of the Cold War) to
its current modular organization. The immediate purpose of the modular organization was to better enable the Army to support
frequent troop rotations to and from Iraq and Afghanistan. In the Modular Army the brigade combat team (BCT) replaced the
division as the Armys largest combat unit with a fixed organization. To bolster its BCT(s), the Army fields a series of multi-
functional support brigades (aviation, fires, sustainment, battlefield surveillance and mobility enhancement). It also retains the
older functional brigades (for engineers, medical, military police, etc.) that existed under Force XXI and previous organizations.
The major command echelons of the Modular Army are as follows:
THEATER ARMY (TA): This echelon has no Marine Corps counterpart. It is the designation of the permanent Army
Service Component Command (ASCC) under a geographic combatant commander (GCC). As such it focuses on one
theater and deploys to no other. It exercises administrative control (ADCON) over all Army units in its theater. The theater
GCC may designate the TA commander as joint force land component commander (JFLCC). If so, the TA headquarters can
supply an initial command and control capability for the support of a major campaign.
CORPS: This echelon corresponds to that of a Marine Expeditionary Force (MEF). By doctrine, it controls two or more
combat divisions. Its primary purpose is to serve as a base upon which a GCC can build a JTF headquarters. It can also
provide operational level command and control to limited to major contingency operations. Additionally, it can provide
operational C2 for a joint land force component (JFLC). Finally, it can serve as an intermediate-level tactical headquarters.
In this capacity it functions more like a MEF headquarters. Like a MEF, it leaves the supervision of battles and
engagements to its subordinate divisions (brigade combat teams do the actual fighting). It focuses instead on shaping the
battlefield and creating conditions for future success. The corps headquarters relieves the JFLCC and the GCC of the need
to plan and coordinate multiple large-scale land operations. Currently, the Army has only three standing corps: I Corps at
Fort Lewis, Washington; III Corps at Fort Hood, Texas; and XVIII Airborne Corps at Fort Bragg, North Carolina.
DIVISION: The Modular Army retains the division as its primary tactical warfighting headquarters. The Army has 10
active and eight National Guard divisions. A division directs the operations of subordinate brigade combat teams (BCT)
and support brigades. It may also act as a JTF, JFLC or ARFOR headquarters in smaller scale operations. A division in
garrison has four BCT(s) and a combat aviation brigade assigned to it but these are not necessarily the forces that division
will command in the field. A divisions only permanent elements are its headquarters and command group and a special
troops battalion (for the communication and service support of the division headquarters only). When deployed a division
is task organized with whatever BCT(s) (as few as two to as many as six) and support brigades its mission requires.

BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM (BCT): The BCT has replaced the division as the Armys largest all-arms combat unit with
a fixed table of organization. The Army has a total of 74 BCT(s) (both active and National Guard). The standard types are
Heavy (HBCT see paragraph 1013b), Infantry (IBCT see paragraph 1013c) and Stryker (SBCT - see paragraph
1013d). The 3rd Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR) and the two heavy BCT(s) stationed in Germany are still structured
under the old Force XXI tables of organization and have three maneuver battalions each. The 3rd ACR is also the
strongest BCT in the Army and the only one with its own air component. Each HBCT or IBCT has only two maneuver
battalions. This has enabled the Army to organize more BCT(s) but it also limits a BCT commanders tactical options. The
Army contends that the BCT reconnaissance (RSTA) battalion not only improves a BCT commanders situational
awareness but can act as a third maneuver element (though with less than half the combat power of a maneuver battalion).

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL SUPPORT BRIGADES: Like the BCT(s) these are combined arms task forces that provide
combat support or combat service support to the BCT(s). The basic types are combat aviation (or CAB - see paragraph
1013e), fires (field artillery see paragraph 1013f), battlefield surveillance (BFSB which conduct ISR), maneuver
enhancement (see paragraph 1013k), and sustainment (see paragraph 1013i). They may operate under division or corps-
sized expeditionary forces or even under a theater army. They may also work for a joint headquarters or in support of
another service component or allied force. For this reason they include their own signal and maintenance units.

FUNCTIONAL SUPPORT BRIGADES OR GROUPS: These are single-function task forces, each drawing all of its
elements from the same Army branch. Functional brigades may be engineer, military police, chemical, air and missile
defense, signal, medical, civil affairs, or military intelligence (MI). Functional groups (including MI, EOD and PSYOPS)
are similar but usually smaller and less likely to deploy as units. Functional brigades and groups are assigned to theater
commands which may attach or sub-assign them to corps or divisions. Like multi-functional support brigades, they
frequently have modular structures, usually consisting of two to seven battalions (of two to seven companies each) or
smaller units per brigade. While functional brigades must rely on theater assets for communication and sustainment,
commanders of the larger brigades are frequently brigadier generals while multi-functional brigade commanders are only
colonels. A support command (under a major general) controls two or more functional brigades of the same type serving in
the same theater. It serves directly under the combatant commander, JFLCC or Army service component commander.

19
b. Army Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT)
US ARMY HEAVY
BRIGADE COMBAT
TEAM (HBCT)
Off WO Enl
286 35 3,454

BDE HQ
RSTA = Reconnaissance, Off WO Enl
Surveillance, Target Acquisition 45 11 105

RECON (RSTA) FIELD BDE SPECIAL BDE SUPPORT

SQUADRON ARTILLERY BN TROOPS BN BATTALION
Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl
34 0 347 25 2 313 28 7 489 60 15 1,050

1 HQ & HQ Troop (2 Raven) 1 HQ & HQ Battery 1 HQ & HQ Co (1 Raven) 1 HQ & HQ Co (1 Raven)

3 Recon Troops (2 Recon platoons, 2 Radars (1 TPQ-36, 1 COMBINED 1 Brigade HQ Co 1 Distribution Co (GS
1 mortar section, 1 Raven per TPQ-37), 2 Raven 1 Intelligence Co (1 Shadow) supply & motor
troop - 3 CFV, 5 HMMWV, 3 2 Firing Batteries
ARMS BN 1 Signal Network Supt Co. transport)
.50-cal, 2 MK-19, 8 M240B, per 16 155mm M109A6 SP 1 Engineer Company 1 Field Maintenance Co
recon platoon) Off WO Enl (3 Combat Engineer Plats,
Howitzers 1 Bde Support Medical Co
47 0 575 1 Equipment Plat.) 4 Forward Support Cos.
NOTE: The brigade special (1 per CA battalion, arty
troops battalion (BSTB) battalion & recon
engineer company replaces squadron)
the small (two platoon) HQ&HQ CO TANK CO RIFLE CO
engineer companies (IFV)
formerly organic to the Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
combined arms (CA) 27 195 5 59 5 131
battalions. All HBCT(s) will
have converted to this Scout platoon (3 CFV, 5 HMMWV)
configuration by FY11. Mortar platoon (4 M1064), 2 mine rollers 14 tanks per 14 IFV, 1 Raven per co. (4 IFV, 3
Medical platoon, Sniper squad (3 teams) company M240B, 2 Javelin per platoon)

Figure 1-33. Army Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) Organization

Major End Items Quantity Major End Items Quantity
Unmanned Aircraft Systems (1 Shadow 200, 15 Raven) 16 HEMTT 10-ton trucks (58 cargo; 48 fuel [2,500-gal]) 106
M1150 Assault Breaching Vehicle (ABV) 6 PLS 16-ton trucks (M1074 & M1075) 52
M9 Armored Combat Earthmover (ACE) 6 PLS Trailers (M1076) 80
FLU-419 wheeled tractors 3 PLS Flatracks (352 M1077 cargo; 16 Hippo water tanks) 368
M915 truck tractors w/M870A3 40-ton semi-trailers 4 Lt/mdm trailers (114 LTT, 26 LMTV, 27 MTV, 44 water) 211
M1088 MTV truck-tractors w/semi-trailers (12- to 25-ton) 28 155-mm SP Howitzer M109A6 w/Armored Ammo Vehicle M992A2 16
M707 Knight HMMWV mounted RSTA systems 5 Armored command post vehicles (36 M1068 & 11 M577) 47
HMMWV troop/cargo/shelter carriers (M998/M1097/M1113) 321 Armored personnel carrier M113A3 (including 30 ambulances) 46
HMMWV armament/TOW carriers (mostly M1114) 63 Self-propelled 120-mm mortar M1064 14
HMMWV Ambulance (M997A2) 11 Infantry/Engineer Fighting Vehicles M2A2 or A3 (61 IFV, 13 EFV) 74
LMTV (2.5-ton) trucks (70 M1078 cargo; 12 M1079 van) 82 Cavalry/Fire Supt Fighting Vehicles M3A2/A3 (CFV) or M7 (FSV) 40
MTV (5-ton) trucks (95 M1083 cargo; 3 M1087 van) 98 Main battle tank M1A2 58
Wreckers MTV (7 M1089) and HEMTT (8 M984) 15 Armored recovery vehicle M88A2 26
Table 1-5. Selected Army Heavy Brigade Combat Team (HBCT) equipment items
In theory the US Army will have 26 heavy brigade combat teams (HBCT) as of January 2011. Seven HBCT(s) are in the National Guard. All are
organized as shown above except for three active brigades, which are still under the old Force XXI tables. Two are mechanized brigades stationed
in Germany. Each has one tank and two mechanized infantry battalions (three maneuver companies each), a 155-mm SP artillery battalion (3x6), a
small recon troop (with HMMWV), and small combat engineer and support battalions. The 3rd Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR), at Fort Hood,
has three armored squadrons (41 tanks, 41 CFV and 6 SP 155-mm howitzers each), an air cavalry squadron (24 AH64, 10 UH60), a support
squadron, and engineer, intelligence and chemical companies. In practice, however, to meet the requirements of the war in Afghanistan, most
HBCT(s) store most of their tanks, Bradley fighting vehicles and other heavy armor and use armored HMMWV(s) instead. BCT artillery battalions
typically man only two howitzers per battery and use surplus personnel for security and/or civil affairs duties.

20
c. Army Infantry Brigade Combat Team (IBCT)
USA INFANTRY
BRIGADE COMBAT
TEAM (BCT)
Off WO Enl
277 33 3,137

BDE HQ
RSTA = Reconnaissance, Off WO Enl
Surveillance, Target Acquisition 44 11 97

RECON (RSTA) FIELD BDE SPECIAL BDE SUPPORT

SQUADRON ARTILLERY BN TROOPS BN BATTALION
Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl
34 0 330 25 2 267 26 7 374 56 13 791
1 HQ & HQ Troop 1 HQ & HQ Battery 1 HQ & HQ Co. 1 HQ & HQ Co (with air
2 Motor Recon Troops (3 1 TPQ-36 (1 Raven) delivery platoon) (1 Raven)
platoons [1-17; 6 HMMWV], 2 Firing Batteries 1 Engineer Co 1 Distribution Co (GS supply &
1 mortar section, 1 Raven ea.) 16 towed 105mm INFANTRY (2 platoons) motor transport)
1 Foot Recon Troop (2 platoons howitzers BATTALION 1 Intelligence Co 1 Field Maintenance Co
[1-27], 1 mortar section, 2 2 Raven UAV (1 Shadow) 1 Brigade Support Medical Co
sniper teams, 1 Raven) Off WO Enl 1 Signal Network 4 Forward Support Cos. (1 per
46 0 639 Support Co. inf bn, arty bn & recon sqdn)

Note: each sniper team RIFLE CO WEAPONS

HQ&HQ CO has one .50-caliber
M107 and one 7.62mm
CO
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
M24 sniper rifles.
25 188 5 126 6 73
Scout platoon (three 6-man squads, 6 Javelins) 4 Assault platoons (1-17, 5
Mortar platoon (4 81mm or 120mm mortars) HMMWV, 2 .50-cal, 2
3 Rifle platoons (1-38, 6 SAW, 2 M240, 2 Javelin ea)
Sniper squad (three 3-man teams) MK-19, 2 M240 each)
1 mortar section (2 60mm mortars), 1 Raven UAV
Medical platoon 1 Raven UAV

Figure 1-34. Army Infantry Brigade Combat Team (IBCT) organization

Major End Items Quantity Major End Items Quantity
Unmanned Aircraft Systems (1 Shadow 200, 15 Raven) 16 HEMTT cargo trucks (13 container handler, 39 M1120) 52
Boats, rubber inflatable (9 are 7-man recon boats) 11 HEMTT fuel trucks (M978) 24
High speed tracked tractors, DUECE 2 PLS heavy trailers (M1076) 37
Wheeled scoop loaders (1) and excavators (4) 5 PLS Flatracks (138 M1077 cargo; 16 Hippo water tanks) 154
M1088 MTV tractors w/ M172A1 25-ton semi-trailers 9 Medium trailers (62 LMTV, 35 MTV, 1 M200, 39 water) 137
M1200 Armored Knight ASV mounted RSTA systems 4 Light cargo trailers (114 M1101 & 54 M1102 LTT) 168
HMMWV troop/cargo/shelter carriers (M1113, M998, M1097) 459 Howitzer, light towed 105-mm M119 16
HMMWV armament/TOW carrier (M1114, M1025/26) 99 Mortar 120mm M121 (w/4 mortar trailers) 12
HMMWV Ambulance (M997A2) 35 Mortar 81-mm M252 (only usable in lieu of 120-mm mortars) 8
LMTV (2.5-ton) cargo trucks (M1078/79) 128 Mortar 60-mm M224 14
MTV (5-ton) cargo trucks (M1083/84/85, 2 M1090 dump) 95 Command launch unit (CLU) Javelin ATGM 76
LMTV/MTV expansible vans (7 M1078, 6 M1087) 13 Heavy Machineguns (75 40-mm MK-19; 122 .50-cal. M2) 197
Wreckers (10 M1089 MTV and 7 M984 HEMTT) 17 Machinegun 7.62-mm M240B (plus 323 SAW) 206
Table 1-6. Selected Army Infantry Brigade Combat Team (IBCT) equipment items
The US Army currently has 20 active and 20 National Guard IBCT. Ten active IBCT are designated as airborne or air assault brigades. Their
personnel are jump qualified and they use airborne variants of selected motor transport equipment such as M1081 LVAD in lieu of M1078
LMTV or M1093 LVAD in lieu of M1083 or M1084 MTV. The Army National Guard includes a number of separate combat battalions (three
combined arms and 13 infantry battalions and three IBCT RSTA squadrons) that may augment selected HBCT/IBCT.

21
d. Army Stryker Brigade Combat Team (SBCT)
USA STRYKER
BRIGADE COMBAT
TEAM (BCT)
Off WO Enl
310 36 3,814

BDE HQ SIGNAL CO ENGR CO INTEL CO

Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl
48 13 131 4 1 65 6 0 137 5 4 70
3 ICV (command), 1 Raven 2 ICV (command) 3 Combat Mobility platoons
6 ASV 1 Mobility Support platoon
13 ICV (12 engineer, 1 infantry)
RECON (RSTA) FIELD 4 Rapid Empl Bridges (REB) SUPPORT
SQUADRON ARTILLERY BN 4 Javelin BATTALION
Off WO Enl Off WO Enl ANTI- Off WO Enl
39 3 394 33 2 359 ARMOR CO 40 13 678
Off WO Enl
1 HQ & HQ Troop 1 H&S Battery 1 HQ & HQ Co (with air
6 0 48
3 Recon Troops (3 recon platoons, 1 TPQ-36, 1 TPQ-37 delivery platoon, 1 Raven)
1 mortar section, 1 Raven ea.) 3 Firing Batteries 11 ICV (9 anti-armor, 1 1 Distribution Co (GS supply &
1 Surveillance Troop (NBC recon, 1 ICV (command) infantry, 1 fire support) motor transport)
Sensor & UAV (Shadow) 18 155mm towed howitzers 1 Forward Maintenance Co
platoons) 3 Raven 1 Brigade Support Medical Co
61 ICV (6 command, 39 recon, 3 INFANTRY
NBC recon, 6 mortar, 3 fire BATTALION
support, 4 medical) Note: each three-man
36 Javelin CLU Off WO Enl sniper team has one .50-
43 0 644 caliber M107 and one
7.62mm M110 sniper rifles.
3 Rifle platoons (1-43, 2
M240, 3 Javelin each)
1 MGS Platoon (1-11)
HQ&HQ CO Scout platoon (1-23)
RIFLE CO 1 mortar section (2
Mortar platoon (4 81mm mortars) 60mm mortars)
Off Enl Sniper squad (two teams) Off Enl 1 sniper team (3 men)
25 173 Medical platoon 6 157 19 ICV (14 infantry, 3
20 ICV (5 command, 4 mortar, 4 MGS, 2 mortar)
recon, 3 fire support, 4 medical) 1 Raven

Figure 1-35. Army Stryker Brigade Combat Team (SBCT) organization

Major End Items Quantity Major End Items Quantity
Unmanned Aircraft Systems (1 Shadow 200, 17 Raven) 18 Light cargo trailers (135 M1101 LTT & 53 M1102 LTT) 188
Tractor, High Speed, full tracked (DUECE) 6 M777 Towed 155-mm Howitzers 18
Wheeled Tractor HMEE (high mobility) 6 Mortars (18 81mm M252 & 18 60mm M224) 36
Mine Clearing Line Charge w/M200 trailer (MICLIC) 6 M1117 Armored Security Vehicles (ASV) (4x4) 6
Volcano-type mine dispensing system M139 3 M1126 Stryker Infantry Vehicle (Interim Combat Vehicle) 128
HMMWV troop/cargo/shelter carriers (M998/M1097/ M1113) 416 M1127 Stryker Reconnaissance Vehicle (ICV) 51
HMMWV armament carriers (M1114/M1025A2) 14 M1128 Stryker Mobile Gun System (MGS) 27
HMMWV armored ambulances (M997A2) 26 M1129 Stryker Mortar Carriers (120mm/81mm/60mm) 36
MTV (5-ton) trucks (mostly cargo types except 2 vans) 188 M1130 Stryker Command Vehicle (ICV) 27
HEMTT trucks (81 cargo types [63 w/LHS], 14 fuel [2.5k]) 95 M1131 Stryker Fire Support Vehicle (ICV) 13
HEMTT 10-ton wreckers M984 17 M1132 Stryker Engineer Squad Vehicle (ICV) 12
PLS heavy trailers (M1076) 72 M1133 Stryker Medical Evacuation Vehicle (ICV) 16
Medium trailers (37 MTV M1095 cargo, 71 M1112 water) 108 M1134 Stryker Anti-Armor (ATGM) Vehicle (ICV) 9
PLS Flatracks (103 M1077 cargo; 19 Hippo water tanks) 122 M1135 Stryker NBC Reconnaissance Vehicle (ICV) 3
Table 1-7. Selected Army Stryker Brigade Combat Team (SBCT) equipment items
As of January 2011 the US Army will have seven active and one National Guard SBCT (when the 1st BCT of the 1st Armored Division converts to
Strykers). An SBCT uses the Stryker series 8x8 armored vehicles, which are later and larger versions of the USMC LAV. Only reduced numbers
of MGS are serving in Afghanistan. Active SBCT(s) also include the 2nd Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR), stationed in Germany, and five
BCT(s) belonging to the 2nd and 25th Infantry Divisions. The 3rd ACR (Fort Hood) has been earmarked to become a Stryker brigade.

22
e. Army Aviation Units
BATTALION Officers WO Enlisted REMARKS
Assault Aviation (troop lift) 32 60 312 30 UH-60 (strength does not include pathfinder company) (Note 1)
General Spt. (GS) Avn. Bn. 42 70 458 12 CH-47D (heavy lift), 12 HH-60 (MEDEVAC), 8 UH-60 (C2) (Note 2)
Attack/Recon Avn. Bn. 33 62 281 24 OH-58D (some units designated as cavalry squadrons) (Note 3)
Air Cavalry Squadron 42 93 (81) 533 (607) 30 OH-58D (or 24 AH-64), 10 UH-60 (troop lift) (Note 4)
Attack/Recon Avn. Bn. 33 50 336 24 AH-64 (5 of 8 NG battalions have only 16 AH-64 each) (Note 5)
Aviation Security & Spt. Bn. 34 56 333 24 OH-58A/C (four battalions) or UH-72A (two battalions) (Note 6)
Notes: An Army aviation battalion (any type) consists of six companies: one headquarters and headquarters (HHC), three aviation, one aviation support and
one forward (service) support. Each Army division has one combat aviation brigade (CAB) (except the 101st Air Assault, which has two). A CAB has two
attack/recon aviation battalions, one assault aviation battalion, one GS aviation battalion and an aviation support battalion. An unmanned air system (UAS)
company per CAB is planned. Non-divisional aviation includes two theater aviation commands and four theater aviation brigades controlling two air
cavalry squadrons, six assault aviation battalions and ten GS aviation battalions (mainly National Guard).
(1) With 80% aircraft availability (and 14 seats per UH60) an assault aviation battalion can transport two (Army) rifle companies in one lift. The three
assault aviation battalions in the 82nd and 101st Airborne Divisions (only) each have a pathfinder company (4 officers, 57 enlisted).
(2) The Army has 25 GS Aviation battalions with heavy lift, MEDEVAC & C2 aviation companies and an air traffic services company in each.
(3) The Armys eight OH58 attack/recon battalions/squadrons are found in six divisional CAB(s). The light 10th and 25th Infantry Division CAB(s)
have two each; the CAB(s) in the medium 1st Infantry, 82nd Airborne, and 101st Air Assault (101st and 159th CAB) Divisions have one each.
(4) Two separate squadrons (one active, one NG) each have three OH58 equipped attack/recon troops (companies) and one assault aviation troop
(UH60). An active squadron with three AH-64 equipped attack/recon troops and one UH-60 troop is organic to the 3rd Armored Cavalry Regiment.
(5) The Army has 24 AH-64 battalions; two per seven (two NG) heavy and one per 10 (six NG) medium and airborne/air assault division CAB(s).
(6) One per CAB in six NG divisions (in lieu of a second attack/recon bn.). Although an AS&S battalion can deploy overseas its primary mission is to
provide aerial transport and sustainment, search and rescue and reconnaissance/observation in support of homeland security/defense within CONUS.
Two battalions use the UH72A Lakota, a modified Euro-copter EC-145 (it resembles a stretched OH58 and reached IOC in FY07). It carries a crew
of two and up to eight passengers or two stretcher cases or a payload of up to 3,957 lbs. (including fuel).
Table 1-8. Army aviation units

f. Army Multiple Launch Rocket System Battalion (Fires Brigade)

MLRS BN
FWD SPT CO
Off. WO Enl Off WO Enl
32 2 283 5 1 158

Though it has its own medical platoon

H&H BTRY FIRING BTRY an Army MLRS battalion must depend
Each firing battery has on an attached or supporting forward
two firing platoons and support company for all its Level II
Off WO Enl a support platoon with Off WO Enl
and higher maintenance and all classes
17 2 76 6 M270 MLRS 5 0 69
of supply except Class VIII (medical)
3 M1068 Armored CP and 33% of its Class V (ammunition).
3 M1068 Armored CP
Figure 1-36. Army Multiple Launch Rocket System battalion organization
Quantity Quantity
End Item End Item
MLRS Bn FSC MLRS Bn FSC
HMMWV troop/cargo carrier (M1152 or older) 40 16 HEMTT 10-ton 8x8 wrecker (M984) 1
HMMWV armament carrier (M1151 or older) 6 PLS 16-ton 10x10 trucks w/o crane (M1075) 4
HMMWV armored ambulance (M997A2) 1 LTT (Light Tactical Trailer) M1101 8 3
LMTV (2.5-ton) cargo truck (M1078) 7 7 MTV (5-ton) cargo trailer M1095 4
LMTV/MTV expandable vans (M1079/M1087) 2 LMTV 2.5-ton cargo trailer M1082 2 7
MTV (5-ton) cargo truck (M1083) 11 M1112 400-gallon water trailer 4 3
MTV truck tractor (M1088) w/12-ton semi-trailer 1 Armored CP vehicles (12 M1068, 1 M577) 12 1
HEMTT 10-ton 8x8 cargo truck (M977/M985) 36 19 M270A1 multiple launch rocket system (MLRS) 18
HEMAT 11-ton ammunition trailer M989 36 19 M88/M88A1 armored recovery vehicle 4
HEMTT 2,500-gal 8x8 fuel truck (M978) 6 Heavy Machinegun (.50-cal M2/40-mm MK-19) 16 33
Note: An M270 carries two six-round 5,020-pound rocket pods ready to fire. It can load two new pods in 20 minutes. A HEMTT truck (M977/M985)
or a HEMAT trailer can carry four pods (or eight pods per truck-trailer combination). For MLRS details see pages 67-68.
Table 1-9. Selected Army Multiple Launch Rocket System battalion equipment
Each of the Armys seven active and seven National Guard (NG) Fires Brigades consists of a headquarters battery, a signal company, a platoon-
sized target acquisition battery (a National Guard TAB is larger), a brigade support battalion (see paragraph 1013i) and two to five field artillery
battalions. The BSB includes a forward support company (direct support logistics) for each artillery battalion assigned or attached to the brigade. As

23
of FY10 a total of 48 artillery battalions (all 3x6 configured) are available for these brigades. Ten are self-propelled 155-mm (two active, eight NG),
10 are towed 155-mm (three active, seven NG), 11 are MLRS (eight active, three NG) and 17 are HIMARS (five active, 12 NG).

g. Army Engineers

U.S. ARMY
ENGINEER
BATTALION

HQ & HQ CO SEPARATE FWD SPT CO

ENGINEER SECTION OR
Off WO Enl COMPANY TEAM ETC Off WO Enl
18 2 63 5 2 85

A modular engineer battalion may have two to five

(three or four is usual) engineer companies plus one
to three separate sections, teams, platoons etc.

Figure 1-37. Army modular engineer battalion organization

The US Army has grouped most of its non-BCT engineers into modular battalions. These battalions may operate under any of the
Armys 21 Maneuver Enhancement (ME) brigades (see paragraph 1013h) or 16 engineer functional brigades (each of these can
command three to five battalions). The only permanent element of a modular engineer battalion is a base consisting of a
headquarters and headquarters company (HHC) to provide command and control and a forward support company for logistics. This
base can control up to seven subordinate units, including two to five separately numbered engineer companies. These can be of any
of the core types listed in Table 1-10. The other subordinate units would be separate platoons, sections or teams providing special
capabilities. Table 1-10 does not include engineer companies organic to BCT(s) and a few non-standard companies and battalions
that exist for special purposes. All data is for FY11. Table 1-11 displays selected equipment items.
T/O Strength Number of units (by component)
Unit Type
Officers WO Enlisted Active Reserve NG Total
Engineer Battalion Base (HHC-FSC) 23 4 148 25 24 49 98
Engineer Sapper Company (tracked) (Sap-Track) 5 0 99 7 4 14 25
Combat
Engineer Sapper Company (wheeled) (Sap-W) 5 0 95 10 0 21 31
Engineer
Engineer Mobility Augmentation Company (MAC) 5 0 117 7 17 16 40
Companies
Engineer Clearance Company (ECC) 6 0 184 12 8 3 23
Engineer Horizontal Construction Company (HCC) 5 0 156 17 24 46 87
General Engineer Vertical Construction Company (VCC) 5 3 154 12 34 43 89
Engineer
Companies Engineer Support Company (ESC) 5 0 116 9 5 22 36
Engineer Multi-Role Bridge Company (MRBC) 5 1 179 5 8 12 25
Table 1-10. Summary of standard Army Engineer companies (Source: USAFMSA)
Notes: An engineer sapper company specializes in combat engineering (mobility, counter-mobility and survivability tasks) but can
also support general engineering. It can augment BCT engineers or an engineer clearance company (see below). A wheeled
(tracked) company has three platoons (one officer and 25 enlisted forming a platoon headquarters and two 10-man sections) armed
with three Javelin anti-tank missile systems (one per platoon), 7 (13) .50-cal MG, 4 (5) MK-19, 10 M240B and 13 (14) SAW.
An engineer mobility augmentation company (MAC) executes assault gap crossings and mounted or dismounted breaches. It can
also emplace obstacles. One MAC can support an IBCT or an SBCT but an HBCT (by doctrine) requires two MAC(s).
An engineer clearance company (ECC) detects and neutralizes explosive hazards in support of a BCT. It has three route clearing
platoons (four one-man Husky 4x4 mine detection and marking vehicles (with towed mine detectors) and six seven-ton 4x4
RG31 MRAP vehicles (with vehicle-mounted mine detectors, a driver and up to nine passengers each). An ECC also has one area
clearing platoon with four MRAP, two flail systems and two MV-4 robotic anti-personnel mine clearers.
An engineer support company (ESC) supports vertical and/or horizontal construction missions with additional/special equipment.
An engineer multi-role bridge company (MRBC) maintains, deploys and/or recovers MGB and ribbon bridge equipment. It can
deploy up to 213 meters of class 75 (class 96 for wheeled traffic) bridging or six class 75 rafts or four MGB.
Separate engineer platoons, sections and teams provide special capabilities. These can be in the areas of construction support, mine
detecting dog, diving, well drilling and geospatial and infrastructure (including fire fighting and prime power) support. Selected
equipment items belonging to the most common construction support units are included in Table 1-11. An Asphalt team (39

24
enlisted) mixes asphalt and paves roads, airfields etc. A concrete team (12 enlisted) mixes and pours concrete. A quarry platoon
(one officer, 34 enlisted) prepares crushed rock, sand or gravel from local materials and an engineer support platoon (one officer,
41 enlisted) loads and hauls material (gravel, stones, etc.) for horizontal construction.
HHC- Sap- Sap- Asphalt Concr- Quarry Engr.
Major Equipment Item MAC ECC HCC VCC ESC MRBC Tm ete Tm Plt Spt Plt
FSC Trac W
Auger, Earth Boom mtd. on SEE* Excavator 2 14
Bridge Erection Boats/rubber boats 0/1 0/3 0/3 0/3 14/37
MLC96 Steel Bridge 80-ton (MGB) 4
M113A3 Personnel Carrier/M577 Armored CP 2/1 13/1 13/1
Crane, wheel mounted (AT422T) 22.5-tons 2 1
Mine Detecting Set AN/PSS-12/14 8 20 20 12 26 8 8 8 16 2 2 2
Tractor w/6,000-gal water distributor; semi-trailr 3 1 1 1 1
Abn Scraper/2,500-gal Water distributor sys. 6/2
M139 Mine Dispenser (Volcano) 4
Hydraulic Excavator (crawler) 2 1 2
Hi Spd SP Compactor/Towed pneumatic roller 2/4 0/1
Truck-mounted bituminous distributor/crane 2/0 0/2
Crush screen and wash plant (up to 150t/hour) 1
Motorized Road Grader (heavy) 4 6 1 1
Truck Tractor w/Hot Oil Heater (on semi-trailer) 1
Ribbon Bridge Ramp Bay/Interior Bay 12/30
AVLB/JAB or Wolverine w/bridge 6
Mine clearing line charge (MCLIC) w/trailer 3 3 4
Scoop Loader w/bucket 2 4 1 1 2 2
Asphalt Mixing Plant/Asphalt Melter 1/1
250 cfm trailer mtd air compressor w/ tools 1
Motorized Roller, 2 drum/Paving Machine (SP) 6/0 4/2
M88 Armored Recovery Vehicle 1 1 **1
Scraper, earth moving SP (heavy) 8
MTV truck tractor w/12-ton semi-trailer 8
Hvy. truck tractor w/M870A3 40-ton semi-trailer **16 24 2 6 1 2 6
Tractor, wheeled (backhoe & front loader) 2 3 14 4
Heavy Cargo Trucks (HEMTT/PLS/LHS) 7 1 1 15 2 1 1 59
Heavy Truck Trailers (PLS/HEMAT) 6 1 1 1 1 1 44
Truck mtd concrete mixer/SP rotary tiller mixer 3/1
HEMTT Fuel Truck 2,500-gal M978 5 2
HMMWV (all variants) 34 3 7 4 8 12 16 12 13 4 2
LMTV or older 2.5-ton Truck (mostly cargo) 10 1 1 2 2 1 2 4
MTV or older 5-ton Trucks (mostly cargo) 8 2 2 6 10 3 2 2 1
Wreckers M984 HEMTT/MTV or 5-ton 1/1 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 0/1 0/1 1/0 2/0
MTV or older 5-ton Dump Truck 9 10 12 16 1 2 2
5-ton MTV Trailer or 4-ton bolster trailers 2 4 1 17 15 1 7
HMMWV Cargo Trailer 7 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 4 1
LMTV or M105 Cargo Trailer or Cable Trailer 5 6 1 1 9 1 4 1
Tamper, Vibrating type w/engine 2 3 1
T5/D5 Light Low Speed Dozer Tractor 4
M9 ACE/High Speed DEUCE w/dozer Tractor 4/0 2
D7/T-9 Low Speed Tracked tractor 2 11 2 1 1
Water Trailer (400-gal) 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
20-ton Dump Truck M917 8 2 10 8
Vehicle/trailer mounted mine detector** 24/12
Medium MRAP (RG-38)** 22
SP Medium Flail Sys/MV-4 Mine Clear Robot** 2/2
Mine Protected Clearance Vehicle (Husky)** 12
*SEE = Small Emplacement Excavator (4x4 truck with blade) ** Only issued as Theater Provided Equipment (TPE) to units currently in Iraq.

Table 1-11. Selected equipment items organic to standard U.S. Army engineer units (USAFMSA)
The Army can assign or attach an engineer battalion to a maneuver enhancement brigade (MEB), an engineer brigade or
(temporarily) a BCT. Unlike Marine engineers, Army engineers are not responsible for water supply/production, bulk fuel (they
build fuel farms but do not operate them), laundry or showers. These functions belong to the Quartermaster Corps. Likewise, the
Ordnance Corps has primary responsibility for EOD. Engineers mainly investigate explosive hazards/incidents and clear mines.

25
h. The Army Maneuver Enhancement Brigade (ME Brigade * )
The Army originally called this unit a Combat Support Brigade (Maneuver Enhancement) when it first introduced it in 2006. It has
no Marine Corps counterpart. Although not a maneuver unit it is normally assigned an Area of Operations (AO) within which it
maintains area security and keeps the MSR(s) open. It replaces division/corps rear operations centers, and assumes division/corps-
level engineer, EOD, MP, and CBRN functions. It can also assume similar functions in the joint security area of a Theater Army or
support a USMC MEF. However, only two of the Armys 21 ME brigades are in the active component. This limits the Armys
ability to employ ME brigades in a surge mode or on a sustained basis in stability or counter-insurgency operations.
An ME brigade staff includes engineer, military police, chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear (CBRN), fires, airspace
management, and area security planning/operations cells. An ME brigade consists of a headquarters company, a network operations
(signal) company, a brigade support battalion, and any or all the following attached or assigned elements (see Figure 1-38).
Military police: by doctrine one or (sometimes) two combat support MP battalions (paragraph 1014b).
Engineers: by doctrine, one or (frequently) two modular Engineer battalions (see paragraph 1013g).
CBRN: by doctrine, one or possibly two chemical battalions if a significant CBRN threat exists.
Civil affairs: one civil affairs battalion, unless a civil affairs brigade is already covering the same AO.
Air and missile defense: one air defense battalion (if a threat exists and an air defense brigade is not covering the same AO)
Explosive ordnance disposal: an EOD company or battalion
Tactical combat force; if an ME brigade faces a Level III security threat (see JP 3-10 for threat level definitions) it may
have a Tactical Combat Force (TCF) assigned or attached to it. A TCF consists of a reinforced maneuver battalion
(infantry, combined arms or Stryker). If a larger force is needed, Army doctrine recommends the use of a full BCT.
(See also FM 3-0, Appendix C and FM 3-90.31)
U.S. ARMY
MANEUVER
ENHANCEMENT
Organic Elements
BRIGADE Normal (Doctrinal) Attachments

BDE HQ & HQ BDE SUPPORT MILITARY

COMPANY BATTALION ENGINEER MILITARY CHEMICAL
ENGINEER
BATTALION POLICE CHEMICAL
BATTALION
Off WO Enl Off WO Enl POLICE
BATTALION BATTALION BATTALION
57 10 110 26 6 300 BATTALION
HQ & HQ Company
NETWORK OPS Distribution Company HQ & HQ co, forward support co, HQ & HQ det. & two to HQ & HQ det. & two to
(SIGNAL) CO Maintenance Company & up to seven engineer cos. & six combat support MP seven chemical cos; only a
separate sections, teams, etc. cos; may include an MP few chemical battalions are
Off WO Enl Focused on general engineering; guard company available for attachment to
4 1 46 See 1013g, above See 1014b below ME brigades
Other Possible Attachments (IAW Mission Requirements)

A typical ME brigade will have two AIR TACTICAL CIVIL EOD

engineer battalions, a military police DEFENSE COMBAT AFFAIRS
battalion and one other battalion COMPANY
(chemical, TCF, civil affairs, etc.) BATTALION FORCE (TCF) BATTALION

Figure 1-38. Army Maneuver Enhancement Brigade organization

ME brigade missions may include the following:
Area security and/or limited stability operations
Construction, maintenance and sustainment of lines of communication
Mobility and/or counter-mobility support
Military police operations (including security, traffic control, law and order, refugee/displaced person movement/control)
Vertical and horizontal construction
Area CBRN defense
Limited offensive and defensive operations (only against Level II or lower threats if a TCF is not available)
Consequence management operations

*
The Army actually uses the acronym MEB to refer to these units but to avoid confusion with a Marine Corps MEB this pamphlet uses ME brigade instead.

26
i. The Modular Armys Sustainment System
Since about 2006, as a part of its transition to the Modular Force structure the US Army has been reorganizing its logistical (or
sustainment) system and rewriting its doctrine. As of FY11 this process is essentially complete. Under the Armys old doctrine
(little changed since World War II) logisticians stockpiled needed material at Army (Theater Army) level supply points within the
combat theater. They continually advanced these supply points so that they remained (ideally) within two to three hours driving
time of the units they supported. Supported units pulled the supplies they needed using their organic transportation, which higher
echelons (division, corps, army, etc.) would reinforce as necessary to ensure adequate deliveries during periods of peak demand.
Under the new doctrine, logisticians are responsible for moving supplies to the users. Based on anticipated requirements, prior
usage data and requisitions from the supported units, logisticians push the supplies to the supported units using transportation
units under logistician control. The emphasis is on getting supported units what they need (but not more than they need) when they
need it (but not sooner) while minimizing stockpiles. The new system is also responsibility for all second echelon maintenance (the
old system left much of this to the supported units) as well as third and fourth echelon. It also handles pay, finance, and most
personnel administration matters. Table 1-12 illustrates the distribution-based systems simplified command structure.
It should be remembered that in the current wars in Iraq and Afghanistan the Army has relied less on its own sustainment units and
more on support from civilian contractors. This was due in part to the limited mobilization/availability of reserve component units.
Old Supply-Based New Modular Distribution-Based Health Service Support
Command Echelons
Support Echelons (1) Sustainment System Echelons System Echelons
Theater Army Theater Sustainment Command (TSC) Medical Command
Theater Support Command
ASCC or JOA Expeditionary Sustainment Cmd. (ESC) Medical Bde (small theater only)
Army Corps Corps Support Command Corps Medical Command (3)
Sustainment Brigade
Division Division Support Command Medical Brigade or Group
Brigade or BCT Forward Support Battalion (2) Brigade Support Battalion (BSB) Brigade Support Medical Co. (4)
Battalion Service Platoon and None organic but a Forward Support Co.
Maneuver Battalion Battalion Medical Platoon
Maintenance Platoon/Section from the BSB is usually attached
(1) No longer in use; (2) An element of the division support command; a separate (non-divisional) brigade would have its own support battalion; (3) Only
one corps-level MEDCOM still exists (in XVIII Airborne Corps); (4) In a BCT only; other brigades have no medical units larger than platoons.
Table 1-12. Army combat service support command echelons
Note that JP 1-02 defines sustainment as covering all aspects of logistics plus finance and personnel management. The US Army
sustainment system, however, provides health service support only to about division level. Above that Army health services operate
separately (see paragraph 1013j below and https://www.mstp.usmc.mil/POIs/ALOC1_10/default.aspx.)
For the rest of the Armys sustainment system the Theater Sustainment Command (TSC) is the senior (two star level)
headquarters for a theater army (or ASCC) under a geographic combatant command (GCC). It provides C2 for theater opening
(TO) and theater distribution (TD) as well as sustainment operations. The Armys five TSC(s) are committed as follows:
The 1st TSC is the logistical headquarters for ARCENT (3rd Army).
The 8th TSC is the logistical headquarters for USARPAC (and 8th Army).
The 21st TSC supports USAREUR (7th Army). Because it is forward deployed it will likely assume an Expeditionary
Sustainment Command mission when directing logistical operations in an active theater (see below).
167th TSC (National Guard) is earmarked for USARNO (5th Army) and USARSO (6th Army).
377th TSC (Army Reserve) is earmarked for USAREUR and has elements forward deployed with USAREUR and in Iraq.
TSC(s) prefer to operate from a sanctuary area outside its geographic theater. To establish command and control of operational
level logistics within its specified area of operations (AO) or joint operating area (JOA) a TSC employs one or more
Expeditionary Sustainment Commands (ESC). Each ESC is a one star headquarters that provides a rapidly deployable,
regionally focused, forward-based C2 capability mirroring the functionality of a TSC. Instead of constituting another command
echelon it acts as the forward command post of its parent TSC. If the TSC elects to deploy forward and assume an ESC mission
within a given AO/JOA, any ESC already operating in that AO/JOA would re-deploy and/or be re-assigned elsewhere.
Sustainment Brigades are the subordinate commands of the TSC/ESC(s). They replace division and corps support commands (see
Table 1-16). Each has a common command element and three to seven task-organized battalions (with three to seven separate
companies each). The battalions can be combat sustainment support battalions (CSSB) (18 of 87 are active component),
transportation motor transport battalions, (six of 24 are active), ammunition battalions (three out of four are active), transportation
terminal battalions (for air/water transport four of nine are active) or petroleum battalions (if the theater has no petroleum group).
The exact composition of a given sustainment brigade is entirely METT-TC dependent. It is typically OPCON to a TSC/ESC,
which normally assigns it an AO and the mission of supporting all friendly units within that AO. If the supported units are BCT(s)
or multi-functional support brigades, the sustainment brigade deals with them through their brigade support battalions (BSB).
Although a sustainment brigade may be OPCON to a division headquarters for a specified purpose or period of time it will not
normally be assigned to a division. Figure 1-39 below shows the configuration of a typical sustainment brigade.
The basic missions of a sustainment brigade are as follows:

27
 Theater Opening: This refers to the establishment and initially operation of ports of debarkation (air, sea or rail) and
sustainment bases. It also involves the facilitation of port throughput for the reception, staging and onward movement of
forces entering a theater of operations (FMI 4-93.2).

U.S. ARMY
The Army has 32 sustainment
brigades; 12 are in the active SUSTAINMENT
force and 20 are Reserve/NG. BRIGADE A sustainment brigade may include a
Organic Elements Transportation Terminal Battalion if it is involved
with water or air transportation.

BDE HQ & HQ EARLY ENTRY COMBAT TRANSPORTATION

COMPANY ELEMENT
Off WO Enl Off WO Enl SUSTAINMENT If a sustainment
MOTOR
41 13 153 28 4 70 SUPPORT BN brigade has no TRANSPORT
(CSSB) TMT battalion, it (TMT) BN
NETWORK OPS will have truck
COMPANY companies in its BN HQ & HQ
Off WO Enl CSSB(s) instead DETACHMENT
4 1 55 Organic Off WO Enl
12 1 39
BN HQ & HQ Q-MASTER Q-MASTER
ORDNANCE
FINANCE COMPANY TRUCK
MAINTENANCE SERVICE OR POL
COMPANY Off WO Enl
OR REPAIR CO (1) (2)
COMPANY
15 2 61 SUPPLY CO COMPANY
OR CENTER
NOTES: MODULAR
(1) May include water supply, POL support and field service ORDNANCE
HR companies; a mortuary affairs company, a transportation inland (3)
PERSONNEL CO, AMMO
cargo transfer company (if it is not part of the TMT battalion),
COMPANY supply or airdrop support companies or detachments etc.
(2) May have an ammunition battalion in lieu of CSSB ammo cos. AREA SUPT TRAILER
(3) May have POL companies/battalions if no POL group in Theater. TRNSFR PT TM
MEDICAL or
(4) Off WO Enl
(4) May have Area Support Medical and/or an ambulance companies AMB CO 1 0 22
if directly supporting forward units. See paragraph 1013j.

Figure 1-39. Army sustainment brigade organization (typical configuration)

Theater Distribution: This covers the receipt, storage, issue, transportation, configuration, reconfiguration,
classification, trans-loading, and collection of stocks and unit equipment. It also includes the reception and transportation
of units and replacement personnel. It is normally conducted according to the TSC theater distribution plan (FMI 4-93.2).
Sustainment: Sustainment is the provision of the logistics, personnel services, and health service support necessary to
maintain operations until mission accomplishment (FM 3-0). Sustainment includes the following three sub-functions:
o Logistics: (FMI 4-93.2)
Maintenance: The Armys guiding principle is replace forward; fix rear. It doctrinally recognizes
field maintenance and sustainment maintenance. Field maintenance repairs items, typically in forward
areas, to restore them to service with their current users. Sustainment maintenance (typically
performed further to the rear) repairs items for return to the supply system while giving replacements
to the original users. The Army has about 70 support maintenance companies for field maintenance
and about 20 component repair companies for sustainment maintenance. All are task organized.
Supply: Sustainment brigades do not normally handle Class VI (personal demand items) or Class VIII
(medical). Items other than Classes V and VIII are primarily a Quartermaster Corps responsibility.
Class I (rations and water): based on supported unit strength reports rations are pushed to
users through the subsistence platoons found in Quartermaster support companies. The
operational commander determines the number of days of supply (DOS) kept on hand.
Regarding water, many supported units have water purification systems and at least some
mobile storage capability. Modular Quartermaster Water Purification and Distribution
Companies provide tailored operational and tactical level water production, storage, and bulk
area distribution capabilities but in the early stages of an operation, before its own water
units are up and running, the Army will rely on commercial packaged/bottled water.
Classes II, III (P) and IV (general supplies, packaged fuel and construction materials): these
are funneled to using units through the Quartermaster support companies area support
platoons. These and Class I (rations) are shipped to the theater in 40-foot ISO sea containers
but since 40-foot containers are not normally used forward of the sustainment brigades, their
loads must be transferred to lighter and less conspicuous tactical vehicles.

28
 Class III (B) (bulk fuel): this is the responsibility of the Quartermaster Corps four POL
groups and five Petroleum Pipeline and Terminal Operations (PPTO) and 14 POL Supply
battalions. The Armys 14 PPTO companies correspond to USMC bulk fuel companies. Each
can store up to 2.1 million gallons; operate up to 90 miles of pipeline; and pump up to
720,000 gallons per day. PPTO companies replenish the POL supply battalions. Each of
these typically has one or two POL supply companies and one to three POL truck companies.
POL supply companies store theater POL reserves and use the truck companies to forward
fuel to POL support companies (in the sustainment brigades) or directly to the support
battalions in the BCT(s). A POL supply battalion normally operates under a POL group or
directly under a TSC, but it could be under a sustainment brigade that had a theater opening
mission. The fuel capacity of a POL supply or support company varies with how many
platoons it has and what size fuel bladders they use (50k or 210k gallon). A POL support
company can also operate up to two FARP(s) for aircraft operating in its vicinity.
Class V (ammunition): Ammunition flows into a theater through a theater storage area (TSA)
where loads are stored, reconfigured and/or shipped to corps/division level ammunition
supply points (ASP). From there it goes to BCT-level ammunition transfer and handling
points (ATHP) or it bypasses the ASP and goes to an ATHP direct. Sustainment brigades
control TSA(s) and ASP(s). Modular heavy lift (HLP) or medium lift (MLP) ammunition
platoons operate them. The storage capacities of HLP(s) and MLP(s) are nearly the same
(11,363 vice 11,273 ST) but an HLP can handle loaded 20-foot ISO containers and lift up to
2,658 ST/day while an MLP lifts only 1,521 ST/day (no containers). HLP(s) serve mainly at
the TSA(s) because much of the ammunition there is containerized. MLP(s) predominate at
the ASP(s) and are configured to send detachments forward to assist at ATHP(s). Typically,
three MLP/HLP(s) operate a division-sized ASP. An ammunition company headquarters is
subordinate to a CSSB or ammunition battalion and controls two to five MLP/HLP(s). Army
doctrine recommends an ammunition battalion headquarters for any theater with more than
one TSA. Brigade ammunition officers send ammunition requests via the responsible
sustainment brigade to the TSC/ESC and Theater Army for approval and/or allocation.
Class VII (major end items) and Class IX (repair parts): These are also sustainment brigade
responsibilities. They are handled similarly to Classes II, III (P), and IV, above but because
of their high cost, Class VII items are closely controlled through command channels.
Field Services: This includes showers, hygiene, laundry, clothing repair and mortuary affairs.
Quartermaster field service and force provider companies subordinate to the sustainment brigades
provide all field services except mortuary affairs. Quartermaster collection companies and mortuary
affairs companies handle the recovery, registration and evacuation of human remains.
Transportation: The TSC/ESC staff employs movement control battalions (MCB) to control movement
throughout the combat theater. An MCB is not normally assigned or attached to a sustainment brigade
unless that brigade is the senior logistics headquarters in its theater. An MCB may control 4 to 10
movement control teams (MCT), depending on the requirements of its AO. An MCT (3 officers, 18
enlisted) can operate as four sub-teams (in separate locations) and perform all movement control
related tasks. It places MCT(s) with any or all division (G-4) and sustainment brigade headquarters,
motor transport and terminal battalions, air or sea ports and along the MSR(s) in its AO. Operational
and tactical intra-theater transportation occurs at the sustainment brigade level and below. It is mainly
surface transportation using truck companies (see Table 1-13), though air (using Air Force fixed-wing
and Army helicopters) and water transportation (using LCU-2000, LCM-8, Logistic Support Vessels
[LSV], barges and tugs) can also serve when appropriate and available.
The sustainment brigades transportation mission includes the establishment, maintenance and control
of a supporting installation network. This network consists of centralized receiving and shipping points
(CRSP), theater distribution centers (TDC) and convoy support centers (CSC). A CRSP is a dock-to-
dock distribution center integrated into a hub and spoke network that funnels cargo to forward
operating bases or other CRSP(s). It does not handle Class V (ammo) and seldom holds cargo more
than 24 hours. A TDC, usually positioned near a major road, airfield or railhead, acts as a super CRSP
that also warehouses and performs supply management, movement control and cargo handling
functions. CSC(s) of variable size (and capabilities) are truck stops established along main and
alternate supply routes where convoys can refuel, perform limited maintenance and rest/relieve crews.
Contracting: The Armys Contract Support Brigade (CSB) is primarily responsible for theater support
contracting. The CSB (or contingency contracting battalions [CCBN] or senior contingency
contracting teams [SCCT]) when deployed will normally be OPCON to the TSC/ESC and provide
general support to the sustainment brigades. CSB elements will not normally be attached to a
sustainment brigade unless it is the senior logistics headquarters in the theater.

29
 MDM Truck CO MDM TRUCK CO MDM TRUCK CO HEAVY
TYPE LT-MDM TRUCK CO
(Corps) (4) (PLS) (EAC) (4) TRUCK CO (5)
50 5-ton tactical cargo 60 20-ton commercial type
60 5-ton tactical truck
trucks (MTV) 60 M1074/75 10x10 6x4 truck tractors 96 M1070
tractors (MTV)
25 5-ton MTV trailers PLS 16.5-ton 120 34-ton flat bed semi- HET truck
120 22.5-ton flat bed
10 5-ton tactical truck trucks trailers (cargo co) OR tractors
semi-trailers
Primary Equipment tractors (MTV) 60 M1076 16.5-ton 60 5k gal POL semi-trailer 96 M1000 70-
(cargo co) OR
20 22.5-ton flat bed PLS trailers (5k POL Co) OR ton flat bed
60 5k gal POL semi-
semi- trailers 360 M1077 Flatrack 60 7.5k gal POL semi- semi-trailers
trailer (POL Co)
(5 light squads and 1 (6 squads) trailer (7.5k POL Co) (12 squads)
(6 squads)
medium squad) (6 squads)
# of Cargo Cos (1)(2) 7 (AC) 25 (RC) 1 (AC) 22 (RC) 13 (AC) 31 (RC) 8 (AC) 48 (RC) 4 (AC) 12 (RC)
# of 5k POL Cos (2) 0 4 (AC) 4 (RC) 0 1 (AC) 20 (RC) 0
# of 7.5k POL Cos(2) 0 0 0 2 (AC) 8 (RC) 0
Long Haul Lift Capacity (assumes 24-hour operations and two trips per day with approximately 85% equipment availability)
20 Containers or 17 102 206 206 N/A
40 Containers or 0 0 0 103 N/A
463L Pallets or 68 306 412 412 N/A
Break Gen Cargo 336 ST 487 ST 1,074 ST 724 ST N/A
Bulk Ammunition 576 ST 714 ST 2,270 ST 1,290 ST N/A
PAX (3) 1,155 (1,779) N/A (2,575) N/A
309,000 gals 412,000 gals 489,250 gals
Water (4) N/A N/A
(3,000-gal fabric tanks) (Hippo tank racks) (4,750-gal fabric tanks)
Bulk Fuel (2) 515,000 gals 787,500 gal (7.5k Co)
N/A 508,200 gals N/A
(POL Cos only) (w/POL tank racks) 525,000 gals (5k Co)
(1) AC = Active Component; RC = Reserve Component
(2) Medium truck companies (Corps or EAC) may be designated either as Cargo or POL companies. Cargo companies have two flatbed semi-
trailers per truck-tractor for trailer transfer operations (trailer transfer point teams support these units). POL companies have one fuel semi-trailer
(5k or 7.5k gallon) per truck tractor (they dont normally do trailer transfers). A POL company cannot carry any cargo except POL.
(3) Tractor-trailers transport personnel only in emergencies;
(4) To carry bulk water semi-trailers must be equipped with fabric tanks or Hippo tank racks; when so equipped they can carry no other cargo.
(5) Heavy truck companies only transport main battle tanks (with their crews) and other tracked vehicles. Class 30 vehicles can be double-loaded.
SOURCES: FMI 4-93.2, The Sustainment Brigade, February 2009; FM 55-15 Transportation Reference Data, 1997.

Table 1-13. Army truck companies

General Engineer Support: Engineers are not normally OPCON to a TSC/ESC or to sustainment
brigades, but are essential to their operations. Army quartermasters, for example, can operate a fuel
farm and maintain its equipment, but need engineers to do the earthmoving needed to establish it.
Engineers also build or repair MSR(s), airfields, ports and the CRSP network, TDC(s) and CSC(s).
Engineer support usually comes from functional engineer brigades or a theater engineer command.
o Personnel Services:
Human resources (HR) support: This includes personnel management, strength reporting, casualty
reporting, postal operations and reception, replacement, redeployment, rest and recuperation, and
return-to-duty (R5) operations. Brigade and battalion S1/G1 sections perform many of these functions.
HR units, serving under a TSC/ESC or a sustainment brigade do not try to augment G1/S1 operations
but focus on casualty reporting, R5 and postal operations.
Financial management (FM): This mainly concerns disbursing and payment for contractual services. A
sustainment brigade includes an FM support operations team and may have an FM company assigned
or attached to it.
o Health Service Support: This is discussed under Paragraph 1013j, below.
Brigade Support Battalion (BSB): This is an organic component of every Brigade Combat Team (BCT), fires, aviation, or ME
brigade (Battlefield Surveillance Brigades [BFSB] only have support companies). It does not exist in functional brigades. The BSB
is the Armys tactical level primary combat service support organization. It plans and executes logistics operations in support of its
parent brigade and is the brigades primary interface with its supporting sustainment brigade. Figure 1-40 shows a notional BSB.
A BSB handles all classes of supply but focuses on the rapid replenishment and distribution of Class III (B) and Class V, to sustain
its parent brigades operational tempo. When required, a supporting sustainment brigade may augment a BSB with transportation or
other assets to support specific replenishment operations. It operates the brigade support area (BSA) and its parent brigades
primary interface with its supporting sustainment brigade. The elements of the BSB function as follows:
The headquarters and headquarters company (or detachment) provides command and control.
The distribution company consists of a supply platoon, a fuel and water platoon and a transportation (or distribution)
platoon. The supply platoon has separate sections for general supply, ammunition handling and transfer point (ATHP

30
 not present in an ME brigade BSB), and Class IX (spare parts). The fuel and water platoons fuel section includes a
mobile fuel farm (using flatrack mounted tanks or fuel tank semi-trailers etc.). Its water section has its own purification
systems. The transportation (distribution) platoon has the majority of the (non-fuel tanker) trucks and sends LOGPAC
(push-pull) convoys forward to replenish the forward support companies or (if there are none) other supported units.

BRIGADE
SUPPORT BN
Note: Some Army units employ cavalry
terminology, under which companies are called
(BSB)* *A combat aviation BSB is called an
troops and battalions are called squadrons aviation support battalion (ASB)

BRIGADE
HQ & HQ DISTRIBUTION MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT
COMPANY (HHC) COMPANY COMPANY
MEDICAL CO

In an ASB or a fires brigade BSB, this unit is Only HBCT, IBCT & SBCT BSB(s) and
rd
called a headquarters and support company. the 3 ACR Support Squadron have
FORWARD medical companies (or troops).
FORWARD
SUPPORT
FORWARD An ASB has a medical platoon in its
SUPPORT
FORWARD
COMPANY (FSC)
SUPPORT HQ and support company.
HBCT, IBCT and Fires Brigade BSB(s) have an FSC COMPANY
SUPPORT
for each maneuver (infantry or combined arms), COMPANY Fires, ME and Sustainment brigades
COMPANY have medical platoons in their
recon (RSTA) or fires battalion. SBCT, 3d ACR,
aviation and ME BSB(s) do not have FSC(s). brigade HHC(s).

Figure 1-40. Brigade support battalion organization

The functions of the (field) maintenance and medical companies should be self-explanatory. A BSB has a medical
company only if it is part of a BCT. Otherwise, it or its parent brigade headquarters company will only have a medical
platoon (see Figure 1-40). For more on brigade-level medical units, see Paragraph 1013j below.
Forward support companies (FSC) exist only in BSB(s) that support HBCT(s), IBCT(s) and fires brigades. An FSC is like
a miniature BSB(s). It consists of a field feeding (mess) section and maintenance and distribution platoons. It replaces
the old service and maintenance platoons that were formerly organic to maneuver, fire support and reconnaissance
battalions. Stryker (SBCT), 3rd ACR, Aviation and ME brigade BSB(s) do not have FSC(s). Instead, their distribution and
maintenance companies must assume the FSC(s) direct support sustainment functions.

j. The Armys Health Service Support (HSS) System

See Section 4003h.

k. Battlefield Surveillance Brigade (BFSB)

As part of the U.S. Armys modular force reorganization the new brigade combat teams (BCT) assumed control over the
reconnaissance and intelligence capabilities that had once been resident at the corps and division level. The difficulty with this
arrangement was that a BCT is a maneuver unit with ISR capabilities. Those ISR capabilities primarily support the BCTs own
operations and only secondarily those of any higher headquarters. They are limited in how deeply they can penetrate the battlefield
and are most effective when their parent BCT is in direct contact with the enemy.
The Army included the BFSB in its Modular Army reorganization to provide ISR assets that specifically answered the needs of
higher headquarters up to the joint task force level. Its stated mission was to improve situational awareness for division level and
higher commanders so they could better conduct current operations while simultaneously preparing for future operations. It can
reach much more deeply into a commanders AO to fill the white space left by BCT reconnaissance squadrons and military
intelligence (MI) companies. It is best used against adversaries with whom it is not in direct contact.
The Armys original concept for the BFSB called for a brigade base of C2 and service elements, augmented by assigned and
attached elements tailored to the brigades current mission. However, after three years of development (2004-07) the Army settled
on the more standardized structure shown in Figure 1-21. The major operating elements are a reconnaissance and surveillance
(R&S) squadron (battalion) and one or two military intelligence (MI) battalions. The brigades can still plug in additional units
when their missions call for special/increased capabilities but the Army has relatively few separate LRS or MI units are available.
The R&S squadron is a long range scout (LRS) troop (company) augmented with two short-range reconnaissance troops (equipped
with heavy machine gun-armed HMMWV(s)). Army LRS teams are comparable to Marine division or force reconnaissance teams.
Their mission is mainly surveillance and target acquisition but they are capable of direct action.
The BFSB MI battalions were formerly division-level Combat Electronic Warfare and Intelligence (CEWI) battalions. They have
been reorganized to shift their emphasis from technical collection and electronic warfare to HUMINT and counter-intelligence (CI).

31
CI and HUMINT personnel operate in four-member teams. Operations management teams are senior (led by warrant officers) and
each controls two or more collection teams. HUMINT involves not only working with informants but interrogation support,
document exploitation, and translating intercepts. For the present, the Army has shelved plans to include a Shadow UAS platoon in
the BFSB MI battalions. As a result a BFSB has no organic aerial collection capability. BFSB analytic capability is also limited. A
BFSB is mainly a collections unit. The command it supports is expected to do its own analysis.

USA BATTLEFIELD
SURVEILLANCE BDE
(Figures in brackets apply to RC bdes)
NOTE: Reserve Component (RC) brigades have
OFF WO ENL only one MI battalion. Five Active Component
125(102) 35(25) 1,163(906) (AC) and one RC MI battalions are converting to
a slightly reduced TO/E (see below).

HEADQUARTERS RECONNAISSANCE MILITARY BDE SUPPORT

& HQ COMPANY & SURVEILLANCE INTELLIGENCE (MI) COMPANY (BSC)
OFF WO ENL (R&S) SQUADRON BATTALION OFF WO ENL
38 11 113 OFF WO ENL OFF WO ENL 5 3 203
33 0 290 23 9(10) 249(257)
Includes ISR fusion, HCS, Distribution Platoon (1-1-54)
CGS, fires, and medical Maintenance Platoon (2-2-121)
sections; not included HQ & HQ Field Feeding Section (0-0-23)
above is a USAF TACP HQ & HQ
TROOP
(1 OFF & 2 ENL) COMPANY MI battalion strengths are for
OFF ENL active MI battalions from FY11.
19 76 OFF WO ENL
SIGNAL NETWORK 11 0 43(44) Previous strengths are in
SUPPORT CO brackets.
RECON TROOP
OFF WO ENL TECHNICAL
3 1 43 (R&S) SIGINT, CI, HUMINT, & MASINT
COLLECTION CO collection; has two SIGINT
OFF ENL
OFF WO ENL platoons & five multifunctional
4 41
8 2 91 collection sections
(each) 12 (3-man) Scout Teams
in HMMWV w/6 .50-cal COLLECTION & Interrogation, HUMINT, CI,
& 6 MK-19 HMG EXPLOITATION CO Document exploitation; one CI &
two (three) HUMINT operations
LONG RANGE OFF WO ENL management teams; three CI &
SCOUT (LRS) TRP 1 3(4) 49(52) six HUMINT collection teams
OFF ENL
6 132 HUMINT Two HUMINT collection platoons
COMPANY (total of four operations
15 (6-man) LRS teams management teams & 12(13)
4 (6-man) Radio base stations OFF WO ENL collection teams)
2 (2-man) Sniper teams 3 4 66(70)

Figure 1-41: Battlefield Surveillance Brigade Organization

Army BFSB(s) did not reach IOC until FY07. Plans called for four active component (AC) and six reserve component (RC)
BFSB(s) but the Army initially formed only three AC (one per corps) and six RC. A seventh RC BFSB will be operational in
FY11. Presumably this was in lieu of a fourth AC BFSB. The first overseas deployment was of the 525th BFSB (XVIII Airborne
Corps) to Iraq in FY08. The 504th (III Corps) relieved it in FY09. The 201st (I Corps) goes to Afghanistan in FY11.
The Army has started a minor BFSB reorganization to save manpower. In FY11 reductions in the MI battalion will be applied to
five AC and one RC MI battalions (see Figure 1-21). Cuts in the signal and support companies will probably start in FY12.

l. Army Civil Affairs and Psychological Operations Forces

The US Army is the primary provider of civil affairs (CA) and psychological operations (PSYOPS) forces to the Department of
Defense. Prior to FY07 all CA and PSYOPS units were under the US Army Civil Affairs and Psychological Operations Command
(Airborne) or USACAPOC(A) which in turn belonged to the Army Special Operations Forces (ARSOF). Only one CA battalion
and one PSYOPS group (POG) were in the active force. The rest were Army Reserve. Between FY07 and FY09 ARSOF expanded
its active CA battalion to a brigade; detached both it and the active POG from USACAPOC(A); and placed them under its direct
control. Also, the Army pulled the rest of USACAPOC(A) (four Reserve CA commands (CACOM) and two Reserve POG(s)) out
of ARSOF and shifted its emphasis from special operations to supporting the rest of the Army and the other Military Services.
Civil Affairs: Upon detachment from ARSOF, the four CACOM(s) controlled seven CA brigade headquarters and 28 battalions.
All CA battalions are reorganizing to the configuration shown in Figure 1-41. Most will have reorganized by FY11.

32
 CIVIL AFFAIRS
CA BDE HQ & HQ H&H Co includes: (Offs.-WO-Enl)
COMPANY BATTALION
CMOC (21-2-36) (US Army Reserve)
Off WO Enl Functional Specialty Cell (13-0-4)
46 2 62 Two Civil Liaison Tms (3-0-3 ea) Off WO Enl
One CA Planning Tm (3-0-3) 59 0 144

HQ & HQ CIVIL AFFAIRS

COMPANY COMPANY
Off Enl Off Enl
23 52 9 23

COMMAND CO HQ & FUNCTIONAL* CIV-MIL OPS

ELEMENT MAINT SECT SPECLTY CELL CNTR (CMOC)
COMPANY HQ
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
2 2 1 11 7 1 8 31
Off Enl CA
1 6 TEAM
HQ S-6 & SOF
CA PLANG CIVIL LN U MINISTRY COMMS Off Enl
ELEMENT CIV-MIL OPS
TM (CAPT) TM (CLT) TEAM 1 3
Off Enl Off Enl CNTR (CMOC)
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl 1 2 1 10
3 3 1 3 1 1 Off Enl
3 2
*The functional specialty cell includes law, OPS/INTEL SUSTAINMT CIVIL IM
civil supply, public safety, public works, SECTION S-1/S-4 SECTION
public administration and preventive Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl
medicine specialists. 3 4 2 12 1 3

Figure 1-42: Civil Affairs battalion (and CA brigade HQ and HQ company), USACAPOC(A) organization

Each CACOM is associated with a regional combatant commander and commands all civil affairs units attached or assigned to that
commander. Table 1-15 shows the regional orientation of the CACOM(s) and their subordinate brigades and battalions. Two new
CA battalions (410th and 437th) will form in FY11 for the 350th CACOM. Presumably, these will allow the 350th to form another
CA brigade. There is no CACOM for AFRICOM but a new CA brigade headquarters (the 361st) and a new battalion (the 457th)
oriented on Africa will form in Germany during FY10-11.
REGION CACOM CA BDE CA BATTALIONS CA brigades are operational assets for corps-level commands.
th 321
st th st th
413 , 451 , 486 , 490
th CA battalions are tactical assets for division-level commands.
SOUTHCOM 350 nd th CA companies support brigades or brigade-equivalent
(separate) 402 , 478
st 358
th th th th
416 , 425 , 426 , 492
nd organizations and CA teams (CAT) support battalions (or
PACOM 351 th th th th equivalents). Each of the earlier pre-modular CA battalions
364 405 , 445 , 448
nd 354
th
401
st
, 414
th
, 422
nd (a few of which have not yet reorganized to the new standard)
CENTCOM 352 th th st th th employed three CA detachments (with four rather than five
360 412 , 431 , 450 , 489
304
th rd th th
403 , 404 , 411 , 443
rd CA teams in each and no CMOC) in lieu of CA companies.
rd
EUCOM 353 th th th th nd
308 407 , 415 , 418 , 432 A key operating element at the CACOM, brigade, battalion
th
th nd No battalions; is 8 Army and company levels is the civil-military operations center
8 US Army (Korea) 322
Table 1-15: Civil Affairs unitliaison to civil
regional relief agencies
orientation (CMOC). It is the primary coordination interface between US
forces and the locals, the humanitarian, non-government and
Table 1-14. Civil Affairs unit regional orientation
inter-governmental organizations and USG civilian agencies.
It also develops, manages, and analyzes the civil inputs to the COP.
Functional specialty cells consist of soldiers with civilian specialties in the six functional areas that Army CA doctrine recognizes.
These are public health and welfare, rule of law, infrastructure, governance, economic stability and public education and
information. Functional specialty cells usually operate under the CMOC. A CACOM has three of them and each has experts in all
six areas. The smaller cells at brigade and battalion level lack economic stability or public education/information experts.
In terms of its size and capabilities an Army CA battalion corresponds to a Marine Corps civil affairs group (CAG).
PSYOPS: The two USACAPOC(A) POG(s) each consist of a small headquarters and four battalions organized as shown in Figure
1-42 below. These are tactical PSYOPS units, meaning that they are intended for use in forward areas under the control of corps-
level or lower headquarters. They are equipped with vehicle mounted and man-pack loudspeakers and can design and print leaflets,
flyers, handbills, etc. A company can support a division in conventional combat but in irregular or urban combat when large
numbers of civilians are present a division requires at least a PSYOPS battalion that can attach companies to each of its brigades.
USACAPOC(A) also has one strategic dissemination company (the 306th) which is attached to 7th POG. Unlike tactical PSYOPS
units this company operates above the corps echelon. It produces audio, audiovisual, print and television propaganda and it can
operate indigenous printing, TV or radio facilities. Its print plant can produce printed books or up to 1.6 million leaflets in 24 hours.

33
 TACTICAL PSYOPS NOTE: Tactical PSYOPS companies are
PSYOPS Units in USACAPOC(A):
REGION POG BATTALIONS
BATTALION separately numbered units specializing in a
nd th th th th (US Army Reserve) specific geographic region. Permanently
East Coast 2 11 , 13 , 15 , 16
th th th th th Off WO Enl assigned to battalions in peacetime they
West Coast 7 10 , 12 , 14 , 17 may be cross-attached as needed to meet
44 0 437
mission requirements.
By doctrine a
Tactical PSYOPS
HQ & SUPPORT TACTICAL battalion can
COMPANY PSYOPS CO support a MEF.
Off Enl Off Enl
12 53 8 96

COMMAND S-1 SECTION S-2 SECTION S-3 SECTION

SECTION COMPANY HQ PRODUCT DEV
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl DETACHMNT
2 3 1 9 1 5 4 10 Off Enl Off Enl
2 16 1 10
CURRENT S-4 SECTION CO HQ & SUPT UNIT MINISTRY * Each Tactical
PRODUCTION TAC PSYOPS PSYOPS det.
OPS SECTION SECTION TEAM
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl DETACHMNT DETCHMNT* has a HQ & 4
1 6 1 5 1 14 1 1 Off Enl Off Enl three-member
1 10 1 15 teams. All teams
Has a print center for are loudspeaker
leaflets, flyers, etc equipped.
Figure 1-43: Tactical PSYOP Battalion, USACAPOC(A) organization
ARSOF: ARSOF retains one civil affairs brigade and one PSYOPS Group (see Figure 1-43).
The ARSOF civil affairs brigade is similar to those used in USACAPOC(A). Each ARSOF CA battalion is oriented towards a
regional combatant commander and has a larger CMOC but lacks both battalion-level liaison teams and functional specialty cells
(in lieu of full functional specialty cells each battalion has rule-of-law and veterinary specialists only).
95th CIVIL 4th PSYOPS
AFFAIRS BDE GROUP
(ARSOF) (ARSOF)
HQ & HQ CIVIL AFFAIRS
COMPANY BATTALION HQ & HQ 9th TACTICAL 3rd PRODUCTION
Off WO Enl OFF ENL COMPANY PSYOPS BN & DISSEM BN
25 3 74 54 147 Off WO Enl OFF ENL OFF WO ENL
25 5 113 52 533 34 1 666

Region CA Bn HQ & HQ CIVIL AFFAIRS

Region Battalion
st REGIONAL st
EUCOM 91 Bn COMPANY COMPANY PSYOPS BN SOUTHCOM 1 PSYOPS
th th
CENTCOM 96 Bn Off Enl Off Enl OFF ENL PACCOM 5 PSYOPS
PACCOM
th
97 Bn 18 55 9 23 38 217 EUCOM
th
6 PSYOPS
th th
SOUTHCOM 98 Bn CENTCOM 8 PSYOPS

Figure 1-44. ARSOF Civil Affairs and PSYOPS units

Unlike the USACAPOC(A) PSYOPS groups, the 4th POG directly supports the regional combatant commanders. It includes one
tactical PSYOPS battalion, identical to a Reserve PSYOPS battalion except that it has five (not four) tactical (and regionally
focused) PSYOPS companies. The four regional PSYOPS battalions plan and conduct operational/strategic level PSYOPS in
support of a regional combatant commanders campaign plan. Each has two product development companies that design, develop,
manage and review PSYOP products and programs. The 3rd PSYOPS production and dissemination (P&D) battalion (like the Army
Reserve 306th PSYOPS Company) produces and distributes the PSYOPS products that the regional battalions design.

1014. Military Police Forces

a. Military Police units organic to the MEF
Under the FMF military police reorganization implemented in FY08, each MSC (division, wing or MLG) in each of the three
standing MEF(s) rates one MP company (MSC Type) and each MEF CE rates one MP support company (Figure 1-41). The MP
support company provides military working dogs, CID and accident investigators and a small corrections section for MAGTF level
use. Also, the MP companies in CLR(s) 17, 27 and 37 maintain (in addition to their four MP platoons) a 14-man MP section for
each CLB in their respective regiments that supports a MEU. For example, the CLR-17 MP company maintains MP sections for

34
CLB(s) 11, 13 and 15. MWS squadrons in the active component force have lost their flight line security platoons and must rely on
the MAW MP companies for flight line security. Table 1-12 shows major equipment items in an MSC type MP company.

MP CO MP CO MP SUPPORT MP CO
th th
(MSC Type) (4 MLG Type) COMPANY (4 MarDiv)
Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl
6 0 168 6 1 140 3 2 149 7 1 165

CO HQ* CO HQ* CO HQ CORRECTIONS CO HQ

PLATOON
Off Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl Off WO Enl
2 8 3 1 20 2 0 11 0 1 12 2 1 35*
*No criminal/accident investigators; *Includes CID & accident *Includes criminal &
relies on MP Support Company. investigation personnel CID PLAT GS PLAT* accident investigators and
a motor transport section
MP PLAT Off WO Enl Off WO Enl
MP PLAT
Off Enl 0 1 20 1 0 40 MP PLAT
Off Enl
1 40 *Two MP Squads Off Enl
1 40 MWD** PLAT Phys Security Sect
Accident Investigation Sect 1 26
Off WO Enl
Each MP platoon has three 13-man squads 0 0 66 An MWD Platoon has:
24 Explosive detector dogs
**Military Working Dog
24 Specialized search dogs
9 Combat tracker dogs Each MP platoon has
3 Drug detector dogs three 8-man squads

Figure 1-45. Standard FMF Military Police organizations

Major End Items (TAM#) Quantity Major End Items (TAM#) Quantity
IED Investigative Unmanned Ground Veh. (IUGV) (B0052) 2 M32 multi-shot grenade launcher (MSGL) (E0025) 8
Armored MTVR 7-ton cargo truck AMK-23 (D0003) 2 M203 grenade launcher (E0892/E0960) 36
M1151A1 Armament Carrier HMMWV (D0030) 42 M249 5.56-mm light machinegun (SAW) (E0960) 36
M1152A1 Armored HMMWV (2-door) (D0033) 10 M2 .50-cal heavy machinegun (E0980) 14
M1165A1 Armored C2 HMMWV (4-door) (D0034) 2 M240 7.62-mm machinegun, ground version (E0989) 14
Cargo trailer, 1.25-ton M1102 LTT-H (D0016) 16 MK-19 40-mm grenade machinegun (E0994) 14
Table 1-15. Selected equipment items, Military Police company (MSC Type) (UIC M11051)
Military police assets assigned to any given MAGTF will usually require augmentation. The MAGTF commander can request
augmentation from the SMCR and/or the U.S. Army. The SMCR has three military police companies in the 4th MLG (Figure 1-38).
There is also an MP company in the 4th Marine Division (with five platoons of three eight-man squads each). The three support
squadrons in the 4th Marine Aircraft Wing still have their MP flight line security platoons. Army MP units are described below.

b. Army Military Police

The US Army Military Police has extensive assets but no fixed organizations above the company level. MP battalions and larger
units are all task-organized. The basic field unit is the Combat Support (CS) MP Company, shown in Figure 1-42 and Table 1-16.
By FY11 the Army will have 193 of these units, including 63 active, and 130 in the reserve components. Army doctrine recognizes
five MP mission areas. A CS MP company has capabilities within all five, as follows:
Maneuver and mobility support: This is essentially traffic control and route security (to include control of stragglers and
refugees). A full strength CS MP company can control up to 360 km of main, alternate and axial supply routes.
Alternatively, it can provide security for up to seven trains.
Police Intelligence Operations: A CS MP company gathers and employs intelligence like any other tactical unit.
Area Security: A full strength CS MP company can secure up to 2,000 square km of rural or 800 square km of urban
terrain or up to 400 square km of bulk fuel pipeline. Alternatively it can provide point security for up to nine small sites or
one large one (such as a major headquarters).
Law and Order Operations: A CS MP company can execute counter-drug operations and perform crime and accident
investigations or it can secure up to 700 US military prisoners (for a limited time).
Internment and Resettlement: A CS MP company can secure up to 2,000 enemy prisoners of war (EPW) in a prepared
holding area (for a limited time) or it can control the dismounted movement of up to 150,000 refugees per day.
A CS MP company provides much of its own logistical support but must depend on higher headquarters for legal, personnel,
administrative and religious services. It also requires supplemental Class III and V logistics as well as maintenance support for its
electrical generators. The Army has 47 (16 active) CS MP battalion headquarters and headquarters detachments (HHD). A CS MP
battalion controls two to six MP companies (four is usual) and can operate under an MP or ME brigade. One CS MP battalion
(either separately or as part of an ME brigade) can reinforce Marine MP(s) in support of a MEF.

35
 CMBT SUPPORT
MP COMPANY
Off Enl
5 162(165)

MP CO HQ MP OPS CNTR MP PLATOON An MP platoon has

three 12-man squads.
Off Enl Off Enl Off Enl A squad operates as
2 22 0 14(17) 1 42 four three-man teams.

Figure 1-46. Army combat support Military Police company organization

Equipment End Item Quantity Equipment End Item Quantity
Mine detector portable AN/PSS-14 6 M998 HMMWV troop/cargo carrier (2-door) (*) 3
Truck, cargo 2.5-ton M1078 LMTV 3 LMTV flat-bed trailer M1082; 1 M1112 Water Trailer 3
Truck, van, 2.5-ton M1079 LMTV 1 Light tactical trailers (M1102) (*) 5
Wrecker, 5-ton M1089 MTV 1 Heavy machineguns (25 .50-cal,* 23 40-mm MK-19) (*) 47
Truck, shop van, 2.5-ton M109 series (older type) 1 M203 grenade launcher/M249 SAW 20/49
M1117 Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) (*) 9
M1151A1B2 HMMWV Armament Carrier 35 M240B 7.62-mm machinegun 12
*Note: One E series company still exists. It has older type vehicles, only one wrecker; fewer trailers and 46 MK-19 machineguns; no .50-cal.
**The Army is issuing the M1117 Armored Security Vehicle (ASV) mainly to non-airborne, active component CS MP companies. The ASV is a 4x4 15-ton vehicle armored against
12.7-mm AP. It has a crew of three. It has a one-man turret with a MK-19 and a 0.50-cal, similar to the 40-50 turret on the AAV. The ASV is issued at a rate of 12 per company or
one per MP platoon headquarters and to one MP team per MP squad. It replaces 12 M1114 HMMWV (carrying six MK-19 and six 0.50-cal machineguns) on a one for one basis.

Table 1-16. Selected equipment items, Army combat support military police company
The Army has numerous separate MP platoons and detachments that provide military working dogs (MWD), customs inspectors,
CID investigators, law and order and traffic enforcement personnel and other specialties.
The Army is also the DoD executive agent for the confinement of prisoners and other detainees. Military police internment and
resettlement (I/R) units carry out this mission. The Armys 28 I/R battalion HHC(s) and 24 I/R companies can serve under a
combat support or I/R MP brigade headquarters. Only four I/R battalion HHC(s) and eight companies exist in the active Army. It
may seem odd that there are only 24 I/R companies for 28 I/R battalions but an I/R battalion HHCs enclosure operations section
(three 24-member I/R detachments) gives it enough specialists it to execute many I/R missions without an I/R company. The
Armys 33 MP guard companies (all reserve component) are also available to reinforce I/R battalion HHC(s) with additional
manpower for enemy prisoner of war/civilian internee (EPW/CI), high risk detainee (HRD) or displaced civilian (DC) operations.
Although by doctrine an I/R battalion HHC can have up to five I/R and guard companies (in any combination), it normally has only
two companies. Table 1-17 shows the maximum prisoner/detainee handling capabilities of a variety of possible I/R battalion
configurations. METT-TC factors and the
MP I/R Battalion HHC + US Military
EPW/CI HRD DC degree to which prisoners/detainees are
MP I/R Co. MP Guard Co. Prisoners (USMP)
compliant can vary these figures significantly.
0 1 1,000 600-900 2,000
1 0 1,000 300-600 100 2,000 An MP I/R company has 4 officers and 120
1 1 4,000 600-900 300 8,000 enlisted (including two internment platoons
2 0 2,000 600-900 300 4,000 with four 10-member squads each). An MP
guard company (4 officers and 155 enlisted)
Table 1-17. Potential MP I/R battalion configurations and capabilities has three guard platoons with 11-member guard
squads in each. A guard company operates in any of the five MP mission areas but its lack of an operations center limits its ability
to plan future operations and provide quick response teams for special situations. Its reduced allowance of vehicles restricts its
ability to conduct motorized patrols. It can guard any fixed facility (such as a hospital, large headquarters, interrogation center,
etc.), not just a detention facility.

1015. Special Operations Forces

a. US Army Special Operations Forces (ARSOF)
ARSOF or US Army Special Operations Command (USASOC) is the largest service component command within SOCOM. It
provides over 30,000 of SOCOMs total of about 58,000 personnel. ARSOF doctrine sees its missions as unconventional warfare
(UW), foreign internal defense (FID), direct action (DA), special reconnaissance (SR), counter-terrorism (CT), psychological
operations (PSYOPS), civil affairs (CA) operations, counter-proliferation of WMD and support to information operations (IO).
Figure 1-xx shows ARSOFs overall force structure. The Special Forces Command is still the core element of ARSOF. It was
originally formed in June 1952 to conduct UW. The Army originally created UW as a doctrinal concept under which it would raise

36
guerrilla forces able to oppose a Soviet-Warsaw Pact invasion of Western Europe even conventional NATO forces were defeated.
The Army first employed UW in Vietnam. UW differs from other forms of irregular warfare (IW) because it involves US trained
and/or led and/or materially supported indigenous or surrogate personnel to accomplish US objectives. UW can be conducted
throughout the range of conflict against both regular and irregular forces. The Army has recently expanded its UW definition to
cover the forces of non-state actors. Since Vietnam Special Forces missions have expanded to include FID, DA, SR and CT. FID
differs from UW in that it supports a national government vice a guerrilla or surrogate force.

US ARMY SPECIAL
OPERATIONS
FORCES (ARSOF)

JFK SPECIAL 95th CIVIL 528th

USA SPECIAL 4th PSYOPS
WARFARE AFFAIRS SUSTAINMENT
FORCES GROUP
CENTER & BRIGADE BRIGADE
COMMAND
SCHOOL
See Figure 1-13, 1013k See Figure 1-13, 1013k

SPECIAL 160th SPECIAL SOAR Total:

th 30 M/AH-6A
FORCES 75 RANGER OPERATIONS
20 MH-60K
GROUP (Active) REGIMENT AVIATION 40 UH-60L
REGT (SOAR) 48 MH-47E

SPECIAL RANGER AVIATION

st rd th th TROOPS BN BATTALION BATTALION
1 ,3 ,5 ,7 &
SPECIAL th
10 SFG(s)
FORCES GP Signal Company
(National Guard) Recon Company (per battalion)
th th
MI Company 4 Rifle Companies, 1 Support (CSS) Company
19 & 20 SFG(s)

Figure 1-47. ARSOF Force Structure

As of FY11 the Special Forces Command consists of five
SF Gp CENTCOM EUCOM PACOM SOUTHCOM
active and two National Guard groups. The organization of a st th st rd
1 SFG 4 Bn 1 -3 Bns
group is given in Figure 1-xx below. In FY07 ARSOF began to rd st th
3 SFG 1 - 4 Bns*
activate a fourth battalion in each of its active Special Forces th st th
5 SFG 1 - 4 Bns
Groups (SFG). It has already activated fourth battalions in the th st rd
7 SFG 1 3 Bns
3rd, 5th and 10th SFG(s) and will activate fourth battalions in the th th st rd
1st and 7th SFG(s) in August 2011 and during FY12, 10 SFG 4 Bn 1 -3 Bns
th nd st th
respectively. It has also expanded the support companies of all 19 SFG** 2 Bn 1 & 5 Bns
th st rd
five active SFG(s) to support battalions. The two National 20 SFG** 1 - 3 Bns
Guard SFG(s) have not been expanded. *Mainly the Levant and Horn of Africa (HOA) **National Guard
Table 1-18. Special Forces Group Regional Orientation
Each SFG (active or National Guard) is supposed specialize in
the cultures, languages and operating environments in the AO of
one of the regional combatant commanders. However, the Team/Billet ODA ODB ODB (Exp)**
requirements of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan have forced all Team Leader CPT MAJ MAJ
the SFG(s) to neglect their own primary AO(s) and focus on Team XO CWO2 CPT CPT
Central Asia and the Middle East. The regional specialization of Co Ops Officer CWO3 CWO3
the different SFG(s) is shown in Table 1-xx. Co SgtMaj 1 E9 1 E9
Ops. Sgt(s) 1 E8 1 E8, 1 E6 1 E8, 1 E6
The basic tactical fighting element of the SF is the operational Ops/Intel Sgt 1 E7 1 E7 1 E7
detachment A (ODA or A Team). Its 12 members include a Comm. Sgt(s) 1 E7, 1 E6 1 E7, 1 E6 1 E7, 1 E6
command element plus specialists in communications, engineering Medical Sgt(s) 1 E7, 1 E6 1 E7, 1 E6 1 E7, 1 E6
(mainly demolitions), light and heavy weapons and medical. All Engineer Sgt(s) 1 E7, 1 E6 1 E6 1 E7, 1 E6
team members will cross train as well. For a UW mission the team Weapons Sgt(s) 1 E7, 1 E6 1 E6 2 E6 (1 ammo)
can act as cadre for a guerrilla company. It can split into two six- CBRN 1 E5* 1 E5*
man elements for SR and DA missions. An SF company has six Armorer/Supply 1 E5* 1 E5*
ODA(s). By TO one of them will specialize in free fall parachuting *Not SF qualified **Expanded
(HALO) and another in SCUBA operations. The other four will
Table 1-19. SF Operational Detachments
also specialize according to the overall unit mission. Such

37
specialization can include mountain, maritime or urban operations, selected types of infiltration, etc. The Army maintains armored
HMMWV(s) with heavy machineguns so that ODA(s) can be motorized when their mission requires it.
USA SPECIAL
FORCES GROUP
(Mobile)
OFF WO EN
236 132 1,826

SF GROUP HHC SF BATTALION SF BATTALION SUPPORT

OFF WO EN (Mobile) (Mobile) (Expanded) BATTALION
31 11 81 OFF WO EN OFF WO EN OFF WO EN
45 26 361 45 26 363 25 17 299
An expanded SF battalion includes Support company (MI, Signal, and
one expanded SF company Operations detachments; TUAV
(Shadow) platoon, & NBC section)
Service support company
BN HHD (ODC) SF CO (Mobile) SUPPORT CO
OFF WO EN OFF WO EN OFF WO EN
17 3 42 8 7 72 4 2 103 As of FY12, the 19th and 20th
SFG(s) will have only three
battalions each (none
expanded). They will also
CO HQ (ODB) A Det. (ODA) A Det. (ODA) A Det. (ODA) have support companies,
(Military Free Fall) (Diver) rather than battalions.
OFF WO EN OFF WO EN
OFF WO EN OFF WO EN
2 1 12 1 1 10
1 1 10 1 1 10

Figure 1-48. US Army Special Forces Group organization

An SF operational detachment B (ODB) is also an SF company headquarters. It commands and supports its six ODA(s) in
garrison and in the field. In the field it usually deploys in a safer area but may deploy forward to provide C2 for multiple ODA(s).
Personnel in an ODB have similar specialties to those in an ODA but are stronger in operations and planning and include logistical
specialists for ODA support. An ODB is weaker in weapons and engineering because it is less likely to conduct direct action. By
the end of FY12 each SFG will include one expanded company. This company differs from the others only in its ODB, which has a
stronger direct action capability. Table 1-xx shows the composition of an ODA and both normal and expanded ODB(s).
An SF operational detachment C (ODC) is an SF battalion headquarters. It will not normally go to the field because in SF
operations the close tactical control of multiple companies is rarely required. It does provide planning, C2, logistic, training and
intelligence support to its battalions. With the battalion support company it establishes, operates and supports a forward operating
base for its own use and that of its subordinate SF companies. It can also provide one Special Operations Command and Control
Element (SOCCE) to a supported conventional headquarters at corps (MEF) level or higher.
The ARSOF civil affairs brigade and PSYOPS group are the only such organizations in the active Army. They are discussed in
paragraph 1013k, above. They can support FID and support to IO, as well as PSYOPS and civil affairs operations.
The Ranger regiment is the primary ARSOF DA unit. It is conventionally organized light infantry, though with generally lighter
equipment than that found in more conventional Army or Marine Corps infantry battalions. Also, it has never operated as a
regiment but only as individual battalions or companies. The Rangers are intended to be a rapidly deployable airborne light infantry
organized and trained to conduct highly complex joint DA operations with or in support of other SO units of all Services. Rangers
can also execute DA operations in support of conventional non-SO missions conducted by a CCDR and can operate as
conventional light infantry when properly augmented with other elements of combined arms.
The 160th Special Operations Aviation Regiment (SOAR) supports other SOF units by planning and conducting special air
operations in all operational environments. Its specially organized, trained, and equipped aviation units provide the joint force
special operations component commander (JFSOCC) with the capability to infiltrate, resupply, and exfiltrate SOF elements
engaged in all SO core tasks. Its aircraft are listed in Figure 1-xx, above. All can be armed with M240 machineguns, M134 7.62mm
six-barrel miniguns and/or 2.75-inch rockets.

b. Marine Corps Forces Special Operations Command (MARSOC)

Although the US Special Operations Command (SOCOM) has existed since 1986, the Marine Corps was not involved with it until
2003. At that time the Secretary of Defense persuaded CMC to send a detachment of mainly Force Recon Marines to serve with
SOCOM in Iraq as a preliminary to full Marine Corps participation. Based on this experience CMC activated MARSOC on 24
February 2006 at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina. MARSOC joined SOCOM in July and made its first deployment in August.

38
MARSOC recruits, organizes, trains, equips, sustains, and maintains its own personnel and provides task organized scalable and
responsive special operations capable forces worldwide to accomplish missions assigned by SOCOM and/or Geographic
Combatant Commanders. Core MARSOC activities include foreign internal defense (FID), counterinsurgency (COIN), direct
action (DA), special reconnaissance (SR), counterterrorism (CT) and support to information operations (IO).
Initially, MARSOC consisted of a small staff and the Foreign Military Training Unit (FMTU). The FMTU had been activated in
2005 to conduct foreign internal defense (FID). The FMTU later expanded into the Marine Special Operations Advisory Group
(MSOAG). Early in FY07, MARSOC activated the 1st and 2nd Marine Special Operations Battalions (MSOB) using personnel from
the 1st and 2nd Force Reconnaissance Companies. It stationed the 1st MSOB (with a logistics detachment) at Camp Pendleton and
the 2nd MSOB at Camp Lejeune. The 1st and 2nd MSOB(s) were originally structured to act as a SOTF-level command, able to
augment a JSOTF as well as to command their respective Marine Special Operations Companies (MSOC). They specialized in SR
and DA missions but could also do FID, CT and IO. The MSOAG, which by FY09 consisted of the differently organized and
smaller 3rd and 4th MSOB(s), provided teams, as directed by SOCOM to support TSOC engagement priorities by conducting
regionally focused FID with partnered foreign forces and to develop unconventional warfare (UW) capabilities.

MARFORSOC
FY11
All MARFORSOC elements are USMC USN CIV
based at Camp Lejeune NC OFF EN OFF EN
except as indicated. 382 2,319 24 227 148

MAR SPECIAL HQ
HQ OPERATIONS
MARFORSOC MARSOC
REGIMENT
SCHOOL
(MSOR)

HQ MSOR includes the 4th MSOB AUGMENTATION

HQ MSOR (22 MO, 182 ME, 1 NO, 19 NE). & TRAINING
Deactivation of the 4th MSOB will SUPPORT UNIT
be largely complete by FY13
Camp Pendleton, CA
Quantico VA
st nd rd
1 MARINE 2 MARINE 3 MARINE SPEC OPS
SPEC OPS SPEC OPS SPEC OPS SUPPORT
BN (MSOB) BN (MSOB) BN (MSOB) GP (SOSG)

MSOB MSOB MSOB MSOC HQ SOSG

MSOC MSOC HQ Co.
HQ Co. HQ Co.

MSOC K INTEL
MSOC(s) A, B, MSOC(s) F, G, H, & I MSOC(s) L, M, & N to be BATTALION
DETACHMENT C, & D activated during FY13-15
W Detachment W (13 MO, 141 ME) includes a
communication platoon, a direct support SUPPORT LOGISTICS
intelligence platoon and maintenance, supply COMPANY COMPANY
and motor transport sections.

Figure 1-49: MARFORSOC organization

Negative experiences in early MARSOC deployments to Afghanistan led to major a restructuring which will not be complete until
FY14. In April 2009 MSOAG became the Marine Special Operations Regiment (MSOR), to provide tactical C2 for the MSOB(s).
The MSOR headquarters currently includes a large number of supernumeraries plus the 4th MSOB, scheduled for deactivation in
FY13. The personnel freed by the 4th MSOB deactivation will enable the 3rd MSOB to organize its three missing letter companies
and become fully operational. When reorganization is complete MARSOC should have an end-strength of about 2,600 Marines,
sailors, soldiers and civilians (or about 5% of SOCOM).
When reorganization is complete each MSOB headquarters company will include a fires control section (four three-man MSOC
teams totaling an officer and 13 enlisted), an EOD section (an officer and 17 enlisted), a paraloft section, a Navy dive section (six
enlisted), engineer and boat sections, communication sections, and medical, supply, maintenance and motor transport sections.
Personnel will total 13 to 14 Marine officers, 182-184 Marine enlisted, 2 to 4 Navy officers, 18 to 21 Navy enlisted and 10 to 12
government civilians.

39
MARSOC is also organizing its Marine Special Operations Companies (MSOC). In FY07 an MSOC consisted of a DA/SR platoon
(eight five-man teams) and a security element (operating six SAW and two M240G). In FY10 MARSOC eliminated the security
element and replaced the DA/SR platoon with four Marine Special Operations Teams (MSOT[s]). An MSOT operates as a
headquarters (team leader, team chief, ops chief and communication SNCO) and two elements (MSOE) with four enlisted Marines
and one Navy Corpsman in each (see Figure 1-xx).

An MSOC headquarters has: MAR SPEC OPS Notes:

1 Commanding Officer (Major) CO (MSOC) FY12 1. An MSOC in FY11 (7 MO, 49 ME) has no
1 Executive Officer (Capt) intelligence officer or first sergeant and only
1 Air Officer (Capt) USMC USN seven USN enlisted.
1 Intel Officer (Capt) (FY12+) OFF EN OFF EN 2. Each FY11 MSOC (except MSOC K) has 8
st
1 1 Sgt (FY12+) 8 50 0 9 to 22 supernumeraries (all ME) attached.
1 Ops Chief (MSgt)
MSO Team Each MSOT has:
1 Asst Ops Chief (GySgt) MSOC HQ 1 Team Leader (Capt)
1 Log Chief (GySgt) (MSOT)
1 Communication Chief (SSgt) USMC USN 1 Team Chief (MSgt)
USMC USN
1 Radio Operator (Sgt) OFF EN OFF EN 1 Ops Chief (GySgt)
OFF EN OFF EN
1 IDC (HMC) 4 6 0 1 1 Comm. SNCOIC (SSgt)
1 11 0 2
2 MSOE Leaders (SSgt)
2 Asst. MSOE Leaders (Sgt)
4 MSOE Members (2 Sgt, 2 Cpl)
2 USN Corpsmen (1 HM1, 1 HM2)

Figure 1-50: MSOC organization

The Marine Special Operations Support Group (SOSG) provides combat support and combat service support to the MSOR. At
present it is only a battalion-sized command. It consists of an intelligence battalion (until recently, an intelligence company and it
is still only at company-strength), a support company (communication and fires platoons plus a section of patrol dogs), a logistics
company and a detachment (Detachment W) to support the 1st MSOB at Camp Pendleton, California.
MARSOC selects and trains its own personnel. Potential MARSOC operators are selected after a two to three week assessment.
Individual training takes 10 to 10.5 months. Specialty training occurs after an operator joins his team. This may include weapons,
communication, leadership, medical, explosives, sniper and special reconnaissance courses. As of April 2010 some 258 MARSOC
Marines had received significant foreign language training conducted through DLI (mainly in European languages) but only 30 had
achieved a Level 3 or higher proficiency.

40
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part II

Equipment Capabilities
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2001. Ground Weapons

a. Vehicle Mounted Weapon Systems
Ammo Effective Practical Combat Wt. Speed Crew Number per
System Weapons
Load Range Rate of Fire Fuel/Range/etc. + Pax Organization FY09
M1A1 120-mm gun 40 2,500 meters 6-8 rpm 68 STONS 14 per Tank co.
Main .50-cal M2 1,200 1,800 meters 40-80 rpm 42 mph on roads 2 per Tank BN H&S
4+0
Battle 2 7.62-mm M240 10,800 900 meters 100-200 rpm 30 mph off roads CO
Tank Smoke GL 24 30 meters N/A 505 gal/289 miles 58 per Army HBCT

M88A2 2 per Tank CO

70 STONS
4 per Tank BN H&S CO
Recovery .50-cal M2 1,300 1,800 meters 40-80 rpm 30 mph maximum 3+0
8 per Ord. Maint CO*
Vehicle 400 gal/280 miles st nd
2 per 1 and 2 CEB
LAV 25-mm M242 600 1,700 meters 200 rpm (high) 14 LAV(25),
13-14.2 STONS 3+6
(25) 2 7.62-mm M240 1,320 900 meters 100-200 rpm 4 LAV(AT),
62 mph on roads
Twin TOW turret 16 3,750 meters 1 to 3 rpm 2 LAV(M),
LAV (AT) 6 mph in water 3+0
7.62-mm M240 1,000 900 meters 100-200 rpm 1 LAV(C2),
71 gal/410 miles
3 LAV(L) &
81-mm mortar M252 99 5,700 meters 10-20 rpm 1 LAV(R) per LAR CO
LAV (M) Each LAV carries 8 5+0
7.62-mm M240 1,000 900 meters 100-200 rpm 4 LAV(25),
smoke grenade
LAV (C2) 7.62-mm M240 1,000 900 meters 100-200 rpm 2+4 6 LAV(C2),
launchers with 16
4 LAV(L),
LAV (L) 7.62-mm M240 1,000 900 meters 100-200 rpm grenades (range 30 2+1 2 LAV(R) per LAR BN
meters).
LAV (R) 7.62-mm M240 1,000 900 meters 100-200 rpm 3 to 5 H&S CO
40-mm MK-19 864 1,600 meters 40-60 rpm 31 STONS 43 P7, 2 C7, 1 R7 per
AAVP7 .50-cal M2 1,200 1,800 meters 40-80 rpm 45 mph on roads 3 + 21 AAV CO
6 mph on water 41 P7, 6 C7, 2 R7 per
Smoke GL 8 30 meters N/A
171 gal/200 miles AAV H&S CO
AAVC7 7.62-mm M240 1,000 900 meters 100-200 rpm (or up to 7 hours in 3 + 10 5 R7 per Ord. Maint.
AAVR7 7.62-mm M240 400 900 meters 100-200 rpm water) 3 to 5 CO*
56.5 STONS
Armored vehicle 4 per tank bn; to be
an M60 series tank hull carrying a 60- 30 mph on roads
AVLB launched bridge
foot scissors bridge 10 mph off roads
2+0 transferred to the
(unarmed) CEB
375 gal/290 miles
27 STONS (ballasted) 12 per CEB
unarmed armored
18 STONS (travel) 4 per ESB
M9 ACE bulldozer (tracked, n/a n/a n/a
30 mph/3 mph in water
1+0
4 per Army Mobility
high speed)
134 gal/230 miles Augmentation Co
MK-154 MK-22 rocket with M58 linear demolition charge (LDC); Carried in M353 trailer n/a 38 per CEB
nd rd
MK-155 creates a 100 x 16 meter lane through a minefield. Carried in an AAV n/a 12 per 2 /3 AAV BN
M2A3 Twin TOW launcher 7 3,750 meters 2 rpm
79 per HBCT (Army)
Infantry 25-mm M242 930 1,700 meters 200 rpm (high)
3+7 (including 18 engineer
Fighting 7.62-mm M240 2,340 900 meters 100-200 rpm 33.75 STONS variants)
Vehicle Smoke GL 16 30 meters N/A (37 with armor tiles)
Twin TOW launcher 12 3,750 meters 2 rpm 38 mph (w/o tiles)
M3A3 250-265 miles (w/o
200 rpm
Cavalry 25-mm M242 1,705 1,700 meters
(high) tiles) 175 gal
3+2 29 per HBCT (Army)
Fighting 7.62-mm M240 2,340 900 meters 100-200 rpm
Vehicle Thermal imaging (to
Smoke GL 16 30 meters N/A 2,000 meters)
Similar to the M3 CFV but designed to carry an artillery fire
M7 FIST
support team (FIST). It can acquire and laser designate 3+2 11 per HBCT (Army)
Vehicle targets for terminally guided munitions.
*The 3rd Ordnance Maintenance Company has only 4 M88A2 and 2 AAVR7. The 4th Ordnance Maintenance Company has no M88A2 at all and only 2 AAVR7.

Table 2-1. Vehicle-mounted weapon systems

41
 b. Crew-Served Weapons (towed or portable)
Effective Rate of Per Type
Weapon Remarks
Range Fire Marine Div.
60mm mortar M224 3,490 meters 20-30 rpm 3 per rifle company 81
81mm mortar M252 5,700 meters 10-20 rpm 8 per infantry battalion; 10 per LAR battalion 82
TOW (includes 20 LAV-AT) 3,750 meters 2-3 rpm Thermal sight; used by LAV-AT and antitank HMMWV 138
Javelin (CLU) 2,500 meters 1 rpm Control launch unit weighs 14-lbs; each round weighs 35-lbs 72
MK-153 SMAW 500 meters 1 rpm Has HEAT, HE & thermobaric rockets 243
M240B 7.62mm machinegun 1,100 meters 100-200 rpm In addition, the M240C is used in armored vehicles 676
M2 .50-caliber machinegun 1,800 meters 40-80 rpm Total per division excludes M48 guns carried on M1 tanks 491
MK-19 40mm grenade MG 1,600 meters 40-60 rpm HE and HEDP grenades have a wound radius of 15 meters 475
M-777 155-mm Howitzer 24,700 meters Up to 5 rpm Can range to 30,000 m with RAP; 24,000 m with Excalabur 54
M-142 HIMARS (227-mm MRL) 32,000 meters 1 per 1.5 sec Range up to 65-km for ER DPICM or 70-km for GMLRS 18
Table 2-2. Crew-served weapons

c. Vehicle Summary
The Light Fleet
Vehicle Dimensions (inches / lbs) Performance (inches/ lbs)
Length Width Height Curb Wgt Fording depth Highway Payload Cross country Towed
payload payload
M1031M1 N/A
85 57 34 368 24 N/A N/A
Motor-cycle
Fuel Data Type: Diesel / JP Tank capacity: 4.2 gal Miles / gallon: 96 @ 55 mph Gallon / hour: .55 @ 60 mph
REMARKS: Employed in garrison and field environments and is designed to perform in all weather conditions (except snow and ice). Can be used
for tactical and urban RECCE, convoy control and MP functions.
Vehicle Dimensions (inches / lbs) Performance (inches lbs)
M1161 & 163 75 Max One Expeditionary Fire
M1163 Internally 138 60 49 reduced 4,750 30 (no kit) 2,000 2,000 Support System (EFSS)
Transportable 120mm mortar OR one
Vehicle (ITV) ammo trailer.
Fuel Data Type: Diesel / JP Tank capacity: Dual 10 gal tanks Miles / gallon: 17 Gallon / hour: 3.5 @ 60 mph
REMARKS: The ITV replaced the Interim Fast Attack Vehicle (IFAV) and filled the tactical void created by the disposal of all variants of the
M151 Jeep. Deployment began in FEB 2009. M1161 for RECCE and a M1163 is a prime mover for 120mm rifled mortar or ammo trailer.
Table 2-3. The Light Fleet

High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles (HMMWV)

FUEL DATA: all HMMWV use diesel/JP. Use 10mpg for planning
Vehicle Dimensions (inches) Curb wgt includes BII Performance (lbs) Fording depth (inches) is w/ & w/o fording kit
Length Width Height Curb wgt Fording Payload
Depth: Hwy Cross cty towed
M997A2 204.5 86 102 7,700 30/60 2,530 2,530 4,200
Hard top ambulance. Replaced the M997 variant. Can carry four litter or eight ambulatory patients.
M1035A2 182.5 86 72 6,100 30/60 4,200 4,200 4,200
Soft top ambulance replaced the M1035 variant. Can carry two litter or three ambulatory patients.
M1123 182.5 86 73.5 5,850 30/60 4,450 4,450 4,200
Replaced the M998 and M1038 variants. Provides light troop and cargo transportation. Available in two and four person configurations, can accept
installation of troop seats and other modifications. Also can be used as the vehicle platform for mobile communication systems as well as other mobile
alternate command posts. Marine Armor Kit (MAK) can be installed on the M1123, in either two or four door configurations.
M1043A2 182.5* 86 78 7,210 30/60 3,090 3,090 4,200
* 190.5 w/ pintle. Produced to replace the M1043 and M1044. Can be armed with the M240G 7.62 mm MG, M2 .50 caliber, MG or the MK19,
40mm, MG. Provides mobile, suppressive and destructive fires in support of the maneuver commander. The MAK can be installed.
M1045A2 182.5* 86 78 7,264 30/60 3,036 3,036 4,200
* 190.5 w/ pintle. The Tube-Launched, Optical-Tracked, Wire-Guided (TOW) missile variant replaced the M1045 and the M1046. Provides mobility
for the TOW missile system & provides commanders a flexible, medium to long range, anti-armor capability. MAK can be installed

42
Vehicle Dimensions (inches) Curb wgt includes BII Performance (lbs) Fording depth (inches) is w/ & w/o fording kit
Length Width Height Curb wgt Fording Payload
Depth: Hwy Cross cty towed
M1097A2 190.5 86 74 5,900 30/60 4,400 4,400 4,200
Replacing the M1037, M1042, M1097 and M1097A1 heavy variants. Designed to carry heavy electronic systems or weapons platforms. May be
configured to act as a command post shelter from which battlefield traffic may be monitored and a communication center from which personnel may
monitor incoming and outgoing radio and telecommunication traffic during operations. May also be configured as a troop carrier.
M1114 196.5 76* 90.6 7,264 30/60 4,400 4,400 4,200
* 94.25 w/ a gunners protection kit (GPK) or 105.38 w/ a Marine Corps Transparent Armor Gun Shield (MCTAGS). The M1114 Up-Armored
HMMWV (UAH) is an armored replacement for the M1043A2 Armament Carrier. The M1114 armor protection includes Up-Armored HMMWV
(UAH) kit, FRAG kits 1, 1a, 2, and 5, as well as a GPK or MCTAGS for the gunners protection. This up-armored package provides the occupants
with ballistics protection through a full 360, in addition to overhead and under body blast protection. The M1114 can be fitted with a wide range of
weapon systems on the roof, including 7.62mm or M2 .50 caliber machine guns or an MK 19 40mm heavy machine gun. UPARMORED HUMVEE
M1151A1 194 91 80 10,300* 30/60 1,800 1,800** 4,200
* and ** varies w/FRAG kits. Can mount the MK19 automatic grenade launcher; M2 Caliber .50 machine gun; M60, 7.62mm machine gun; M240G,
7.62mm machine gun; and M249, 5.56mm Squad Assault (SAW); ring mounted with a 360 degree arc of fire, with armor protection for crew, weapon
components, and ammunition. The A1 model designator represents the fact it has Integrated Armor Package (IAP) installed, commonly referred to as
Underbody, and features the flexibility of adding FRAG Kits 1,1a, 2, and 5 and B Kit. SUPER UPARMORED HUMVEE
M1152 194 86 76 6,400 30/60 5,700 5,700 4,200
An un-armored HMMWV. A 2-door vehicle designed to replace the M1037/M1042 and M1097A2 variants. Can be configured as a cargo/troop
carrier or as a shelter carrier.
M1152A1 194 90.5 75 8,760 30/60 3,340* 3,340* 4,200
Can be used as a cargo/troop carrier or as a shelter carrier. Can transport a two-man crew and eight passengers. Has the capability to secure and
transport the S250 electrical equipment shelter. The A1 model designator represents the fact it has Integrated Armor Package (IAP) installed,
commonly referred to as Underbody, and has the flexibility of adding a B2 Armor kit with FRAG Kits 1, 1a, 2 and 5.
M1165 194 90.5 76.25 6,550 30/60 4,950 4,950 4,200
The M1165 Expanded Capacity Vehicle is an upgrade from the M998/M1038 and the M1123.
Is a Marine Force Special Operations Command configured armored/unarmored four-door Command Variant Vehicle.
Hwy or Cross cty 2,230 lbs w/B3,
M1165A1 194 91 75 9,870 w/B3 30/60 4,200
740 lbs w/B3 and FRAG 1/1a, 2 & 5
Combines the M1097A2 four-door body with the M1113 ECV Chassis and is used as a Command and Control/General Purpose Vehicle. The A1
model designator represents the fact it has Integrated Armor Package (IAP) installed, commonly referred to as Underbody. The M1165A1 may be
configured with the B3 Armor kit, in addition to, FRAG 1, 1a, 2, and 5 kits.
M1167 194 91 80* 11,250 30/60 1,850 1,850 4,200
With TOW Gunner Protection Kit (TGPK) The M1167 Tube-Launched, Optical-Tracked, Wire-Guided (TOW) missile variant replaced the
M1045A2 and the M1046 HMMWV variants. It provides mobility for the TOW or SABER missile system giving commanders a more responsive,
medium to long range, anti-armor capability.
Table 2-4. High Mobility Multipurpose Wheeled Vehicles

Medium Tactical Vehicle Replacement (MTVR) family of trucks

All MTVR vehicles
Are 7-ton 6 x 6 designed for use on all types of roads, highways and cross country terrain.
Are transportable by highway, rail, sea, and air.
Use state of the art commercial technology including an independent suspension system, electronically controlled engine and transmission, and
a central tire inflation system, which increases the off-road maneuverability and mobility of the vehicle.
Are capable of traversing a 60 percent gradient, a 30 percent side slope up to 15 mph and a 40 percent side slope at 5 mph at its maximum cross
country load. It is capable of an on-road cruising range of 300 miles
Use diesel/JP fuels and use 4.5 mpg for planning
Armor kits provide all round plus overhead and underbody protection for the crew compartment. A troop carrier version is available for either
kit. Reducible MAS is reducible to a height of 98 in, and designed to meet the height restrictions aboard naval ships.
Dimensions (inches) Curb wgt includes BII Performance (lbs) Fording depth (inches)
Vehicle Length Width Height Curb wgt Fording Payload
Depth: Hwy Cross cty towed
MK23 23,753
MK25 28,642
315 98 141 60 30,000 14,200 22,000
MK23A1 27,900
MK25A1 29,100
This cargo variant MTVR family of trucks replaced the M813A1, M923A1, M923A2, M925, M925A1, M813 with ISO Bed and the M923 with ISO
Bed. The difference between the MK23 and MK25 is the MK25 has a 20,000-pound capacity self-recovery winch. MK23A1/MK25A1 is referred
to as ready to accept armor (RTAA). This model has upgraded cab mounts, armored flooring, upgraded suspension, and air conditioning. RTAA is
not considered an armored vehicle and is interchangeable with the MK23/MK25 to satisfy (T/E) allowances.

43
AMK23 33,000
AMK23A1 33,800
315 98 141 60 24,400 12,000 22,000
AMK25 34,200
AMK25A1 35,000
A = Armored The AMK23 is the MK23/MK23A1 with non-reducible MTVR Armor System (MAS) installed. The AMK23A1 is the
MK23/MK23A1 with reducible MAS installed. The AMK25 is the MK25/MK25A1 with non-reducible MAS installed. The AMK25A1 is the
MK25/MK25A1 The 23 is w/o winch and the 25 w/ winch.
MK27 30,067
MK28 30,955
386.5 98 141.2 60 30,000 14,200 22,000
MK27A1 30,600
MK28A1 31,700
The MK27/MK28 Extended Bed (XL) variant of the MTVR family replaced the M814, M927, M927A1, M928 and the M928A1. The MK28 has a
20,000-pound capacity self-recovery winch. The MK27A1/ MK28A1 are the ready to accept armor (RTAA) versions of the MK27/MK28, which
include upgraded cab mounts, armored flooring, upgraded suspension, and air conditioning. The MK27A1/MK28A1 are not considered to be armored
vehicles, and are interchangeable with the MK27/MK28 for (T/E) allowances
AMK27 35,700
AMK27A1 36,400
386.5 98 141.2 60 24,400 12,000 22,000
AMK28 36,800
AMK28A1 37,500
A = Armored. The AMK27 is the MK27/MK27A1 with non-reducible MAS installed. The AMK27A1 is the MK27/MK27A1 with reducible MAS
installed. Explanation for the 28 is the same as the 27. The 28 has a winch while the 27 does not.
MK29 30,400
MK30 31,300
315.4 96 135.5 60 28,000 12,200 22,000
MK29A1 31,800
MK30A1 32,500
The Dump truck of the MTVR family replaced the M817, M929, M929A1 and the M930. The MK29 / MK30 is equipped with a steel welded dump
body, which extends up and over the vehicle cab to prevent damage during loading. The MK30 has a 20,000-pound capacity self-recovery winch. The
MK29A1 / MK30A1 is referred to as RTAA. This model has upgraded cab mounts, armored flooring, upgraded suspension, and air conditioning.
RTAA is not considered an armored vehicle and is interchangeable with the MK29/MK30 to satisfy (T/E) allowances.
AMK29 37,200
60
AMK29A1 37,200 23,200 10,800
315.4 96 135.5 22,000
AMK30 38,000
AMK30A1 38,000
The AMK29 is MK29/MK29A1 with non-reducible MAS installed. The AMK29A1 is MK29/MK29A1 with reducible MAS installed. Explanation
for the 30 is the same as the 29. The 30 has a winch while the 29 does not.
MK31 94,000*
296 14 141 27,200 60 67,000* N/A
MK31A1 32,000**
# Reducible to 98 * includes semi trailer ** Highway kingpin load. NO cross country king pin load. This is the tractor variant and replaces the M818,
M931 and the M931A1 5-ton tractor series. It is equipped with all wheel steering and a sliding 5th wheel. The MK31A1 was procured as the prime
mover for the MK970 5,000 gallon refueler. MK31A1 is referred to as RTAA. This model has upgraded cab mounts, armored flooring, upgraded
suspension, and air conditioning.
AMK31 94,000* 67,000*
296 98 141 32,800 60 N/A
AMK31A1 28,500** 22,500#
* includes semi trailer ** Highway kingpin load. # cross-country kingpin load. The AMK31 is the MK31/MK31A1 with non-reducible MAS
installed. The AMK31A1 is MK31A1 with reducible MAS installed.
MTVR Wreckers
MK36 141 49,100 Lift and Tow 48,800 lbs. GVW w/14,000 lb. lift capacity
387 98 60
AMK36 126 54,000
The MK36 Wrecker replaces the M816, M936 and the M936A1. It is compatible with all tactical vehicles in its weight class and smaller. It is able to
lift and tow or flat tow 7-ton size vehicles and smaller vehicles with trailers without damage to either the towed or towing vehicle. MK36A1is referred
to as RTAA. This model has upgraded cab mounts, armored flooring, upgraded suspension, and air conditioning. RTAA is not considered an armored
vehicle and is interchangeable with the MK36 to satisfy (T/E) allowances.
Crane lift (lbs) Flat towing (lbs) Recovery winch capacity (lbs)
22,000 at 9 ft 3,960 @ 31 ft Highway Cross country Self Main
MK37 34,400 22,000 11,200
MK37A1 360 98 142 34,400 60 22,000 11,200 N/A
AMK37A1 38,800 20,800 10,400
The MK37 High Mobility Artillery Rocket System (HIMARS) Re-Supply Vehicle (RSV) carries rocket pods for the HIMARS system. It is equipped
with a Material Handling Crane (MHC) and can carry two pods on its cargo bed and two more on an MK-38 trailer over all road and terrain
conditions. A HIMARS section consists of a launcher, two RSVs and RSTs. The AMK37A1 is an armored variant.
Table 2-5. Medium Tactical Vehicle Replacement (MTVR) family of trucks

44
 LOGISTICS VEHICLE SYSTEM (LVS) The Heavy Fleet
The MK48/MK48A1 Front Power Unit (FPU) and their associated rear body units (RBU) form the Logistics Vehicle system (LVS). Used
primarily by combat service support motor transport units to haul supplies in large quantities from beachheads, ports, railheads or airfields to
combat service support areas, it is an all-metal, fully enclosed, 4x4 tactical front power unit with a crew of two. Its low profile, cab-forward
configuration permits loading aboard military aircraft with no preparation when coupled to any of the driven RBU. The FPU attaches to the
RBUs through an articulation joint to form an integral articulated 8x8 vehicle with cross-country mobility.
MK48 Length Width Height Curb wgt Fording Depth Max Speed
MK48A1 238 96 102 25,300 lbs 60 55 MPH
Max Max Fuel
Grade Slope Capacity Miles / gal Gallons / hour Range
60% 40 275 gal 2 12.2 300 miles
Rear Body Units
MK 14 / MK14A1 Length 238.5 Width 96 Height 64 Curb wgt 16,000 lbs
Pay load (lbs) On highway 45,000 Off highway 25,000
This is the container hauler of the LVS. It is a tandem axle, all metal, RBU that couples to the FPU. Its primary mission is to transport
International Organization of Standards/American National Standards Institute (ISO/ANSI) containers, standardized cargo, shelters and functional
modules from the beach to unit supply points. It is capable of carrying up to six empty or four full fuel (B2085) or water (B2086) modules and one
pump unit from the SIXCON system. The RBU is equipped with a towing pintle for towing trailers, howitzers and an additional MK14/MK14A1
RBU equipped with a tandem tow lunette extension kit.
MK 15 / MK15A1 Length 240 Width 96 Height 140 Curb wgt 28,000 lbs
Pay load (lbs) On highway 20,000 Off highway 20,000
This RBU combines with the FPU to form a fully equipped wrecker for recovery of disabled vehicles and Material Handling Equipment. It is
primarily used for recovery of LVS vehicles and is capable of lifting and towing the M809, M939, HMMVA2 series of vehicles and MTVR
vehicles. It lifts via an A-frame attached to the rear of the RBU and the associated tow bar. It is equipped with a Material Handling Crane used
for removing power packs and loading equipment and standardized containers. It is also equipped with a knuckle boom crane and a folding
telescoping boom crane. An auxiliary hydraulic circuit in the vehicle provides power for hydraulic tools and can also be used to supply another
RBU with hydraulics. It has an electrically operated hydraulic remote control unit allowing operation of the crane and winch from a distance.
MK 16 / MK16A1 Length 198 Width 96 Height 87 Curb wgt 16,200 lbs
Pay load (lbs) On highway 46,000 Off highway see note.
NOTE: Cross-country mobility is limited by the mobility of the trailer and equipment it tows. This RBU combines with the FPU to form the fifth
wheel semi-trailer variant of the LVS and used to transport semi-trailers equipped with a 3.5-inch diameter kingpin. This RBUs primary mission
is to transport the M870 family of semi-trailers; it can also transport any commercial semi-trailer compatible with the kingpin diameter and fifth
wheel height. It can also transport towed type full trailers and semi-trailers through the use of a towing pintle. A rear winch mounted in front of
the fifth wheel is capable of pulling a combat loaded M1 series tank onto a semi-trailer without using the tanks own power. The winch may also
be used for recovery of other vehicles; the oscillating fifth wheel can be adjusted for highway and cross-country use.
MK18 Length 304.5 Width 96 Height 74.76 Curb wgt 21,800 lbs
M18A1 240 148 20,200
Pay load (lbs) On highway 44,000 Off highway 25,000
The MK18 combined with the FPU forms the ribbon bridge/container transporter LVS. It consists of a modified MK14 RBU with the flat bed
body removed and a lifting gear assembly and a winch assembly mounted on the replacement split/ pivotal bed. (A1 has the flat bed body replaced
by a hook arm container/flatrack lifting gear and winch assemblies) They are capable of self loading and unloading the Ribbon Bridge Set,
Flatrack and ISO/ANSI cargo containers though the use of hydraulic cylinders, pulleys, chains and winches. Prior preparation is not required for
loading and unloading of ISO/ANSI containers. Reconfiguring the RBUs for loading and unloading the Bridge Set requires approximately 25 to
30 minutes to change rollers and brackets. It can be operated by remote control from a distance either in the container or bridge mode.
M1077, MK1077 Length 240 Width 96 Height 62.5 Curb wgt 3,300 lbs
20,200
Pay load (lbs) On highway (M1077 & A1) 33,000 MK1077 32,300
The Palletized Load System (PLS) Flatrack Model M1077/1077A1 is a welded steel flat cargo body with a front wall equipped with a lifting point.
The PLS and is compatible with the MK18A1 RBU. It is equipped with ISO locks, sideboard kits and tie down fasteners to facilitate the
movement of break-bulk materials and ISO containers. A fully loaded flatrack can be self-loaded and self-offload by an MK18A1 without the aid
of additional material handling equipment and by an MK18 equipped with container lifting and loading chains. There are no hydraulic, airs or
electrical connections or equipment on an MK1077. The Palletized Load System (PLS) is also used with the LVSR MKR18.
Table 2-6. Logistics Vehicle System (LVS) family of trucks

45
 d. Tactical Trailers
Type Curb Wt Payload Remarks
M101A3 (2-wh) 1,340-lbs 1,500-lbs Korean War vintage -ton trailer; being replaced by M1102
M116A3 (2-wh) 875-lbs 1,965-lbs Chassis version of the M101 without cargo bed
M1101 (2-wh) 1,460-lbs 1,940-lbs Light Tactical Trailer for older A0/A1 HMMWV; used only by the Army
M1102 (2-wh) 1,460-lbs 2,740-lbs Light Tactical Trailer for heavy A2-series or M1123/1151/1152 HMMWV
LTT-HC (2-wh) 1,175-lbs 3,025-lbs Chassis version of the M1102; no model number issued to date
M105A2 (2-wh) 2,750-lbs 3,000-lbs Legacy trailer due for replacement by the MTVR trailer
M149A2 (2-wh) 2,800-lbs 3,320-lbs 400-gallon water trailer; for replacement by the MTVR trailer
M353 (2-wh) 2,720-lbs 7,000-lbs 3.5-ton chassis trailer; for replacement by the MTVR trailer
AO432 (2-wh) 5,610-lbs N/A Self-contained gas powered lube unit; carries 10gal fuel; burns 1 gph
M1073 (4-wh) 6,640-lbs 10,000-lbs Flatbed lunette trailer able to carry an M1 tank engine or other cargo
MK-38 (4-wh) 9,600-lbs 12,400-lbs HIMARS flatbed re-supply trailer; carries two MLRS pods
MTVR (4-wh) Will include flatbed cargo bed (payload of 12,200# +), water carrier and chassis variants
Engineer Equipment Trailer 11,035-lbs 20,000-lbs 4-wheel flatbed lunette trailer for self-propelled engineer equipment
MK-970 (4-wh) 18,000-lbs? 35,000-lbs Aviation compatible variant of the Army M969A3 refueler semi-trailer.
M870A2 19,600-lbs 80,000-lbs 40-ton semi-trailer for transporting heavy engineer equipment
M870A2E1 23,360-lbs 100,000-lbs Enhanced M870A2 able to carry heavy engineer equipment with armor

Table 2-7. Tactical Trailer Summary

Fuel and Water SIXCON planning factors notes:

Fuel capacity for a SIXCON fuel module is 900 gallons
Diesel fuel weighs approximately 7.7 pounds per gallon; water weighs 8.3 pounds.
An empty SIXCON fuel or water module weighs 2,600#
A full SIXCON fuel module weighs 9,550#; a water module weighs 10,000#
A SIXCON fuel or water pump module weighs 2,300#
The maximum cross-country load for an MTVR is 14,200#

A MK-23/25 MTVR can carry cross-country one full SIXCON fuel or water module and a pump module or two fuel
or water modules with reduced (600 gallon) loads.

e. HMMWV Armor Kits:

Marine Armor Kit (MAK)
M1123 with MAK Armor.
First fielded January 2005
Bolt on zonal armor to doors, side panels, flank kits, tailgate, roof, ballistic
glass
Minimum protection = 1,800 lbs
Maximum protection = 3,400 lbs.
Air conditioning.

HMMWV Fragmentation (Frag) Kits

#1 Is Rocker & pillar armor Adds ~135 lbs
#1a Increased Rocker & pillar protection Adds ?
#2 Protection from IEDs at front wheel well Adds ~100 lbs.
#5 Door over lays (replaces B Kits). Thicker glass Adds ~700 lbs
#6 Counters advanced IEDs & explosively formed penetrators (EFP) Adds ~1,350 lbs
Table 2-8. Vehicle armor kits

f. Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) and Countermine Vehicles are a family of vehicles that were
designed from the ground up to reduce casualties and increase survivability for personnel subjected to mines, IEDs,

46
small arms and Explosively formed penetrators (EFP). As of July 2009 there were 28 variants of MRAPs in 3
categories produced by 5 manufacturers, this section is merely representative. Generic to all: Shock absorbent
seating, v-shaped hull (monocoque) to direct underbody blast away from occupants. Top speed on 0% grade is
65mph, range on level ground at 45mph is 300 miles (minimum). CTIS and run flat tires are good for 30 miles at 30
mph on level road. Will ascend and descend 60% grade at 2 mph. USMC weapons turret will accept the MCTAGS
Category I 4x4 Mine Category II 6x6 Joint
Resistant Utility Vehicles Explosive Ordnance
(MRUV) 7 to 15 tons. 4 pax. Disposal (EOD) Rapid
Mission: support combat Response Vehicle
operations in urban or (JERRV) 14 to 24 ton.
confined spaces. Mounted 10 pax. Missions:
patrols, reconnaissance, convoy lead, troop
communications, command transport, ambulance,
& control. Shown is a explosive ordnance
Cougar manufactured by disposal and combat
Force Protection Industries. engineering. Shown is
MaxxPro Plus
manufactured by International Truck
Category III MRAP All
Specialized Terrain Vehicle
Route (M-ATV). 4 pax
Clearance + gunner. Has
and EOD several variants
vehicles. allowing it to
Shown is a perform CAT I
Buffalo Mine and II missions.
Protected Weight ~ 12 ton.
Clearance Has a higher
Vehicle degree of
(MPCV) mobility and is
(operator less prone to
th
only) with its arm extended. This picture (from 29 Palms) shows rollovers than other MRAP. Fielded in Afghanistan in OCT 2009
the new Claw (an improved Spork*) which was fielded in and is based on Oshkoshs medium tactical vehicle replacement
Afghanistan the week of 23 Aug 2010. The claw will allow the (MTVR) trucks. Only Oshkosh is building the M-ATV and it is
operator to grasp and rotate objects. *for spoon and fork Oshkoshs only MRAP.

Vehicle Mounted Mine Detection (VMMD) System. A related explosion resistant system, not an MRAP, used in route clearance.
Husky [Towing/mine detection vehicle (T/MDV)] (on far left) towing Interim Vehicle Mounted Mine Detection System trailers. The
Husky uses ground penetrating radar (GPR) to scan the ground to a width of 3 meters (depth is classified). The trailers can be used
to detonate pressure sensitive device. They can clear 200 km / day. A detailed explanation of operations can be found here: http://c-
s-i.com/Products/vmmd.asp
MRAP Glossary
AUV Armored Utility Vehicle MEAP MRAP Expedient Armor Program
C2V Command and Control Vehicle MMPV Medium Mine Protect Vehicle
CTIS Central Tire Inflation System MPCV Mine Protected Clearance Vehicle
FMTV Family of medium Tactical Vehicles MRAP Mine Resistant Ambush Protected
GPR Ground Penetrating Radar MRRMV Mine Resistant Recovery and Maintenance
HAGA Heavily Armored Ground Ambulance Vehicle
HEV Hardened Engineer Vehicle MRUV Mine Resistant Utility Vehicle
JERRV Joint EOD Response Vehicle MRV Mine Resistant Vehicle
LSAC Low Signature Armored Cab T/MDV Towing Mine Detecting Vehicle
MATV Military All-Terrain Vehicle VMMD Vehicle Mounted Mine Detection
M-ATV MRAP All Terrain Vehicle

Table 2-9. Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) and Countermine Vehicles

47
2002. Fixed Wing Aircraft
A/C Type and Speed & Weapons Capabilities Combat Radius Comments
Missions Endurance* (representative) & Range#@
* Varies significantly with ordnance load and mission profile. Information from MCWP 3-25
# from Global Security web site
@ Most have unlimited range when refueling. Range then limited by pilot fatigue, ~ 8 hours.
AV-8B Harrier MAX STANDARD AV-8B: AN/APG 65 radar
II+ (= Harrier endurance: GAU-12U 25mm cannon in left 100 nm with 20 enables the Harrier to
Two Plus) 230 KIAS under-fuselage pod fairing minutes loiter launch AIM -120,
(ammunition in right pod fairing). time AMRAAM, AIM-7, and
Offensive Air Maximum AGM-84 missiles.
Support (OAS) 585 KIAS OPTIONAL: Unrefueled
AIM-9M Sidewinder range: 686 nm
Anti-air warfare AIM-120 AMRAAM
(AAW) MK-80 series GP bombs
GBU-10/12/16 LGB
AGM-65F Maverick IR Guided
AGM-65E Maverick Laser-Guided
AGM-84 Harpoon Anti-Ship
CBU-99 cluster munitions
LITENING Targeting pod (for GBU-
12 and GBU-16 bombs.
Napalm
JDAM
F18 MAX STANDARD F/A 18: A&C models are single
A/B Models endurance: M61A1/A2 Vulcan 20mm cannon 200 nm with 30 seat, B&D are two
OAS, AAW, 250 KIAS minutes loiter seaters.
time
OPTIONAL:
C/D Models Maximum All models have
AIM-7 Sparrow
OAS, AAW, Sources vary: Unrefueled AN/AAS-38 FLIR,
AIM-9 Sidewinder
tactical air 1,100 KIAS is range: 2,000+ LITENING II pods, GPS,
AIM-120 AMRAAM
coordinator low end of all. nm NVG.
MK-80 series GP bombs
(airborne)
GBU-10/12/16 LGB
[(TAC(A)), C/D Models also have
AGM-65F Maverick IR Guided
forward air C/D Models an advanced tactical
AGM-65E Maverick Laser-Guided
controller radii: airborne reconnaissance
AGM-84 Harpoon Anti-Ship
(airborne) Fighter: 366 nm systems (ATARS) pod.
CBU-59 cluster munitions
((FAC(A)) Attack: 415 nm
AGM-88 HARM
reconnaissance (Figures from
SLAM/SLAM-ER
(RECCE) Navy Library
Joint stand off weapon (JSOW)
suppression of on-line)
Joint direct attack munition (JDAM)
enemy air defenses
2.75 / 5 Rockets
(SEAD)

EA-6B Prowler MAX# ALQ-99 Tactical jamming System Unrefueled To be replaced by the
endurance: (TJS) range: 850 nm EA-18G which became
Airborne Command 470 KIAS AGM-88 HARM operational SEP09.
and Control (C2). 425 nm mission
Electronic warfare Maximum radius
(EW) and SEAD 560 KIAS
Ferry range: (5
Has Counter IED drop tanks)
capability a 1,747 nm.
highly classified
program.

48
A/C Type and Speed & Weapons Capabilities Combat Radius Comments
Missions Endurance* (representative) & Range#@
EA-18G MAX In surveillance only configuration: Range: 2,000 The EA-18G is slated to
endurance: 2 AIM 120 for self defense nautical mile be the only dedicated
Airborne Electronic 250 knots For stand-off jamming and escort (nm) on EW A/C in the US force.
Attack (AEA) and indicated air jamming missions: interdiction AND, the US is currently
SEAD speed (KIAS) 2 AGM 88 HARM mission w/ 4 x the only western
2 AIM 120 1, 000 bombs & country with such an
The Growler has Maximum 2 AIM 9 missiles A/C it would become the
1,100+ KIAS In a strike configuration: and 2 drop sole source of tactical
more that 90% in
common with the 2 AGM-99 HARM tanks. jamming for NATO air
standard F-18E/F 2 AGM 154 JSOW forces.
Super Hornet. 2 AIM 120 Ferry Range: Quoted from:
Block 1 has up to 3 AN/ALQ 99 5,600 nm Defense Industry Daily
radar jamming pods w/ AN/ALQ- 31 May 2010
218 digital radar warning receiver
and an AN/ALQ communication
countermeasures system:
Block 2 has APG 79 multi-mode
radar w/ passive detection mode
and active radar suppression, ALQ
218 digital radar warning receiver
and ALE 47 countermeasures
dispenser.
KC-130J As of JUNE 2010 the USMC is Tanker Cargo Mission: 3,062
Cruise speed working on developing an armed Mission: 1,000 nm radius
Aerial refueling ~ 348 KIAS KC-130J. Utilizing a Harvest HAWK nm radius
Assault Support (Hercules Airborne Weapons Kit)
Emergency Maximum system which will permit the A/C TANKER: CARGO: The bay has
MEDEVAC 355 KIAS to use a 30mm cannon, HELLFIRE 8,455 gallons 4,500 cu ft of usable
Cargo lift missiles, and precision guided (gals) in wing & volume and can
Special Operation bombs. Test unit is the Marine external tanks accommodate loads up
Support Aerial Refueler Transport Squadron plus 3,600 gals to 37,216 lbs. e.g.
Radio relay (VMGR) 352, San Diego, CA in a specially Two HMMWV, or one
Battlefield configured M113, or 6 pallets or 74
Illumination Deployment of the Harvest HAWK removable litters or 92 passengers
is slated for Summer 2010. internal or 76 combat equipped
Airborne fire fuselage tank. paratroopers.
support pending. More information at web sites Can transfer
SEE Weapons below. fuel at ~ 360
Capability. gal/minute
KC-130 F/R/T. As of June 2010. The last F model was retired in FEB 08. The T model is only in the USMC reserves. Only
operational R models are with the Navys Blue Angels

Harvest
HAWK

SOPGM = stand off precision guided

munitions

LH = long haul

TSS = thermal sight system

Passengers Pallets Combat equipped Troops

0 6 0
Cargo
92 1 76
Configured
KC-130J air land 52 3 33
(example)
delivery of cargo 24 5 16
/ personnel 70 litters w/ 6 attendants 74 litters w/ 2 attendants
Fuselage Tank Passengers Pallets
Configured 40 1
(example) 24 2

49
A/C Type and Speed & Weapons Capabilities Combat Radius Comments
Missions Endurance* (representative) & Range#@
MV-22 Max cruise Some are armed with M240G Take-off & land The MV-22 can carry 24
speed 250 machine gun on the back ramp. vertically(VTOL) combat troops or up to
Assault Support KIAS w/ a payload of 20,000 lbs of internal
(Medium lift) Also some have a remotely 24 troops or cargo or 15,000 lbs of
operated weapon turret, based on 6,000 lbs of external cargo.
the remote guardian system (RGS) cargo at 430 M777 = 7,000 lbs
located in a belly mount with a nm combat
GAU-17 7.62mm minigun. This is range or VTOL M-ATV = 4,000 lbs
provides 360 coverage. w/ a payload of Up armored HMMWV =
8,300 lbs for a ~ 6,000 lbs (depends
range of 220 on the kit)
nm.
Normal Ferry range of over
operating range 2,100 nm.
is 1,100 nm

Table 2-10. General Fixed-wing aircraft capabilities

2003. Rotary Wing Aircraft

NOTE 1: Combat radius/endurance varies with temperature, humidity, wind, A/C configuration, and mission requirements. Specific performance
must be calculated for every mission.
NOTE 2: Primary source is MCWP 3-24 Assault Support. However, it is dated 2004 and doesnt include all the A/C in this table. Information
cross referenced with Global Security and, when possible, manufacturers on-line specification. Whenever sources didnt agree used the most
conservative.
NOTE 3. Many of these aircraft can be used for MEDEVAC, but then would be a HH model.
CH-46E Assault Support Max 2 X GAU 15/A. Ramp mounted M240D 132 nm for an Combat: max of 14 pax with
Sea (medium lift) 145 assault mission aerial gunners
Knight MEDEVAC MEDEVAC: 15 litters and 2
TRAP Endurance 2 attendants
hours Cargo: max 4,000 lbs
external

CH-53E Assault Support Max 2 X GAU 15/A). Ramp mounted M240D. Ramp (unrefueled) 480 55 pax or
Super (medium lift) 150 mounted GAU 21/A nm Medevac: 24 litters.
Stallion MEDEVAC MAX 540 nm Cargo: 20,000 lbs internal
TRAP Ferry 990 nm
Endurance 4
hours
UH-1N Assault Support , Max M240D MG or GAU-16/A .50 cal MG or GAU- MAX 172 nm In pax configuration has
Occasionally C2. CAS, SAR, 130 17/A 7.62mm. Can be armed w/ a variety of fifteen seats (pilot + 14) . In
Iroquois FAC (A), Hydra rockets. (see Hydra below) Endurance 1 hour cargo configuration: internal
More often: MEDEVAC capacity of 220 ft & external
TRAP load of 5,000 lbs can be
Huey
carried.
The UH-1Y Venom is replacing the UH-1N. Mission and armament is very similar but it is faster (cruise ~ 170 KIAS), has greater range (~3 hrs
endurance), greater payload (> 6,000 lbs) a stronger airframe design, advanced electronic warfare and greater self protection than the UH-1N. (US
Navy Technology web site) Noticeable external changes are the new four-bladed all composite, ballistically tolerant main and tail rotors.
M197 20mm cannon, Hydra 70 rockets. (see 265 nm in attack configuration
AH-1W Hydra below), 5 in (127mm) Zuni rockets. 8 Max ~ 300 nm Endurance 2.4 hour
Super CAS
rockets in two 4-round LAU-10D/A launchers. Sample weapons mix: Cannon & 2 AIM-9s, plus
Armed
Cobra 190 TOW Missiles. Up to 8 missiles mounted in two- 2 two shot TOW launchers (8 total) and 1 seven
Recce/Escort
missile launchers. AGM-114 Hellfire Missiles. shot - 70mm rocket pod under each wing (14
Limited anti-air
AND Up to 8. 2 AIM-9 Sidewinder Anti-Aircraft total) OR
defense
Missiles or (See remarks) Cannon & 2 AIM-9s plus 2 nineteen shot - 70mm
AH-1Z rocket pod under each wing (76 total)
Viper OR Much the same as W, but no Zuni or TOWs. (Some web sites did not differentiate between the W & Z.) Compared to the W the
Zulu Cobra Z has new rotor technology, upgraded military avionics, weapons systems, and new electro-optical sensors. It has improved
survivability and can find targets at longer ranges.
The Hydra 70 (70mm or 2.75 inch) is a family of unguided rockets offering a variety of warhead configurations, from smoke and illumination
rounds, to flechettes, submunition carriers, and unitary warheads up to 317 pounds. Are fired from the 7 shot Lau-68C/A or LAU-61D/A (19 shot)
launcher. While they are low cost weapons, and easy to carry in numbers, they are not a very accurate by modern standards, hence a poor choice
for urban warfare if limitations exist on the use of force. However, in April 2010 the NAVY approved production of the Advanced Precision Kill
Weapons System (APKWS). The APKWS has hit an average distance from the center of the laser spot of less than 0.75 meters against a
government specification of 2 meters. This will transforms the standard rockets to smart, highly precise laser-guided missiles. The APKWS will
initially deploy with the AH-1W.

50
The following are US Army helicopters
Cruise M296 .50 cal MG, Hydra rockets, Air-to-Air Max 145 nm Can externally carry up to
OH-58D 80 2,000 lbs via a cargo carrying
Stinger (ATAS) and HELLFIRE missiles. range on internal
Kiowa RECCE, CAS hook or 4 litters or 6 soldiers.
Max The Mast Mounted Sight (MMS) carries day & fuel and 3 hour
Warrior night acquisition sensors and laser rangefinders. endurance
125
2 x 7.62mm Machine Guns on side-cabin pintle
mounts
Assault Support, OPTIONAL: External Stores Support System Optional:
UH-60 M (1) (ESSS) offering up to four hard points. 2 x External 230 gallon fuel
C2 Max range 276
Black Cruise 16 x Hellfire anti-tank missiles tanks
MEDEVAC nm w/o reserve
Hawk 150 Mine Dispersal Systems 2 x External 450 gallon fuel
TRAP 2 x GAU-19 12.7mm Gatling Guns tanks
2 x M240H 7.62mm General Purpose Machine
Guns (GPMG)
M230 30mm cannon Radius 345 nm
Cruise
CAS HELLFIRE missile (up to 16) Ferry range 1,300
150
Hydra missiles (Up to 76) nm Has double- and triple-
AH-64 Long Bow Enchancements: Longer-range weapons accuracy and all-weather/night fighting. redundant aircraft systems to
Apache Detection of objects (moving or stationary) without being detected. Classification and threat- improve survivability for the
prioritization of up to 128 targets in less than a minute. Integrated sensors, networking, and digital aircraft and crew.
communications for situational awareness, management of the battle space in real time, and digital
transmission of images and target locations to joint operations battlefield commanders.
50 nm w/ 16,000
44 pax or 24 litters
Up to 3 pintle mounted, machine guns (1 on load 100 nm w/
Assault Support
CH-47 Cruise loading ramp and 2 at shoulder windows), 30 combat
(heavy lift) Internal or external loads up
Chinook 170 generally 7.62 M240 machine guns. Can use equipped soldiers.
MEDEVAC to 24,000 lbs. Max gross wgt
M134 mini guns Self deploy
50,000
1,000+ nm
Table 2-11. Rotary-Wing aircraft capabilities

Aircraft glossary
AAM air to air missile HMMWV high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle
AAS advanced airborne sensor IR infrared
AAW anti-air warfare JDAM joint direct attack munitions
AGM advanced guided munitions; air-to-ground JSOW joint stand off weapon
missile system KC airborne fuel tanker/cargo
AIM air intercept missile LGB laser-guided bomb
ALQ Not an acronym. MEANS: A = Airborne, L = MEDEVAC medical evacuation
Countermeasures, Q = special purpose MK mark
AMRAAM advanced medium-range air-to-air missile MV Marine Corp variant
AN analog nonsecure nm nautical mile
APG aim point graphic NTS night targeting system
ATARS advanced tactical airborne reconnaissance NVD night vision device
system NVG night vision goggles
AV attack/vertical NWP Navy warfare publication
CAS close air support OAS offensive air support
CBU cluster bomb unit OBS on board system
CH cargo helicopter OH observation helicopter
CV Air Force variant Pax passengers
DASC(A) direct air support center (airborne) POD not an acronym
EA electronic attack RECCE reconnaissance
EW electronic warfare SEAD suppression of enemy air defenses
F/A fighter/attack SLAM stand off land attack missile
FLIR forward looking infrared radar SLAM-ER stand off land attack missile-expanded response
GAU aircraft gun unit, a 30mm anti-tank cannon SOF Special operations forces
GBU guided bomb unit (various sizes exist) TAC(A) tactical air coordinator (airborne)
GP general purpose TJD tactical jamming system
GPS global positioning system TOW tube launched, optically tracked, wire guided
HARM high speed anti-radiation missile UH utility helicopter

Table 2-12. Aircraft Glossary

51
2004. Unmanned Vehicle Systems
a. Unmanned Aerial Systems (UAS)
Although personnel often use the acronym UAV the correct term for an entire system is UAS. A typical system
includes the air vehicle(s), modular mission payloads, ground control stations, launch and recovery equipment, and
communications equipment. The UAS have been combat proven and FY11 budget will have substantial funding for
their acquisition and improvement. The USMCs 4 primary UAS are in the following tables.

WASP III
Category Tier I (BN and below asset) / Micro (MUAV)

Collection Electro Optical (EO) or Infrared (IR)

Specifications Weight 1 lb
Wing span 29 inches
Payload .25 lbs
Range 3.4 miles
Speed ~ 30mph
Endurance: 45 mins
Ceiling up to 1000 feet

Downlink L-Band ((Refers to four different bands of

the electromagnetic spectrum: 40 and
60 GHz (NATO))
Can be expendable. Remarks Hand launched. Autonomous or controlled
flight.
Table 2-13. Unmanned Aerial System WASP

RQ-11B RAVEN
Category Tier I (BN and below asset) / Small (SUAV)

Collection Electro Optical (EO) or Infrared (IR)

Specs Wgt. 4 lbs Wing span 4.5 ft

Payload 1 lb Range 6 miles
Speed 30-60mph
Endurance 60-90 mins (rechargeable battery) 80-
110 mins (single use battery)
Ceiling 1,000 feet

R means reconnaissance and Q means unmanned Downlink L-Band

aircraft system. The 11 refers to it being the 11th of Remarks Replaced the Dragon Eye. (Some remain in
a series unmanned reconnaissance aircraft systems USMC inventory). Hand launched recovered by
deep-stall. Can fly remote controlled or
autonomous.
Table 2-14. Unmanned Aerial System RQ-11B RAVEN

52
 SCAN EAGLE
Category Tier II (Div/Rgt/MEU asset) /
Small Tactical UAV (STUAV)
Collection Electro Optical (EO) and or Infrared (IR)
Specifications Payload 13 lbs Endurance: 15 hours
Wgt. 40 lb Range 55 miles (LOS) Ceiling 16,000 feet
Wing span 10 feet Speed 50 - 80mph

Downlink S-Band The S band ranges from 2 to 4 GHz, crossing

the conventional boundary between UHF and SHF at
3.0 GHz.

Remarks Launched via catapult launcher and flies

(left) Recovering a preprogrammed or operator-initiated missions. For
USMC Scan Eagle from retrieval the aircraft catches a rope suspended from a
its retrieval tower. 50-foot-high tower. The system makes the Scan Eagle
runway-independent

Table 2-15. Unmanned Aerial System SCAN EAGLE

RQ-7 SHADOW
Category Tier III (MEF level asset) / Tactical UAV (TUAV)
Collection Electro Optical (EO) and / or Infrared (IR)
Specifications Wgt. 375 lb Wing span 14 feet Payload 45-60 lbs Range 3.4 miles
Speed ~100mph Endurance: 5 hours Ceiling 15,000 feet
Downlink C-Band. A band of radio frequencies extending from 4 to 8 gigahertz.
Remarks Hydraulically launched and recovered by an arresting system on a runway. It can also take off
from a runway. Replaced RQ-2 Pioneer.
Table 2-16. Unmanned Aerial System RQ-7 SHADOW

Figure 2-1. Launching an RQ-7 Shadow

As an example of on-going UAV development, the RQ-7 is a 200, but its manufacturer also has a 400
and 600 models and more in development. Attempts are underway to arm the Scan Eagle and Shadow.

PREDATOR
An USAF medium altitude, endurance (MALE) UAV that is becoming increasingly important to ground operations.
Officially operational in 2004 and by FEB 2009 the fleet flew over 500,000 hours, 80% of them in combat. First solely a
reconnaissance aircraft (RQ-1A), then an armed version (MQ-1: shown below. The M means multirole), and finally a
hunter-killer variant, the Reaper (MQ-9). The Ms account for 85% of all missions flown and have been used for close
air support. http://defense-update.com/products/p/predator.htm

53
 The MQ-9 Reaper has an operational ceiling of 50,000ft, a
maximum internal payload of 800lb and external payload
over 3,000lb. It can carry up to four Hellfire II anti-armor
missiles and two laser-guided bombs (GBU-12 or EGBU-
12) and 500lb GBU-38 JDAM (joint direct attack munition).
In May 2008, a USAF Reaper successfully test dropped
four Raytheon GBU-49 Enhanced Paveway II 500lb
bombs, which have laser and GPS guidance.

MQ-1 Predator

Wingspan 48.7ft* Length 27ft* Wingspan 66ft Length 36ft Weight Payload 450lb Weight 10,000lb* *
Predator B Endurance 40+ hours / 24 hours on station. http://www.airforce-technology.com/projects/predator
Table 2-17. Unmanned Aerial System PREDATOR

RQ-4 GLOBAL HAWK

A combat proven USAF high altitude, long endurance (HALE) UAV. Operates at altitudes of over 60,000 ft (out of range for most
surface to air missiles) and can provide persistent surveillance over a 40,000 sq mile target area (bigger than Indiana), loitering for more
than 24 hours (endurance record is 33 hours), and flies at over 300mph. The launch and recovery facility can be located up to 1,200
miles away from the intended target area and control facilities can be located just about anywhere in the world with the help of satellites
and ground control stations. Can provide near real-time visibility to ground commanders. Will eventually replace the U-2. Cost per
flight hour U2 = $35,000 vs. Global Hawk $13,000 (SEP 2010)

Table 2-18. Unmanned Aerial System GLOBAL HAWK

b. Unmanned Ground Vehicle Systems

The Armys Future Combat Systems (if development continues) will
eventually field a wide variety some which might be adopted by the
USMC or that technology could be used to develop SUGVs for
specific USMC applications. In addition the USMC is independently
developing its own UGVs. These items are merely an introduction.

Figure 2-2. Dragon Runner

Dragon Runner: Because of its diminutive size (15.5 x 11.25

x 5, 9 lbs) it is referred to as a mini or throw bot (robot). It
is also called a pack bot for its ability to be back packed.
Figure 2-3. Dragon Runner (upgrade) Designed to withstand being thrown over a wall, through a

54
window, up/down a stairway OR from a moving vehicle. If thrown, it is always right side up. It has a video camera, a microphone,
and infrared illuminators and sensors. Top speed 20 mph. Developed by USMC Warfighting Laboratory, Quantico with Carnegie
Mellon Robotics Institute.

Dragon Runner (upgrade): Based on the original USMC design, this one can be configured for surveillance or EOD missions.
Add-on elements can be added without special tools required. Length 16 inches and weight 14 lbs. It is a pack bot, not a throw bot.
The tracks allow it to climb stairs and traverse terrain the original runner could not. The arm will allow it to open doors and
disarm IED(s).

MK3 Remote Ordnance Neutralization System (RONS):

Although it can be used for
surveillance, the primary purpose
of the MK3 is EOD. Cameras
enable the operator to control the
robot from a command center.
The working arm has nearly an 8
foot reach. A shoulder, elbow,
wrist and hand enable the RONS
to use different tools. It can move
on either wheels or tracks. Figure 2-5. Mk-3 RONS working arm
Figure 2-4. Mk-3 RONS
For a 10-slide Naval Surface Warfare Center (NSWC) EOD Technology Division presentation
on UGVs, (October 2008) see: www.flcmidatlantic.org/power_point/2008/robots/Brezina_Robotics_Brief_FirstLink.pdf
See also the Association of Unmanned Vehicle Systems International (AUVSI) Unmanned Systems Program Review 2009 (FEB
09) www.shephard.co.uk/news/1663/auvsi-joint-service-eod-robot-family-concept-outlined/

2005. Marine Air Command and Control System Radars

Max. Max. Ballistic MACCS
3D/2D Frequency Quantity per MEF
Range Altitude Trajectories Agency
AN/TPS-59 (V)3 3D 400 nm 500 K ft. D-band Yes TAOC/EWC 2
AN/TPS-63B 2D 160 nm 40 K ft. D-band No TAOC/EWC 1 (2 in III MEF)
AN/TPS-73 2D 60 nm 60 K ft. E-band No MATCD 4 (2 in III MEF)
AN/TPN-22 3D 10 nm 10 K ft. I-band No MATCD 3

Table 2-19. Marine air command and control radar systems

2006. Marine Air Defense

Air-to-Air/ Data Comm. &
Platform Employment Radar
Surface-to-Air Link Security
F/A- AAW-OAAW - M61A1/A2 Vulcan TADIL-C - APG-73 with increased speed and memory 2 x AN/ARC-210
18A/C/D SEAD (w/HARM) 20mm cannon capacity UHF, VHF,
Hornet OAS-CAS/DAS - AIM-7 Sparrow - AN/AAR-50 thermal imaging navigation set SINCGARS,
(D has TAC)) - AIM-9 Sidewinder - AN/AAS-38 Nite Hawk FLIR targeting pod Have Quick II,
Interdiction - AIM-120 - GEC Cat's Eyes pilot's night vision goggles. KY-67
Night Attack AMRAAM - LITENING II Targeting Pod system
Escort
AV8-B AAW-OAAW - 25mm cannon Digital - APG-65 2 x AN/ARC-182
Harrier SEAD - AIM-7 Sparrow targeting - Digital targeting data link, UHF, VHF, KY-58
II+ OAS-CAS/DAS - AIM-9 Sidewinder data link - Global Positioning System, Upgraded:
Interdiction - AIM-120 - LITENING II Targeting Pod system 2 x AN/ARC-210
Night Attack AMRAAM UHF, VHF,
AS Escort SINCGARS,
Have Quick II.
Avenger Low Altitude Air FIM-92D Stinger GBDL With a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), can use 2 x SINCGARS
Stinger Defense Missile (8 per all Marine sensors and specific sister service (one per MANPAD
MANPAD Avenger fire unit) sensors. Stinger)

Table 2-20. Marine air defense capabilities weapons

55
 Platform Mission Type/Data Link Band Range Altitude
AN/TPS-59 (V)3 Long Range Surveillance (ABT/TBM) GCI 3D PPDL to ADCP L 400 nm 500 K ft.
AN/TPS-63 Medium Range (gap-filler) surveillance (ABT) 2D Remote Radar L 160 nm 60 K ft.
GCI (VHF)
AN/MPQ-62 (CWAR) Close-in low altitude EW and cueing (ABT) GCI 2D GBDL J 30 nm 30 K ft.
AN/UPS-3 (TDAR) Short-range low altitude EW and cueing 2D GBDL L 10 nm 10 K ft.
AN/TPS-73 Air traffic control surveillance radar 2D TADIL-B E 60 nm primary 60 K ft.
120 nm
secondary

Table 2-21. Marine air defense capabilities sensors

Agency Mission C2 System Data Link Comm/Sec Reference

TACC Senior agency of MACCS; ACE Cmdrs MSCS;CTAPS TADIL A, B; HF, UHF, VHF MCWP
CP NATO Link 1 CTT Satcom; Have Quick, 3-25.4
YES
Control intercept of hostile aircraft & TADIL A, B & J;
HF, UHF, VHF; Have MCWP
TAOC missiles; Surveillance & ID of a/c within AN/TYQ-23 ATDL-1
Quick, YES 3-25.7
assigned sector; Tactical ATC NATO Link 1 CTT
Provide EW cueing of TBMs from TADIL L
ADCP AN/TSQ-124 HF, UHF, VHF, YES
AN/TPS-59 via TADIL J PPDL: GBDL
Air Traffic Control BDZ MCWP
MATCD AN/TSQ-131 (CSS) TADIL-B HF, UHF, VHF, YES
3-25.8

Table 2-22. Marine air defense capabilities command and control

2007. Communications Equipment

a. Ground Single-Channel Radio
The Marine Corps has migrated to a new family of single-channel tactical radio systems that feature improved encryption and
text messaging capabilities. These systems are summarized in Table 2-20.
Freq.
R-T* Configuration (power Watts) Freq. Typical Applications
Band
HF to RT 1694 (AM/FM) AN/PRC-150C (20 W) AN/MRC-148 (60/150 W)
Radio line of sight and
VHF (HF/VHF AN/VRC-104 (150W) AN/TRC-209 (60/150W) 1.6 to 60 MHz
beyond/ long range
See Note 1 concerning these
RT-1523E (VHF) AN/PRC-119F (4 W) (note 2) 30-88 MHz (VHF) Radio line of
VHF to RT-1523 (FM) AN/VRC-88 (4 W) AN/VRC-92 (2x50 W) sight and relay or
UHF (VHF/UHF) AN/VRC-89 & 91 (1x4, 1x50W) AN/MRC-145 (2x50 W) retransmission
(note 3) AN/VRC-90 (1x50 W) AN/PRC-119D (4W) SATCOM (PRC-117 &
(AM/FM) AN/PRC-148 (5 W) ** AN/PRC-152 (5W)* VRC-103)
30-512 MHz
(VHF/UHF AN/VRC-111 (20/50 W) ** AN/VRC-110 (50W)*
See Note 4 concerning these
RT-1796 AN/PRC-117F (20 W) (note 6) AN/VRC-103 (50W)
See note 5 concerning these
UHF Commercial AN/PRC-153 (5 W) (note 6) 380-470 MHz Voice to 1 km
*R-T = Receiver-transmitter
Table 2-23. Ground single channel radio capabilities (TM 2000-OD/2C Dec 05), MARCORSYSCOM
Communications and Network Systems (CNS) Programs and Equipment Facts Book April 2009
Notes:
(1) An MRC-148 consists of 2 PRC-150s with a VRC-104 mounted in a HMMWV. A TRC-209 is a transit case with one PRC-150.
(2) The PRC-119F uses the improved RT-1523E which offers a significant size/weight reduction without loss of capability. It weighs only 10
pounds without batteries. Plans are as -119s become unserviceable to replace them with PRC-117s.
(3) This is the SINCGARS (single channel ground and air radio system) family of tactical radios. The models listed are those used by the USMC.
Although new radios are designed to be SINCGARS compatible, these SINCGARS radios are still in service only pending their replacement by
PRC-117/VRC-103 and PRC-148/VRC-111 systems. The MRC-145 is a USMC VRC-92 with a dedicated HMMWV.
(4) The PRC-148 and PRC-152 are competing hand-held radio designs produced by Thales Communications and Harris, respectively. The PRC-
148, used by both Army and USMC has already had several upgrades. Both systems offer capabilities that until recently were only available in

56
larger man-pack radios, including voice and text messaging and built-in encryption, GPS and VHF/UHF transmission. The VRC-111 is a vehicle
mounted receptacle that recharges two PRC-148s and amplifies their signals to 50 Watts. The VRC-110 is the equivalent system for the PRC-152.
(5) The PRC-117 and its amplified vehicle-mounted version (VRC-103) provide line of sight (LOS), SATCOM, Electronic Counter Counter
Measures (ECCM), frequency hopping and compatibility with SINCGARS, Have Quick and all other single channel VHF/UHF systems. It is
compatible with legacy encryption systems and can act as translator between otherwise incompatible radios. The PRC-117G, a data capable radio,
is being fielded hence will be gradually replacing -117F and -119s.
(6) The PRC-153 is a hand-held device with a headset described as a Personal Role Radio (PRR) or Integrated Intra-Squad Radio (IISR). It
transmits data or voice in low intercept probability mode to 1 km.
* The VRC-110 is a dual vehicle mount for two -152s. VRC-112 is a single vehicle mount for one -152.
** The VRC-111 is a dual vehicle mount for two -148s. VRC-113 is a single vehicle mount for one -148.

b. Enhanced Position Locating and Reporting System (EPLRS) AN/VSQ-2C

The Radio Set, Enhanced Position Locating and Reporting System (EPLRS) consists of an EPLRS Network Manager (ENM) and
AN/VSQ-2D(V)1 Data Net radios. The ENM replaces the Enhanced Downsized Net Control Station that was initially fielded with
the EPLRS. The ENM offers increased capability and significantly reduces the system footprint, taking the network management
functionality from a HMMWV mounted system to a laptop. The VSQ-2D radio is based on the UHF (420-450 MHz) frequency-
hopping RT 1720 receiver-transmitter. It can be configured for man-pack (16 Watts power) or vehicle use (up to 100 Watts) and
has a six-mile ground-to-ground range (with LOS) or a ground-to-air range of up to 200 miles. EPLRS provides a dedicated,
secure, and mobile data communications network for MAGTF C4I users besides a data backbone for several Tactical Data Systems
and connects them into a seamless/integrated exchange. It also provides automated friendly Position Location Information and
navigation information via GPS based systems. EPLRS enables data exchange in unicast and multicast modes and is compatible
with virtually all standard terminal devices (DACT, TCO, TDN server, and AFATDS) via standard internet protocol. Within the
Army and Marine Corps EPLRS is the digital backbone for the ground forces that are linked via the Lower Tactical Internet. The
Navy's primary use of EPLRS is to provide over-the-horizon location and tracking of amphibious assault and logistics craft in
support of Marine operations. (http://www.marcorsyscom.usmc.mil/sites/cins/CNS/Tactical%20Radios/EPLRS.html)

c. AN/MRC-142 Multi-Channel Radio

Figure 2-6. AN/MRC-142A UHF multi-channel radio

AN/MRC-142A (A1955) AN/MRC-142B (A1954) AN/MRC-142C (A0153)

Band I (UHF) 225 - 400 MHz
Frequency Range 1350 - 1850 MHz (UHF) 1350 - 1850 MHz (UHF)
Band III (UHF) 1350 - 2290 MHz
Bandwidth 125 KHz 125 KHz 125 KHz
256, 512, 768, 1024, 1536, 1544, 2048, 4096,
Channel Rate 144, 288 & 576 kbps 576 kbps
8192, 12288, 13504, 14336, 16384 or 16640 kbps
Low: 300 Miliwatts (25 dbm) Low: 300 Miliwatts (25 dbm)
Output Power 50 Watts
High: 3 Watts (35 dbm) High: 3 Watts (35 dbm)
Operating Range Up to 30 miles LOS 30 miles Up to 30 miles LOS
Analog: 300 3400 Hz Analog: 300 3400 Hz
Orderwire Channel AEOW, DVOW at kbps
Digital: 16 kbps Digital: 16 kbps
Transmission Types Voice/data, wideband, digital Voice/data, wideband, digital Voice/data, wideband, digital
AS-4255 (2) 50 ft AS-4255 (2) 50 ft; TEAMS (1) 112 ft mounted
Antenna AS-4255 (2) 50 ft
SMAK Antenna (1) 100 ft. on HMMWV or M-1102 trailer
Integrated multi-channel system with two radios providing two-way secure digital wideband transmission; mounted on a HMMWV. As of
FY10 the Marine Corps will have 381 AN/MRC-142A (+28 on order) and 10 AN/MRC-142B (+19 on order). The AN/MRC-142B is designed
Remarks
for ship to shore LOS communication and includes an RF amplifier and SMAK antenna. The MRC-142C, which offers additional band width
and an increased frequency spectrum, will replace MRC-142A units on a one for one basis. Any MRC-142 must be stationary when in use.
Table 2-24. AN/MRC-142 multi-channel radio (TM-2000-OD/2C)

57
d. AN/TRC-170(V)5 Multi-Channel Radio (Assets belong to the CE and the ACE)
Operating Mode Line of sight (LOS) or troposcatter mode
Frequency Range 4.4 5.0 GHz
Bandwidth 3.5 or 7 MHz
Data Rates 2048, 1536, 1024, 512, 256 or 128 kbps
Output Power 1 KW
Operating Range Up to 100 miles
Number of channels 32 full duplex
Transmission Types Voice (digital or analog); data (digital or quasi analog)
Remarks Cryptographic and multiplexer systems are housed in a modified S-250/G shelter (transportable in an M1097A2
HMMWV); system must be stationary to operate. The antenna group could be carried in a second HMMWV.
Table 2-25. AN/TRC-170 multi-channel radio (TM-2000-OD/2C)

e. AN/GRC-239 Tropo/Satellite Support Radio (TSSR)

Operating Mode Directional Line of sight (LOS)
Frequency Range 14.4 15.25 GHz
Bandwidth 1 MHz
Data Rates 72 4608 Kbps or a balanced NRZ group at 6.144 Mbps
Orderwire Analog 8.5 MHz subcarrier
Operating Range 10 25 miles
Antennas 1 ft dish used under 10 miles; 2 ft dish used between 10 to 25 miles
Transmission Types Digital Voice/data
Remarks The TSSR serves a multi-channel transmission communications system for MAGTFs of all sizes. The TSSR is a great
substitute for long cable runs or augments existing GMF satellite terminals.
Table 2-26. AN/GRC-239 Tropo/Satellite Support Radio (TSSR)

f. AN/TSC-191 Wireless Point-To- Point Link, Version D (WPPL-D)

The WPPL-D systems are currently only issued to Marine Expeditionary Units (MEU) but anticipated future acquisition to other
parts of the MAGTF.

g. SHF SATCOM Terminal Systems

These systems are self-contained GMF (Ground Mobile Forces) super high frequency (SHF) tactical communication terminals. The
AN/TSC-93C has recently been upgraded with an enhanced tactical satellite signal processor that improves data throughput. It also
has CV-FOM (for conversions from copper to fiber or vice versa), GPS, uninterruptible power supply and replacement FM order-
wire. The AN/TSC-93 operates from an S-280 van carried on an MTVR with the antenna and power supply on trailers. The
AN/TSC-85 operated from an S-250 van on an M1097A2 or M1165 heavy HMMWV. In a MEF both systems are used by the CE.

AN/TSC-85D(V)1* (TSC-93D is replacement) AN/TSC-93D

Weight 7,225 lbs 6,000 lbs
Dimensions 174 x 87 x 83.38 87 x 79 x 70
Transmit Frequency Range SHF 7900 8400 MHz SHF 7900 8400 MHz
Transmit Bandwidth 40 MHz 40 MHz
Power Output 500 Watts (nominal) 500 Watts (nominal)
Receive Frequency Range 7,250 7,750 MHz 7,225 7,725 MHz
Receive Bandwidth 500 MHz 500 MHz
Antenna AS-3036/TSC AS-3036/TSC
Channel width 32 kbs 16-32 kbs
TRI-TAC Group (Digital Trunk Antenna size) 4 1
Table 2-27. SATCOM Terminal Capabilities (TM2000-OD/2C)

h. Lightweight Multi-Band Satellite Terminal (LMST), AN/USC-65(V)1 and (V)2

The Lightweight Multi-band Satellite Terminal (LSMT), AN/USC-65 is a Super High Frequency (SHF), transportable, multi-band
satellite ground terminal consisting of a 2.5-meter antenna and a group of transit cases that contain and protect the electronic
equipment. The AN/USC-65(V)1 Hub provides up to seven simultaneous communication paths using two antennae. The (V)2
Mini-Hub provides the minimum set of communication interfaces, allowing up to four simultaneous communication paths using
one antenna. The system can be configured as a hub or a mini-hub terminal in a satellite communications network. The LMST
provides full duplex communications in the SHF spectrum in the military X-band and commercial C and Ku-bands. Simplex

58
receive only in the Ka-band is also supported. The LMST (V) 1 provides two complete communication paths for support of a single
antenna with redundant operations or dual antennae with no redundancy. A MEF CE will have two AN/USC-65(V)1 and six (V)2.
Three AN/USC-65(V)2 will support the ACE.
The system is transportable by truck, rail, ship, aircraft or helicopter or as netted cargo. It operates in the SHF spectrum including
the C-band (3.625-6.425 GHz), X-band (7.25-8.4 GHz), Ku-band (10.95-14.5 GHz) and Ka-band (receive only) (20.2-21.2 GHz).
Shipping weight on 463L Pallet System 9,735 lbs
Weight in HMMWV-mounted configuration with antenna 7,482 lbs
Technical Technology Digital
Characteristics
Orientation/Range Satellite/SATCOM
for AN/USC-65
Power 1-400 Watts (adjustable)
(V)1 or (V)2
Operational Mode Voice, Data
Encryption KG-94A, KY-57, KY-99
Table 2-28. AN/USC-65(V)1 and (V)2 Lightweight multi-band satellite terminal (LSMT) (TM 2000-OD/2C)

i. PHOENIX Tactical SHF Satellite Terminal (TSST), AN/TSC-156

Figure 2-7. PHOENIX TSST
The AN/TSC-156 Phoenix is a Quad band Tactical Super High Frequency satellite
communications terminal mounted on an M1152A1 vehicular platform and is capable of
operating over military X-and Ka-band satellites and C- and Ku-band over commercial
satellites. The Phoenix supports one network consisting of up to four ETSSP multiplexed
full-duplex links and is configured to operate with either the systems internal antenna in
C-, X-, Ku, and Ka-band, or with the AS-4429/TSC Large Aperture Antenna (LAA) in
X-band, but not simultaneously.
The Phoenix operates in a world-wide military tactical environment and provides SHF
SATCOM transmission of baseband signals at the MARFOR/MEF HQ for termination at
MSC HQ, DISN STEP/teleport, naval vessels, and Services or JTF HQs. It provides
SHF SATCOM transmissions to any size MAGTF and can be deployed as a "first in"
communications resource.

j. Extremely High Frequency Satellite Communications Terminal AN/TSC-154

Secure, Mobile Anti-Jam Reliable Tactical Terminal (SMART-T)
The Satellite Communications Terminal AN/TSC-154 Secure, Mobile Anti-Jam Reliable Tactical Terminal (SMART-T) is a
Military Strategic, Tactical and Relay (MILSTAR) satellite-compatible communications terminal transported on an M1097A2
HMMWV. It allows long-haul tactical communications for Digital Transmission Groups (DTG), Digital Subscriber Voice
Terminals (DSVT) and individual encrypted subscribers at data rates from 75 bps to1.544 Mbps. SMART-T is compact, utilizing
an offset-fed Gregorian antenna with a 4.5 foot composite reflector. The components present a low profile when mounted on the
systems all-steel pallet. SMART-T is designed to operate in natural weather under battlefield conditions and to withstand
biological and chemical attacks, Radio Frequency (RF) signal jamming, detection and electro-magnetic pulse. A typical MEF uses
eight (two with the CE, two with division HQ and one per infantry or artillery regiment; not normally with the ACE or MLG).
Frequency Range Transmit: EHF; Receive: SHF
Aggregate Data Rates Up to 2,048 bps in Low Data Rate (LDR) mode or up to 2,048 kbps (four
pipes at 512k per pipe) in Medium Data Rate (MDR) mode
Orientation & Distance SATCOM
Technical Operational Mode Voice/Data
Characteristics Encryption Secret, TS/SCI
Power Output 1 to 25 Watts
Power Supply MEP-003A or MEP-803A generator
Operating Weight & 8,600 lbs; 193 x 85 x 143 (84 high for shipping); 113.92 square feet;
Dimensions 1,357.6 cubic feet (797.5 for shipping)
Table 2-29. AN/TSC-154 SMART-T Satellite Communication Terminal (TM 2000-OD/2C Rev D)

k. Global Broadcast Service (GBS) Transportable Ground Receiver Suite (TGRS)

AN/TSR 9
GBS is a smart-push/user-pull SATCOM system that provides large volumes of information to deployed, or garrison forces. The
AN/TSR-9 receives and disseminates GBS broadcasts at up to 23 Mbps, and is capable of processing both classified and
unclassified information products such as: Imagery, Intelligence, Video (NTSC and Digital), Theater message traffic, Joint and
service-unique news, Weather and MWR programming.

59
The AN/TSR-9 satisfies a Marine Corps requirement for a global, high-throughput, one-way flow of voice, video, and data to
Marine Forces either deployed or in garrison. GBS provides the capability to quickly disseminate large amounts of information to
MAGTF, and is deployed with MAGTF(s) as a "first in" wideband communications resource. The TGRS will operate continuously,
and while it does not require 24 hour-a-day manning, the TGRS requires the presence of a trained operator at certain critical times,
to include initial installation and software configuration.

l. Secure Wide Area Network (SWAN)

SWAN Family of Systems (FoS) are an integrated commercial off the shelf (COTS) solution utilizing VSAT and networking
components. SWAN is an OTP communications asset and can be set up in 30 minutes or less. SWAN fills a void of Beyond Line-
Of-Sight (BLOS) capability within the MAGTF communications infrastructure. SWAN-D comes in three versions; small, medium
and trailer mounted. It consists of a RF Package and a network package. Version 2 and 3 can be used with a Master Reference
Terminal (The network hub). The program of record is VSAT which will not include the Network package. However, since the
DDS-M (Also a Network Package) will not be fielded until 2010. Operates in Ku commercial band and will soon be upgraded to a
Ka band.

m. Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal (SPIRIT) II

AN/TSQ-190(V)2
The Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal (SPIRIT) II provides dedicated communications for
intelligence information products to MAGTF command elements. It is a mobile SHF satellite communication system that uses
commercial or military satellites to receive, transmit and process secure voice, data, video-conferencing and facsimile
communications. It provides 14 channels of digital voice or data (SCI or GENSER) with a maximum aggregate rate of 1.544
Mbps. LAN communications are supported by two separate Ethernet LANs (SCI and GENSER). Routers provide access to the
SIPRNET, JWICS, National Security PLATFORM and DSCS. These capabilities provide dedicated communications for
coordinating intelligence operations and analysis. Normally there is one per MEF CE.
One heavy HMMWV (M1097A2 or M1165), One HMMWV also tows the 2.4M AS-4429/TSC
carries a primary heavy shelter (PHS) and lightweight high gain X-band antenna (on an M116
Hardware another carries a spare equipment and trailer) and the other tows a 10 kW 3-phase
maintenance (SEM) shelter. generator.
Technology Digital
Spectrum C-Band, Ku-Band, X-Band
Technical Orientation & Distance SATCOM (includes AN/PSC-5 satellite phone)
Characteristics Operational Mode Voice/Data
Encryption Secret and TS/SCI

Table 2-30. Trojan Special Purpose Integrated Remote Intelligence Terminal (SPIRIT) II (TM 2000-OD/2C Rev D)

n. Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal - Lightweight

Integrated Telecommunications Equipment (Trojan SPIRIT-LITE) AN/TSQ-226(V)1
The Trojan Special Purpose Intelligence Remote Integrated Terminal Lightweight Integrated Telecommunications Equipment
(Trojan SPIRIT-LITE) is a super high frequency (SHF) dual band multi-channel satellite communications terminal utilizing a 2.4
meter antenna. It offers the essentials of the AN/TSQ-190 Trojan SPIRIT II but fits into 21 carrying cases (11 of them for support
equipment, including the power supply) weighing 1,300 pounds and takes up only 103 cubic feet of space. It is transportable by air,
HMMWV or by any commercial truck that can handle a payload of at least 1,400 pounds. The ACE and the GCE normally employ
one system each.
Technology Digital
Spectrum C-Band, Ku-Band System offers enhanced
Technical Orientation & Distance SATCOM voice, video and data
Characteristics Operational Mode Voice/Data communications at 64 kbps
Encryption Secret and TS/SCI to 1.544 Mbps.
Power 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Table 2-31. Trojan Special Purpose Integrated Remote Intelligence Terminal Lightweight Integrated
Telecommunications Equipment (Trojan SPIRIT-LITE) AN/TSQ-226(V)1 (TM 2000-OD/2C Rev D)

o. MAGTF Modular Command and Control Center

From MCWP 3-40.3, 3 MAGTF Communications Systems, January 2010, p. 4-4 As Marine Corps operations in Afghanistan,
Iraq, and the January 2005 post-tsunami operations in Southeast Asia demonstrated, there is a growing need to transform MAGTF

60
C2, warfighting, and other business functions into a network centric environment. This is necessary to implement electronic and
streamlined processes that allow decision to be made rapidly, transparently, and across disparate platforms, systems and domains
A key to obtaining these abilities is the AN/TSQ-239(V)2 Combat Operations Center (COC), command information Systems-C2
facilities. The AN/TSQ-239 is a combat operations center (COC) system made up of common components designed to be modular,
scalable and supportable. It supports a Marine Corps- wide standard for COC(s).
It is designed to provide mobile, modular command and control centres across the span of tactical command from battalion to
divisional level. It provides tactical data and C2 systems to the headquarters, including manoeuvre, fires, intelligence, logistics and
administration. The COC is designed for rapid deployment, includes a network of workstations supporting C2 applications, and has
large-screen displays that can take input from any workstation. The system has been upgraded to incorporate the Command Post of
the Future (CPOF) C2 application (see separate entry). Workspaces are pre-wired for quick set-up. The system integrates non-
secure, secret voice and data communications, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) capabilities and networked servers. Multiple
networks (SIPRNET, NIPRNET, shipboard, coalition and Access Net{TM}) are used to provide security and accessibility among
interoperable users. Network Distribution. The SIPRNET has two expandable rings, NIPRNET and Coalition one each, all with a
10 Gbyte fibre backbone. The scaleable, modular system consists of three principle elements: Tents (dome and oblong) Trailers:
GETT: Generator (20 KW), ECU (Environmental Control Unit), Tent Operational Trailer (OT). Common to CapSets II, III, IV.
Contains communications and servers. Transit cases. Designed to contain all C2 components (routers, servers, switches, laptops);
manportable two-man lift; fits through ship hatch. There are currently three variants, known as Capability Sets (CapSet), which are
designed for different levels of command in the Ground or Air Combat Element (G/ACE) of the Marine Air/Ground Task Force
(MAGTF). These are: AN/TSQ-239(V) 2 - CapSet IIAN/TSQ-239(V) 3 - CapSet IIIAN/TSQ-239(V) 4 - CapSet IV.
http://www.janes.com/articles/Janes-C4I-Systems/AN-TSQ-239-V-Combat-Operations-Center-COC-United-States.html May
2010

A seven page General Dynamics brochure available here: http://www.gdc4s.com/documents/COC%20Brochure7.pdf

A general configuration follows;
Notes:
(1) A Generator ECU (Environmental Control Unit) Tent (GET) trailer is the chassis version of the M1102 1.25-ton light tactical trailer (LTT) carrying
a 120,000 BTU COTS ECU with a 50-gallon fuel tank, a 21 KW tactically quiet COTS generator set and a Base-X model 305 tent.
(2) An operational trailer is a M1102 LTT pre-wired and pre-loaded with hardware, servers, power supply etc. for both NIPRNET and SIPRNET.
(3) Base-X Tent Model 305 is a 25 x 18 foot frame tent. The 8D36 is a 37 x 31 foot extended dome frame tent (carried on two GET trailers) that
serves as a hub to connect 305 tents in the CSI or CSII configurations

CS III GETT

CS IV CS II

GETT OT

OT OT GETT

Figure 2-8. AN/TSQ-239 COC configurations

p. AN/TSQ-227 Digital Technical Control (DTC) van

The DTC provides a technical control function for the MAGTF
Commander. It is the central management facility, terminating all
terrestrial links and switch circuits for major commands. Data
circuits and miscellaneous subscriber circuits are interconnected,
as required. The DTC consists of an S-280 C/G shelter that is
modified to accommodate COTS, GOTS, and NDI technical
control and ancillary equipment. The DTC permits the technical
controller to exercise effective operational control over the
communications links, trunks, and groups within a deployed
Marine Corps network and is located at the Marine Force
Component, MEF, and MSC HQ C2 nodes. Within a MAGTF
node, the DTC will connect to multiple transmission systems such Figure 2-9. Digital Technical Control (DTC) van
as satellite systems, multi-channel systems, single channel radio

61
systems, and cable. For the MEF users perspective, the DTC provides the multiplexing and link management of switching traffic,
voice/circuit switches, data switches, and dedicated circuits.

q. MAGTF Telephone/Message Switches

New Switch Echelon Employed Equipment Location Terminal Devices
AN/TTC-62 DEOS MEF/MSC/Regiment/Group
STU-III, STE
AN/TTC-63 RSAM MEF/MSC/Regiment/Group or Battalion
DSVT, DNVT
IGX REDCOM
MEF/MSC DTC
Compact Digital Switch (CDS) DSVT, DNVT
Table 2-32. MAGTF telephone/message systems (1991+)

r. MAGTF Multiplexers
Multiplexers Location Employed Equipment Location
Promina 800E MEF/MSC DTC
AN/TTQ-5 DITS MEF/MSC/Regt
FCC-100(V)7/8/9 MEF/MSC/Regt/Battalion DTC; MRC-142A/B
TAC 300 MEF/MSC/Regt/Battalion MRC-142C
Promina 800 MEF/MSC/Regt Standalone
Promina 400 MEF/MSC/Regt Standalone
AN/TSQ-227 Digital technical control van (DTC) MEF/MARFOR/MSC
Table 2-33. MAGTF Multiplexers

s. MAGTF Data/Messaging
Data Location Employed Equipment Location
AN/TSQ-222 (Gateway) MEF/MSC 1 for 1 with DTC
AN/TSQ-228 (Data Distribution System (DDS) MEF/MSC/Regt/Battalion
Defense Message Switching MEF/MSC
Table 2-34. MAGTF data/messaging systems

Name Symbol Frequency Wavelength Applications

High Shortwave, amateur radio, citizens' band radio, skywave
HF 3-30 MHz 10-100 m
Frequency propagation
FM broadcasting, amateur radio, broadcast television,
Very high frequency VHF 30-300 MHz 1-10 m
aviation, GPR, MRI
Broadcast television, amateur radio, mobile telephones,
Ultra high
UHF 300 3000 MHz 10100 cm cordless telephones, wireless networking, remote
Frequency
keyless entry for automobiles, microwave ovens, GPR
Super High Wireless networking, satellite links, amateur radio,
SHF 3 - 30 GHz 1-10 cm
frequency microwave links, satellite television, door openers
Microwave data links, radio astronomy, amateur radio,
Extremely High
EHF 30 300 GHz 1-10 mm remote sensing, advanced weapons systems, advanced
frequency
security scanning
Table 2-35. Frequency ranges

62
2008. Amphibious Ships
Home- Max. Troop Usable Well Deck Aircraft
Type Name Weapons Water
port Speed Capacity Cargo Space Capacity Capacity
Cleveland (LPD-7) San Diego 709 11,800 sq. ft. 168 x 50 2 helicopter 100 K
Dubuque (LPD-8) San Diego Marines for vehicles Enough for spots gal
Amphibious Denver (LPD-9) Sasebo JA 21 kts Can surge 1 LCAC or up to four 2 CIWS storage
Transport Dock by 176 38,300 cu. ft. 1 LCU or CH-46 60 K
Ponce (LPD-15) Norfolk Marines for cargo 20 AAV equivalents gal/day
Mission: Transport San Antonio Norfolk
and land Marines,
their equipment and (LPD-17)
supplies by embarked New Orleans (LPD- San Diego 702 24,600 sq. 188 x 50 2 helicopter 2 MK-31
landing craft or
18) Marines feet for Enough for landing spots RAM
amphibious vehicles
Can surge vehicles 2 LCAC or Can operate 2 30mm
augmented by Mesa Verde Norfolk 21 kts
helicopters in by up to 1 LCU or up to four MK-46
(LPD-19)
amphibious assault. 95 36,000 cu. ft. 4 LCM-8 CH-46 2 .50-cal
Green Bay San Diego Marines for cargo or 20? AAV equivalents MK-26
(LPD-20)
New York (LPD-21) Norfolk
Whidbey Island Little
(LSD-41) Creek
Germantown (LSD- San Diego
42)
Ft. McHenry Little
(LSD-43) Creek 402 440 x 50
Gunston Hall (LSD- Little Marines 11,800 sq ft
Dock Landing Two 2 25-mm
44) Creek for vehicles Enough for
Ship 20+ helicopter MK-38
Comstock San Diego Can surge 4 LCAC or
kts landing
Mission: Support US (LSD-45) by up to 5,100 cu ft for 3 LCU
Navy and Marine spots 2 CIWS
Corps amphibious Tortuga Sasebo 102 cargo 21 LCM or
operations including (LSD-46) Japan Marines 64 AAV
landings via
Landing Craft Air Rushmore San Diego
Cushion (LCAC), (LSD-47)
conventional landing
craft and helicopters, Ashland (LSD-48) Little Creek
upon a hostile shore. Harpers Ferry Sasebo JA
.
(LSD-49)
Carter Hall Little 402
(LSD-50) Creek 16,900 sq ft 180 x 50
Marines Two 2 25-mm
for vehicles
Oak Hill Little 20+ Can surge helicopter MK-38
Enough for
(LSD-51) Creek kts by up to landing
50,700 cu ft 2 LCAC or 1
Pearl Harbor San Diego 102 spots 2 CIWS
for cargo LCU
(LSD-52) Marines
Wasp (LHD-1) Norfolk
Essex (LHD-2) Sasebo
Amphibious Japan
Assault Ship Kearsarge (LHD-3) Norfolk 1,893
42 CH-46
Boxer (LHD-4) San Diego Marines 322 x 50
Mission: Primary 20,000 sq ft equivalents
2 NSSMS
landing ships for major Bataan (LHD-5) Norfolk for vehicles 5 AV-8B (1)
portions of the assault 22 kts Can surge Enough for 3 CIWS
Bonhomme San Diego 101,000 cu ft
echelons of a Marine by up to 3 LCAC or 2 8 .50-cal
Amphibious Force and Richard (LHD-6) for cargo 9 helicopter
211 LCU
Marine Amphibious spots
Brigade. Secondary Iwo Jima Norfolk Marines
role, using AV-8B (LHD-7)
Harrier and anti-
submarine helicopters Makin Island San Diego
perform sea control (LHD-8)
and limited power
projection missions. Nassau Norfolk 1,903 28,730 sq ft 9 CH-53 2 NSSMS
(LHA-4) Marines; for vehicles 249 x 76 12 CH-46 3 5/54 140K
25 kts
Peleliu San Diego no surge 116,900 cu ft 1 LCAC (2) 6 AV-8B (1) 1 CIWS gal/day
(LHA-5) capacity for cargo 9 helo spots 6 20mm
Amphibious Blue Ridge Yokosuka 3,015 sq ft for Blue Ridge 2
Command Ship (LCC-19) Japan 209 vehicles and Whitney
Mission: Provide C2 in 23 kts N/A 2 CIWS
major amphibious
Mt. Whitney Gaeta Italy Marines 2,175 cu ft for 1 SH-60
operations. (LCC-20) cargo
NOTES: (1) actual mix depends on mission assigned; (2) island structure prevents embarkation of more than one LCAC.

Table 2-36. Amphibious Ships

63
2009. Landing Craft
Type Ship Class Well Deck Capacity Type Ship Class Well Deck Capacity
LHD Wasp 3 LCAC, 2 LCU, 6 LCM-8 or 12 LCM-6 LSD-41 Whidbey Island 4 LCAC, 3 LCU, 10 LCM-8 or 10 LCM-6
LHA Tarawa 1 LCAC, 4 LCU, 7 LCM-8 or 17 LCM-6 LSD-49 Harpers Ferry 2 LCAC, 1 LCU, 4 LCM-8 or 9 LCM-6
LPD Austin 1 LCAC, 1 LCU, 4 LCM-8 or 9 LCM-6
NOTE: Planning speed for an amphibious task force is 12-13 knots.
Table 2-37. Amphibious ship well deck capacities
Cargo deck is 67 x 27.
Can load 1 M1A1 tank and 2 HMMWV, 4 LAV, or equivalent trucks.
With personnel transport module can haul 120 passengers
LCAC Payload capacity is 60 tons.
Max speed is 40 knots (planning speed is 30 knots).
Offload time is ~15 minutes.
Reload time is ~ 45 minutes.
Cargo deck is 12.5 x 25.
Can load 2 M1A1 tank, or 60-70 tons of large vehicles, or 400 combat loaded troops.
LCU-1646 Class Payload capacity is 180 tons.
Man speed is 12 knots.
Turnaround time (offload and reload) is roughly twice the time for an LCAC.
LCM-8 Cargo deck is 14 x 42. Payload capacity is 60tons - Max speed is 9 knots
(steel hull) Can load 4 HMMWV, or 3 HMMWV and 1 LAV, or 150 combat loaded troops.
Cargo deck is 17 x 42.
LCM-8 Can load 1 M1A1, or 60-70 tons of large vehicles, or 200 combat loaded troops.
(aluminum hull) Payload capacity is 180 tons.
Max speed is 12 knots.
Cargo deck is 37 x 11.
Can load an MTVR, or 2 HMMWV, or 1 LAV, or 80 combat loaded troops.
LCM-6
Payload capacity is 34 tons.
Max speed is 10 knots.

Table 2-38. Landing craft capabilities

Note: LCU and LCM require beach gradients of 1:20 to 1:60. Steeper slopes may cause broaching, while flatter slopes may cause grounding out.
Range 45 NM
Speed 25 knots
Availability Day One 52 Day Four 43
LCAC per Day Day Two 49 Day Five 40
(from a total of 54) Day Three 46
Operating Time 16 hours per day per LCAC
Time per Sortie Vehicle load - 6 hours, 8 minutes Cargo load 8 hours 36 minutes
Sorties per Day for Vehicles 2.6 Sorties per LCAC per day Total = 104 LCAC sorties @ 40 LCAC per day
Sorties per Day for Cargo 1.86 Sorties per LCAC per day Total = 74 LCAC sorties @ 40 LCAC per day
Personnel Capacity 180 troops with personnel transport module (only 24 troops without the PTM)
Short Tons per Sortie 25 STONS or 50 pallets (500-lbs per pallet)
12 HMMWV per sortie 4 M923 per sortie
Vehicles per Sortie 4 LAV per sortie 2 M923 5-Ton Trucks,2 M198 or M777
2 AAV per sortie, 1 M1A1 per sortie Howitzers and 2 HMMWV per sortie
Transit (45 NM @ 25 kts) x 2 = 216 min Beach Operations:
Well deck Operations: 30 min for vehicles
Time Details 62 min for vehicles 120 min for cargo
120 min for cargo 60 min for friction
Total = 368 min (for vehicles) or 516 min (for cargo)
Infantry
325 HMMWV (all types) = 28 sorties 10 MTVR Trucks = 3 sorties
Regiment
Unit LCAC 58 M1A1 tanks = 58 sorties 10 LVS combinations = 5 sorties
Tank
Sortie 8 M88A2 ARV = 8 sorties 50 MTVR trucks = 13 sorties
Battalion
Requirements 4 M60A1 Bridge layers = 4 sorties 108 HMMWV = 9 sorties
144 LAV = 36 sorties 42 MTVR trucks = 11 sorties
LAR Battalion
5 LVS combinations = 3 sorties 37 HMMWV = 4 sorties
Table 2-39. Landing craft air cushion capabilities

64
2010. Navy Surface ships
Primary Air Search Weapon ID Data Link Comm. Aviation
Type
Role Radar Systems Capabilities Capabilities Capabilities Capabilities
Aircraft Carrier Fixed-wing air AN/SPS-48E NSSMS Rotating IFF TADIL-A HF, EHF Fighter squadrons
(CV/CVN) operations (3D) CIWS ACDS Block 0/1 TADIL-J UHF, SHF (4) SH60F: Plane
AN/SPS-49 (CV Auto ID) TADIL-C SATCOM guard, dipping sonar,
(2D) SEC, CEC ADSI SAR
Guided Missile Battle group Primary: TLAM, SM2 Blk 2/3 Mast-mounted TADIL-A HF, EHF 2 SH60B: OTH
Cruiser (CG) air defense SPY-1B (3D) VL ASROC phased array IFF TADIL-J UHF targeting, SAR
Secondary: HARPOON (Backup IFF TADIL-C SATCOM
AN/SPS-49 2 5 54, CIWS mounted on DNMFL
(2D) SLQ 32 V3 SPS-49.), CEC HAWK Link
Guided Missile Air defense SPY-1B (3D) TLAM, SM2 Blk 2/3 Mast-mounted TADIL-A HF, EHF Flight deck support
Destroyer (DDG) VL ASROC phased array IFF TADIL-J UHF landing and
HARPOON (Backup IFF TADIL-C SATCOM refueling
2 5 54, CIWS mounted on DNMFL helicopters
SLQ 32 V3 SPS-49.) HAWK Link
Guided Missile Surveillance AN/SPS-49 76-mm Rotating IFF TADIL-A HF 2 SH60B: OTH
Frigate (FFG) (2D) CIWS mounted on HAWK Link UHF targeting, SAR
CAS Search SLQ 32 V3 SPS-49 SATCOM
Amphibious SPS-52 NSSMS Rotating IFF TADIL-A HF, EHF Helicopters
Helicopter SPS-40B 3 5 54 NTDS TADIL-J UHF Harriers
Assault Ship Sea/air CIWS TADIL-C SATCOM
(LHA) landing
Force
Amphibious assault SPS-48C NSSMS Rotating IFF TADIL-A HF, EHF Helicopters
Helicopter Dock SPS-52 CIWS NTDS TADIL-J UHF Harriers
Ship (LHD) SPS-49 CEC TADIL-C SATCOM
Amphibious C2 CIWS Rotating IFF TADIL-A HF, EHF
Command Ship NTDS TADIL-J UHF
(LCC) TADIL-C SATCOM
Other Amphibious Helicopter Landing Platform Ships (LPH) Amphibious Transport Dock (LPD) Dock Landing Ship (LSD)
ships (not detailed) Iwo Jima Class San Antonio Class Whidbey & Harper Ferry Class
Littoral Combat Ships (LCS). A completely new class of ship. The USS Freedom, first of the Freedom Class, was commissioned 8 FEB 2008
and was followed by USS Independence of the Independence Class at her commissioning on 16 JAN 2010.
Class Hull Length Beam Draft Top speed Range (at 18 knots/ 21 mph)

Freedom Monohull 378 ft 57 ft 12.7 ft 52 mph/45 knots 3,500 nmi

Independence Trimaran 418 ft 104 ft 13 ft 51 mph/44 knots 4,300 nmi
Comment: A limitation is the LCS is meant to operate autonomously for only 21 days. The ships fortes are speed and shallow draft.
Standard Armament: 1 x 57mm gun (220 rpm, range 9 miles/ 14 km), 2 Aircraft carried: 2 x MH-60 Seahawks and 2 MQ-8 Fire Scouts OR 1
x .50 MG (4 on Independence). Can carry many others MH-60 and 3 MQ-8s.
Unique to LCS are their mission modules which include packages for mine warfare (MIW), Anti-submarine warfare (ASW) and anti-surface warfare
(SUW). They can include a wide variety of sensors of MIW and ASW. Examples follow:
MINE Warfare (note) Anti-submarine warfare (note)
AN/AES-1 Airborne Laser Mine Detection System (ALMDS) Spartan Unmanned Surface Vehicle (USV)
AN/ALQ-220 Organic Airborne and Surface Influence Sweep (OASIS) AN/AQ-22 Airborne Low Frequency Sonar (ALFS)
AN/AQS-20 Mine hunting Sonar System Advance Deployable System (ADS) of underwater Sonar
NOTE: For details of these systems, and more, go to www.militaryaerospace.com and search for New Ship takes lead in countermine and anti-
submarine warfare. Ship would carry only one module at any one time, and must include the specialist crew required to be totally operational.
The LCS may become the most prolific ship in the Navy plans are to procure 50+ more. The keel for USS Fort Worth LCS 3 (Freedom Class) was
laid 13 JUL 09 and the keel for the USS Coronado LCS 4 (Independence Class) was laid 14 DEC 09. Both are due to enter the fleet in 2012.

Table 2-40. Navy surface ships

2011. Navy Air Defense
a. Navy Platform Air Defense
Platform Strengths Weaknesses
ANSPY-1 multifunction, phased array, fire control quality radar. The system is designed for blue water and littoral
operations however AN/SPY-1 configuration must be
Very rapid transition from SPY-1 silent to full radiate and full
modified to look above the terrain to avoid causing
situational awareness.
excessive false targets from land clutter. These
Fast reaction, fully/semiautomatic combat systems. Initial detection
configuration changes may increase ship
to first missile movement in less than 10 sec.
susceptibility to low and fast targets.
Salvo rate of less than 2 sec per launcher (CG-52 and above with
Once a target is engaged and the initial salvo fired,
CG-47/ MK 41 VLS)
WCS will not allow the target to be reengaged
DDG-51 Mix of multiple SM.
(second salvo) until a kill evaluation has been
Class Max field of fire and min blockage zones completed.
Must illuminate target only for a short duration prior to intercept. AN/SPY-1 antenna height is lower than the AN/SPS-
AN/SPY-1 radar variable sensitivity feature allowing radar 49 radar system resulting in reduced radar horizon.
sensitivity to be tailored to threat RCS, environment, and tactical DDG-51 Class are not equipped with a AN/SPS-49
situation. radar (no secondary air search radar)
Weapons & ID doctrine capable of automatic and semiautomatic Must hold an AN/SPY-1 track. Cannot engage on a
response/action. remote or AN/SPS-49 track unless equipped with

65
 Platform Strengths Weaknesses
CEC.
FFG-7 Effective against (2 or less) medium & high altitude ASM. Long range air search radar is 2D.
Class Improved 2D air search radar. Track capacity is limited.
Adequate low-flyer detection source Mk 23 TAS/NSSMS FCR in
sector search.
Good long range 3D air search radar.
CV/CVN Self-defense shipboard weapon systems only.
Good overland/near land detection system (AN/SPS-48E and
AN/SPS-49 with AN/SYS-2)
Quick reaction modes.
Radar antenna height provides detection of low altitude targets out
E2-C
Hawkeye
to the radar horizon. Limited concurrent, warfare area mission support
Optimum over water detection and tracking capability. (because of crew tasking).
(E2-D to Large airborne target detection capability out to 350nm. Degraded detection capability over land.
replace Extensive IFF capability. Limited on-station time (3 to 4 hrs).
E2-C
JTIDS type 2 No link simulcast capability
FY11)
SATCOM capability.
Multi-mission aircraft. Lack of IFF interrogator.
F/A-18
Medium PRF radar with good over land performance. Limitation of one-man crew in high threat
Hornet
NCTR/BVR capability environment

Table 2-41. Navy platform air defense capabilities

b. Navy Aviation Air Defense Weapons

Aircraft Air Search Weapon Data Link Communication
Primary Role ID Capabilities Combat Range
Type Radar Systems Capabilities Capabilities
Detection range: IFF (M1-4) HF, UHF
Air surveillance TADIL-A
E-2C over 300nm; Limited ES UHF/VHF 4 hours on
and aircraft APS-145 TADIL-J
(Blk II) over capability, SATCOM station
control TADIL-C
2,000 tracks CID CAP Have Quick
AIM-7, AIM-9 NCTR VHF
F-18C/D Air intercept, 575 nm with in-
APG-65 AIM-120 (Electronic ID) TADIL-C UHF
And E/F strike flight refueling
AGM-84, 20 mm IFF Have Quick
AGM-84 Rotating IFF HF
SEAD/Jamming 600 nm with in-
EA-6B APS-130 ALQ-99, USQ-113 mounted on TADIL-C UHF/VHF
EW intercept flight refueling
ALQ-218 SPS-49 Have Quick
AGM-84, AIM-120 Rotating IFF HF, INCANS* 575 mm with
SEAD/Jamming APG-79
ALQ-99, JSOW mounted on TADIL-C UHF/VHF in-flight
F-18G EW intercept AESA
ALQ-218 SPS-49 Have Quick refueling
Will replace the EA-6B; *Allows voice communication while jamming
HF, UHF 2,300 nm
EW Rotating IFF
EP-3 APS-116 N/A TADIL-A UHF/VHF (3 hours on
Communications NTDS
SATCOM station)
Table 2-42. Navy aviation air defense weapons
2012. Army Air Defense
Characteristics Patriot (MIM-104) SLAMRAAM/AIM-120 Avenger/Stinger
Targets (air) Airplanes, helicopters, UAV Airplanes, helicopters, UAV Airplanes, helicopters, UAV
Targets (missile) TBM, TASM, Cruise missiles Cruise missiles Cruise missiles
Sensor Range 75 km AN/MPQ-64 Sentinel radar; relies on a BMC4I battle management
100 km AN/MPQ-53
(planning) system for fire data; Avenger has onboard visual or FLIR systems
Number of launchers 4 batteries per Patriot or AMD 24 fire units per AMD or 36 per MAMD battalion (fire units may be Avenger
per organization bn; 6 launchers per battery or SLAMRAAM; SLAMRAAM to replace Avenger on a one for one basis)
Number of missiles 6 AIM-120 (or AIM-9) per SLAMRAAM
16 per PAC-3 (MIM-104F) 8 Stinger per Avenger fire unit
per launcher fire unit (HMMWV mounted)
Coverage angle of Track = 120 degrees
360 degrees out to 75 km
supporting radar Search = 90 degrees
Engagement range 40 km (AIM-120 AMRAAM) or 4 km (Stinger)
70 km (PAC-3)
(planning) 10 km (AIM-9 Sidewinder) 2 km (.50-cal)
Table 2-43. Army air defense capabilities

66
2013. Maritime Prepositioning Force
MPSRON-1 MPSRON-2 MPSRON-3
Square Feet 845,895 1, 035,878 989,089
Containers [20 Equivalent Units (TEU)] 1,705 2,351 2,271
Bulk JP-5 (gal) 2.48 M 14.17 M 4.20 M
Fuel MOGAS (gal) 24,000 28,000 28,000
Bulk Water (gal) 287,822 449,982 447,194
Water productivity (gal/day) 87,184 132,500 128,337
Table 2-44. Maritime Prepositioning Force capabilities

MPSRON-1 MPSRON-2 MPSRON-3

Flag Ship(s) USNS BOBO USNS BUTTON USNS LUMMUS
Alternate Flag Ship(s) USNS OBREGON USNS KOCAK USNS PLESS
USNS SISLER USNS LOPEZ USNS WILLIAMS
USNS SEAY USNS DAHL
USNS GIANELLA
MPF (E) USNS WHEAT USNS STOCKHAM USNS MARTIN
Time to Al Jubail 18 days 9 days 22 days
Time to Korea 32 days 16 days 6 days
Notes: Steaming times are at economical speed (13-kts.). Ships are capable of 17-20-kts, if required. MPSRON-1 steam times assume
use of the Suez Canal.
Table 2-45. Maritime Prepositioning Force ships and steaming times

2014. Joint Support Systems

The joint surveillance, target attack radar system (JSTARS) is an airborne multi-mode radar surveillance/target acquisition system
that detects and tracks moving or fixed targets for attack by standoff weapons and aircraft. JSTARS provides target information for
pairing attack aircraft and standoff weapons with selected targets. The system can be cued by other reconnaissance, surveillance,
and target acquisition systems; responds rapidly to worldwide contingencies; and provides surveillance and attack information in
all light and near-all-weather conditions. It reports target location, size, direction, rate, and type. It uses a Boeing E-8C aircraft
equipped with a phased-array antenna in a conformal belly pod that can operate both as a synthetic aperture side-looking radar to
detect fixed surface targets or as a Doppler radar to detect moving vehicles on a time sharing basis. The E-8C is equipped for
secure communications using HAVE QUICK for anti-jam communications with Army units. The system includes Army AN/TSQ-
132 truck-mounted ground station modules and data link connectivity for transmitting raw radar data to the Army ground stations.
It can send targeting information to Air Force controllers on the ground via Joint Tactical Information Distribution System (JTIDS)
and/or directly to JTIDS equipped tactical aircraft.
JTIDS is a joint Service program that provides high-capacity, anti jam protected data distribution and voice communications to
tactical forces in air defense, defensive counter-air, and anti-air warfare areas. JTIDS is a communications, navigation, and
identification system intended to exchange surveillance and command and control (C2) information among various C2 platforms
and weapons platforms to enhance varied missions of each of the Services. JTIDS provides the Army, Navy, Air Force, and Marine
components with a secure, jam-resistant, high capacity data link communications system for use in a tactical combat environment.
JTIDS is the communications component of the tactical digital information link (TADIL) designated Link-16, and is synonymous
with the TADIL J message standard. The JTIDS family of terminals (Class 2 and 2H for the Air Force, Navy and Marine Corps;
and 2M for Army) is a joint development program which employs time division multiple access, and spread spectrum techniques.
JTIDS permits rapid and secure exchange of essential command control, and status information with all terminals in the tactical
theater. Host platforms (i.e. E-3, E-8, F-15, RIVET JOINT, ABCCC, MAOC, and MCE) program and budget for JTIDS production
terminals. The JTIDS provides an information distribution system for selected US Air Force and Navy Airborne Warning And
Control System (AWACS) and tactical units. It features secure, jam resistant, low probability of exploitation tactical data and voice
communications. It will provide precise tactical air navigation, relative navigation, and identification, and will have additional
capabilities of common grid navigation. It will also use automatic relay capability inherent in the long range communications
equipment. The system will be interoperable among the Services and NATO/Allied users equipped with JTIDS or the NATO
multifunctional information distribution system. Anti-jam protection is achieved through frequency hopping, spread spectrum
techniques. It allows sensor data exchange between platforms in real-time and provides integrated communications, relative
navigation and identification, combat status and targeting information. It will be employed in air defense, defensive counter-air, and
anti-air warfare mission areas. All terminals provide data communication in the LINK 16 data format.

67
2015. Intelligence, Reconnaissance and Surveillance Assets
a. Ground Reconnaissance
Asset Operational Types of Sensors and Comments
Altitude or Range Information Max. Collection (Missions, Roles, Type Reporting Produced,
Collected Range Sources)
Missions/Roles: Teams can also implant unattended
ground sensors for the Ground Sensor Platoon (GSP)
7x50 binoculars
(1 per MEF). Radio equipment includes HF, VHF,
10x scope (on the
4-6 days mission; Missions include surveillance and reconnaissance
USMCR Force M40A5 rifle)
range dependent HUMINT and limited Direct Action (DA). Teams trained for
Recon M49 - 20x spotting
upon terrain, climate, MASINT operations in all environments. All teams can insert by
Company scope
and team training air (military free-fall or static line, rappel, or fast-rope)
Max observation
surface craft, SCUBA or closed-circuit, or by foot.
range 4 Km
Reports: SPOT, SALUTE, NATO formatted, or others
as Div/MEF may require.
Missions/Roles: Teams can also implant unattended
7x50 binoculars ground sensors for the SCAMP Platoon (MEF HQ).
10x scope (on the Radio equipment includes HF, VHF, SHF, and UHF.
4-6 days mission;
M40A5 rifle) Missions include surveillance and reconnaissance.
USMC Division range dependent HUMINT
M49 - 20x spotting Teams trained or operations in all environments. All
Recon Battalion upon terrain, climate, MASINT
scope teams can insert by air (limited parachute, rappel, or
and team training
Max observation fast-rope) surface craft, limited SCUBA, or by foot.
range 4 Km Reports: SPOT, SALUTE, NATO formatted, or others
as Div/MEF may require.
Missions/Roles: Teams can conduct special
reconnaissance (SR) in support of tactical,
operational, or strategic goals. SR Teams can be
7x50 binoculars
reassigned FID, DA or other SOF-related missions as
Unlimited; dependent 10x scope (on the
required. Teams can be assigned to the fleet
USN Sea, Air, upon availability of M40A5 rifle)
HUMINT commander or to the JSOTF (as part of the JTF).
Land (SEAL) re-supply by cache M49 - 20x spotting
Technical Teams trained for operations in all environments. All
Teams sites, aircraft, or scope
SEALS can be inserted by parachute (static line or
other forces Max observation
military free fall), SCUBA or closed-circuit, surface
range 4 Km
craft, or by foot.
Reports: SPOT, SALUTE, NATO, or other
CCDR/SFOB may require.
Missions/Roles: In SR role, SF teams can conduct
7x50 binoculars SR in support of tactical, operational, or strategic
Unlimited; dependent 10x scope (on the goals. SR Teams can be reassigned FID, DA or other
USA Special upon availability of M24 rifle) SOF-related missions as required. Teams trained for
HUMINT
Forces Recon re-supply by cache M49 - 20x spotting operations in all environments. All teams can insert by
Technical
Teams sites, aircraft, or scope static line parachute, select teams can insert by
other forces Max observation SCUBA or HALO/HAHO.
range 4 Km Reports: SPOT, SALUTE, NATO, or other
CCDR/SFOB may require.
Missions/Roles: In SR role, teams can conduct SR in
Combined support of tactical, operational, or strategic goals. SR
Unconventional Teams can be reassigned to support environmental
Unlimited; dependent
Warfare Task As required reconnaissance, armed reconnaissance, coastal
upon availability of
Force (CUWTF) HUMINT patrol and interdiction, target and threat assessments,
re-supply by cache
Technical Max observation counterterrorism, unconventional warfare missions,
sites, aircraft, or
available only range 4 Km and post-strike reconnaissance. Typically CUWTF
other forces
for operations in teams will work for the CFC and are comprised of
Korea U.S. SF and Rangers, ROK SF and SEALS.
Reports: As CFC may require.
Table 2-46. Ground reconnaissance assets

68
b. Unmanned Aircraft Systems
Asset Operational Types of Sensors and Comments
Altitude or Range Information Max. Collection (Missions, Roles, Type Reporting Produced, Sources)
Collected Range
Endurance 45 mins Missions/Roles: Employed at BN and below. Autonomous
Wasp III Max Ceiling 1,000 feet or controlled. Launched by hand or slingshot.
IMINT EO or IR
MUAV Range 3.4 miles Reports: SPOT/SALUTE reports, imagery.
Speed ~ 30mph
Mission/Roles: Employed by VMU squadrons. GPS-ground
Endurance: 10 hours
IMINT track navigation. Pneumatic Wedge shaped launcher with
Scan Max ceiling: 1,000 ft
Communication EO or IR Skyhook 50 ft pole recovery system.
Eagle Range: 32 km
Relay Reports: IPIR, SPOTREP, RECCEEXREP, INTREP, plus
Speed: 64 mph
imagery clips via SIPR Net or video tapes
Missions/Roles: Brigade combat team and below. Puts
Endurance: 80 minutes
UAV capabilities into the hands of platoon leaders and
RQ-11A Max ceiling: 15,000 ft EO/IR
IMINT company commanders. Provides recon and IED search for
Raven Range: 10 km CCD
patrols and flies the perimeter of camps.
Speed: 60 mph
Reports: IPIR, SPOTREP.
Missions/Roles: Small size (3 man crew) and fast dash
Endurance: 6-8 hrs speed make this ideal UAV where quick response is
RQ-7 Max ceiling: 15,000 ft required. Brigade Division and higher. (replaced Pioneer)
IMINT EO/EW payloads
Shadow Range: 125 km Reports: Likely IPIR, SPOTREP, RECCEEXREP, INTREP,
Speed: 92 mph plus imagery clips via SIPR Net or video tapes, once fully
developed.
Missions/Roles: Short range Army UAV supporting
commanders from echelons above corps to ACR. It can
provide real time imagery intelligence, artillery adjustment,
Endurance: 8+ hrs
battle damage assessment, reconnaissance and
RQ-5A Max ceiling: 15,000 ft IMINT FLIR
surveillance, target acquisition and battlefield observation.
Hunter Range: 300 km (IR & FLIR) CCD
An RQ-5B also exists; both it and the RQ-5A are only in
Speed: 80 mph
limited use and will be replaced by the Predator.
Reports: Likely IPIR, SPOTREP, RECCEEXREP, INTREP,
plus imagery clips via SIPR Net or video tapes.
Endurance: >8 hrs Missions/Roles: Navy Operational level UAV. Growth
SAR/EO/IR
RQ-8B Max ceiling: 20,000 ft planned for a UAV communications node.
IMINT Laser rangefinder
Fire Range: 241 km Reports: Unknown.
and designator
Scout Speed: 144 mph
The MQ-8B deployed aboard the USS McInerney (FFG-8) in SEP 09 in a counter-drug role aboard
Missions/Roles: Operational and national level UAV. Will
Endurance: 36 hrs
RQ-4A/B eventually replace the U- 2. Has EO/IR and SAR with
Max ceiling: 65,000 ft SAR/MIT
Global IMINT growth planned for a UAV communications node or
Range: 21,720 km EO/IR
Hawk surrogate satellite, MTI, and SIGINT payloads.
Speed: 403 mph
Reports: Unknown.
Max endurance: 40 hrs EO/IR - TESAR SAR Missions/Roles: Long endurance, medium altitude UAV
RQ-1 Typical sortie: 12-20 hrs (MQ-1) & Lynx SAR for ISR missions. Surveillance imagery from SAR, CCD
MQ-1B Operating alt: 25,000 ft (MQ-9) all weather and a FLIR capability for real time IMINT to front line
Predator Speed: 135 mph (max) surveillance; soldier, the operational commander or worldwide in real
84 mph (cruise) *2 color high- time via SATCOM links. Equipped with UHF and VHF
resolution DTV radio link, C-band line-of-sight data link with range of
Max endurance: 40 hrs television & image 150 nm and UHF and Ku-band satellite data links. The Air
MQ-1C IMINT
Operating alt: 29,000 ft intensified TV (low Force re-designated the RQ-1B as the MQ-1B after
Sky Armed Recon
Range: 643 km light) with a variable equipping it to carry two AGM-114 Hellfire missiles. The
Warrior
Speed: 155 mph (max) zoom & 955-mm Army chose to develop the MQ-1C into an extended range
spotter. multi-purpose UAS for IOC FY09; it can carry up to four
AGM-114 Hellfire missiles.
MQ-9 Reaper SAR (synthetic Reports: Unknown but likely IPIR, SPOT reports,
Endurance: 24 hrs (max); 16 hrs aperture radar) - INTREP. RECCEEXREP, supplemented with imagery
(normal) GMTI (Ground clips via SIPR Net or VHS video tapes.
Operating alt: 50,000 ft Moving target Missions/Roles: Hunter/Killer: six hard-points able to
Speed: 276 mph (max) 230 mph Indicator) & AN/ASS- carry (collectively) up to 3,750# of AGM-114 Hellfire
(cruise) Armed Recon 52 Multispectral missiles (up to 14), GBU-12 Paveway II and GBU-38 joint
targeting system direct attack munitions (JDAM).
(MTS) (MQ-1C) Reports: See RQ-1/MQ-1
Type Designators: R = reconnaissance; M = multi-role (can carry ordnance); Q = unmanned
Table 2-47. Unmanned aircraft system assets

69
c. Fixed-Wing Aircraft
Asset Operational Types of Info Sensors & Max. Comments
Altitude or Range Collected Collection Range (Missions, Roles, Type Reporting Produced, Sources)
Missions/Roles: The LITENING II combines night and day
Max Speed: 460 mph targeting and navigation capabilities in a single, low-cost, high-
performance pod. It enables the aircraft to detect and identify
Ceiling: 33,100 ft LITENING II targeting
AV-8B Various ground targets for extremely accurate delivery of both
Range: 685 miles and recon pods conventional and precision-guided weapons, and an intelligence,
Loiter time: 60 min. surveillance and reconnaissance (ISR) capability.
Reports: IMINT Reporting including ROVER 3.
Mission/Roles: Electronic Reconnaissance. The EA-6B's ALQ-99
Max Speed: 754 mph
ALQ-99 On-board OBS collects, records and updates tactical electronic order of
EA-6B Ceiling: 37,600 ft ELINT
System (OBS) battle (EOB) data that it can disseminate through the C2 system
Range: 850 miles while airborne. Reports: Via TERPES.
ATARS, LITENING Missions/Roles: The LITENING II combines night and day
Max Speed: 1,127 Targeting & Recon targeting and navigation capabilities in a single, low-cost, high-
EF-18G performance pod. It enables the aircraft to detect and identify
mph Pods - FLIR, CCD
(various; ground targets for extremely accurate delivery of both
Ceiling: 50,000 ft Various TV, laser tracker,
USN
Range: 330 miles infrared laser marker conventional and precision-guided weapons, and an intelligence,
only) surveillance and reconnaissance (ISR) capability.
combat & range-finder, KB-
Reports: IMINT Reporting including ROVER 3.
35 strike camera
Missions/Roles: A land-based, long range ASW patrol aircraft
that can provide Ku band packet MUX data links for video and
Max Speed: 466 mph
P-3C other sensor data to surface forces, and
Ceiling: 28,300 ft Various Various
Orion Command, Control, Communications, Computers, and
Range: 5,600 miles Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance (C4ISR)
capabilities. P8A Poseidon will replace; Reports: Unknown.
Max Speed: 530 mph Missions/Roles: An electronic warfare and recon aircraft utilizing
EP-3E state-of-the-art electronic surveillance equipment for its primary
Ceiling: 29,000 ft Various Classified
Aries II mission. Reports: Unknown.
Range: 3,000 miles
Missions/Roles: Delivers PSYOPS and civil affairs broadcasts in
standard AM, FM, HF, TV and military communications bands.
Missions are flown at maximum altitude to ensure optimum
EC-130 Max Speed: 344 mph
propagation patterns. Typical mission (day or night) consists of a
Senior Ceiling: 33,000 ft Various Various
single-ship orbit offset from the target audience. Secondary
Hunter Range: 2,050 miles missions include command and control (C2) communications
countermeasures (C3CM) and limited intelligence gathering.
Reports: Unknown
Missions/Roles: GR/CS provides near real-time SIGINT and
targeting information to tactical commanders throughout the corps
area with emphasis on deep battle and follow-on forces attack
support. It collects selected low, mid, and high band radio signals,
RC-12D Max Speed: 287 mph
identifies/classifies them, determines source locations, and
Guard Ceiling: 30,000 ft SIGINT Classified
provides near real-time reporting to tactical commanders. GR/CS
Rail Range: 1,200 miles targeting accuracy is also provided by the ELINT system.
Automated addressing to CTT field terminals provides automated
message distribution to tactical commanders in near real time.
Reports: SIGINT and ELINT.
Missions/Roles: The Rivet Joint's modifications are primarily
related to its on-board sensor suite, which allows the mission crew
RC-135V Max Speed: 500 mph to detect, identify and geo-locate signals throughout the
SIGINT
Rivet Ceiling: 44,000 ft Various electromagnetic spectrum. The mission crew can then forward
COMINT gathered information in a variety of formats to a wide range of
Joint Range: 3,900 miles
consumers via Rivet Joint's extensive communications suite.
Reports: SIGINT and COMINT reporting.
Missions/Roles: JSTARS is an airborne battle management and
command and control platform that conducts ground surveillance
to develop an understanding of the enemy situation and to support
Max Speed: 639 mph Ground
E-8 WAS/MTI attack operations and targeting that contributes to the delay,
Ceiling: 42,000 ft Surveillance
JSTARS SAR/FTI disruption, and destruction of enemy forces. These functions
Range: 150 miles MTI and SAR support the primary mission of Joint STARS which is to provide
dedicated support of ground commanders requirements.
Reports: N/A
E-3 Max Speed: 530 mph Missions/Roles: Surveillance of aircraft in low, medium, and high
Sentry Ceiling: 41,000 ft N/A Various altitude, C3 in all weather.
(AWACS) Range: 5,747 miles Reports: N/A
Missions/Roles: The U-2 provides continuous day or night, high
Max Speed: 528 mph SIGINT
altitude, all weather, stand-off surveillance of a battle area in direct
U-2 Ceiling: 90,000 ft IMINT Classified
support of U.S. and allied ground and air forces. In addition to
Range: 2,200 ~4,600 (wet-film or high altitude reconnaissance, the aircraft performs air sampling

70
 Asset Operational Types of Info Sensors & Max. Comments
Altitude or Range Collected Collection Range (Missions, Roles, Type Reporting Produced, Sources)
miles EO) flights and, occasionally, search and rescue missions. Reports:
N/A
Missions/Roles: Was developed by Southern Command after
RC-7B Max Speed: 270 mph SIGINT requirement for a manned SIGINT and IMINT. Current version
Crazy Max Ceiling: 21,000 ft IMINT Various (RC-7B) designated the ARL-M, conducts IMINT, SIGINT, as well
Hawk Range: 770 miles MTI-SAR as provides MTI SAR data.
Reports: TACREPs, KL, SPOT reports, VPN reporting.
AN/APY-8 Lynx
Cruise speed: ground-looking radar Missions/Roles: A manned sensor platform fitted with belly
C-12R
325mph and other electro- pods carrying camera turrets and synthetic aperture radar. An
Horned Various
Ceiling: 30,000+ ft optical sensors for ARMS the Aerial Reconnaissance Multi-Sensor platform.
Owl Recent missions include route reconnaissance in search of IEDs
Range: 3,640 km long range day and
night viewing
King Air Cruise speed:
USMC ordered 6 on 10 July 2008 to replace the C12. VMR Det
350 ER 300mph
TBD TBD Belle Chasse, Louisiana received two (C12W) in AUG 2010 for
(extended Ceiling: 35,000 ft evaluation.
range) Range 1764 nm
Table 2-48. Fixed-Wing aircraft assets

d. Ground or Sea Sensors

Asset Altitude Types of Sensors and Comments
or Information Max. Collection (Missions, Roles, Type Reporting Produced, Sources)
Range Collected Range
Mission/Roles: Continuous all-weather location determination and
Sensor activity monitoring of within a given area of operation.
Control & Sub-Functions: Graphic depiction of objects through thermal graphic
Management Tactical Remote optics; classification by air-delivered sensors (i.e., tracked vehicle,
ELINT
Platoon N/A Sensor System rotary-winged aircraft etc.) and hand deployed ground sensors.
MASINT
(SCAMP) (TRSS) Equipment: Each Sensor Mobile Monitor System (SMMS) has two
stations each with an IBM laptop loaded with monitoring software.
MEF CE Reports: SALUTE or SENREP (Sensor Reports); positive ID and
classification of detected activity; strip charts and image displays.
Radio Bn Mission/Roles: ESM/EA in support of the MAGTF. Can be lifted via
MAGTF EW SIGINT CH-53E under ideal conditions; however the weight is very close to
N/A Classified
Supt System HUMINT NATOPS limits. MEWSS is a specially configured LAV.
(MEWSS) Reports: SALUTE, SPOT, KL, or others as required.
Mission/Roles: ESM/EA in support of the MAGTF. Can conduct
Radio Bn
SIGINT ESM/EA in support of advance force or MSPF/R&S operations. Can
Radio Recon N/A Classified
HUMINT insert via helicopter (parachute/rappel/ fast rope), surface craft, or foot.
Team (RRT)
Reports: SALUTE, SPOT, KL, or others as required.
Radio Bn Mission/Roles: ESM/EA in support of the MAGTF. Has capability to
SIGINT
SIGINT Supt N/A Classified insert via helicopter (rappel/fast rope), surface craft, or foot.
HUMINT
Team (SST) Reports: SALUTE, SPOT, KL, or others as required.
Table 2-49. Ground or sea sensors

e. Ground Surveillance Radars

Ground Surveillance Radar (AN/PPS-5D)
Description: Man-portable battlefield . Characteristics
surveillance radar used for detection and
Man-portable -82 lbs
audio classification of personnel,
wheeled and tracked vehicles. Cost Detects and Audio classifies
effective alternative for replacing the o Personnel to 10 km
aging AN/PPS systems. Utilizes o Wheeled and tracked Vehicles to 20
frequency agility and reduced power km
output for Low Probability of Detection
(LPD) by enemy forces. Figure 2-10. AN/PPS-5D Ground Surveillance
Radar

Ground Surveillance Radar (AN/PPS-5E)

71
Description: Man-portable battlefield Characteristics
surveillance radar used for detection and Man-portable - 78 lbs
audio classification of personnel, wheeled Detects and Audio classifies
and tracked vehicles. o Personnel to 165 m to 10 Km
Enhancement to AN/PPS-5D systems. o Wheeled and tracked Vehicles fm
Utilizes frequency agility and reduced power 165 m to 30 Km
output for Low Probability of Detection (LPD)
by enemy forces. Solid-state electronics and Figure 2-12. AN/PPS-5E Ground Surveillance
built-test for troubleshooting and
sustainment.
Radar

Surveillance Radar (SR) Hawk

Detection Range: 10 m to 10 Km for personnel;

10 m to 30 km for vehicles.
Accurate to within 10 meters.

FROM the Manufacturer: (July 2010) This radar is currently deployed OCONUS
in support of the CENTCOM mission.

Figure 2-13. Surveillance Radar Hawk

Table 2-50. Ground Surveillance Radars

f. Persistent Surveillance System

The Rapid Aerostat Initial Deployment (RAID)* System is a
combination of cameras and surveillance equipment located on towers,
masts, or aerostats - one of which is the Tethered Aerostat Radar System
(TARS) shown at left. They can be equipped with a variety of sensor
suites (electro optical/ Infrared {EO/IR}, radar, acoustic detectors) to
provide unprecedented elevated persistent surveillance (EPS). A
standard 17m aerostat can carry a < 200 lb payload to 1,000. They are
also available in 32m and 38m and consequently carry heavier payloads.
*Part of the USMC Persistent Surveillance System.

Aerostats differ from blimps in that blimps are powered and aerostats are not. They are tethered to the ground via a
cable that provides communication to and from the balloon and electrical power to it. Helium filled and because they
are not highly pressurized bullets wont burst them. In fact they remain buoyant for hours after multiple punctures
and can be repaired on site. They can remain airborne for five days with one hour of maintenance between flights
and a standard for operational readiness is 97%.
The Future EPS/UAV? The goals of the Defense Advanced Research
Projects Agency (DARPA) Vulture program are: 5 years on station with a
450kg payload, and sufficient speed to stay on station for 99% of the time
against winds encountered at 60,000-90,000 feet. A competitor, a Zephyr 7*
(left), claims the Fdration Aronautique Internationale (FAI) worlds
record for a 336 hour, 22 min flight flown from Yuma Proving Grounds, AZ
on 22 JUL 10 despite energy sapping heat. The Zephyr was flown on
autopilot and via satellite communications to a maximum altitude of more
than 21,550m. *Manufactured by QinetiQ is a High Altitude Long
Endurance (HALE) UAV. Uses solar power during daylight and reverts to
battery power during darkness. Wingspan of the 7 is 22.6m but weighs ~
50Kg. On 14 SEP 2010 DARPA awarded an $89 million contract to
Boeing to develop the SolarEagle (right). The SolarEagle will be the first of
the launch & leave craft and projected to have a wing span over 400 feet. Its first flight is due in 2014.
Table 2-52. Persistent Surveillance

72
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part III

Battlespace and Time

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3001. Aviation Forward Operating Base Considerations

a. Forward Operating Bases
In preferred order
Occupy host nation airfield
Use abandoned or captured airfields
Use roads, highways, or parking lots
Construct EAF (takes 2-3 weeks)

b. Forward Operating Base Classifications

Main Air Base. A secure airfield capable of supporting sustained ops ashore; can handle all aircraft up to and including
C-5s and C-17s; includes IMA support.
Air Facility. A secure airbase able to support squadron-sized units and provide OMA. Can be an airfield, road segment,
EAF or clear level ground. Can sustain combat sortie rate operations and support forward sites like FARP(s).
Air Site. A secure location where aircraft preposition to reduce response time. Operations are limited to receiving and
launching previously loaded aircraft awaiting pre-planned or immediate missions.
Air Point. FARP(s) and lager points designed to support specific tactical missions. FARP(s) permit aircraft to rapidly
rearm and refuel close to the battle to reduce response time. Lager points are where aircraft marshal between missions.

c. Refueling Systems
Tactical Airfield Fuel
Dispensing System (TAFDS)
320,000 gallons in six 20k
and four 50k gal collapsible
bladders
Three systems per MWSS
600 gpm pumping capacity
Up to 12 dispensing points.
Can be established in 48
hours
Helicopter Expedient Refueling
System (HERS)
Stores up to 18,000 gallons in 18
500 & 3 3,000-gal bladders
Three systems per MWSS.
Helicopter transportable
125 gpm pumping capacity
Up to 4 dispensing points
Can be established in 4 hours.
Not for extended operations.
MK-970 5,000-gallon Refueler
SIXCON Tank Modules
Semi-Trailer
Each MWSS has 10 MK-970 (to 5 x 900-gal + 1 pump
increase to 12) but only three MK- modules make up an
31 tractors available per MWSS. ISO 20x8x8 package.
Poor cross-country mobility. Moved by MTVR, LVS
Capacity limited to 3,800-gal when or helicopter
moving cross-country. One dispensing point
Only one dispensing point. 100 gpm pump
300 gpm pumping capacity capacity

Table 3-1. Refueling system capabilities (TM 11275-15/3D; TM 11240-154C)

d. Maritime Prepositioning Force Support

T-AVB MPS
T-AVB 3 USNS Wright (East) and T-AVB 4 USNS Curtiss (West) Usually in theater before T-AVB
Both ship are in Reduced Operating Status (ROS-5) and would When combined with FIE and FISP allowances it
deploy 120 hours after notification provides the ACE 30 days of combat operations
Will arrive in AO 15-20 days after notification of movement sustainment until arrival of T-AVB
Provides sea lift of intermediate logistics support; marries up with
aircraft, personnel and support pre-positioned by FIE and MPS.
Table 3-2. Maritime prepositioning force support

e. MALSP Support Packages

Fly-in Support Package (FISP) Contingency Support Package (CSP) Follow-on Support Packages (FOSP)
Enabling packages (part of FIE) Augment FISP Provides garrison support
Provide O-level spare part support Provides O & I level support (mobile Final building block of MALSP
(remove and replace) facilities, equipment, spares, personnel)
When married with support from MPS to sustain 90 days combat flying.
and FIE, provides 30 days combat flying.
Table 3-3. MALSP support packages

73
3002. Notional Marine Expeditionary Force Lay-down

Figure 3-1. Notional Marine Expeditionary Force lay-down

3003. Notional Marine Expeditionary Force Command Post Layout

Figure 3-2. Notional Marine Expeditionary Force Command Post layout

3004. Rear Area Operations

Marine Corps doctrine for rear area operations is currently under review in the light of recent experience gained in Afghanistan and
Iraq. The dominant feature of these campaigns has been the enemys near exclusive use of irregular warfare. Distinctions between
forward and rear areas have largely disappeared and this situation is likely to prevail in future conflicts. Joint doctrine, as
expressed in JP 3-10 Joint Security Operations in Theater, has replaced specific forward and rear area concepts with a holistic
approach that focuses on security operations throughout a given theater. Marine Corps doctrine is likely to move in a similar
direction. However, until this new doctrine is promulgated readers are advised to consult JP 3-10 for doctrinal information on rear
area operations.
This publication is available on line at http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine/jel/new_pubs/jp3_10.pdf.

3005. Tactical Control and Fire Support Coordination Measures

These terms can be found in MCRP 5-12A, Operational Terms and Graphics.

74
Boundary: A line that delineates surface areas for the purpose of facilitating coordination and de-confliction of operations
between adjacent units, formations, or areas. (FM 3-90)
Zone of Action: A tactical subdivision of a larger area, the responsibility for which is assigned to a tactical unit; generally applied
to offensive action. See also sector.
Line of Departure: 1. In land warfare, a line designated to coordinate the departure of attack elements. Also called start line. 2.
In amphibious warfare, a suitably marked offshore coordinating line to assist assault craft to land on designated beaches at
scheduled times.
Attack Position: The last position occupied by the assault echelon before crossing the line of departure.
Axis of Advance: A line of advance assigned for purposes of control; often a road or a group of roads, or a designated series of
locations, extending in the direction of the enemy.
Direction of Attack: A specific direction or route that the main attack or center of mass of the unit will follow. The unit is
restricted, required to attack as indicated, and is not normally allowed to bypass the enemy. The direction of attack is used
primarily in counterattacks or to insure that supporting attacks make maximal contribution to the main attack.
Phase Line: A line utilized for control and coordination of military operations, usually a terrain feature in the operational area.
Objective: The physical object of the action taken, e.g., a definite tactical feature, the seizure, and/or holding of which is essential
to the commanders plan.
Final Coordination Line: A line used to coordinate the ceasing and shifting of supporting fires and the final deployment of the
assault echelon in preparation for launching an assault against an enemy position; also called FCL.
Restrictive Fire Line: A line established between converging friendly surface forces that prohibits fires or their effects across
that line. Also called RFL. (JP 1-02) In Marine Corps usage, the purpose of the restrictive fire line is to prevent interference
between converging friendly forces without coordination with the affected force(s).
Restrictive Fire Area: An area in which specific restrictions are imposed and into which fires that exceed those restrictions will
not be delivered without coordination with the establishing headquarters. Also called RFA. (JP 1-02) In Marine Corps usage, the
purpose of the restrictive fire area is to regulate fires into an area according to the stated restrictions.
Coordinated Fire Line: A line beyond which conventional surface fire support means (mortars, field artillery, naval gunfire
ships) may fire at any time within the zone of the establishing headquarters without additional coordination; the purpose of the CFL
is to expedite the surface-to-surface attack of targets beyond the CFL without coordination with the ground commander in whose
area the targets are located.
Fire Support Coordination Line: A fire support coordination measure that is established and adjusted by appropriate land or
amphibious force commanders within their boundaries in consultation with superior, subordinate, supporting, and affected
commanders. Fire support coordination lines (FSCLs) facilitate the expeditious attack of surface targets of opportunity beyond the
coordinating measure. An FSCL does not divide an area of operations by defining a boundary between close and deep operations or
a zone for close air support. The FSCL applies to all fires of air, land, and sea-based weapon systems using any type of
ammunition. Forces attacking targets beyond an FSCL must inform all affected commanders in sufficient time to allow necessary
reaction to avoid fratricide. Supporting elements attacking targets beyond the FSCL must ensure that the attack will not produce
adverse effects on, or to the rear of, the line. Short of an FSCL, all air-to-ground and surface-to-surface attack operations are
controlled by the appropriate land or amphibious force commander. The FSCL should follow well defined terrain features.
Coordination of attacks beyond the FSCL is especially critical to commanders of air, land, and special operations forces. In
exceptional circumstances, the inability to conduct this coordination will not preclude the attack of targets beyond the FSCL.
However, failure to do so may increase the risk of fratricide and could waste limited resources. Also called FSCL. (JP 1-02)
Base Unit: Unit of organization in a tactical operation around which a movement or maneuver is planned and performed; base
element.
Checkpoint: 1. A predetermined point on the surface of the earth used as a means of controlling movement, a registration target
for fire adjustment, or reference for location. 2. Center of impact; a burst center. 3. Geographical location on land or water above
which the position of an aircraft in flight may be determined by observation or by electrical means. 4. A place where military police
check vehicular or pedestrian traffic in order to enforce circulation control measures and other laws, orders and regulations.
Contact Point: 1. In land warfare, a point on the terrain, easily identifiable, where two or more units are required to make contact.
2. In air operations, the position at which a mission leader makes radio contact with an air control agency.
Coordinating Point: Designated point at which, in all types of combat, adjacent units/formations must make contact for purposes
of control and coordination.
Linkup Point: A point where two infiltrating elements in the same or different infiltration lanes are scheduled to meet to
consolidate before proceeding with their missions. See also assault operations; airborne operations; breakout; linkup. (FM 3-90)
Tactical Area of Responsibility: The geographical area associated with a combatant command within which a combatant
commander has authority to plan and to conduct operations. Also called AOR.
Forms of Maneuver: Distinct tactical combinations of fire and movement with a unique set doctrinal characteristics that differ
primarily in the relationship between the maneuvering force and the enemy The choices of offensive maneuver are envelopment,

75
turning movement, infiltration, penetration, and frontal attack. The choices of defensive maneuver are forward and in-depth.
Commanders use these to orient on the enemy, nor terrain.
Types of Offensive Operations: Operations which aim at destroying or defeating the enemy. Their purpose is to impose US
will on the enemy and to achieve decisive victory.
Types of Defensive Operations: Operations conducted with the immediate purpose of causing an enemy attack to fail.
Defensive operations may also achieve one or more of the following; gain time; concentrate force elsewhere; wear down the enemy
forces as a prelude to offensive operations; and retain tactical, strategic; or political objectives.

3006. Notional Offensive Operations Schematic

UNCLASSIFIED
Copy no. ___ of ___ copies
I MEF
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 April 2001
ABD-1
APPENDIX 18 TO ANNEX C TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 OPERATION SHARP SWORD (U)
OPERATIONS OVERLAY (U)

Figure 3-3. Notional offensive operations schematic

76
3007. Notional Defensive Operations Schematic

Figure 3-4. Notional defensive operations schematic

3008. Types of Defenses

a. Mobile Defense
A mobile defense is the defense of an area or position in which maneuver is used together with fire and terrain to seize the initiative
from the enemy. The mobile defense destroys the attacking enemy through offensive action. The commander allocates the bulk of
his combat power to mobile forces that strike the enemy where he is most vulnerable and when he least expects attack. Minimum
force is placed forward to canalize, delay, disrupt, and deceive the enemy as to the actual location of our defenses. Retaining his
mobile forces until the critical time and place are identified, the commander then focuses combat power in a single or series of
violent and rapid counterattacks throughout the depth of the battlespace.
A mobile defense focuses on the destruction of the enemy by permitting him to advance into position that exposes him to
counterattack by a strong, mobile reserve. It is characterized by minimal combat power forward and the bulk of combat power held
in reserve for the decisive counterattack. A mobile defense requires mobility greater than that of the attacker. Marines generate the
mobility advantage necessary in the mobile defense with organic mechanized and armor forces, helicopter-borne forces, and
Marine aviation. The commander must have sufficient depth within his area of operations to allow the enemy to move into his
mobile defense. Terrain and space are traded to draw the enemy ever deeper into our defensive area, causing him to overextend his
force and expose his flanks and lines of communication to attack. The success of the mobile defense often presents the opportunity
to resume the offense and must be planned. Depth is required in a mobile defense in order to draw the enemy in and expose an
exploitable weakness to counterattack. The following circumstances favor the conduct of a mobile defense
The defender possesses equal or greater mobility than the enemy.
The frontage assigned exceeds the defenders capability to establish an effective position defense.
The available battlespace allows the enemy to be drawn into an unfavorable position and exposed to attack.
Time for preparing defensive positions is limited.
Sufficient mechanized and aviation forces are available to allow rapid concentration of combat power.
The enemy may employ weapons of mass destruction.
The mission does not require denying the enemy specific terrain.

b. Position Defense
The position defense is a type of defense in which the bulk of the defending force is disposed in selected tactical positions where
the decisive battle is to be fought. It denies the enemy critical terrain or facilities. A position defense focuses on the retention of
terrain by absorbing the enemy into a series of interlocked positions from which he can be destroyed, largely by fires, together with

77
friendly maneuver. Principal reliance is placed on the ability of the forces in the defended positions to maintain their positions and
to control the terrain between them. The position defense is sometimes referred to as an area defense. This defense uses battle
positions, strongpoints, obstacles, and barriers to slow, canalize, and defeat the enemy attack. The assignment of forces within these
areas and positions allow for depth and mutual support of the force.
Battle Position. A battle position is a defensive location oriented on the most likely enemy avenue of approach from which a unit
may defend or attack. It can be used to deny or delay the enemy the use of certain terrain or an avenue of approach. The size of a
battle position can vary with the size of the unit assigned. For ground combat units, battle positions are usually hastily occupied but
should be continuously improved.
Strongpoint. A strongpoint is a fortified defensive position designed to deny the enemy certain terrain as well as the use of an
avenue of approach. It differs from a battle position in that it is designed to be occupied for an extended period of time. It is
established on critical terrain and must be held for the defense to succeed. A strongpoint is organized for all-around defense and
should have sufficient supplies and ammunition to continue to fight even if surrounded or cut off from resupply. The commander
positions the bulk of his combat power in static defensive positions and small mobile reserves. He depends on his static forces to
defend their positions. His reserves are used to blunt and contain penetrations, to counterattack, and to exploit opportunities
presented by the enemy. The commander also employs security forces in the position defense. The commander conducts a position
defense when
The force must defend specific terrain that is militarily and politically essential.
The defender possesses less mobility than the enemy.
Maneuver space is limited or the terrain restricts the movement of the defending force.
The terrain enables mutual support to the defending force.
The depth of the battlespace is limited.
The terrain restricts the movement of the defender.
There is sufficient time to prepare positions.
The employment of weapons of mass destruction by the enemy is unlikely.

3009. Historical Planning Ratios for Array of Friendly Units

Friendly Mission Ratio Friendly to Enemy Notes
Delay 1 to 16
Defend 1 to 3 Prepared or Fortified
Defend 1 to 2.5 Hasty
Attack 3 to 1 Prepared or Fortified
Attack 2.5 to 1 Hasty Position
Counterattack 1 to 16 Flank
Table 3-4. Planning ratios for array of friendly units

3010. Mine Countermeasures Terminology and Responsibilities

Figure 3-5. Mine countermeasures responsibilities

78
3011. Weather Conditions - Sea States
Winds Average Wave Sea State
Number Description Definition
(knots) Height (ft) Equivalent
1 Light Airs Ripples with appearance of scales 1-3 0.05 0
2 Light Breeze Small wavelets, glassy appearance 4-6 0.18 0-1
3 Gentile Breeze Large wavelets, crests begin to break 7 - 10 0.6 - 0.9 1-2
4 Moderate Breeze Small waves becoming large waves, white caps appear 11 - 16 1.4 - 2.9 2-3
5 Fresh Breeze Many white caps, chance of sea spray 17 - 21 3.8 - 5.0 3-4
6 Strong Breeze Large waves begin to form foam crests, extensive spray 22 - 27 6.4 - 9.6 4-5
Sea heaps up, white foam blows in streaks, spindrift is
7 Moderate Gale 28 - 33 11 - 16 5-6
seen
Moderately high waves of greater length, foam is blown,
8 Fresh Gale 34 - 40 19 - 28 6-7
spray affects visibility
9 Strong Gale High waves, dense foam streaks, sea begins to roll 41 - 47 31 - 40 7-8

Table 3-5. Sea states Beaufort Scale

3012. Opposed Rates of Advance Tables

Degree of Resistance Prepared Defense (Note 5) Hasty Defense (Note 6)
Attacker-Defender Go terrain Slow-Go Terrain No-Go Terrain Go Terrain Slow-Go Terrain No-Go Terrain
Ratio Arm/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf
Intense 1:1 2 2 1 1 0.6 0.6 4 4 2 2 1.21 1.2
Very Heavy 2:1 (-) 5 to 6 4 2 to 3 2 1.5 to 1.8 1.2 10 to 12 8 5 to 6 4 3 to 3.6 2.4
Heavy 3:1 7 to 8 5 3 to 4 2.5 2.1 to 2.3 1.5 13 to 17 10 8 5 3.9 to 4.8 3
Medium 4:1 8 to 10 6 4 to 5 3 2.4 to 3 1.8 16 to 20 12 10 6 4.8 to 6 3.6
Light 5:1 16 to 20 10 8 to 10 5 4.8 to 6 3 30 to 40 18 20 9 9 to 12 5.4
Negligible 6:1 24 to 30 12 12 to 15 6 7.2 to 9 3.6 48 to 60 24 30 12 14.4 to 18 7.2

Table 3-6. Division opposed rates of advance (km/day)

Degree of Resistance Prepared Defense (Note 5) Hasty Defense (Note 6)

Attacker-Defender Go terrain Slow-Go Terrain No-Go Terrain Go Terrain Slow-Go Terrain No-Go Terrain
Ratio Arm/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf Am/Mech Inf
Intense 1:1 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.15 0.1 1 0.8 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.2
Very Heavy 2:1 (-) 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 1.5 1 1 0.7 0.6 0.3
Heavy 3:1 1.2 0.7 0.75 0.5 0.5 0.3 2 1.2 1.3 0.9 0.8 0.5
Medium 4:1 1.4 0.8 1 0.6 0.5 0.5 2.4 1.4 1.75 1.1 0.9 0.8
Light 5:1 1.5 0.9 1.1 0.7 0.6 0.5 2.6 1.6 2 1..2 1 0.9
Negligible 6:1 1.7+ 1+ 1.3+ 0.8 0.6 0.6+ 3+ 1.7+ 2.3+ 1.3+ 1.1+ 1

Table 3-7. Brigade and below opposed rates of advance (km/day)

Notes (both tables):
1. Brigade and below level units cannot sustain these rates for 24 hours.
2. The relative combat power ratio must be computed for the unit(s) under consideration.
3. When there is surprise, multiply these figures by a surprise factor as follows:
Complete Surprise x 5 (e.g. Germans at The Ardennes in 1944, Arabs in 1973).
Substantial Surprise x 3 (e.g. German Invasion of Russia in 1941, Israelis Invasion of Sinai in 1967).
Minor Surprise x 1.3 (e.g. Allied Normandy landing in 1944, Pakistanis attack on India in 1971).
4. The effects of surprise last for 3 days, being reduced by one-third on day 2 and two-thirds on day 3.
5. Prepared defense is based on defender in prepared positions (24 hours or more).
6. Hasty defense is based on 2 to 12 hours preparation time.
7. The ratios used here are to determine the degree of resistance. There is no direct relationship between advance rates and
force ratios. However, sustained advances probably are not possible with a 3 to 1 ratio. Advance is possible against
superior forces but cannot be sustained.
Rates greater than 6 to 1 will result in advances between these and the unopposed rates.

79
3013. Deployment Operations Team Requirements
Force List
o Assigned (MEF).
o Apportioned (i.e., amphibious).
COA
o Means of force closure.
o Timeline.
Designation of APOD/SPOD/DEST
Priority of Force Closure (Capability Sets)
Priority of Force Stand-Up
Notional Timeline for Events and Due Dates
o D-Day DOT (0900, G-5 Conf Room)
o D+3 DOT (MPF MAGTF II Data Due)
o D+8 DOT (In-Progress Review)
o D+14 DOT (In-Progress Review)
o D+18 MCS MAGTF II (TPFDD) Data Due
o D+22 JOPES Upload/MSCs Review
o D+25 MEF CG Validation

80
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part IV

Staff Planning Factors and Considerations

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4001. Casualty Rate Estimation

The MAGTF G-1 creates his casualty estimates using one of the official Marine Corps computer models or simulations found at
either of the following web sites: https://osprey.manpower.usmc.mil/web/manpower/manpower.nsf/mp/MPP-60+Main+Frames
https://mcmps.manpower.usmc.mil/casestweb/.

4002. Planning for Enemy Prisoners of War, Actual or Suspected Insurgents and/or
Civilian Detainees
The DOD Directive 2310.1, DOD Program for Enemy Prisoners of War (EPW) and Other Detainees, designates the Secretary of
the Army as the executive agent for the administration of the DOD EPW/ Detainee Program. When operating jointly, the U.S.
Army receives detainees captured by the U.S. Marine Corps, Navy, and/or Air Force. The U.S. Army receives prisoners as soon as
possible after capturing forces complete initial classification and administrative processing. (MCWP 3-34.1) Planning
considerations for EPW/CI can include the following:
Collection Points - To handle expected Enemy Prisoners of War (EPW), Civilian Internees (CI) or other detainees the MAGTF
establishes a system of EPW/CI collection points. A collection point is an area where EPW/CI are held temporarily while awaiting
evacuation to transfer points or holding areas further to the rear or to the custody of the US Army. At the collection point EPW/CI
may be interrogated for intelligence information and, if they are sick or seriously injured, can receive medical treatment. Collection
points may be classified as follows:
Company-level Collection Point - Tactical troops guard EPW.
Battalion-level Collection Point -
o Collection points are usually established at the battalion level.
o Established at a central location designated by the GCE commander.
o Usually operated by MPs.
Holding Areas - Holding areas can accommodate more captives for longer periods of time than can collection points. Like
collection points, holding points are temporary and must be able to move with little or no notice. They are usually are located in or
near a base. An MP platoon (able to guard up to 500 captives) or company (able to guard up to 2,000) usually operates a MAGTF
holding area.
COIN Considerations - The nature of COIN operations sometimes makes it difficult to separate potential detainees from innocent
bystanders, since insurgents lack distinctive uniforms and deliberately mingle with the local populace. Interrogators are often under
extreme pressure to get information that can lead to follow-on operations or save the lives of noncombatants, Soldiers, or Marines.
While enemy prisoners in conventional war are considered moral and legal equals, the moral and legal status of insurgents is
ambiguous and often contested. What is not ambiguous is the legal obligation of Soldiers and Marines to treat all prisoners and
detainees humanely, and in accordance with the Detainee Treatment Act of 2005 and DODD 2310.01E. No person in the custody
or under the control of DOD, shall be subject to torture or cruel, inhuman, or degrading treatment or punishment, as defined in,
U.S. law (FM 3-24).

4003. MAGTF Health Service Support

a. Basic Concepts
Under joint doctrine (JP-4.02, October 2006) the mission of health service support (HSS) is to maintain the individual and
group health needed to accomplish a military mission. According to Marine Corps doctrine (MCWP 4-11.1, March 1998) it is
to minimize the effects that wounds, injuries, and disease have on units effectiveness, readiness, and morale. Navy doctrine
(NWP 4-02, January 2008) states that Naval Expeditionary Health Service Support (NEHSS) exists to promote physical and
mental health readiness and to care for the sick and injured in military operations.
For the US military, modern battlefield medicine originated from the ideas of Major Jonathan Letterman, US Army Medical
Department. In 1862 Letterman became medical director for the Army of the Potomac. He reorganized that armys medical service
to get wounded soldiers off the battlefield and into the hands of trained medical orderlies as quickly as possible. To make the best
use of his resources Letterman introduced the principles of triage (to focus treatment on patients who could most benefit from it).

81
He also devised a series of levels that a wounded man would pass through that offered ascending levels of care, beginning with
battlefield first aid and ending at a base hospital. The lower levels would focus on minimum measures needed to save life or limb.
More expanded treatments would be available higher up. A casualty would proceed up this ladder only as far as was necessary to
deal with his illness or injury and return him to duty. Only the most seriously injured would pass through every stage.
Today, United States military medical doctrine recognizes five levels of medical care. However, the levels that Army and Air Force
medical doctrine recognizes differ somewhat from those of the Navy and joint doctrine. Table 4-1, above, illustrates the main
distinctions. Just to ensure maximum confusion in practice both systems may be used by any Service more or less interchangeably.
Planners should be familiar with these doctrinal distinctions. The five levels together form what is called the taxonomy of care.
Navy-Joint Army-Air Force
SERVICES PROVIDED SERVICE PROVIDERS (1)
Care Level Care Level
First Casualty location/collection, Triage Self/buddy aid Combat Life Saver (Army-USMC)
Responder First aid & life/limb-saving measures at POI Hospital Corpsman (USN) & Combat Medic (Army)
(also called Treatment of minor injury/illness (sick call) Squadron Medical Element (SME USAF)
Level/Role 1) Level I Routine preventive medicine Battalion Aid Station/Medical Platoon (USN-USMC)
Casualty evacuation (Army-AF only) Battalion or Brigade Medical Platoon (Army)
Advanced Trauma Management (ATM) Air/ground ambulance (Army-AF); COSC Det. (Army)
Combat Operational Stress Control (COSC) Shock-Trauma Plat.(2) (STP) (USN-USMC)
Forward Resuscitative treatment; local anesthesia Medical Battalion (including Surgical Company,
Resuscitative (general anesthesia only in FRSS/MFST/FST) STP(2), FRSS(3), Combat Stress Tm) (USN/MC)
Care (FRC) Limited patient holding (72 hours maximum) Dental Det./Co./Bn./Sqdn (Army-USAF-USN/MC)
(also called Radiology, Laboratory, Limited dental Fleet Surgical Team (USN)
Level/Role 2) Level II
Limited mental health (COSC) BCT/Area Support Medical Company (Army)
Limited optometry (Army-AF) Fwd. Surgical Tm (FST), COSC Det. (Army)
Advanced preventive medicine EMEDS (Basic), Mobile Fld Surgical Tm (MFST)(AF)
Level I services as needed (Army-AF only) NBC/Preventive Medicine Teams (various) (USAF)
In theater hospital; medical, surgical, dental & EMEDS (+25 or higher)/AFTH, MFST (AF)
Theater psychiatric care for all patient categories; Expeditionary Medical Facility, Hospital ship (USN)
Hospitalization Patients stabilized for evacuation to COMMZ Combat Support Hospital (CSH) (Army)
Level III
(also called or out of theater (Army-AF); severe trauma Hospital Augmentation Tms. (multiple types) (Army)
Level/Role 3) patients should reach Level III within 12 hrs; FST, Area Medical Lab (Army)
Level I & II services as needed (Army-AF only) Minimum Care Detachment (Army)
Full acute, convalescent, restorative & OCONUS Medical Treatment Facility (MTF)
Definitive rehabilitative care (OCONUS) (USN) CSH augmented with special medical, surgical &
Level IV
Care Additional treatment to stabilize patients patient holding capabilities (Army)
(also called requiring evacuation to CONUS (Army-AF) Air Force Theater Hospital (AFTH)
Level/Role 4) Full range of acute, convalescent, restorative
Level V CONUS MTF; VA or NDMS(4) hospital
& rehabilitative care (CONUS only)
En Route Included in ERCS(5) (USN), Stretcher team; ambulance
Essential care during patient movement
Care Levels I - IV Aero-medical Evacuation, CCATT(6) (AF)
NOTES: POI = point of injury/illness; (1) The list of service providers is not exhaustive; those found in the MAGTF are in italics; (2) Shock-
Trauma Platoon this is really a Level II unit but it provides some Level I services; (3) Forward Resuscitative Surgical System; (4) NDMS =
National Disaster Medical System; (5) ERCS = En Route Care System; (6) CCATT = Critical Care Air Transport Team

Table 4-1. Taxonomy of Care (Army-Air Force Care Levels vs. Navy-Joint Care Levels)
Planners should note that while Army-Air Force medical units are staffed and equipped to furnish care not only at their designated
levels but also at all lower levels, Navy/Marine Corps medical units normally furnish care at their designated levels only. Thus, for
example, an Army Level II medical unit such as a Brigade Support Medical Company (BSMC) provides both Level I and II
services (including casualty collection, sick call, preventive medicine etc.). A Navy-Marine Corps surgical company, though also a
Level II unit, has only limited (mainly triage and initial trauma management) or no Level I capabilities.

b. HSS Within the MAGTF

MAGTF medical assets only provide medical care at Level II or below. For higher level medical care it must rely on theater level
or other Service assets. The medical capabilities that the MAGTF does have can be classified as shown in Table 4-2, below.
The primary Level I medical care provider within the MAGTF is the battalion or squadron level medical platoon or section. In
garrison, as far as possible, its mission to keep all members of the parent unit medically fit for deployment. In combat the mission
is to minimize the effects of wounds, injuries and diseases on the parent units effectiveness and morale.
Battalion/squadron level medical units can range in size from two or three enlisted Hospital Corpsmen to a couple of medical
officers and 65 or more corpsmen. Larger units will operate an aid station and provide additional Corpsmen (up to four squads in an
infantry battalion medical platoon) to accompany the supported units operating elements.

82
 CARE LEVEL UNIT TYPE CAPABILITIES
Collects casualties, administers first aid; provides aid station services (sick call,
Battalion/Squadron Medical
sanitation, triage, trauma stabilization, etc.); evacuates serious casualties to Level 2
Level 1 (First
Responder) Provides aid station services for the regiment/group headquarters company, battery
Regiment/Group Medical or squadron only. May furnish certain specialist support (infantry regiment medical
section provides psychiatrists, for example) to subordinate battalions/squadrons.
Shock-Trauma Platoon Heavy on emergency surgery; not oriented to casualty collection but can triage for
(STP) an FRSS or act as a BAS; limited patient holding; evacuates patients to Level 3
Forward Resuscitative Performs operating room surgery beyond STP capabilities (can enter a major body
Level 2 (Forward
Surgical System (FRSS) cavity); very limited patient holding; evacuates stabilized patients to Level 3
Resuscitative
Provides STP, FRSS, ERCS, patient holding wards, combat stress control, lab,
Care) Medical Battalion
pharmacy and radiology support; evacuates patients to Level 3
Provides detachments for routine and emergency medical care to support medical
Dental Battalion
battalion assets and battalion/squadron and regiment/group aid stations
The MAGTF must rely on fleet hospitals, shipboard facilities, Army and Air Force
Level 3 & higher None
theater and combat support hospitals and Air Force Aero-Medical evacuation
Provides short distance ground evacuation; includes one Marine driver and one
Ambulance Team
Navy Hospital Corpsmen; it provides first aid as well as en route care as required
Provides ground evacuation of non-ambulatory casualties in situations precluding
the use of vehicles or aircraft. If possible, a team should have four stretcher
En Route Care Stretcher Team
bearers but two may suffice for short carries over level ground. Stretcher teams do
not exist in any unit T/O&E and must be improvised from available personnel.
En Route Care System Can support up to two stabilized patients that require ventilators for a flight (fixed or
(ERCS) rotary wing) of up to two hours without relief or resupply

Table 4-2: Capabilities of MAGTF HSS elements

Corpsman attached to forward units locate and collect (or direct the collection of) casualties and provide essential first aid at the
point of injury or illness (POI). In combat casualties are first sent to a company level collection point (CCP) under the direction of
the first sergeant and senior corpsman. Casualties who can still walk are directed to the CCP while those that cannot are taken there
by stretcher or ambulance. At the CCP they may receive further treatment and if this renders then fit for duty they can be sent back
to their units. If not they are sent to the BAS by ambulance or other vehicle or on foot (if practical).
A BAS in the field has the following responsibilities:
Conduct sick call Return patients to duty when possible
Conduct triage Initiate treatment of combat stress casualties
Treat casualties to minimize mortality, prevent further injury, Transfer evacuees from the BAS to ambulance,
and stabilize for further evacuation helicopter, or other evacuation transportation
Record all casualties received and treated, and report them to Maintain deployment health records (DHR) of battalion
the appropriate unit section for preparation of casualty reports personnel
Provide temporary shelter in conjunction with emergency Provide personnel replacement and medical re-supply for
treatment company level Hospital Corpsmen
An infantry battalion BAS typically operates as a forward echelon under the senior medical officer (a general surgeon) and a rear
echelon under the junior medical officer (a physicians assistant). When the battalion displaces the forward echelon moves with it,
leaving its patients with the rear echelon. The rear echelon rejoins the forward echelon when it has evacuated all its casualties to
higher level medical treatment facilities (MTF) or transferred them to other medical units such as a Shock-Trauma Platoon (STP).
A BAS typically operates out of a GP tent but it can also assume a mobile configuration with (in the case of each echelon of an
infantry battalion BAS) one 7-ton truck (if available) and one M1035 ambulance (see paragraph g, below). Upon arrival at its
operating site it will be able to set up and become operational in about an hour. The BAS is a crude emergency room. It does not
hold patients but provides temporary shelter. Its personnel perform five basic functions:
Security: consists mainly of the following two tasks: (1) removing weapons and munitions from patients before they enter
the triage or treatment areas; and (2) keeping people out of the BAS who do not belong there.
Triage: here BAS personnel separate patients into three groups: (1) those likely to survive without major impairment even
if they receive little or no immediate treatment; (2) those likely to die even if they receive immediate treatment; and (3)
those that can survive and/or retain limbs, eyesight etc. only if they receive immediate treatment.
Treatment Area: usually located in a GP tent, 7-ton truck or any secured area with or without shelter. Here, the battalion
surgeon (and/or his assistant, if he has one) performs (or supervises) essential life/limb saving procedures. The surgeon
will be mainly concerned with Triage group (3) casualties, described above, but group (1) casualties will be here also.
Evacuation Area: a staging area for patients awaiting evacuation and/or those requiring monitoring and continued care.
BAS personnel stationed here will issue casualty reports and CASEVAC or MEDEVAC requests from here.
Expectant Area: the chaplain supervises this staging area, which is for casualties who are not expected to survive. These
casualties (most of whom will be on pain medications) belong to Triage group (2), described above.

83
Casualties requiring surgery beyond the limited capabilities of the BAS are evacuated to the surgical company in direct support of
the BAS parent battalion. Less urgent disease and non-battle injury (DBNI) casualties, psychological casualties and casualties
expected to recover within 72 hours go to the medical battalion medical section (see paragraph d), further to the rear.
For its medical logistics needs, a BAS requires the following AMAL(s) (all scaled to an infantry battalion BAS). AMAL 635 is the
equipment set. AMAL 636 is the consumable set and supports up to 50 surgical patients with major wounds. AMAL 699 is the sick
call set. It provides 30 days of equipment and supplies to treat up to 300 patients for DNBI.

c. Medical Reorganization since Desert Storm and OIF

In November 1995, the CMC ordered the reorganization of the 1st and 2nd Medical Battalions in response to strong criticism of their
mobility and responsiveness in Operation Desert Storm (1991). The medical battalion at that time consisted of a headquarters and
service (H&S) company, two surgical support (S/S) companies and four collecting and clearing (C&C) companies. The C&C and
S/S companies collected casualties from the next forward medical support echelon (usually a BAS), gave them Level II care and, as
necessary, evacuated them to a Level III facility. Both C&C and S/S companies provided the same services but C&C companies
acted as smaller, more mobile direct support units while the larger, more capable S/S companies acted in general support.
The 1995 reorganization replaced the S/S and C&C companies in the 1st and 2nd Medical Battalions with three surgical companies
and added eight shock trauma platoons (STP) to the headquarters and service company. The 3rd and 4th Medical Battalions later
reorganized in a similar fashion but on a smaller T/O that gave them only two surgical companies and six STP(s) each.
The new organization gave each surgical company three operating rooms (surgical squads), three 20-bed patient holding wards, a
triage/evacuation section, a combat stress platoon and ancillary services (laboratory, pharmacy and radiology). A surgical company
received casualties from STP(s), supported BAS(s) and its own triage/evacuation section. It provided resuscitative surgery, medical
treatment, temporary patient holding and coordinated evacuation (as needed) to Level III facilities. Whenever possible a surgical
company positioned itself on or close to an airfield where fixed wing air evacuation assets would be readily available.
Each shock trauma platoon (STP) consists of a stabilization section (with 10 temporary holding cots) and a collection and
evacuation section to collect casualties from the next forward medical echelon (typically a BAS). It originally included seven
enlisted Marines who operated its vehicles and radios but today an STP only has Marines and vehicles attached to it on an as
needed basis. An STP has only four officers, 14 Navy enlisted and three tents. It needs only an hour of set up time.
Operational experience revealed that the surgical companies were not mobile enough to meet Operational Maneuver from the Sea
(OMFTS) requirements. The only medical battalion element that could operate as far forward as a BAS was an STP but an STP
could only perform ER surgery.
Emergency room or ER medicine includes such critical lifesaving procedures as airway and chest tubes, intravenous lines, blood
transfusions, control of external bleeding, etc. These procedures can stabilize about 90% of all serious casualties enough to get
them to a Level III medical facility. However, the other 10% require operating room (OR) procedures where the surgeon must enter
a major body cavity (MBC). In the MAGTF only the surgical companies had OR-capable elements but their large footprints
often prevented them from positioning themselves close enough to a BAS to save the most critically injured.

Surgeons Anesthesia OR MSC Pre-Op OR (C) Post- Continuous Patients Equipment

TYPE ENL
(A) (A) Nurses (B) (C) Patients Op (C) Ops. (D) (E) Wt. (F)
FST (USA) 4 2 (nurses) 3 1 10 (G) 2 8 72-hrs 30 12,644#
MFST (USAF) 3 1 (doctor) 1 0 0 (G) 1 2 36-hrs 10 600#
FRSS (USMC) 2 1 (doctor) 1 0 4 2 1 2 48-hrs 18 6,400#
Notes: A. One orthopedic surgeon per FST/MFST/FRSS; the others are trauma surgeons; FST anesthesiologists are nurse-anesthesiologists
B. MSC = Medical Service Corps (administrative officer)
C. Figures indicate the maximum number of patients that the unit can simultaneously accommodate in pre-op, OR and post-op care. A
FST, MFST, or FRSS should hold post-op patients no longer than three hours, pending evacuation.
D. Maximum time period during which the unit can operate without resupply, relief, reconstitution or augmentation
E. Number of major trauma surgeries the unit can perform over one operations period without relief, reconstitution or re-supply. A given
unit can also perform about twice as many non-operative resuscitations as major trauma surgeries.
F. Equipment weight does not include vehicles or FST/MFST tentage. To displace in one lift an FST needs six HMMWV(s) w/trailers, an
FRSS two HMMWV, and an MFST one. FRSS equipment includes two BASE-X tents and two 3-kw generators plus water and fuel.
G. Army doctrine does not rate an FST for a maximum number of pre-op patients; an MFST has two litters for pre- or post-op patients.
Table 4-3. Capability comparison between the Forward Surgical Team (FST - Army), the Mobile Field Surgical
Team (MFST - Air Force) and the Forward Resuscitative Surgical System (FRSS - Navy-USMC)

The Army and Air Force faced a similar problem. In 1991, the Army had no OR capability below its Level III hospitals but needed
an OR capable unit able to augment a BAS. Its response was the forward surgical team (FST), which emerged in its present form
about 1997. About 1999 the Navy and Air Force introduced their own counterparts, the forward resuscitative surgical system
(FRSS - Navy) and the mobile field surgical team (MFST Air Force). For a comparison of these organizations see Table 4-3.
When OIF I began in March 2003, the Navy-Marine Corps had organized six FRSS teams. These augmented 1st Medical Battalion
in support of I MEF. By May four new teams (from 4th Medical Battalion) relieved the first six after the conventional combat had

84
ceased. The FRSS(s) worked closely with the STP(s) and BAS(s). The surgical company OR(s) acted as jump FRSS(s), relieving
the actual FRSS(s) as the latter moved forward. During the first phase of OIF I, no Marine who still had a pulse when he reached an
FRSS died. Over the next 12 months 97% of all FRSS patients survived. One FRSS weakness that OIF highlighted was an
inadequate provision for essential care for the most serious post-op casualties while they were en route to a Level III MTF.
This deficiency led, during FY-04 and 05 to the development of the en route care system (ERCS). ECRS consists of a critical care
nurse and a hospital corpsman with special training and a set of equipment and consumables (AMAL 647) supporting the air
transportation of up to two severely injured patients for up to two hours. The Navy formed its first ERCS teams during FY-08.
Surgical Holding Combat Pharm. X-Ray Lab ERCS T-Evac.
Unit STP FRSS Cots Beds
Squad Ward Stress Tm. Tm. Tm. Tm. Sect.
st nd
H&S Co 1 /2 Med Bn FY08 8 80
rd th
H&S Co 3 /4 Med Bn FY08 6 60
Surgical Co FY08 3 3 1 2 2 2 1 60
st nd
TOTAL 1 /2 Med Bn FY08 8 9 9 3 6 6 6 3 80 180
rd th
TOTAL 3 /4 Med Bn FY08 6 6 6 2 4 4 4 2 60 120
st nd
H&S Co 1 /2 Med Bn FY10 3 3 4 3 2 2 4 3 30 80
rd th
H&S Co 3 /4 Med Bn FY10 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 30 60
Surgical Co FY10 3 3 2 3 30
st nd
TOTAL 1 /2 Med Bn FY10 12 12 4 3 2 8 4 12 120 80
rd th
TOTAL 3 /4 Med Bn FY10 9 9 3 3 2 6 3 9 90 60
Note: During FY08-10 ERCS (En Route Care System) teams and an increased number of shock-trauma platoons (STP) replaced the triage-
evacuation (T-Evac) sections. FRSS teams replaced surgical squads. Cots are for very short term (three hours) holding of patients awaiting
surgery/evacuation. Beds are for longer term holding (up to 72 hours). This reorganization did not affect the number of ambulances. The H&S
companies in the 1st and 2nd Medical Battalions have 16 each. In the 3rd and 4th they have 12. Surgical companies have eight (two squads) each.

Table 4-4. Medical Battalion, FMF, reorganization

OIF experience ultimately led to further medical battalion reorganization in FY-09. The surgical companies (scheduled to be
renamed forward surgical companies) replaced all their previous elements (except their headquarters, radiology teams and two
ambulance squads) with three FRSS teams, three STP(s) and three ERCS teams. The OR squads and the triage/evacuation section
disappeared. The patient holding wards, combat stress, laboratory and pharmacy teams moved to the H&S companies. Table 4-4
(above) compares the old and new medical battalion organizations.

d. Logistical and Operational Considerations for the New Medical Battalion

Medical Battalion:
Each surgical company supports an RCT. In addition to its command-control elements the H&S company incorporates the
assets of an additional surgical company (called the medical section). The medical section reinforces the surgical
companies with STP/FRSS/ERCS as required.
Patient holding beds are reduced by half and concentrated in the H&S company. New medical doctrine emphasizes rapid
patient stabilization and evacuation in lieu of patient holding.
Combat stress and disease/non battle injury cases are treated in the H&S company rather than in the surgical companies.
The medical battalion is dependent on:
o The Engineer Support Battalion for general engineering (water, power, showers, laundry, site preparation, etc.)
o The MLG Food Service Company for rations for organic personnel and for patient feeding
o The Supply Battalion, MLG, for all classes of supply and for medical equipment maintenance
o The Maintenance Battalion, MLG, for non-medical equipment maintenance
o The Dental Battalion, MLG, for dental detachments.
Surgical Company (or Forward Surgical Company):
In the field it is ADCON to the medical battalion but OPCON to the combat logistics battalion (CLB) associated with the
infantry regimental combat team (RCT) that the surgical company supports.
To support a Regimental Combat Team (RCT), the surgical company typically deploys one FRSS, one STP and one ERCS
with the headquarters or battalion aid station (BAS) of one of the maneuver battalions. This BAS should also be within 30
minutes evacuation time of the BAS(s) of the other battalions. The remainder of the surgical company co-locates with the
CLB (GS) in the CSSA or within approximately one hour evacuation time of the RCT BAS(s).
Each BAS sends those casualties who most urgently require surgery to the forward FRSS/STP and all other surgical
casualties requiring evacuation to the surgical company main body.

85
 FRSS/STP evacuates its cases directly to a Level III (or higher) hospital, approximately two hours distant. It sends an
ERCS team with any patient (or patients) needing a ventilator.
From the surgical company main body combat stress patients, patients with diseases or non-battle injuries, and patients
likely to return to duty within the time set by the theater evacuation policy go to the medical battalion H&S company
(within one hour evacuation time). Other patients are evacuated (with ERCS support, if needed) to a Level III hospital.
The surgical company is dependent on:
o The medical battalion H&S company to take combat stress, disease, non-battle and overflow surgical casualties;
and for patient holding, laboratory, utilities and for vehicles (including additional ambulances) and drivers.
o Other MLG elements for the same services (dental, general engineering, food service, supply and maintenance) as
the medical battalion (above).
FRSS (Forward Resuscitative Surgical System):
This unit has two operating surgeons (vice unit surgeons) and provides operating room (OR) surgery (vice emergency room
or ER surgery). Unlike unit surgeons, operating surgeons have special skills/training that enable them to enter a patients
major body cavities (or MBC, defined as head, chest, abdomen or leg) when the need to do so is urgent.
About 10% of severe trauma patients require OR surgery within the first 30-60 minutes after injury. The FRSS is the only
MAGTF element that has this capability (all Level III facilities have it) and planners must use it sparingly.
Qualification as an operating surgeon requires five years of intensive study and practice beyond ordinary surgical training.
Planners can think of it as Ranger school for surgeons. Graduates of such training have highly perishable skills (and,
often, highly inflated egos). Planners should ensure that they maintain their proficiency by participating in at least 15 major
surgeries per month. This can involve detaching key FRSS personnel during slow periods to operate on patients at busy
Level III or higher hospitals.
An FRSS requires only two HMMWV(s) (or one troop/cargo HMMWV and one M1035 ambulance) with trailers (or
equivalent airlift) for mobility. It fits into two Base-X tents and can be ready to operate one hour after arrival at a given site.
An FRSS can only operate on one patient at a time but has cots for two pre-op patients and two post-op patients. It is not
resourced to hold patients longer than about three hours.
An FRSS can treat an average of 18 patients over a 48-hour period without re-supply. After 18-patients or 48-hours an
FRSS will require, at minimum, one AMAL 646 (FRSS consumables) before it can treat another 18 patients (or function
for another 48 hours). Personnel rest/rotation and/or equipment maintenance may also be necessary.
Whenever possible, an FRSS should operate with a shock, trauma platoon (STP). The FRSS does OR surgery, while the
STP does initial resuscitation and serves as a triage and evacuation station. If no STP is available a BAS can serve instead.
STP (Shock Trauma Platoon):
An STP consists of a stabilization section (two ER surgeons, a physicians assistant, and seven enlisted corpsmen) and an
evacuation section (one ER nurse and seven corpsmen). It can displace in two MTVR(s) (with one trailer), two M1035
ambulances and a HMMWV, all with Marine drivers, or in equivalent airlift. It fits in three tents and can set up in an hour.
An STP performs ER surgery; this covers surgeries of all types except those involving entry into a major body cavity
(MBC). ER surgery can stabilize 90% of all trauma cases enough to enable them to survive evacuation to a Level III MTF.
An STP can treat an average of 50 patients before it requires resupply (AMAL 632 STP consumables).
An STP has 10 holding cots. It can equip four to hold critical care patients. In theory the cots can hold patients awaiting
surgery or evacuation for up to 72 hours but patient holding significantly drains mission essential STP resources. Except in
extremis an STP will avoid holding a patient for more than 12 hours.
A forward deployed STP can reinforce or replace a BAS. It can also augment an FRSS.
Three STP(s) deployed to Afghanistan will each have two mobile trauma bays (MTB). An MTB is a 20-foot ISO container
equipped internally as a mobile ER. It also has a generator and an air conditioning unit (both external). It can accommodate
an ER surgeon, a nurse, three corpsmen and up to three patients. It is usually moved on the bed of an LVS/LVSR. It is not
designed to transport personnel or evacuate patients. Instead, it brings improved ER service to remote areas.
ERCS (En Route Care System):
An ERCS team (one critical care nurse and one hospital corpsman) provides essential care during movement (preferably by
aircraft) for patients requiring a ventilator (oxygen).

86
 Each team can support up to two critically ill/injured patients for up to two hours (flight time) before requiring re-supply
(AMAL-647 ERCS consumables).
The movement of less serious casualties requires the support of one or hospital corpsmen per air or surface vehicle. These
corpsmen use the AMAL-648 casualty evacuation system. Each AMAL-648 has equipment and supplies to support up to
eight patients (one critically injured, five less critical stretcher cases and two sitting) up to for two hours.
The following tactical aircraft can conduct casualty/medical evacuation missions:
Range Speed Corps- Litter Ambulatory
Type
(NM) (kts) men Cases Cases
6 0
UH-1Y Venom 130 158 1 3 4
0 (est.) 7
6 0
UH-60Q Blackhawk
315 150 1 3 4
(Army only)
0 7
15 0
CH-46F Sea Knight 132 132 2
0 15
CH-47F Chinook 24 0
329 149 2
(Army only) 0 33
12 0
V-22 Osprey 500 327 2
0 24
24 0
CH-53E Sea Stallion 1,120 150 2
0 37
Table 4-5. Tactical MEDEVAC/CASEVAC aircraft

e. Patient Movement (PM) Concept

PM is a casualty management system that coordinates the movement of casualties from point of injury through successive levels of
care to a facility that can provide the appropriate level of treatment. The prompt evacuation of casualties to treatment facilities is
essential to minimize morbidity and mortality. (MCWP 4-11.1). The overriding objective of PM is to receive, effectively treat and
stabilize and move combat casualties to an appropriate treatment facility within 10 to 60 minutes of the onset of severe combat
trauma or acute illness. The Golden Hour concept holds that if a severely injured patient can begin to receive lifesaving
resuscitative surgery within that time his chances of survival and avoiding or minimizing post-traumatic shock are maximized.
However, the Golden Hour concept has not yet been validated. Current OIF/OEF trauma data show improved medical
training and equipment has kept patient survivability above 95% even well after the Golden Hour has elapsed.
The three main components of PM are Evacuation (casualty, medical or areo-medical), En Route Care, and Medical Regulating.
Casualty evacuation (CASEVAC) involves the unregulated movement of casualties aboard designated ships, land vehicles, or
aircraft. Medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) involves [dedicated] medical evacuation platforms (air, surface or watercraft) staffed
and equipped to provide en route medical care. Aero-medical evacuation (AE) specifically refers to the fixed wing movement by
the United States Air Force (USAF) of medically regulated casualties, using military and/or contracted airframes, with aircrew
trained explicitly for this mission. En Route Care is the continuation of care using the three aforementioned modes of patient
movement (evacuation) within the Health Service Support (HSS) continuum to clinically preserve the patients condition. Todays
reduced medical footprint forward, and the evacuate and replace philosophy, place a high demand on the en route care
capabilities of all Services (JP 4-02). Medical Regulating is the process of selecting appropriate destination Medical Treatment
Facilities (MTF) for patients being medically evacuated in, between, into, and out of different theaters and CONUS (MCWP 4-
11.1). It is critical for HSS planners to incorporate En Route Care with PM in order to meet the MEDEVAC standard for the AO,
thus increasing the survival rate for combat casualties. HSS planning must also integrate across the six MAGTF logistics functions
with the medical services and lift elements of other Military Departments and those of coalition partners.

f. Medical Regulating (MEDREG) Concept

Figure 4-1 illustrates a Medical Regulating system established for a MAGTF in the early phase of an amphibious operation. Figure
4-2 shows a MEDREG system in a mature theater, moving patients from the point of injury or illness (POI) in the combat zone to
theater hospitals ashore (i.e. Navy Expeditionary Medical Facility/Fleet Hospital and/or Army Combat Support Hospital) or afloat
(i.e. TAH or Navy Hospital Ship) and eventually to Level V treatment in CONUS.
In the early stage MEDREG system shown in Figure 4-1, the Landing Force Patient Evacuation Officer (LF PEO) and one Patient
Evacuation Team (PET) are co-located with the MAGTF DASC (Direct Air Support Center). They coordinate the evacuation of
casualties by air from the beach to the primary or secondary casualty receiving and treatment ships. These are normally
amphibious ships (LHA/LHD, LPD etc.). If boat service exists between the ships and the beach another PET will co-locate with the
Beach Evacuation Station (BES) to coordinate casualty evacuation by boat. The PEO and PET coordinate their operations with the
MEDREG Control Officer (MRCO) stationed aboard the PCRTS (Primary Casualty Receiving and Treatment Ship).

87
 Figure 4-1. Initial medical regulating concept

CONUS GPMRC Global Patient Movement Requirements Center

Level 5
MTF GPMRC TPRMC
JPRMC
Theater Patient Movement Requirements Center
Joint Patient Movement Requirements Center
MRCO Medical Regulating Control Officer
MTF Medical Treatment Facility
AELT Aeromedical Evacuation Liaison Team (USAF)
FH/EMF Fleet Hospital/Expeditionary Medical Facility (EMF)
OCONUS FRSS Forward Resuscitative Surgical System
Level 4
MTF PET Patient Evacuation Team
STP Shock Trauma Platoon
TPMRC TAH Hospital Ship
PCRTS Primary Casualty Receiving and Treatment Ship
AELT AELT
CLC Combat Logistics Company
CLB (DS) Combat Logistics Battalion (Direct Support)
Level 3 FH/EMF* TAH MSOC Medical Support Operations Center
POI Point of Injury/Illness
JPMRC ERCS patient movement
Patient Movement
Comm- Medical Regulating
* May utilize sister Service facilities instead:

Medical Section CSH Army: Combat Support Hospital

(Med Bn H&S Co) MRCO EMEDS Air Force: Expeditionary Medical Support
MSOC
AELT PCRTS
Level 2 MAGTF Navy Joint
Surgical CLB Notes:
Co (-) AELT (DS) 1. Mental health patients evacuated directly from the BAS
AELT to the Medical Section (Medical Battalion H&S Company)
2. Disease and non-battle casualties and casualties likely
FRSS STP CLC
to return to duty within the evacuation policy are evacuated
Golden from the surgical company (-) to the Medical Section
Hour (Medical Battalion H&S Company)
PET
Level 1 3. Trauma casualties can be routed from the BAS to the
POI BAS BN COC DASC forward STP/FRSS (for the most serious) or from the BAS
to the surgical company (-) or directly to a Level III MTF.
Figure 4-2. Mature medical regulating concept
Once the Medical Support Operations Center (MSOC) is established ashore, the MSOC and the LF PEO coordinate casualty
management and patient movement requirements with the MRCO (afloat) and JPMRC (Joint Patient Movement Requirements
Center) over the MEDREG net. The JPMRC provides the intra-theater PM coordination and requirements capability for a JTF or
MAGTF. It may be a stand alone entity within a JOA (Joint Operating Area) or subordinate to, and may receive direction from
the GPMRC (Global Patient Movement Requirements Center), located at Scott Air Force Base, Illinois, or the supporting Theater
Patient Movement Requirements Center (TPMRC) such as in CENTCOM or PACOM AOR(s). The purpose of JPMRC
coordination is to functionally integrate medical regulation responsibilities (the proper medical treatment facility specialty bed),
transportation movement requirements (best mode of transportation, such as air/sea/land), mission requirements determination (the
right medical crew members and medical equipment), coordination, and overall activities supporting JTF PM requirements. The

88
JPMRC performs integrated PM tasks for MAGTF units assigned to the JTF or within the task forces JOA and may coordinate
through the TPMRC to request and schedule strategic AE support (inter-theater), or work directly with the GPMRC as required.
Since PM requires both intra-theater and inter-theater lift, it is critical that the JPMRC communicate requirements to the JTFS J-4
LNO to ensure expeditious medical regulating for casualties or patients to CONUS MTF(s).
To ensure supportability of the HSS mission, it is imperative to generate accurate casualty estimates (both battle and non-battle)
and to utilize all the available organic, joint, coalition and host nation HSS assets available so they can be leveraged against
projected casualties. The goal of HSS planning is to develop and execute a PM system that mitigates requirement shortfalls and
integrates all five levels of care, from point of injury/illness to a CONUS MTF. Effective and efficient PM planning takes full
advantage of the Golden Hour thus maximizes patient prospects for survival, full recovery and return to duty.

g. The Armys Health Service Support (HSS) System

Army doctrine makes health service support part the sustainment mission but Army medical units operate under their own chain of
command. Like its Air Force and Navy counterparts the Army HSS system offers multiple levels of care as illustrated in Table 4-1.
NUMBER PERSONNEL
UNIT TOE / DESCRIPTION REMARKS
AC* RC* OFF WO EM
MEDICAL COMMAND, BRIGADE & GROUP HEADQUARTERS & HEADQUARTERS COMPANIES (HHC)
08640G HHC, Medical Command (Note A) 2 2 80 8 104 A MEDCOM supports a theater army (MG command)
08411A HHC, Corps Medical Command 1 0 59 5 72 Phasing out (XVIII Airborne Corps has the last one)
08420G HHC, Medical Brigade (Note B) 4 11 34 4 62 Controls 2 or more MMB/CSH, etc. (BG command)
08432L HHD, Medical Group 0 2 21 1 47 Phasing out in favor of MEDBDE(s); (COL command)
BATTALIONS & BATTALION EQUIVALENTS
08485G Multi-functional Medical Bn. (MMB) 5 16 16 2 58 Strength is for HQ and HQ det. (HHD) only; (Note 1)
08485L Medical Logistics Bn. 0 1 16 1 212 Phasing out in favor of separate Med Log companies
Combat Support Hospital (CSH) 96 critical, 140 intermediate, 40 minimal, & 20 neuro-
08705L 0 3 161 2 366
(296-bed) (EAC) psychiatric care beds; 8 OR tables (144 hours/day)
08855A CSH (248-bed) (EAC) 1 0 151 2 274 Phasing out in favor of CSH (Corps) (last one is in ROK)
48 critical & 200 intermediate care beds; 6 OR tables
08945A CSH (248-bed) (Corps) 9 16 156 2 327
(can generate up to 96 OR table hours/day)
COMPANIES, DETACHMENTS & TEAMS (not an exhaustive list)
08423A Veterinary Detachment 3 0 3 0 11 Vet hospital with OR for dogs or other animals (Note 3)
08429A Preventive Medical Detachment 12 24 2 0 11 Supports up to 17,000 troops (Note 2)
08440A Veterinary Services Detachment 8 12 9 1 47 Meat inspection; Level II care for up to 50 MWD (Note 3)
08443G Air Ambulance Co. (12 HH-60) 13 18 10 26 49 Operates in sections of three aircraft each; MEDEVAC
08443L Air Ambulance Co. (15 UH-1V) 0 3 8 26 123 & patient transport; UH-1V phasing out (Note 4)
08453A Ground Ambulance Co. (24 M997) 5 15 4 0 69 Can support a division in combat; under an MMB/CSSB
08457A Area Support Medical Co. (ASMC) 14 39 13 0 67 Assigned/attached to MMB/CSSB; ER surgery (Note 5)
08460G Stress Control Med. Det. (COSC) 6 12 15 0 31 assigned to an MMB; one supports two divisions
08473A Dental Co. (area support) 4 6 30 0 64 Supports up to 43,000 troops (Note 2)
08478L Dental Co. (dental service) 2 11 16 0 40 Supports 20,000 troops; phasing out (Note 2)
08488A Medical Logistics Co. 8 9 2 1 77 Supports up to 22,000 troops in combat (Note 6)
08489A Blood Support Detachment 5 2 2 0 28 One per MMB (active only); supports 100,000 troops
08497A Medical Logistics Support Co. 0 6 3 1 115 Supports up to 53,000 troops in combat (Note 6)
08518L Forward Surgical Team (FST) 16 22 10 0 10 Triage/surgery; up to 30 patients per 72 hrs. (Note 7)
08527A Hospital Augmentation teams 3 12 5-9 0 2-9 9 head & neck, 3 eye, & 3 neurosurgery teams (Note 7)
08537L Medical Teams (various) 3 5 2 0 1-2 Pathology, renal & infectious disease teams (Note 7)
08567G Optometry Team 14 4 2 0 4 One per 15,000 troops; usually assigned to MMB/CSSB
08668A Area Medical Lab 2 0 19 0 24 Usually under a MEDCOM/med brigade; 1 per theater
08753A Area Support Medical Detachment 0 2 6 0 35 Reduced version of the ASMC; being phased out
08903L Medical Logistics Support Det. 0 4 1 0 36 Used when a full med log co. is not needed (Note 6)
08948A Hospital Company B 0 2 84 0 170 CSH augment; 24 critical & 140 intermediate care beds
08949A Medical Det. Minimum Care 1 26 7 0 31 CSH augment: adds 120 minimum care beds
Notes: * AC = Active Component; RC = Reserve Component (i.e. Army Reserve and Army National Guard)
A. The two AC MEDCOM(s) are located in Hawaii and Germany, respectively; each can command two or more MEDBDE(s).
B. One active MEDBDE is subordinate to each standing corps (I, III & XVIII ABN) and the 8th US Army( Korea).
1. An MMB may have up to five companies (ASMC, dental, ambulance, logistics etc.) or 10 detachments or a combination (two dets. = one co.)
2. Usually serves under an MMB but may be under a CSSB or directly under a medical command (MEDCOM) or medical brigade (MEDBDE).
3. Usually assigned to a MEDBDE & aligned to a security or logistics unit; one Vet Services Det. Per 60,000 troops or USMC MEF
4. All HH-60 companies (but one) belong to general support aviation battalions (in combat aviation brigades or theater aviation commands)
5. Supports up to 15,000 troops not assigned to BCT(s); ER surgery, ATM, triage, limited dental & COSC; holds 40 patients up to 72 hours
6. A Med Log unit stocks & issues Class VIII supply & repairs/maintains medical equipment; usually under an MMB but may be under a CSSB
7. Usually assigned to a MEDCOM or med brigade but attached to a CSH; can deploy to a ASMC/BSMC or BAS to provide OR capabilities
Table 4-6. Army medical units

89
For a full discussion of medical care levels see paragraph 4003a. Medical planners should remember that the Army has most of
DoDs dedicated rotary wing medical evacuation assets. It also has a total of 29 combat support hospitals (CSH) offering in-theater
Level III and higher care. In Afghanistan, for example, Army and Air Force hospitals provide most of the Level III and higher care.
Finally, the US Army is also DoDs sole provider of veterinary care. This is focused on meat inspection and the care of military
working dogs (MWD) from all the Services. However, it can care for other military animals (such as pack mules) and for farm and
other animals indigenous to a given Theater (to support civil-military operations).
Army battalion (and support brigade) medical platoons and teams/sections provide Level I medical care. They tend to be smaller
than their Navy-Marine Corps counterparts relative to the number of personnel they serve. For example, an Army infantry battalion
has 15 company/platoon level medics as its first responders but a 25% larger Marine battalion has 44. For this reason the Army
relies on buddy aid and non-medical soldiers trained as combat life savers (CLS) to a greater extent than does the Marine Corps.
Ideally, medics provide first aid and direct the movement of casualties from their points of injury (POI) to a company-level casualty
collection point (CCP), run by the company first sergeant and senior medic.
At the CCP, the senior medic triages all casualties, stabilizes the more serious casualties, treats the less serious and, together with
the first sergeant, arranges the evacuation of casualties requiring further treatment. This will usually be to the battalion aid station
(BAS). An Army BAS is similar to (though smaller than) its Navy-Marine Corps counterpart. When required it can split to form a
forward air station (FAS) as well as a BAS operating further to the rear. It is supported by an evacuation section consisting (in a
light infantry battalion) of eight ambulances with a driver and a medic in each. They can evacuate casualties from POI to CCP and
from CCP to BAS. Helicopter evacuation is preferred when available.
Within an Army brigade combat team (BCT), the brigade support medical company (BSMC part of the brigade support battalion
or BSB) provides Level II care. Sustainment brigades directly supporting troops in combat can include Level I and II medical units
(see Figure 1-39). However, the majority of Army medical units operate under their own functional brigades (commanding three to
seven battalion equivalents each) and theater medical commands (MEDCOM).
Within a medical brigade multifunctional medical battalions (MMB) control most of the Level I or II and medical logistics units.
An MMB can control a combination of three to six companies or six to 12 detachments (two detachments equate to one company).
A typical MMB has about five company equivalents, including one or more area support medical companies (ASMC) a dental
company, a medical logistics company and other elements such as a ground ambulance company and/or preventive medicine,
combat stress, veterinary or optometry detachments (an active component MMB will have a blood support detachment). An ASMC
provides BSMC services for all units within an assigned AO that do not already have BSMC support. An ASMC or BSMC differs
from a Navy-Marine Corps surgical company in that it provides Level I as well as Level II services but offers emergency room
type surgery only. ER surgery can stabilize most casualties but caring for the 10% of casualties that require immediate operating
room (OR) surgery (involving entry into a major body cavity see paragraph 4003b) requires a forward surgical team (FST).
An Army combat support hospital (CSH) offers Level I, II and III and, when augmented, Level IV care. It is a modular unit able to
operate as a single entity or as an 84-bed element and a 164-bed element. A medical brigade will have two to three CSH(s).
An Army Veterinary services detachment can inspect food for up to 60,000 personnel (or for a USMC MEF). It also gives Level I
and II medical care to up to 50 military working dogs or other animals. An Army veterinary detachment (of which there are three)
is a Level III military hospital for dogs. Each has its own OR and can hold up to 10 in-patients and support 50-200 out-patients.

h. The U.S. Air Force HSS System

As stated in AFDD 2-4.2 Health Services (December 02) the Air Force Medical Service (AFMS) defines its core competencies as
fixed-wing aero-medical evacuation, expeditionary medical care in military operations, interface with World Health Care
(working with international medical officials), and (civil) population health. Relative to the Army and Navy-Marine Corps medical
services, places less emphasis on dealing with battle casualties (though it can certainly do so) and more on preventive medicine,
disease and non-battle injury, NBC defense and providing medical services to civil populations. Within DoD, the Air Force is also
the main provider of aero-medical evacuation services using fixed-wing transport aircraft operating as far forward as possible.
Upon the opening of a theater of operations, the AFMS begins to establish a medical contingency ground support system that will
provide forward stabilization of patients, primary care, dental services, force health protection and to prepare patients for aero-
medical evacuation. It does this by inserting small teams with very low footprints that can still provide essential capabilities. The
most common of these are as follows:
Squadron Medical Element (SME): similar to its Navy-Marine Corps counterpart, it is organic to an aircraft squadron and
provides it with Level I medical support. Typical size is one officer (flight surgeon) and two enlisted medical technicians.
Independent Duty Medical Technician (IDMT): similar to the Navys independent duty Corpsman, this is a senior medic
whose training qualifies him as a licensed practical nurse (LPN) who can supply certain specified (Level I) medical
services in lieu of a physician. Services include sick call, immunizations, basic dental, and force health protection in
addition to emergency first aid. If operating in a base area without facilities the IDMT will need a vehicle and a shelter.
One IDMT can support a population of about 100-250. The AFMS has less than 500 IDMT(s).
Air Transportable Clinic (ATC): a 463L pallet of equipment and supplies. A 10K forklift can move it from the airfield to
its designated site. It augments an SME and/or IDMT(s) so they can support a population of 300-500.

90
 Global Reach Laydown Team (GRL): an expeditionary preventive medicine mission unit that detects and mitigates
disease or non-battle hazards; conducts environmental baseline studies and inspects food and water. A team has a flight
surgeon, a public health officer, a bioenvironmental technician (BEE) and an IDMT. The AFMS has about 16 teams.
Preventive and Aerospace Medical Team (PAM): a larger and more capable expeditionary preventive medicine unit. It
performs health threat and risk assessments and the surveillance, control and mitigation of health hazards. It can also
provide (Level I) primary and emergency care and flight medicine. A PAM team can serve as a follow-on to a GRL team.
The AFMS has about 35 PAM teams in its force structure. Each has nine personnel in three echelons, as follows:
o Advanced Echelon (ADVON): one aerospace medicine physician; one public health officer
o Second Echelon: one BEE; one IDMT
o Third Echelon: two public health technicians; two BEE technicians; one aerospace physiologist
Mobile Field Surgery Team (MFST): already covered in Table 4-2, paragraph 4003-c above, this highly mobile five-
member team provides life-saving OR-level surgery within one hour of injury.
Critical Care Air Transport Team (CCATT) or Emergency Care Air Transport Team (ECATT): cares for critically
ill/injured but stable patients (who need a ventilator) in an in-flight aircraft. A counterpart to the Navy-Marine Corps
ERCS team it consists of an internal medicine physician, a critical care nurse and a respiratory technician and supports up
to three patients. Adding a second critical care nurse increases its capacity to five patients. An Aero-Medical Evacuation
Team (AET - two flight nurses and three technicians) takes care of the non-critical patients on a given AE flight.
To build up theater medical capabilities AFMS will also deploy its expeditionary medical system (EMEDS). The AFMS introduced
EMEDS in 1999 as a replacement for its large air transportable hospital. EMEDS offers a lightweight, rapidly deployable, modular
medical capability flexible enough to respond to any scenario. Its building block approach enables it to build itself up to where it
can supply whatever medical capability is needed. EMEDS uses three basic increments that are as follows:
EMEDS Basic: deploys with seven days of supply and provides Level II medical support for a population of 1,000 to
2,000 personnel. Its services include force health protection, sick call, forward resuscitative care (OR & ER surgery),
limited dental care, preparation of patients for aero-medical evacuation and very limited patient holding (four holding
beds). An EMEDS Basic has a total of 25 members (15 officers) and deploys in two modules as follows:
o Small Portable Expeditionary Aero-medical Rapid Response team (SPEARR): can deploy with man-packed
equipment only or with a sling loaded SPEARR trailer (463L pallet load equivalent that includes a shelter). It
can be ready to deploy within two hours of initial notification. Its 10 members consist of an MFST (five
officers), an expeditionary critical care team (internist, nurse and technician), and the initial element (ADVON)
of a PAM team (two officers). In the man-pack mode the SPEARR team requires an expedient shelter and has
only two days water (assuming a temperate climate) and MRE(s). The trailer (6,000 lbs. loaded weight) carries
a shelter with generator and environmental control unit. It also has food and medical supplies for five to seven
days and two additional days potable water. A SPEARR team can support a population of up to 500 personnel.
If it has a trailer it will also need a vehicle (military or commercial) to tow it to the set-up location.
o EMEDS Basic, Module 2: This is the follow-on echelon that completes the EMEDS basic configuration. Its 15
members include a C2 team, nurse and dental augmentation teams, a medical primary care team, and the last
two echelons of a PAM team. Its equipment comes on two 463L pallets and includes two additional shelters
and four holding cots). An EMEDS Basic (or just the SPEARR team) can do 20 major non-operative
resuscitations and 10 emergency surgeries within 48 hours but will not be able to do more without resupply.
The full EMEDS basic can provide Level II medical support to a population of up to 2,000. It requires about
15,000 square feet of level ground to set up its shelters and it requires vehicles to move its trailer and 463L
pallets to its set-up location. It will also require re-supply within five to seven days. In non-temperate climate
conditions it will require additional water. Re-supply is delivered in 10 day increments.
EMEDS + 10: this module upgrades the EMEDS Basic to a small Level III hospital with 10 in-patient beds (plus four
holding cots). It does not increase the EMEDS Basics surgical capabilities. It does add three shelters (making a total of
six) and a pharmacy, laboratory and critical care ward. It arrives in theater with seven days supply and can support a
population of 2,000 to 3,000. Its equipment comes on 11 additional 463L pallets and it has 31 personnel (8 officers). Its
minimum site requirement increases to 26,000 square feet.
EMEDS + 25: contains three additional shelters (a supply shelter, two more patient wards), and 15 additional in-patient
beds. The 30 additional personnel (14 officers) include a surgical augmentation team (which doubles the capabilities of
the MFST to 20 operative and 40 non-operative resuscitations per 48 hours), a four-bed intensive care unit (ICU) team, a
dental augmentation team and even dieticians and physical therapists. The equipment fits on 13 additional 463L pallets.
Its minimum site requirement increases to 40,000 square feet. It can support a population of 3,000 to 5,000.
Additional modules can upgrade EMEDS to an Air Force Theater Hospital (AFTH) with 50 or 114 beds, requiring up to 100,000
square feet of ground space and employing up to 300 personnel.

91
4004. Return to Duty Estimate Considerations
Chart shows breakdown of results of hits by enemy fire.
Roughly 10% of the wounded can be returned to duty
from 1st and 2nd Echelon facilities. When figuring in
DNBI the RTD rate increases significantly. It will normally
average around 40% from 1st and 2nd echelon facilities.
Longer evacuation policy will increase the number RTD
but will require greater logistic support. A shorter
evacuation policy will reduce RTD and require less
logistics but place more demand on evacuation assets.

Figure 4-3. Return to duty estimate considerations

4005. Human Waste and Solid Waste Planning Factors

6 Port-a-johns are required for each 150 persons and
Port-a-John Planning Factor one additional for each 40 extra
Planning factor for expedient portable holes,
One such latrine per 20 people (USAID and II MEF)
honey buckets, dug latrines etc.
On average, each person will produce 5.3 lbs of solid
Solid Waste Production (trash) Planning Factor waste per day.
Table 4-7. Human and solid waste planning factors

4006. Intelligence Considerations

Intelligence provides a comprehensive image of the battlespace and the threat. Operational and tactical intelligence is required to
plan and conduct maneuver warfare operations. Intelligence helps commanders to provide for constant or predictable aspects of the
environment, come to an understanding on the general direction of future actions, and anticipate possible threat force actions and
reactions.

a. Planning and Direction

The planning and direction phase of the intelligence cycle consists of those activities that identify pertinent and Priority Intelligence
Requirements (PIR) and provide the means for satisfying those requirements. A good PIR -
1. Asks only one question.
2. Focuses on specific facts, events or activities concerning the enemy or the battlespace.
3. Is tied to mission planning, decision-making, and execution.
4. Provides a clear, concise statement of what intelligence is required.
5. Contains geographic and time elements to limit the scope of the requirement.
Other things to consider during the planning and direction phase:
1. Have friendly objectives, intentions, and plans been fully communicated to appropriate intelligence organizations?
2. Has the Annex B (Intelligence) been prepared for the operation plan, operation order, or campaign plan?
3. Are the priority information requirements based on threat and the operational environment related commanders critical
information requirements (CCIR)?
a. Are they prioritized according to the commanders priorities?
b. Are they specific with regard to time, location, and enemy (or weather) event or activity?
c. Are organic collection assets employed to answer these requirements in a prioritized manner?
d. Are information requirements on which the unit is unable to collect forwarded to higher headquarters as RFI(s)
in a logical, prioritized manner?
e. Are collectors aware of the higher headquarters CCIR(s), and are subordinate commands aware of the higher
headquarters CCIR(s)?
4. Have intelligence support requirements for personnel augmentation, to include regional or functional experts, linguists,
collection personnel, or reservists, been identified to higher headquarters?
5. What centers, groups, bureaus, cells, offices, elements, boards, WGs, and planning teams require G-2/S-2 representation?

92
 6. Has the intelligence architecture for flow of responsibilities for priority intelligence requirements (PIR(s)) and request for
information been determined?
7. Have deliberate targeting plans been reviewed and are target materials up-to-date?

b. Collection
Collection is the gathering of intelligence data and information to satisfy the identified requirements. During the collection phase,
the intelligence collection plan is developed to identify what we know, what we dont know, and our plan on how to obtain what is
needed to further develop the intelligence picture. Examples of items to consider include:
1. Are the right assets being employed to collect against the right targets?
2. Is event templating used to drive and sequence the collection plan?
3. Have gaps and shortfalls in collection capabilities been identified? Have those been forwarded and requested of higher
headquarters?
4. Have requirements for HUMINT, GEOINT, SIGINT, and MASINT collection been identified?
5. Is the collection section considering:
a. Task organization of intelligence units.
b. Identification of personnel and equipment requirements.
c. Requirement for liaison teams.
d. Connectivity with national, theater, and joint force intelligence assets.
e. Communications and information systems (CIS) requirements.
f. Logistic requirements.
g. The need for specialized capabilities; e.g., linguists.
6. Organic Assets:
a. CI/HUMINT Company
Have CI, counterterrorism, and force protection related intelligence requirements been identified?
Have intelligence security guidelines been developed and disseminated?
Have the requirements for interrogation and debriefing capabilities been identified?
b. Radio Battalion
c. Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion
d. Division Reconnaissance Battalion
e. Ground Sensor Platoon (GSP) - Unattended Ground Sensors:
f. Marine Tactical Electronic Warfare Squadron (VMAQ) (EA-6B/TERPES)
g. F/A-18 D with the Advanced Tactical Airborne Reconnaissance System (ATARS).
h. Marine UAV (or UAS) Squadron (VMU)
i. Manpack SIDS
7. External Intelligence Collection Assets:
a. Have external (national, theater, and joint force intelligence assets) intelligence collection assets been
identified? (Example: RC-135 Rivet Joint; E8 Joint Surveillance Target Attack Radar System (JSTARS);
Predator UAV, etc.)
b. Are external collection asset capabilities clearly understood?

c. Processing, Exploitation and Production

Processing and exploitation involves the conversion of collected data into information that can be produced into a form that is
suitable as intelligence. Processing is largely a technical function that does not add meaning to the data but that is necessary to
convert the data into a form that people can understand. Examples of processing include developing a piece of film, translating a
document or communications intercept from a foreign language or converting electronic data into a standardized report that can be
analyzed by a system operator. Production plans should be developed to support execution of specific tactical options, engagement
of targets, and selecting branches and sequels to the operation plan.

d. Dissemination and Utilization

Dissemination is the timely conveyance of intelligence to users in an appropriate form. Intelligence has no inherent value. Its value
is realized through its utilization as support to operations.

93
 1. Are all subordinate commands represented in dissemination concept, including the relevant rear area commands? Is the
G-2/S-2 cognizant of the CCIR(s) of both higher headquarters and subordinate commands?
2. Are analysis and production priorities established to enable the AFC to produce and disseminate the most critical and
relevant intelligence products first?
3. Are OPTs supported by up-to-date, predictive intelligence products for use in developing and war-gaming future enemy
and friendly COA(s)?
4. Have guidelines for dissemination of intelligence products been established?

4007. Aircraft Sortie Rates

Surge Period
24 Hrs 48 Hrs 72 Hrs
Aircraft Sustain Surge Post Surge Post Surge Post Surge
Squadron (Type A/C)
Per Squadron Rate Rate Penalty Penalty Penalty
VMFA (F/A-18A/C) 12 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
VMFA (AW) (F/A-18D) 12 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
VMA (AV-8B) 16 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
VMAQ (EA6B) 5 1.2 2.0 N/A 1.0 .75
VMGR (KC-130) 12 1.2 2.0 N/A 1.0 .75
VMM (MV-22) (Note 5) 12 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
HMH (CH-53E) 16 2.0 3.0 N/A 1.5 1.0
HMH (CH-53D) 18 2.0 3.0 N/A 1.5 1.0
HMM (CH-46E) 12 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
HMLA (AH-1Z) 18 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
HMLA (UH-1Z) 9 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
(UH-60) 30 (Note 9) 2.5 4.0 N/A 2.0 1.5
Notes:
1. Sortie rates will fluctuate based on the types of missions flown, duration of missions, aircrew availability, and maintenance sustainment capability.
2. For each day of surge, next days surge and sustained sortie rates are reduced by 0.5.
3. For each day of surge, plan on an equal number of post surge recovery days (i.e. 2 days of surge requires 2 days of recovery).
4. For carrier-based aviation assume 10 strike sorties every deck-cycle with 8 deck-cycles in a 12-hour period. Eight deck-cycles times 10 strike
sorties per deck-cycle equals 80 sorties in a 12-hour period.
5. MV-22 Sortie rates are estimates using same data as F/A-18A/C/D.
6. Helicopter sortie requirements based on legs less than 90 nm.
7. Helicopter lift Requirements:
CH-46E: 12 Marines
MV-22: up to 24 Marines
CH-53D/E: 24 Marines
8. Vehicles not included. If vehicles are to be lifted by helicopter, assume one CH-53E per vehicle not available for troop lift.
9. Number of aircraft is for a UH-60-equipped US Army aviation battalion.

Table 4-8. Aircraft Sortie Rates

4008. Marine Air Command and Control System

a. Forms of Control
TACC TADC TAOC EW/C DASC MATCD MMT FAC FAC(A) ASC(A) TAC(A)
Command X
Air Control X X X X X X X X X X X
Positive Control X X X X
Procedural Control X X X X X X X X X
Radar Control X X X X
Terminal Control X X X X X X
Air Direction X X X X X X
Table 4-9. Forms of control exercised by Marine Air Command Control System agencies

94
b. Theater Air Ground System (TAGS)

Figure 4-4. Theater Air-Ground System (from ALSA TAGS TTP FM 3-52.2, April 2007)
AAMDC Army air and missile defense command JFLCC joint force land component commander
ACA airspace control authority JOC joint operations center
ACCE air component coordination element JSOAC joint special operations air component
ADA air defense artillery JSOTF joint special operations task force
ADAFCO air defense artillery fire control officer JSTARS joint surveillance target attack radar system
ADC air defense commander JTAC joint terminal attack controller
AEW airborne early warning LNO liaison officer
AFLE Air Force liaison element MARSOF Marine Corps special operations forces
AFSOF Air Force special operations forces NALE naval and amphibious liaison element
ASC (A) assault support coordinator (airborne) NAVSOF Navy special operations forces
ASOC air support operations center NG REP naval gunfire representative
ASWC antisubmarine warfare commander NSWTU naval special warfare task unit
AWACS airborne warning and control system ODA operational detachment alpha (USA SF)
BCD battlefield coordination detachment OFD operational fires directorate
CATF commander amphibious task force SACC supporting arms coordination center
CRC control and reporting center SALT supporting arms liaison team
CWC composite warfare commander SOC special operations center
DASC direct air support center SOCCE special operations command and control element
FAC (A) forward air controller (airborne) SOLE special operations liaison element
FCT firepower control team STT special tactics team
FSCC fire support coordination center STWC strike warfare commander
FSC fire support coordinator SUWC surface warfare commander
GLO ground liaison officer TAC (A) tactical air controller (airborne)
IWC information warfare commander TACC tanker airlift control center
JACE joint air control element TACP tactical air control party
JAOC joint air operations center TADC tactical air direction center
JFC joint force commander WOC wing operations center (USAF)

95
c. Notional Aviation Communication Architecture
JFACC TRC-170
TSC-100 MAG-FW

TRC-170 TRC-170
TSC-93 MRC-142 MRC-142

TRC-170 TRC-170
MEF ACE HQ TACC MAG-RW

TRC-170
TSC-85 TSC-93

TRC-170

TRC-170
TRC-170
TRC-170 TAOC
GCE
MRC-142 EW/C TRC-170 TRC-170
DASC

CRC
MRC-142 RRT

Note: As a planning factor, use a maximum distance of 120 miles and a maximum throughput of 4608 kbps for a TRC-170; 30 miles and 864 kbps for
a MRC-142; and unlimited mileage and 576 kbps for a TSC-85/93. TSC-100 is a joint system similar to TSC-85/93 but not used by the Marine Corps.

Figure 4-5. Notional aviation communications architecture

d. Movement and Set-up

TACC TAOC EW/C DASC ASE MATCD MMT
Time to set up (hours) 24 24 4 2 1 18 2
Number of C-5 equivalent sorties 17 21 7 2 0.5 3 0.5
Number of C-17 equivalent sorties 32 37 12 3 1 5 1
Number of C-130 equivalent sorties 95 109 34 9 2 14 2

Table 4-10. Marine Air Command Control System agency planning factors
Standard MACCS packages are configured as follows:*
TACC = TBMCS, CDLS, power, a/c, shelters, tents, etc. ASE = 1 AN/TSQ-207 CASC, 1 AN/MRC-138, 1 M998 HMMWV
TAOC = 4 TAOM, 2 AN/TPS-59, 2 AN/TPS-63, 2 ADCP and SADF MATCD = 1 AN/TPS-73, AN/TPN-22, AN/TSQ-120, AN/TSQ-131
EW/C = 2 TAOM, 1 AN/TPS-59 and 1 ADCP and AN/TRN-44
DASC = 3 AN/TSQ-207 CASC, 2 AN/MRC-138, 1 AN/MRC-145 MMT = 1 AN/TPN-30, AN/TRN-46, AN/TSQ-216 w/trailer and 1
M1123 HMMWV
* Packages represent an 80% solution. Specific mission planning may require changes.

96
e. Service Function Comparisons
MARINE NAVY AIR FORCE ARMY
TACC TACC AOC DOCC
TAOC FAWC CRC ADA TOC
EW/C SAWC CRE ADA TAC
CG/DDG ADA
FSCC SACC FSE
DASC ASCS ASOC G-3 AIR
DASC(A)
TACP TACP FIST
TAC(A) TAC(A) FO
FAC(A) FAC(A) FO
HAWKEYE AWACS
Table 4-11. Service function comparison

4009. Artillery Planning Factors and Considerations

a. Artillery Organization for Combat
Place units in a tactical organization to establish command relationships.
Give units a tactical mission.

b. Fundamentals of Organizing for Combat

The fundamentals of organizing for combat include
Adequate support for committed maneuver units.*
Weight the main attack in the offense or the most vulnerable area in the defense.*
Facilitate future operations.*
Ensure immediately available artillery support for the commander to influence the action.
Maximum feasible centralized control.
* May be achieved by mission, ammunition, and positioning.

c. Establishing Command Relationships

Strategic tailoring.
Tactical tailoring.
Command relationships (organic, assigned, attached or OPCON).

d. Tactical Missions (Inherent Responsibilities)

Answers Calls for Establish Furnishes
Artillery Unit Establish Has as its Has Fires
Fire in Priority Comm. Forward Is Positioned By
Mission Liaison with: Zone of Fire Planned By
from: with Observers
Direct 1. Supported unit Supported unit Supported Zone of action of To each maneuver Unit commander as Develop own fire
Support 2. Own observers (down to unit supported unit company of needed or ordered plan in
3. Higher artillery HQ battalion level) supported unit by higher artillery coordination with
HQ supported unit
Reinforcing 1. Reinforced unit Reinforced unit Reinforced Zone of action of Upon request of Reinforced unit or as Reinforced unit
2. Own observers unit supported unit reinforced unit ordered by higher
3. Higher artillery HQ artillery HQ
General 1. Higher artillery HQ No inherent No inherent Zone of action of No inherent Higher artillery HQ Higher artillery
Support 2. Own observers requirement requirement supported unit requirement HQ
General 1. Higher artillery HQ Reinforced unit Reinforced Zone of action of Request of Higher artillery HQ Higher artillery
Support 2. Reinforced unit unit supported unit to reinforced unit or reinforced unit HQ
Reinforcing 3. Own observers include that of subject to approval subject to approval
reinforced unit of higher artillery HQ of higher artillery HQ

Table 4-12. Artillery tactical missions (inherent responsibilities)

97
e. Essential Fire Support Tasks
INFORMATION
Purpose: The friendly maneuver reason for the effects; identity of the
friendly maneuver unit that will leverage the targeting effect; and a
description in space and time of what the effect will accomplish.
Task: Descries the effects against a specific enemy formation's
function or capability. Memory Aid: Task = Effect, Formation,
Function
Method: Who does the task and when it will be accomplished; ties
the detect function to the executor in space and time.
End State: The definition of success for the task. Attempts to
quantify successful accomplishment of the task. Also provides the
basis for the assess function and the decision to re-attack or not.
Table 4-13. Artillery essential fire support tasks
EXAMPLE
th
Allow 5 Marines to encircle and destroy the large group of
insurgents currently operating in AO Alpha.
th
Delay the movement of insurgents from AO Alpha until 5
Marines can block their main escape routes.
STA TM 1 calls for FA delivered FASCAM after it detects a
large insurgent group approaching the mountain pass through
TAI 1. 2/11 emplaces a medium density FASCAM minefield to
block this escape route.
Insurgent movement through TAI 1 is delayed, allowing time for
th
5 Marines to complete its encirclement and destroy the
insurgent force.

f. Artillery Cannon and Rocket Characteristics

Max. Rate of Sustained Rate
Asset Max. Range (m) Ammunition Available
Fire of Fire
Self propelled 24,000 (Excalibur), 30,000 (RAP) Projectiles: HE, RAP, ICM,
4 rpm for 3 1 rpm (round
155mm howitzer 22,000 (w/o RAP), 28,100 (BBDPICM), ILLUM, DPICM, ADAM, WP,
minutes per minute)
M109A6 17,900 (DPICM) RAAMS, CPHD, SMK, Excalibur
Towed 155mm 24,000 (Excalibur), 30,000 (RAP) 5 rpm for 2 HE effective casualty radius
light-weight 24,700 (w/o RAP), 28,200 (BBDPICM), minutes 2 rpm (ECR) is 50 meters
howitzer M777 18,000 (DPICM) (estimate) Fuses: PD, VT, MT, MTSQ, Delay
Towed 105mm 6 rpm for 2 3 rpm for 30
19,500 (RAP), 14,500 (w/o RAP) HE, WP, ILLUM, APICM, SMK
howitzer M119 minutes minutes
Self propelled 32,000 (DPICM), 65,000 (ER DPICM), 1 round per DPICM, APAM, AT2
1 round per
227mm MLRS 70,000 (GMLRS), ATACMS 165,000 4.5 carries two pods with six rockets
1.5 seconds
M270A1 (basic) or 300,000 (Block 1A) seconds or one ATACMS in each
227mm HIMARS 32,000 (DPICM), 65,000 (ER DPICM), 1 round per
1 round per DPICM, Unitary, Cargo; carries
M142 mounted on Fires same munitions as MLRS but 4.5
1.5 seconds only one rocket pod (six rockets)
an MTV truck USMC has not acquired ATACMS seconds
Notes: (1) An M777 weighs 10,000 lbs and needs 2.5 minutes to emplace and 2.25 minutes to displace.
(2) An M198 weighs 16,000 lbs and needs 6.6 minutes to emplace and 10.7 to displace.
(3) The M119 howitzer weighs 4,500 lbs and uses a heavy HMMWV as its prime mover.
(4) Guided MLRS uses a DPICM warhead (M30) or a unitary warhead (M31); IOC for the M31 was July 07. Minimum Range is 15,000 m.
(5) M982 Excalibur, a 50-lb GPS-guided projectile (anti-armor or anti-personnel), reached IOC mid-FY07. Minimum range is 8,000 m.
Abbreviations: (ER = extended range) SMK Smoke (HC)
ILLUM Illumination APAM Anti Personnel, Anti Material
RAP Rocket Assisted Projectile CLGP Copperhead laser guided projectile
MLRS Multiple Launch Rocket System WP White Phosphorus
BBDPICM Base Bleed Dual Purpose Improved Conventional Munitions ADAM Area Denial Anti-personnel Mine (FASCAM)
DPICM Dual Purpose Improved Conventional Munitions RAAMS Remote Anti Armor Munitions System
APICM Antipersonnel Improved Conventional Munitions GMLRS Guided MLRS (inertial guidance plus GPS)
PD Point Detonating (fuze) VT Variable Time (fuse) ET Electronic Time (fuze MLRS/HIMARS only)
MT Mechanical Time (fuze) MTSQ Mechanical Time Super Quick (fuze)
Table 4-14. Artillery cannon and rocket characteristics

g. Notional Artillery Ammunition Requirements (Infantry-Heavy Threat)

OFFENSE DEFENSE
DODIC NOMENCLATURE
Quantity Weight (Lbs) Quantity Weight (lbs)
D003 Chg Spotting 155mm 57 135.3 13 30.8
D501 Proj 155mm ADAM-L M692 13 1,420.2 24 2,622
D502 Proj 155mm ADAM-S M731 26 2,840.5 20 2,185
D505 Proj 155mm ILL M485A2 13 1,268.8 6 585.6
D510 Proj 155mm CPRHD M712 2 452.6 1 226.3
D514 Proj 155mm RAAM-L 11 1,212.7 8 882
D515 Proj 155mm RAAM-S 5 551.2 12 1,323
D528 Proj 155mm SMK WP M825 107 11,101.2 113 11,723.7
D532 Chg Prop 155mm RB M203 729 11,882.7 248 4,042.4

98
 OFFENSE DEFENSE
DODIC NOMENCLATURE
Quantity Weight (Lbs) Quantity Weight (lbs)
D533 Chg Prop 155mm RB/WB M119A1/A2 363 5,916.9 144 2,347.2
D540 Chg Prop 155mm GB M3A1 190 3,106.5 68 1,111.8
D541 Chg Prop 155mm WB M4A1 936 15,303.6 386 6,311.1
D544 Proj 155mm HE M107 593 59,077.6 209 20,821.6
D550 Proj 155mm SMK WP M110A1 36 3,712.5 38 3,918.7
D563 Proj 155mm HE DPICM M483A1 568 62,054 132 14,421
D579 Proj 155mm HERA M549A1 233 24,173.7 55 5,706.2
D864 Proj 155mm DPICM-ER M864 410 NA 150 NA
N285 Fuze ET M577 1,211 3,504.3 490 1,417.9
N286 Fuze ET M582 103 345.6 50 167.8
N291 Fuze Proximity M732A2 148 380.1 52 133.5
N340 Fuze PD M739A1 654 2,370.1 215 701.4
N532 Primer, Percussion M82 2,219 275.1 864 104.9
N659 Fuze PD CP Mk399-1 12 39.6 4 13.2

Table 4-15. Notional artillery ammunition requirements (infantry heavy threat)

Notes:
All quantities and weights are totals based upon an 18-gun 155-mm howitzer battalion (M198/M777).
All quantities are amounts required per day.
Quantities for offense are also the battalions basic allowance. Basic allowance is the ammunition recommended to be carried within
the means normally expected to be available for combat operations.
OFFENSE DEFENSE
32 Battalion Mass Killing Missions (Bn 3 rounds) 11 Battalion Mass Killing Missions (Bn 3 rounds)
26 Minutes of Illumination 12 Minutes of Illumination
10 500m Smoke Screens (10 min duration) 10 500m Smoke Screens (10 min duration)
2 Point Targets Destroyed 1 Point Targets Destroyed
3 200 x 200 Low Density Minefields (1SD, 2LD Low Angle) 3 200 x 200 Low Density Minefields (1SD, 2LD Low Angle)
1 200 x 200 Med Density Minefield (1LD Low Angle) 1 200 x 200 Med Density Minefield (1LD Low Angle)

Table 4-16. Artillery battalion infantry-heavy mission equivalents

h. Notional Artillery Ammunition Requirements (Armor-Heavy Threat)

OFFENSE DEFENSE
DODIC NOMENCLATURE
Quantity Weight (Lbs) Quantity Weight (lbs)
D003 Chg Spotting 155mm 46 109.2 24 57
D501 Proj 155mm ADAM-L M692 9 983.2 24 2,622
D502 Proj 155mm ADAM-S M731 23 2,512.7 18 1,966.5
D505 Proj 155mm ILL M485A2 6 585.6 5 488
D510 Proj 155mm CPRHD M712 3 578.9 1 226.3
D514 Proj 155mm RAAM-L 15 1,653.7 12 1323
D515 Proj 155mm RAAM-S 2 220.5 7 7717
D528 Proj 155mm SMK WP M825 10 1,037.5 10 1,037.5
D532 Chg Prop 155mm RB M203 997 16,251.1 502 8,182.6
D533 Chg Prop 155mm RB/WB M119A1/A2 278 4,531.5 144 2,347.2
D540 Chg Prop 155mm GB M3A1 92 1,504.2 47 7,684.5
D541 Chg Prop 155mm WB M4A1 652 10,660.2 340 5,559
D544 Proj 155mm HE M107 393 39,152.6 163 16,238.8
D550 Proj 155mm SMK WP M110A1 3 309.3 438 412.5
D563 Proj 155mm HE DPICM M483A1 464 50,692 240 26,220
D579 Proj 155mm HERA M549A1 350 36,312.5 586 22,202.5
D864 Proj 155mm DPICM-ER M864 554 NA 240 NA
N285 Fuze ET M577 1,138 3,293 586 1,695.7
N286 Fuze ET M582 92 308.7 54 181.2
N291 Fuze Proximity M732A2 96 251.7 41 105.3
N340 Fuze PD M739A1 593 1,934.6 305 995
N532 Primer, Percussion M82 2,009 249.1 1,033 128.1
N659 Fuze PD CP Mk399-1 8 26.4 3 9.9

Table 4-17. Notional artillery ammunition requirements (armor-heavy threat)

Notes:
All quantities and weights are totals based upon an 18-gun M198/M777 battalion.

99
 All quantities are amounts required per day.
Quantities for offense are also the battalions basic allowance. Basic allowance is the ammunition recommended to be carried within
the means normally expected to be available for combat operations.

OFFENSE DEFENSE
32 Battalion Mass Killing Missions (Bn 3 rounds) 14 Battalion Mass Killing Missions (Bn 3 rounds)
12 Minutes of Illumination 10 Minutes of Illumination
1 500m Smoke Screens (10 min duration) 1 500m Smoke Screens (10 min duration)
3 Point Targets Destroyed 1 Point Targets Destroyed
1 200 x 200 Low Density Minefields (1SD, 2LD Low Angle) 3 200 x 200 Low Density Minefields (1SD, 2LD Low Angle)
1 400 x 400 Med Density Minefield (LD High Angle) 1 400 x 400 Med Density Minefield (LD High Angle)

Table 4-18. Artillery battalion armor-heavy mission equivalents

i. Notional Artillery Ammunition Requirements (Composite Infantry/Armor Threat)

OFFENSE DEFENSE
DODIC NOMENCLATURE
Quantity Weight (Lbs) Quantity Weight (lbs)
D003 Chg Spotting 155mm 52 123.5 19 45.1
D501 Proj 155mm ADAM-L M692 11 1,201.8 25 2,731.2
D502 Proj 155mm ADAM-S M731 25 2,731.2 19 2,075.8
D505 Proj 155mm ILL M485A2 10 9,766 5 488
D510 Proj 155mm CPRHD M712 2 452.7 1 226.3
D514 Proj 155mm RAAM-L 13 1,433.2 10 1,102.5
D515 Proj 155mm RAAM-S 4 441 10 1,102.5
D528 Proj 155mm SMK WP M825 64 6,640 62 6,432.5
D532 Chg Prop 155mm RB M203 848 13,844.4 375 6,112.5
D533 Chg Prop 155mm RB/WB M119A1/A2 325 5,297.4 144 2,347.2
D540 Chg Prop 155mm GB M3A1 146 2,387.1 58 948.3
D541 Chg Prop 155mm WB M4A1 810 13,243.5 362 5,918.7
D544 Proj 155mm HE M107 504 50,211 186 18,530.2
D550 Proj 155mm SMK WP M110A1 21 2,165.5 21 2,165.5
D563 Proj 155mm HE DPICM M483A1 522 57,028.5 186 20,320.5
D579 Proj 155mm HERA M549A1 286 29,672.5 135 14,006.2
D864 Proj 155mm DPICM-ER M864 474 NA 195 NA
N285 Fuze ET M577 1,178 3,408.8 538 15,556.8
N286 Fuze ET M582 98 328.9 52 174.5
N291 Fuze Proximity M732A2 126 232.6 46 118.1
N340 Fuze PD M739A1 126 232.6 46 118.1
N532 Primer, Percussion M82 2,125 263.5 940 116.6
N659 Fuze PD CP Mk399-1 10 33.1 4 13.2

Table 4-19. Notional artillery ammunition requirements (composite infantry/armor threat)

Notes:
All quantities and weights are totals based upon an 18-gun M198 battalion.
All quantities are amounts required per day.
Quantities for offense are also the battalions basic allowance. Basic allowance is the ammunition recommended to be carried within
the means normally expected to be available for combat operations.

OFFENSE DEFENSE
32 Battalion Mass Killing Missions (Bn 3 rounds) 13 Battalion Mass Killing Missions (Bn 3 rounds)
10 Minutes of Illumination 5 Minutes of Illumination
2 500m Smoke Screens (10 min duration) 2 500m Smoke Screens (10 min duration)
2 Point Targets Destroyed 1 Point Targets Destroyed
1 200 x 200 Med Density Minefield 1 200 x 200 Med Density Minefield
Table 4-20. Artillery battalion composite infantry/armor mission equivalents

j. Ammunition Transportation
General information
High explosive projectiles, copperhead projectiles, white bag, red bag, and green propellants, all fuzes and small arms
ammunition can be stored and transported together. A576 .50 cal 4&1 link incendiary rounds are not to be stored or
transported in this category.

100
 Illumination projectiles, primers, CS capsules, all pyrotechnics, and A576 .50 cal 4&1 link incendiary rounds can be
stored or transported together.
White phosphorous projectiles and felt wedge white phosphorous screening projectiles can be stored or transported
together.
NOMENCLATURE DODIC No. Per Skid Dimensions (ft) Weight (lbs)
High Explosive D544 8 27.12 x 13.62 x 32 798.072
Illumination D505 8 27.13 x 13.63 x 23 782.640
White Phosphorus D550 8 27.13 x 13.63 x 31 828.937
DPICM D563 8 29.13 x 13.63 x 38 873.030
Copperhead D510 1 61 x 11 x 11.38 205.030
RAP D579 8 29.12 x 14.62 x 38 815.709
WP Screening D528 8 27.12 x 13.62 x 31 881.848
M3 Green Bag D540 80 49.5 x 37.5 x 36 1,306
M4A1 White Bag D541 50 55 x 40 x 44.5 1,766
M119 Red Bag D533 24 45.63 x 38.75 x 42.12 1,172
M203A1 Red Bag D532 24 48 x 38 x 36.63 1,370
M825 Smoke D528 8 27.12 x 13.62 x 31 830
RAAMS-L D503 8 29.12 x 14.62 x 39.38 822
ADAM-L D501 8 29.12 x 14.62 x 39.38 874
ADAM-S D502 8 29.12 x 14.62 x 39.38 874

Table 4-21. Ordnance classification data (155-mm only)

Vehicle Caliber No. of Projectiles (Note 3) Propellants (Note 3)

MK-23/25 MTVR prime mover (Notes 1, 2 & 4) 155-mm (Note 3) 48 48
(GB) 366
MK-23/25 MTVR ammunition vehicle (Notes 1 & 2) 155-mm (Note 3) 96 (WB) 180
(RB & M119) 40
MK-37 MTVR HIMARS ammunition carrier (Note 2) 227-mm MLRS Two pods (6 rockets each) N/A
(GB) 112
M105A2 cargo trailer (Note 2) 155-mm (Note 3) 24 (WB) 60
(RB & M119) 40
MK-38 MTVR HIMARS trailer (Note 2) 227-mm MLRS Two pods (6 rockets each) N/A
(GB) 640
155-mm (Note 3) 288 (WB) 400
MK-48 FBU with one MK-14 RBU (LVS) (Note 2) (RB & M119) 132
227-mm MLRS Four pods (6 rockets each) N/A

Table 4-22. General ammunition transportation

Notes:
1. Absent published payload figures for the MK-23/25 MTVR those shown in the table are for an unarmored M-923 5-ton cargo truck.
The cargo bed dimensions of both the M-923 and MTVR are the same but the MTVR can lift a 50% heavier payload. However, the load
plan, safety restrictions on net explosive weight and the need for vehicle armor in combat theaters will probably limit MTVR loads to
those of the M-923.
2. All figures are based on pure loads and single-type items (e.g., GB propellant) on skids. All payload data is based on cross-country
capacities. Data may be reduced by road conditions and vehicle hardening requirements.
3. Based on M107 high explosive projectiles.
4. Combat loading for a prime mover is just that, all components for a complete round are transported together as per the units SOP.
5. Without a forklift, one Marine, on average, can offload one HE projectile per minute. For example, three Marines can offload 96 HE
projectiles in an average of 32 minutes.

k. Artillery Employment Considerations in Built-Up Areas

Organization for Command &
Movement & Positioning Delivery of Fire Security
Combat Control
Centralized control is Movement should occur during night or periods of Both direct and indirect fires are delivered Positions Radio
required during initial reduced visibility when possible. for supported units. must be communications
phases; fortified. are impaired by
There are few displacements, often by platoon or Destruction of fortifications may require
decentralized control buildings.
section. assault fire techniques.
is required during
Wire can usually
later phases to Positions should be selected that minimize masking, High-angle fires may be required.
be run overhead.
support semi- provide several routes of escape, and afford as
Need for accurate meteorological
independent actions much cover and concealment as possible. Use of Make use of
of small units existing structures (garages, office buildings, (MET) and survey data increases civilian
highway overpasses) is recommended. because most targets are point targets.

101
Organization for Command &
Movement & Positioning Delivery of Fire Security
Combat Control
Special techniques for emplacing howitzers, such Improved conventional munitions and Communications.
as spades against a curb when the ground is not variable time (fuze) effects are reduced by
A greater use of
suitable for emplacement, may be required. structures, although they are effective
messengers and
Explosives may be required to soften emplacement against personnel on rooftops. HE delay
prearranged
of howitzers. is used for penetration effects.
audio and visual
Illumination, chemical incendiary
Reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of signals may be
ammunition, and smoke are effective.
position (RSOP) elements should be well armed required.
because they may have to clear areas to be Ammunition expenditures will be heavy.
occupied. Extensive route reconnaissance is Lasers and PGM permit destruction of
required. targets with minimal rubbling of adjacent
buildings. Tall buildings may hamper laser
Target acquisition devices are somewhat degraded.
use. Batteries must be prepared for hasty
Radars should be emplaced to cover likely areas of
survey techniques.
enemy indirect-fire weapon employment. Radars
should not be placed in the midst of an urban area Magnetic instruments are impaired.
because of masking.

Table 4-23. Artillery employment considerations in built-up areas

4010. Scatterable mines (SCATMINE) and Other Type Mine Information

SCATMINEs are laid without regard to a classical pattern. They are designed to be delivered or dispensed remotely by aircraft, artillery, missile, or
a ground dispenser. All US SCATMINEs have a limited active life and self-destruct after that life has expired. The duration of the active life varies
with the type of mine and the delivery system.
SCATMINE systems enable a tactical commander to emplace minefields rapidly in enemy-held territories, contaminated territories, and in most
other areas where it is impossible for engineers to emplace conventional minefields. Some systems allow for rapid emplacement of minefields in
friendly areas. As with all minefields and obstacles, scatterable minefields are an engineer responsibility.
Based on the tactical plan, the maneuver commander's staff engineer determines the minefield location, size, density, and emplacement and SD
times. With this information and a thorough understanding of the available systems, he can then recommend the type of minefield (conventional or
scatterable) to be emplaced. If a scatterable minefield is selected, he recommends the delivery system and coordinates the minefield with
appropriate staff officers.

a. Types of SCATMINE and Self-Destruct Times

SYSTEM NUMBER/TYPE OF MINES ARM SHORT LONG
ADAM 36 AP per projectile (155) 1 min or 4 hours 48 hours
FASCAM
RAAM 9 AT per projectile (155) less M731(A1)/M741(A1) M692(A1)/M718(A1)
5AT, 1 AP per M87 canister 48 hours or 15 days
Volcano 2 min 4 hours (set by operator)
6AT, 0 AP per M87A1 canister (set by operator)
Recycle to 15 days
MOPMS 17AT, 4 AP per M131 dispenser 2 min 4 hours (set by operator)
up to 4 cycles
USAF: CBU-89B (72AT, 22 AP each) 48 hours or 15 days
Gator 2 min 4 hours
USN: CBU-78B (45AT, 15AP each) (set by operator)
NOTES: 1. Mines begin to self-destruct at 80% of laid life (i.e., a 4-hour field begins to self-destruct after 3 hours and 12 minutes; a 15-day
field begins to self-destruct after 12 days).
2. All scatterable mines are laid on the surface but are colored to be less visible.
3. ADAM and RAAM are dispersed by 155-mm howitzer projectiles (FASCAM); Gator is dispersed from fixed-wing aircraft; Volcano is
dispersed from helicopters or surface vehicles; MOPMS is dispersed from a man-portable suitcase dispenser.
4. Abbreviations: AT = antitank; AP = anti-personnel; ADAM = Area Denial Artillery Munition; RAAM = Remote Anti-Armor Munition;
MOPMS = Modular Pack Mine System.
5. Antitank mines achieve K-kills against armored vehicle targets with a fuse that senses changes that occur in the magnetic field
around mine as a target vehicle passes over it. The mine then fires a self-forging fragment (SFF) into the lightly protected belly of
the target vehicle. RAAM, Volcano, MOPMS and Gator mines are all the same size (1.7 kg each) and use the same bursting
charge (585g). About 20% of RAAM mines have anti-handling devices. The other types may still detonate if moved.
6. An antipersonnel mine deploys up to eight tripwires (each up to 12 meters long) to sense its targets. ADAM is a bounding mine,
which propels a small bursting charge (21g) into the air before exploding it. It is much smaller than a Volcano, MOPMS or Gator
mine (ADAM weighs 540g; the others weigh 1.44 kg each). Volcano, MOPMS and Gator mines each explode a 540g bursting
charge at ground level. All Gator AP and 20% of ADAM have anti-handling devices. Volcano and MOPMS AP mines do not.

Table 4-24. Types of SCATMINE and self-destruct times

102
b. Situational SCATMINE Employment Planning Time
Identify enemy actions 5 min
Make executive decision 2 min
Pass to execute 2 min
Change mission 5 min
Execute Obstacle 7 to 60 min
Arming 2 min
Total 23 76 min
Table 4-25. Situational SCATMINE employment planning times
It depends on minefield size, density, size firing unit, unit/MF angle, range, and number of rounds. Example: 4 guns, .003 density,
550 x 200 m, low angle, 15,500 m, BMA > 800 mils, 78 rounds = 20 min to fire.

c. Field Artillery SCATMINE (FASCAM) Fire Planning

The standard size of a FASCAM minefield is 400 x 400 meters for high-angle, and 200 x 200 meters for low-angle.
Obstacle Overall Density RAAM ADAM Probability of
Effect Standard Area (m)
Rating Total Linear
2
Area
2
Linear
2
Area
2
Linear
2 Encounter
Disrupt Low 0.3/m 0.001 0.2 0.0005 0.1 200 x 200 25-35 percent
Fix Medium 0.5/m 0.002 0.4 0.0005 0.1 200 x 200 45-55 percent
Turn High 1.2/m 0.002 0.8 0.0010 0.4 400 x 400 85+ percent
Block High 1.4/m 0.004 0.6 0.0020 0.8 400 x 400 85+ percent
NOTES: 1. Obstacle effects: (a) Disrupt = slow/disorganize an enemys advance; (b) Fix = slow an enemy within a specific area (making him vulnerable to other
assets); (c) Turn = manipulate an enemys maneuver in a desired direction; (d) Block = stop an enemy along a specific route.
2. Mine densities: (a) Linear = number of mines per meter; (b) Area = number of mines per square meter; a linear density of less than 0.5 per meter is low; a
density of 0.5 to 0.9 is medium and 0.9 or more is high. Mine densities may be reduced if minefields are covered by fire.

Table 4-26. FASCAM/SCATMINE minefield density and size

d. SCATMINE Characteristics
Minefield dimensions (m) Self-Arm Self-Destruct
Delivery System Rounds or Canisters Basic Load
Length Depth Time Time
Artillery FASCAM 155 battalion:
155MM (AP/AT) 1 min 4 hours DISRUPT: 24R + 6A
400 400 180R (4 hr)
ADAM/RAAM after (M731/M741) FIX: 48R + 12A
90A (4 hr)
M731/741 projectiles ground 48 hours TURN: 48R + 12A
800 200 162R (48 hr)
ADAM/RAAM impact (M692/M718) BLOCK: 96R + 12A
M692/M718 projectiles 36A (48 hr)
GATOR 4 hr, 48 hrs, or FIX: 2 CBU-89B or (F18) FIX: 2 dispensers
650 200 2 min
A-10, F-16, or F/A-18 15 days CBU-78B dispensers per sortie
MOPMS (Box Perimeter 2 M131 per
70 35 2 min 4 16 hours 1 M131 suitcase
Security) engineer squad
DISRUPT: 1100 120
160 canisters 2 loads of 160
VOLCANO FIX: 1100 120 48 hrs, 5 days
2 min (960 mines) canisters per
(helicopter dispensed) TURN: 550 320 or 15 days
(one full load) VOLCANO
BLOCK: 550 320
Table 4-27. SCATMINE characteristics
e. SCATMINE Life Cycle
The following data is taken from FM 20-23, Mine/Countermine Operations, Chapter 3.
All SCATMINE systems have a similar life cycle, although specific times vary based on the SD time and the dispensing system.
For safety reasons, SCATMINE must receive two arming signals at launch. One signal is usually physical (spin, acceleration, or
un-stacking), and the other is electronic. This same electronic signal activates the mines SD time.
Mines start their safe-separation countdown (arming time) when they receive arming signals. This allows the mines to come to rest
after dispensing and allows the mine dispenser to exit the area safely.
Mines are armed after the arming time expires. The first step in arming is a self-test to ensure proper circuitry. Approximately 0.5
percent of the mines launched will fail the self-test and self-destruct immediately.

103
After the self-test, mines remain active until their self-destruct (SD) time expires or until they are encountered. Mines actually self-
destruct at 80 to 100 percent of their SD time. The time period from when the mines begin to self-destruct and when they finish is
called the SD window. No mines should remain active after the SD time has been reached. Two to five percent of US SCATMINEs
fail to SD as intended. Any mines found after the SD time must be treated as unexploded ordnance (UXO). For example, mines
with a 4-hour SD time will actually start self-destructing at 3 hours and 12 minutes. When the 4-hour SD time is reached, no
unexploded mines should exist.

f. SCATMINE Limitations
Between 5 and 15 percent of SCATMINEs will come to rest on their edges; mines with spring fingers will be in the lower
percentile. If there is mud or snow more than 10 centimeters deep, the number will be in the higher percentile. When employing
ADAM or RAAM in more than 10 centimeters (four inches) of snow or mud, high-angle fire should be used and the number of
mines increased. AP mines may be less effective in snow, because the deployment of trip wires is hindered. Melting of the snow
may also cause the mines to change positions and activate AHD.
Due to their small size, the reduced explosive, and the possibility of landing with an improper orientation (on their side or at an
angle), AT SCATMINEs have less chance of destroying a vehicle than a conventional full-width AT mine. An armored vehicle will
not always be destroyed after an encounter with an AT SCATMINE. Further, the effectiveness of SCATMINEs in water obstacles
is reduced even more, because five centimeters (two inches) of water prevents the formation of the M-S slug (SFF). Although the
blast wave is accentuated by underwater placement (attacking hatches and covers), mining of banks and approaches is
recommended instead.

4011. Counterfire Radars

a. AN/TPQ-46 and AN/TPQ-37 Characteristics
AN/TPQ-46A WLR (Weapons AN/TPQ-37 WLR
Locating Radar)
Min 750 m 3,000m
Range
Max 24,000 50,000m
Search Min 230 mils 300 mils
Sector Max 1,600 mils 1,600 mils
Extended azimuth search function up to st
1 round fire-for-effect
6,400 mils
st st
Accuracy 1 round fire for effect 1 round fire for effect
Emplacement Time 20 Min * 30 Min *
March Order Time 10 Min or less * 15 Min or less *
Transportation Air external CH-53E (without vehicle)/ Air external CH-53E/
internal KC-130 Internal KC-130
Screening Crest 15 30 mils 5 15 mils
Positioning METT-T dependent METT-T dependent
Emplacement and march order times are a function of crew proficiency and may be shorter. The times shown are the ARTEP Standards.

Table 4-28. Counterfire radar characteristics.

b. AN/TPQ-46A Probabilities of Detection

Range Bands (km)
0-8 8.1-12 12.1-16 16.1-20 20.1-24 24.1-28 28.1-34 34.1-40 40.1-46 46.1-50
Lt/Med Mortars (81mm) 0.9 0.78 0.67 0.56 0.46 0.35 0 0 0 0
Heavy Mortars (120mm) 0.94 0.84 0.78 0.73 0.7 0.65 0 0 0 0
Lt/Med Arty (122/155mm) 0.84 0.67 0.57 0.47 0.37 0.37 0 0 0 0
Heavy Artillery (8 inch) 0.88 0.74 0.64 0.53 0.45 0.32 0 0 0 0
Rocket/SSM 0.88 0.74 0.64 0.53 0.45 0.32 0 0 0 0
Mortar/Arty Average 0.89 0.76 0.66 0.57 0.49 0.4 0 0 0 0

Table 4-29. AN/TPQ-46A probabilities of detection

104
 Figure 4-6. AN/TPQ-46A mortar, artillery, and rocket detection averages

c. AN/TPQ-37 Probabilities of Detection

PROBABILITY OF 50% CIRCULAR ERROR 90% CIRCULAR ERROR
LOCATION PROBABLE PROBABLE
81mm Mortars No specific data exists. Data indicates the AN/TPQ-37 can be expected to track visibility, and
track velocity requirements are met.
105mm Artillery
85%; 4-20 km 35 m or 0.35% range, 90 m or 0.9% range,
Muzzle velocity: 207-684 m/s
1600 mil coverage whichever is greater whichever is greater
Quadrant elevation: 200-1100 mils
155mm Artillery
85%; 4-25 km 35 m or 0.35% range, 90 m or 0.9% range,
Muzzle velocity: 207-684 m/s
Center 1067 mils whichever is greater whichever is greater
Quadrant elevation: 200-1100 mils

Table 4-30. AN/TPQ-37 probabilities of detection

Figure 4-7. AN/TPQ-37 mortar, artillery, and rocket detection averages

d. AN/TPQ-48 Lightweight Counter Mortar Radar (LCMR)

The AN/TPQ-48 will detect, track, and locate mortars at a minimum range of 1 K with maximum
ranges of
60mm 4 km
81mm 5 km
120mm 6 km
(The detection range is greater distance than the range of the mortars).

Operating parameters
Weapon location coverage
- 360 degree continuous surveillance (only radar with 360 degree coverage)
- 30 degree elevation

105
 - 3 Hz Search rate
Multiple power sources
- 120 /220V, 50-400 Hz
- HMMWV
- Batteries
2 man portable and air droppable (weighs 120 pounds)
Automatic mortar location notification
Digital messaging to Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS)
20 minute setup / 5 minute teardown with two men

4012. The Targeting Process

Targeting is the process of selecting targets and matching the appropriate response to them, taking into account operational
requirements and capabilities. It involves an analysis of the enemy situation, considering the commanders mission (task and intent)
and capabilities available, to identify those critical enemy vulnerabilities which, if exploited, deny the enemy resources critical to
his ability to resist.
Targeting is a continual decision-making process that begins with receipt of the mission and continues through the development
and execution of the order. It is based on the friendly scheme of maneuver and tactical plan. It includes an assessment of the
weather, terrain, and the enemy situation. This assessment then identifies those enemy units, equipment, facilities, and systems that
must be attacked or influences to ensure success. Targeting includes specifying which targets are to be acquired and attacked, when
they are to be acquired and attacked, and what is required to achieve the desired effects. Selected crucial targets are also identified
for deliberate follow up action and analysis (combat assessment [CA]).

a. Decide, Detect, Deliver and Assess

The Marine Corps uses the decide, detect, deliver, and assess (D3A) targeting methodology (see figure 4-8). While the following
section discusses D3A as it applies to targeting, it is essential to realize how D3A applies to overall fire support planning. Targeting
cannot be successful unless it is completely integrated into the fire support planning process. For example, the priorities established
by the commander in the decide phase are not for targeting alone, but include his guidance for intelligence collection, fire support
planning, and execution of fires. The four phases of D3A are inherently intertwined and overlapping.
Decide. The decide phase translates commanders intent into priorities and attack guidance. It provides the overall focus and
sets priorities for intelligence collection and attack planning. The commander bases his initial guidance on the IPB. The IPB
provides much of the information for the intelligence estimate and the targeting process. Intelligence preparation of the
battlespace (IPB) is the foundation for the rest of the targeting process. It is a continuous and systematic method for
analyzing the enemy, weather, and terrain in a geographical area. Targeting priorities must be established for each phase or
critical event of an operation. For targeting to be successful, everyone must understand the unit mission, commander's intent,
and the commander's planning guidance.

Figure 4-8. Marine Corps targeting methodology

A function of the decide phase is target value analysis (TVA). TVA provides a relative ranking of target sets, or categories
using the following enemy characteristics: doctrine, tactics, equipment, organizations, and expected behavior. It also
identifies high value targets (HVT(s))those assets the enemy commander requires to successfully complete his mission. In
addition, fire planners identify high payoff targets (HPT(s)), a subset of HVT(s), whose loss to the enemy will contribute to
the success of the friendly COA.
Some of the products of the decide function are
o High Payoff Target List. The prioritized list of HPT(s) used by the targeting board to develop the attack guidance
matrix.
o Attack Guidance Matrix. The attack guidance matrix tells how, when, and to what effect a HPT will be engaged.
The attack guidance matrix is incorporated into the maneuver and fire support plans. It is the commanders attack
guidance and is designed to support his plan. One attack guidance matrix rarely supports the needs of an entire force
and may differ between the various echelons of command.

106
 o Requirements for Battle Damage Assessment (BDA). The commander specifies targets of a critical nature
that require combat assessment to determine effects and stipulates how that BDA is determined. These requirements
are incorporated into his commander's critical information requirements (CCIR(s)) and the collection plan.
The products from the decide function are incorporated into the fire support annex of the OPORD.
Detect. The detect phase is designed to locate and identify HPT(s) identified in the decide phase. This is accomplished by
executing the targeting collection plan. Target acquisition assets are tasked to collect information for target development.
Sensors are focused on the characteristics of relevant targets and specific sensor requirements are established. Target
priorities from the decide phase expedite processing of information.
The products of this phase are actual targets and suspected targets.
The G-2/S-2 is the principal figure in executing the collection plan. The commander's critical information requirements
(CCIR(s)) are the goals of the collection plan and should incorporate fire support targeting requirements. The G-2/S-2 must
work closely with the FSC to determine target location error (TLE), identification, and dwell time requirements for collection
systems to produce valid targets. This should result in clear, concise taskings to target acquisition assets. As information for
target development is collected, it is forwarded to the target intelligence section (TIS). Targets acquired or developed that are
specified for attack are passed to the FSCC to engage under the attack guidance. Suspected targets are forwarded to the FSCC
for tracking and correlation with other information for target development.
A MAGTF generally has a wide variety of assets available to detect and identify targets. These can range from national
intelligence collection assets, such as satellite photography, to a squad leader's shelling report (SHELREP). Generally, the
FSC, following the guidance in the decide function, will request support from units with target acquisition assets normally
employed in general support of the force. These include radio direction finding (radio battalion), counterbattery/counterfire
radar (artillery regiment), visual reconnaissance and hand held aerial imagery (primarily UAV squadrons), multi-sensor
imagery (UAV and F/A-18D squadrons), electronic reconnaissance (EA-6B squadrons), ground sensors, visual ground
reconnaissance (division and force reconnaissance units), and prisoner of war interrogation (Interrogation Platoon, Intel Co).
Pilot debriefs conducted by the ACE G-2 also provide a valuable source of targeting information.
Other target acquisition assets in the MAGTF (artillery FO(s), NSFS spot teams, and Scout Sniper platoon can be found at
the battalion level and below. The primary mission of these assets is to support their parent units. Essential target information
for reporting acquired targets consists of the reporting unit, time of acquisition, target location/size/activity, TLE, dwell time,
and stationary or moving status. The FSCC can develop targets in their area of operations by monitoring calls for fire.
Automated systems collect this information based on inputs received from observers and the supporting artillery FDC.
Deliver. The main objective of the deliver phase is to execute the concept of fires/fire support plan on targets in support the
commanders plan. The deliver phase is comprised of a set of tactical and technical engagement solutions. The decision of
whether or not to attack the target is based on the attack guidance matrix and the current situation. If the decision is made to
not attack, but to track a target, it is passed back to the TIS. Other tactical considerations are how and when to attack the
target. The technical solution specifies detailed attack requirements. Tactical and technical decisions can take place within
separate fire support agencies (e.g., a regimental FSC makes a decision to attack an detected enemy command post with
artillery and the artillery battalion FDC determines the appropriate ammunition and number of volleys to achieve the desired
result). The keys to the deliver phase are well established procedures for execution, prior coordination, and rehearsals.
When targets are identified by the FSCC for attack, the determination of when and how to attack a target is made considering
attack assets available, their capabilities, the desired effects, and rules of engagement (ROE). This refined analysis produces
the following tactical decisions: time of attack, desired effect, and the attack system to be used. Another important decision is
the employment of combined arms in the attack of certain targets, to include the employment of lethal and non-lethal fires
(e.g., engagement of a target by artillery along with jamming or monitoring may be of greater benefit than simply firing at the
target). Any remaining coordination with higher, lower, adjacent units, or other services is conducted at this time.
Once the tactical decisions have been made, the target is passed to the selected supporting arm for technical attack decisions.
These decisions include the unit to conduct the attack, number and type of munitions, and response time. The supporting
arm's ability to respond based on range, time on station, available munitions, and reaction time cannot be assumed but are
functions of the prior coordination and the current situation.
The extent of the deliver function depends on time available, the target type, and attack guidance. Targets attacked
immediately are prioritized in accordance with attack guidance. A time sensitive target (moving or short dwell time) may
need tracking if it is not attacked within the appropriate response time. Planned targets may be attacked individually or
incorporated into the appropriate fire plan; e.g., air tasking order (ATO), schedule of fires. When time is available, a thorough
analysis is conducted for detailed consideration of targets. The authority to decide to attack is normally decentralized because
of the need for responsiveness. When time is limited, the process may be greatly abbreviated.
Assess. Combat assessment (CA) reveals whether or not the commander's guidance has been met and determines the
overall effectiveness of force employment. It must be objective and measure the things that are important to commanders, not
make important the things that are easily measurable. In the decide phase the commander approves the critical targets on
which damage assessment is required and the type of surveillance desired. Fire support planners identify how damage

107
 assessment will be collected, considering limited assets and continued requirements for the detect phase. The degree of
reliability and credibility of the assessment depends largely upon collection resources. CA will lead to re-attack
recommendations with the potential to change plans and modify commander's guidance. Combat assessment includes BDA
and re-attack recommendations.
BDA is the timely and accurate estimate of damage resulting from the application of military force, lethal or non-lethal,
against a target. It is primarily an intelligence responsibility, however, at the tactical level, BDA provides commanders a
snapshot of targeting effectiveness and enemy status. In the targeting process, BDA helps to determine if re-attack of a target
is necessary. It may take many forms, including number of casualties, damage to equipment, target reaction to the attack
(e.g., moving, hardening), or deception efforts.
On the basis of BDA and target assessment, a determination is made whether or not the desired effects were achieved. This
may apply to a specific target or to systems. Major factors incorporated into CA and re-attack or modified attack guidance
recommendations are the unit basic load, the required supply rate, and the controlled supply rate.
The employment of fire support assets for re-attack is coordinated the same way as employment of TA assets for detection.
This is most easily done when assessment is planned, coordinated, and, when possible, executed concurrently with the attack.
At lower levels, specific targets may be designated for assessment. When the attack of a target is controlled and observed by
a forward observer (FO), forward air controller (FAC), or naval surface fires (NSF) spotter, or any other observer, separate
tasking for assessment is not necessary. When active assessment is not possible, other measures can be used. For example, if
an artillery battery were to be attacked, the appropriate measure of a successful attack might be the termination of firing by
the target. If a target is of such importance that its destruction or neutralization must be confirmed before a planned course of
action can be initiated or continued, then positive assessment must be accomplished regardless of risk.

b. Joint Targeting Process

The joint targeting process determines the employment of military force to achieve the JFCs objective. Both operations and
intelligence share this function. The joint targeting process includes the steps by which target intelligence and target materials are
produced and applied to support operational decision-making and force employment. The joint targeting process is depicted as a
cyclical process with sequential phases (see Figure 4-9).
However, the joint targeting process is really a continuously operating series of closely related, interacting, and interdependent
functions. It provides for a logical progression in the development of targeting solutions. It proceeds from the definition of the
problem to an assessment of the solution. The cycle allows the targeting officer to test multiple solutions and refine both the
understanding of the problem and the proposed solutions.
Joint targeting is not a static, inflexible process, but rather a dynamic process that must be fluidly applied. Each phase of the
process can directly affect other phases of the process. For example, CA directly affects subsequent force application if mission
results prove inadequate. Likewise, weaponeering directly affects execution planning as weapons will influence execution tactics.

Figure 4-9. Joint targeting process

c. Joint Air Tasking Cycle

The joint air tasking cycle is a systematic process that matches available capabilities/forces with targets to achieve operational
objectives. The cycle (see Figure 4-10) provides a repetitive process for the planning, coordination, allocation, and tasking of joint
air missions/sorties, within the guidance of the JFC. The cycle accommodates changing tactical situations or JFC guidance, as well
as requests for support from other component commanders. The joint air tasking cycle is an analytical, systematic approach that
focuses targeting efforts on supporting operational requirements. Much of the day-to-day joint air tasking cycle is conducted
through an interrelated series of information exchanges (through designated component liaison officers and/or messages), which
provide a means of requesting and scheduling joint air missions.
There are usually three joint ATOs at any time

108
 The joint ATO in execution (todays plan).
The joint ATO in production (tomorrows plan).
The joint ATO in planning (the following days plan).

Figure 4-10. Joint air tasking cycle

The following table shows the actions of the JFC and MAGTF during each of the joint air tasking cycle phases.
Joint Air Tasking
Joint Task Force MAGTF
Cycle Phase
Phase 1: JFC guidance and objectives (36-48 hours prior to air tasking day): Direct support plan submitted
JFC/Component Targeting priorities.
Coordination Joint Targets List (JTL)/ Joint Integrated Prioritized Target List (JIPTL)
planning guidance.
Fire support coordinating measures.
Rules of engagement.
Definition of component direct support sorties.
JFC apportionment decision:
Total expected effort by percentage and/or priority that should be devoted to
the various air operations and/or geographic areas for a given period of time.
Components informed through a guidance and intentions message.
Phase 2: Joint air operation center (combat plans) processes potential targets from the The commander determines targeting
Target JIPTL. objectives and priorities.
Development Components submit target information reports (TGTINFOREP): The targeting board:
No later than 26 hours prior to air tasking day. Receives MSC target nominations for
Nominate targets, submit CA information, recommend no-strike targets, deliberation, deconfliction, and
cancel, or renew targets. prioritization.
Produces MAGTF target nomination list
which includes direct support targets and
common sourced target nominations.
Phase 3: Weaponeering includes turning the JIPTL into the Master Air Attack Plan. MAGTF submits air support requests
Weaponeering & (AIRSUPREQ) for preplanned targets for the
During allocation the JFACC translates the apportionment decision into number
Allocation next days ATO. This is done no later than 24
of sorties. This is done through the exchange of air allocation requests
hours prior to the air task day.
(ALLOREQ).
Phase 4: SORTIEALOT sent by JFACC no later than 12-18 hours prior to air task day. It Submit direct support Marine ATO for
Joint ATO contains: integration into the joint ATO.
Development Revisions to component allocations. Submit critical changes to target requests
Approval/disapproval of component requests. and asset availability.
Revisions to mission data.
JFC and JFACC guidance, target worksheets, the Master Air Attack Plan and
component requirements are used to finalize the joint ATO, SPINS, and airspace
control order. The joint ATO is transmitted 12 hours prior to the air task day.
Phase 5: JFACC directs execution and/or de-conflicts all capabilities/forces made Complete transition of joint ATO between
Force Execution available for the joint ATO. future operations and current operations
Capabilities/forces not apportioned for tasking, but included in the joint ATO for (both at the command element and the
coordination purposes, will be redirected only with the approval of the respective aviation combat element.
component commander or designated senior JAOC liaison officer. Manage critical changes to target requests,
priorities, and asset availability.
Phase 6: Done at all levels of the joint force. It determines if the required target effects are MAGTF conducts assessment.
Combat being achieved to meet the JFCs overall concept. Submit MISREPs, BDA reports, and
Assessment JFACC/JFC staff continuously evaluates results of joint air operations and TGTINFOREPs to the JFC.
provide these results to the JFC for consolidation and overall evaluation of the
current campaign.

Table 4-31. Actions during the joint air tasking cycle phases

109
d. Targeting Process Comparison
Joint Targeting Marine Corps Joint Air Tasking
Process Targeting Cycle Phases
COMMANDERS JFC/COMPONENT
OBJECTIVES & COORDINATION
GUIDANCE
DECIDE
TARGET TARGET
DEVELOPMENT DEVELOPMENT

DETECT

WEAPONEERING WEAPONEERING
ASSESSMENT ALLOCATION

FORCE JOINT ATO

APPLICATION
DELIVER DEVELOPMENT

EXECUTION PLANNING FORCE

FORCE EXECUTION EXECUTION

COMBAT COMBAT
ASSESSMENT
ASSESSMENT ASSESSMENT

Figure 4-11. Targeting process comparison

While the Marine Corps targeting process differs from the joint targeting process and the joint air tasking cycle, each of the
targeting processes achieves the same results. The MAGTF uses the D3A methodology for targeting within its AO using organic
forces/capabilities. The MAGTF uses the joint targeting process for targeting outside their AO or when targeting inside their AO
using other Services forces/capabilities (other than joint air). The MAGTF interacts with the joint air tasking cycle during joint air
operations. See figure 4-11.

4013. Naval Surface Fire Support Planning Factors

The only surface gun system currently in service with the US Navy and capable of supporting Marines ashore is the single-barreled
5-inch 54 caliber NM 42/MK 45. Each CG-47 class cruiser carries two. Each DDG-51 class destroyer carries one. These ships
carry 600 rounds of ammunition per gun. A 155-mm gun system intended to at first augment and eventually replace the 5-inch/54
is not yet in service. A 62-caliber version of the 5-inch gun (5/62) has also been developed and is in limited service. It was
intended to employ extended range (ER) ammunition that was not subsequently procured. This gun will fire the same ammunition
as the 5/54 but the longer barrel permits only a marginal improvement in range. Ships armed with the older 5-inch/38 gun system
have been retired. The capabilities of the 5-inch/54 caliber MK-45 gun are as follows:
Max. Range (m) Rate of Fire Projectiles Fuzes Danger Close HE Burst Radius Illumination
21,900 (12,200 with 20-30 rpm (max.) HE, HC, ILL, PD, MT, 45-72 sec burn time
750 m 45 m
reduced charge) 16-20 rpm (sustained) WP, RAP CVT, VT 2-10 m/s rate of fall

Table 4-32. NM 42/MK 45 5-inch/54 caliber gun system capabilities

4014. NBC Defense Planning Factors and Considerations

a. Mission-Oriented Protective Postures
MOPP MOPP MOPP MOPP MOPP MOPP
EQUIPMENT LEVEL ZERO LEVEL ONE LEVEL TWO LEVEL THREE LEVEL FOUR
Mask Carried Carried Carried Worn* Worn
Over-garment Available Worn* Worn* Worn* Worn
Over-boots Available Available Worn Worn Worn
Gloves Available Carried Carried Carried Worn
* In hot weather coat or hood can be left open for ventilation.
Table 4-33. Mission-oriented protective postures

110
b. Chemical Agent Persistency at 70 degrees Fahrenheit
GA/GF GB GD/HL HD VX
CARC* 0.71 2.45 4.64 6.33 634
Sand 1.24 4.28 8.12 11.07 1,109.5
Bare soil 3.19 11.02 20.88 28.45 2,853
Alkyd paint 0.92 13.18 6.03 8.22 824.2
Information extracted from FM 3-6 Numbers = hours
**Chemical Agent Resistant Clothing
Table 4-34. Chemical agent persistency at 70 degrees Fahrenheit

c. Chemical Agent Persistency at 80 degrees Fahrenheit

GA/GF GB GD/HL HD VX
CARC 0.71 2.45 4.64 6.33 634
Sand 1.24 4.28 8.12 11.07 1,109.5
Bare soil 2.84 9.8 18.56 25.32 2,536
Alkyd paint 0.92 13.18 6.03 8.22 824.2
Information extracted from FM 3-6 Numbers = hours
Table 4-35. Chemical agent persistency at 80 degrees Fahrenheit

d. Chemical Agent Persistency at 90 degrees Fahrenheit

GA/GF GB GD/HL HD VX
CARC 0.33 1.35 2.36 2.8 241
Sand 1.48 6.07 10.62 12.6 1,084.5
Bare soil 1.32 5.4 9.44 11.2 964
Alkyd paint 0.42 1.75 3.06 3.64 313.3
Information extracted from FM 3-6 Numbers = hours
Table 4-36. Chemical agent persistency at 90 degrees Fahrenheit

e. Detailed Equipment/Troop Decontamination Water Requirements

Item to be Decontaminated Number of Items Gallons of Water
Individual 1,000 28,500
Casualty 1,000 1,200 (+28,500)
Small Vehicle 50 5,200
Large Vehicle 50 7,500
Small Jet/Helicopter 12 1,800
Large Jet 12 7,200
Table 4-37. Equipment/troop decontamination water requirements

f. NBC Defense First-Aid Equipment

Medicants Per Man
Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) three kits
Nerve Agent Pretreatment Pyridostigmine (NAPP) one blister pack
Convulsant Antidote Nerve Agent (CANA) one
Table 4-38. NBC defense first-aid equipment (individual issue)

g. NBC Defense Reference Publications

JP 3-11, Joint Doctrine For Operations in Nuclear, Biological and Chemical (NBC) Environments, 26 Aug 2008
FM 3-6 or FMFM 7-11-H, Field Behavior of NBC Agents (Including Smoke and Incendiaries), 3 Nov 1986
MCWP 3-37 MAGTF Nuclear, Biological and Chemical Defense Operations, Sep 1998
FM 3-11 or MCWP 3-37.1, Multi-Service, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures For Nuclear, Biological and Chemical Defense
Operations, 10 Mar 2003
FM 3-11.4 or MCWP 3-37.2, Multi-Service, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures For Nuclear Biological and Chemical (NBC) Protection,
2 June 2003
FM 3-11.5 or MCWP 3-37.3, Multi-Service, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures For Nuclear Biological and Chemical Decontamination,
4 Apr 2006
FM 3-11.9, Potential Military Chemical/Biological Agents and Compounds, 10 Jan 2005

111
 FM 3-11.11, Flame, Riot Control Agents and Herbicide Operations, 10 Mar 2003
FM 3-11.14, Multi-Service, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures For Nuclear Biological and Chemical Vulnerability Assessment, 28 Dec
2004
FM 3-11.19, Multi-Service, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures For Nuclear Biological and Chemical Reconnaissance 30 Jul 2004
FM 3-11.21, Multi-Service, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures For Nuclear Biological and Chemical Aspects of Consequence
Management, 1 April 2008
FM 3-50, Smoke Operations, 31 Dec 2008
FM 3-90.15 Sensitive Site Operations, 25 Apr 2007
FM 4-02.7, Health Service Support in a Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Environment, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures 15 Jul 2009
FM 4-02.283, Treatment of Nuclear and Radiological Casualties, 20 Dec 2001
TC 3-10, Commander's Tactical NBC Handbook, 29 Sep 1994

4015. Engineer Bridging Considerations

Figure 4-12. Ribbon/assault floating bridge

Figure 4-13. Kings Law of River Crossing

a. Marine Corps Bridge Equipment (Ribbon Bridges and MGB)

When making a determination to perform a tactical river or gap crossing you must consider the following:
For gaps greater than 200 meters, rafting is generally more efficient due to currents and time to assemble.
Assume all bridging must sustain Class 70 loads. Match the assets available to the need. If you can use a
floating/ribbon bridge to meet your needs instead of a medium girder bridge (MGB), use it.

112
 Length (ft/m) Hours to Assemble Class
252/77 1.0 70
125/38 0.5 (30 minutes) 70
75/23 0.3 (20 minutes) 70
Table 4-39. Ribbon/assault floating bridge assembly
One floating/ribbon bridge set can span a maximum of 252 feet or 77 meters, and can support class 70 loads. The assembly time is
approximately 77m/hour.
Bridge Type Total Per ESB MPF
th th
Ribbon Bridge sets (3 per bridge Co) 9 6 ESB = 6, 8 ESB = 3 None (2 rafting outfits carried instead)
th th
MGB sets (3 per bridge co) 21 6 ESB = 6, 8 ESB = 3 1 per MPS squadron
Table 4-40. Number of bridge sets in major commands.
Notes:
Feet/meter conversion: 1ft = .3048 meters, 1 meter = 3.2808 ft.
Times are approximate. It generally takes more time and effort to move and offload bridging assets than it does to assemble them.
These tables are for best case scenarios and must be adjusted for water current conditions.
River Width (meters/feet) 100/328 150/492 300/964 400/1,312
Minutes per round trip 8 10 16 20
Rounds per hour 7 6 3 3
Number of rafts per centerline 1 2 3 5

Table 4-41. River crossing capabilities

River width (meters/feet) 500/1,640 600/1,968 800/2,824 1,000/3,280 1,200/3,936

Minutes per round trip 24 26 32 38 45
Rounds per hour 2 2 1 1 1
Number if rafts per centerline 5 6 6 6 6

Table 4-42. Raft crossing capabilities for longer span

Each ribbon bridge set has five ramp bays and 12 interior bays. An interior bay is 228.5 or 6.92 meters long and weighs 12,000 pounds. A ramp
bay is 190.7 or 5.81 meters long and weighs 11,700 pounds. An LVS MK-48/18 can carry and launch or recover two bays. Each bridge requires a
ramp bay at either end and enough interior bays to span a wet gap of up to 100 meters (300 feet). The bridge can be assembled at a rate of up to 200
meters per hour in daylight or up to 133 meters per hour at night. About 200 vehicles spaced 30 meters apart and moving at 16 km per hour can
cross the bridge. Alternately, ribbon bridge components can be assembled as rafts to serve as ferries. Each ferry requires two ramp bays and one or
more interior bays (up to four). Table 4-37 (below) shows the composition and capabilities (including military load capacity or MLC) of potential
ribbon bridge rafts.
Current Velocity in MPS (fps) and MLC
Assembly Load
Raft Type Class 0.9 1.2 1.5 2.5 2.7
Time Space 1.75 (6) 2 (7) 3 (10)
(3) (4) (5) (8) (9)
3 bays 6.7-m L 45 45 45 40 40 35 30 25
(2 ramp, 1 8 min
interior)
(22) C 45 45 35 25 15 10 0 0
4 bays 13-m L 70 70 70 60 60 60 55 45
(2 ramp, 2 12-min
interior)
(44) C 60 60 60 55* 40* 40* 15* 0
5 bays 20.1-m L 75 75 75 70 70 70 60 60
(2 ramp, 3 15-min
interior)
(66) C 75 70 75 70* 60* 50* 25* 0
L (wheel) 96 96 96 96 96 96 70 70
6 bays 26.8-m L (track) 80 80 80 70 70 70 70 70
(2 ramp, 4 20-min
interior)
(88) C (wheel) 96 96 96 70 70 55 30 0
C (track) 70 75 70 70 70 55 30 0
NOTES:
1. When determining raft classification, L refers to the longitudinal rafting and C refers to conventional rafting.
2. If the currents velocity in the loading/unloading area is greater than 1.5 MPS (5 fps), then conventional rafting must be used.
3. The roadway width of a ribbon raft is 4.1 meters (13 feet 5 inches).
4. The draft of a fully loaded ribbon raft is 61 centimeters (24 inches).
5. Vehicles should only be loaded on the interior bays.
6. Each raft requires a minimum of two bridge erection boats (BEB) for propulsion.
7. The assembly time for a raft increases by 50 percent at night.
*Three BEB are required for conventional rafting of 4, 5, or 6 bay rafts in current velocities greater than 1.5 Conventional Longitudinal
MPS (5 fps).

Table 4-43. Ribbon bridge raft capabilities (FM 90-13)

113
A rafting construction outfit consists of five interior bays (total length: 113 feet/34 meters) and two ramp bays, and can be
assembled in 25 minutes. These outfits are not issued to units but each MPS squadron has two and there are three spares. They
take longer to prepare than standard ribbon bridges but can serve in secure areas, free ribbon bridges for the forward areas.
The MGB is a two-girder, hand assembled deck bridge that fits inside a 20 ISO sea container. Its two longitudinal girders, with
deck units between, provide a 4.0m wide roadway. Girders of top panels can form a shallow, single-story configuration. This type
of bridge is used for short spans and light loads. A heavier double-story configuration using top panels and triangular bottom panels
is used for heavier loads or longer spans (see FM 5-212 1989).
SINGLE STORY CONFIGURATION DOUBLE STORY CONFIGURATION
5 bays; 9.8-m 8 bays; 15.2-m 12 bays; 22.6-m 4 bays; 16.8-m 8 bays; 24.1-m 12 bays; 31.4-m
Work Party 9 17 17 25 25 25
Work Time (day) 30-min 45-min 60-min 45-min 60-min 90-min
Work Time (night) 45-min 60-min 75-min 75-min 90-min 120-min
Notes: (1) Time/manpower figures assume good building sites (firm dry ground) (3) Add 20% for untrained personnel
(2) Time/manpower figures do not include work on approaches (4) Add 30% for adverse site conditions
Table 4-44. Medium girder bridge assembly requirements

b. Bailey M2 Bridge

Figure 4-14. Bailey bridge

The Bailey bridge is a through-type truss bridge, the roadway being carried between two main girders. The trusses in each girder
are formed by 10-foot panels pinned end to end. In this respect, the Bailey bridge is often referred to as the panel or truss
bridge. Standard parts can be used to assemble seven standard truss designs for efficient single spans up to 210 feet long and to
build panel crib piers supporting longer bridges. There are no Bailey/M2 bridges in the USMC inventory. There are Bailey bridges
in U.S. contingency stocks/ war reserve. Reference: FM 5-277 (Change 1, May 86)
Single/Single Double/Single Triple/Single Double/Double Triple/Double Double/Triple Triple/Triple
Truss/Story
(SS) (DS) (TS) (DD) (TD) (DT) (TT)
Max. MLC 70 length NA 50-ft (15m) 80-ft (24m) 110-ft (34m) 120-ft (37m) 140-ft (43m) 170-ft (52m)
Table 4-45. M2 Bailey bridge

Type of Construction
Span (ft/m) SS DS TS DD TD DT TT DT TT
Construction by Manpower Only Using One Crane
40/12.1 1.5
60/18.3 1.75 2.0
80/24.4 2.0 2.75 3.0
100/30.5 2.5 3 3.5 4.5
120/36.6 3.5 4.0 5 6.5
140/42.7 3.75 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.75 10.5
160/48.8 5.0 6.5 8.5 13.75 19.0 11.75 16.5
180/54.9 7 9.5 14.75 21.5 13.5 18.25
200/61 16.75 24.0 14.5 20.5
Table 4-46. Estimated time for assembly (hours)

114
c. Armored Vehicle-Launched Bridge (AVLB)

Figure 4-15. Armored Vehicle-Launched Bridge (AVLB)

The armored vehicle-launched bridge (ALVB) consists of three major sections: the launcher, the hull, and bridge. The launcher is
mounted as an integral part of the chassis. The bridge, when emplaced, is capable of supporting tracked and wheeled vehicles with
a military load. The bridge can be retrieved from either end. The roadway width of the AVLB is 12 feet. The bridge can be
deployed within two to five minutes, and retrieved in 10 minutes. The class 60 AVLB/scissors bridge can span a gap of 57 feet with
unprepared abutments or 60 feet with prepared abutments. An upgrade program will strengthen this bridge to class 70. Previous
edition of this pamphlet discussed the pending replacement the AVLB with the Joint Assault Bridge (JAB), based on the M1 tank
chassis and carrying a Class 70 bridge, but the JAB program was cancelled. The Army did procure 44 M104 Wolverines but
cancelled the balance of their order. Given the current trend toward lighter force future procurement is in doubt. The M104
Wolverine, is based on the M1 tank and when extended spans 24 meters. The 2-man crew of an AVLB or Wolverine can launch a
bridge from under armor but only a Wolverine can retrieve a bridge while its crew is fully armor protected. An AVLB must
dismount one crewman to guide the vehicle and connect it to its bridge in order to retrieve it.
MPS 1 MPS 2 MPS 3 I MEF II MEF III MEF SMCR Spares/Training Total
2 2 2 4 4 0 4 12 30
Note: Primary figures are for the AVLB. Each AVLB system consists of one M60 chassis and one scissors bridge.
Table 4-47. Armored Vehicle-Launched Bridge systems in the Marine Corps
The Marine Corps maintains four AVLB in each of its tank battalions. Each US Army engineer mobility augmentation company
(MAC) has six armored vehicle bridging systems. Six of them have Wolverines. The Army (but not the Marine Corps) carries spare
bridges for its AVLB and Wolverine bridging systems on low bed trailers at the corps level and higher. See FM 3-90.12/MCWP 3-
17.1 Combined Arms Gap Crossing Operations, July 2008.

4016. Engineer Breaching Considerations

See MCWP 3-17.3 (formerly FMFM 13-7) MAGTF Breaching Operations, and MCRP 3-17A (FM 5-34, former FMFRP 13-5)
Engineer Field Data.

a. Breaching Tips
Find a bypass, if possible (use caution to avoid kill zones). The acronym SOSRR stands for
Breach fundamentals:
Suppress
Need 2-Lanes for Battalion.
Obscure
Need 4-Lanes for Regiment.
Secure
Space lanes at least 500m apart.
Reduce
Go for more lanes than you need.
Resupply
Attack flanks (weak points) of obstacles or defense.

115
b. Breaching Sequence

Figure 4-16. Breaching Sequence

c. Breach Complexity
This following table shows the complexity and time factors for expeditious planning of a breach when briefing at the division or
higher level.
Action Element Time (Minutes) Controlled
Develop situation (verifying boundary of enemy obstacle system) Force in contact M to 2 S3/G3
Maneuver support force into overwatch position Support M + 2 to 15 Support CDR
Maneuver assault force into covered assault position Assault M + 2 to 15 Assault CDR
Call for Artillery DS Artillery M + 2 to 15 FSO
Build smoke Mortars M + 5 to 10 FSO
Suppress enemy with direct fires Support M + 15 to 29 Support CDR
Suppress enemy with artillery fires DS Artillery M + 10 to 29 FSO
Maintain smoke DS Artillery/mortars M + 10 to 30 FSO
Maneuver breach force to breach location Breach M + 20 to 30 Breach CDR
Reduce obstacle prepare two lanes Breach M + 23 to 30 Engineer leader
Place smoke pots Breach M + 23 to EOM Breach CDR
Shift direct fires off of the OBJ Support M + 29 to 30 Assault CDR
Shift indirect fires beyond OBJ DS Artillery M + 39to 30 Assault CDR
Assault to destroy enemy on far side of objective Assault M + 30 to 45 Assault CDR
Reorganize to continue the mission TF M + 45 to EOM S3
M = contact with obstacle EOM = End of Mission
Table 4-48. Breaching complexity and time factors

d. Breaching and Clearing Methods

Mines Weight Max. Lane Cleared Assembly Time Employment Time
Nomenclature Type
Cleared (lbs) Width Length (with crane & crew) In Minutes (Speed)
MK 155 MCL Trailer
AT/AP 3,200 8 m (26) 100 m (328) 35 minutes 4 (25 mph)
(1 MICLIC) Mounted
MK 154 MCL AAV
AT/AP 10,690 8 m (26) 300 m (984) 60 minutes 1 (30 mph)
(3 MICLIC) mounted
MICLIC = Mine Clearing Line Charge MCL = Mine Clearing Launcher
Table 4-49. Explosive breaching and clearing

116
 Mines Weight Width Preparation Time Employment Time
Nomenclature Type
Cleared (lbs) Meters (ft) (with crane & crew) In Minutes (Speed)
Roller Tank mounted AT/AP 20,000 2 @ 1.1 (3.6) 45 minutes 4 (5 mph)
Plow Tank mounted AT/AP 12,000 2 @ 1.8 (6) 45 minutes 4 (3 mph)

Table 4-50. Mechanical breaching and clearing

e. Breaching and Clearing Equipment

TAMCN Nomenclature Quantity Location
B0476 AN/PSS-14 Mine detector 74* CEB
B0589 M9 ACE 16 CEB
B0160 Assault Breaching Vehicle 8 CEB
B1298 MK155 Line Charge w/ M353 trailer 38 CEB
B1315 MK154 Line Charge (3 shot) 12 AA BN
E0996 M1A1 Tank Track width mine plow 16 Tank BN

Table 4-51. Breaching and clearing equipment in a Marine Division

4017. Engineer Obstacle Considerations

Obstacles should support weapon systems.
Obstacles should not impede our own mobility.
Obstacles must hinder enemy movement.
Obstacles are emplaced in depth, as resources will feasibly support considering time manpower and logistical complaints.

Max Effective
Friendly Max Effective Range Ex-Soviet
Range
M203 Grenade launcher 160 m GP-25 40-mm (rifle) Grenade launcher 200m
AT4 Anti-tank rocket 300m RPG-7 Antitank Grenade Launcher 300m
SMAW MK153 rocket launcher 450m RPG-29 Antitank rocket 500m
M249 Machinegun 800m RPK 7.62-mm Light Machinegun 800m
M240G- 7.62 Machinegun 1,100m PK/PKS 7.62-mm Machinegun 1,000m
M2 - .50 cal Machinegun 1,800m DShK-38/46 12.7-mm Machinegun 1,500m
MK-19 Grenade launcher 1,600m NSV 12.7-mm Machinegun 2,000m
LAV 25-mm All purpose rounds 1,800m AGS-17 30-mm Grenade Launcher 1,700m
LAV 25-mm High Explosive 2,200m BMP1 - 73mm 800m
JAVELIN 2,000m BMP2 & BTR90 - 30mm 1,000m
TOW 3,750m T55 - 100mm 1,500m
M1A2 120-mm 3,000m T62 - 115mm 1,600m
3,500m BTR60/70/80 & BRDM & towed - 14.5mm 2,000m
60-mm Mortar M224 (Illum) 3,200m T72, T80 & T90 - 125mm 2,400m
(WP) 3,500m BMP1 or ground mounted - AT3 3,000m
5,800m T80 - AT8 or T90 AT11 4,000m
81-mm Mortar M252 (Illum) 5,100m BMP2, BMD or ground AT4/AT5 4,000m
(WP) 3,500m AT-14 Kornet Laser Guides ATGM 5,500m
120-mm Mortar M120 7,200m 60-mm Mortar Type 89 (Chinese) 2,700m
AH-64 HELLFIRE 8,000m 82-mm Mortar M1937/M1943 3,040m
14,500m 82-mm Mortar 2B14-1 PODNOS 4,050m
105-mm howitzer
19,500m (RAP) 120-mm Mortar M1938/M1943 5,700m
18,000m (HE, ICM) 120-mm Mortar 2S12 SANI 7,100m
Artillery 155-mm 28,200m (base bleed) 107-mm Rocket (Chinese) 8,500m
30,000 (RAP) 122 mm D30 towed or 2S1 SP howitzer 15,300m
32,000m (DPICM) 152 mm D20 towed or 2S3 SP Howitzer 17,500m
227-mm MLR HIMARS
65,000m (ER DPICM) BM-21 MLRS 20,500m
MLRS-ATACMS (basic) 165,000m 130mm Field Gun M46 27,150m
Table 4-52. Weapon ranges to determine obstacle coverage by fire

117
a. Minefield Design

Fix
Disrupt

Block
Turn

Figure 4-17. Minefield design

b. Hand Emplacement
Disrupt Turn Fix Block
Std Minefield Frontage (M) 250 500 250 500
Depth (M) 100 300 120 320
30 Min 30 min 1 hours 36 Min 2 hrs

Table 4-53. Time to hand emplace minefield

Width of Avenue of
Disrupt Turn Fix Block
Approach (m)
500 0.5 hrs 1.4 hrs 1.0 hrs 4.0 hrs
1000 1.0 hrs 2.8 hrs 2.0 hrs 8.0 hrs
1500 1.5 hrs 4.2 hrs 3.0 hrs 12.0 hrs
2000 2.0 hrs 5.6 hrs 4.0 hrs 16.0 hrs
3000 3.0 hrs 8.4 hrs 6.0 hrs 24.0 hrs
4000 4.0 hrs 11.0 hrs 8.0 hrs 32.0 hrs
5000 5.0 hrs 14.0 hrs 10.0 hrs 40.0 hrs

Table 4-54. Company hours for hand emplacement

c. Demolitions
Material Time (hrs)
Target TNT Cratering Shaped Thermite Hours to destroy
(lbs) Charge (40 lbs) Charge (40 lbs) Grenades (ea.) w/10 men
Highways:
*Major bridge (over 400) 1200 3
*Minor bridge (over 400) 800 2
Tunnels 12,000 5
Road Craters
2-lane road (27) 7 2 2
4-lane road (70) 19 12 4

Railroads:
* Major bridge (over 400)
6
* Single track 3,000
6
* Double track 4,500
* Minor bridge (under 400)
4
* Single track 2,000
4
* Double track 3,000
5
* Tunnel 12,000 50
4
* Terminal facilities 1,000 125
* Rolling stock (locomotive and 30 cars) 50

118
 Material Time (hrs)
Target TNT Cratering Shaped Thermite Hours to destroy
(lbs) Charge (40 lbs) Charge (40 lbs) Grenades (ea.) w/10 men
Airfields:
* Runway (per 1000) 5,500 25 8
* Fuel storage (per tank)
* Below ground 400 1 1
* Above ground 1 1 0.2
*Radar/radio apparatus 30 10 0.5
POL Facilities:
Storage and handling 50 10 1
Refining 100 15 15 1
Distributing facilities 20 2 0.2
Electric Power Denial:
Generator 150 10 1
Transformer station 100 25 1
Telecommunications Denial:
Microwave tower 25 0.1
Telephone exchange 25 0.2
Repeater/radio station 50 2 0.2
Satellite Dish 25 2 0.1
Waterways Denial:
Lock 2,000 1
Levee wall 15 10 2
Dam (navigational) 1,000 2.5
This table is intended as a guide for planning purposes only. For further information see MCRP 3-17A (FM 5-34) Engineer Field Data
Notes:
(July 2005).

Table 4-55. Destruction of operational targets

4018. Engineer Survivability Considerations

Number of M9 Armored Combat Earthmovers or D7G Dozers
2 ACE 2 D7G 4 ACE 4 D7G 6 ACE 6 D7G 8 ACE 8 D7G
LAR Platoon (rein) (7 LAV all types) 16 hrs 8 hrs 8 hrs 4 hrs 6 hrs 3 hrs 4hrs 2 hrs
LAR Co (25 LAV of all types) 56 hrs 26 hrs 28hrs 13 hrs 21 hrs 10 hrs 14 hrs 6.5 hrs
TANK Platoon (4 M1A2) 9 hrs 8 hrs 5 hrs 4 hrs 4 hrs 3 hrs 2.5 hrs 2 hrs
TANK Co (14 M1A2) 32 hrs 26 hrs 16 hrs 13 hrs 12 hrs 10 hrs 8 hrs 6.5 hrs
FA Battery (6 155mm) 14 hrs 10 hrs 7 hrs 5 hrs 5 hrs 4 hrs 3.5 hrs 2.5 hrs
FA Battalion (18 155mm) 40 hrs 28 hrs 20 hrs 14 hrs 15 hrs 11 hrs 10 hrs 7 hrs
AAV Platoon (12 P7A1) 27 hrs 12 hrs 14 hrs 6 hrs 10 hrs 5 hrs 7 hrs 3 hrs
AAV Co (43 P7A1, 2 C7, 1 R7) 103 hrs 46 hrs 52 hrs 23 hrs 39 hrs 17 hrs 26 hrs 11 hrs

Table 4-56. Time required for the M9 ACE or the D7G Dozer to complete a fighting position
M9 ACE and D7G Dozers should operate in pairs or teams whenever possible. This increases productivity to about 2.5
for 2 blades.
For each 3-hours of dig time with an ACE or D7G, allow an additional -hour for maintenance and -hour for moving
and marking.

119
4019. Engineer Bulk Fuel Considerations
The Marine Corps has developed a family of tactical fuel systems (TFS) based on a common set of standard components. This
permits limitless combinations of tailored systems to meet mission requirements.

Figure 4-18. Current USMC tactical fuel systems (overview)

a. Amphibious Assault Fuel System (AAFS)

The Amphibious Assault Fuel System (AAFS) receives, stores, transfers, and dispenses bulk fuel for all elements of the MAGTF.
The system receives and stores fuels and then distributes them to sub-systems (such as TAFDS, HERS, GERS and ERS, described
below) where it can be dispensed to aircraft, ground vehicles etc. An AAFS consists of six 20,000-gallon and twenty 50,000-gallon
collapsible fuel tanks together with connecting hoses, pumping stations etc. An engineer bulk fuel company can operate four AAFS
(one per platoon) but a full MEF requires eight. Each MEF can request a second bulk fuel company from the 6th Engineer Support
Battalion USMCR. Although the time required for establishing an AAFS can vary widely a generally accepted rule of thumb is
about 96 hours.
CAPABILITY CAPACITY
Storage 1,120,000 gallons
Ship-to-shore 720,000 gallons per day
Receipt
From rail tanker or tanker trucks 1,110,000 gallons per day
Bulk or retail issues 550,000 gallons per day
Issue
Assault hose line bulk distribution (HRS) 720,000 gallons per day (system pumping capacity is 600 gal per minute)
Note: All receipt, issue and transfer capabilities are based on a 20 hour operational day (TM 11275-15/3C)

Table 4-57. Amphibious Assault Fuel System (TAMCN B0685)

b. Tactical Airfield Fuel Dispensing System (TAFDS)

The Tactical Airfield Fuel Dispensing System (TAMCN B0625) receives, stores, and dispenses aviation fuel at expeditionary
airfields. With the single fuel on the battlefield concept, the system will be able to supply fuel to both aviation and ground assets. It
has a storage capacity of 320,000 gallons (typically in four 50,000-gallon and six 20,000-gallon fuel bladders) and a pump
capability up to 600 GPM. It can operate up to 12 aircraft refueling points simultaneously. It can receive up to 720,000 gallons of
fuel per day (20 hours) from multiple sources (but usually tanker trucks or an AAFS hose line). Each MWSS is allowed three
TAFDS.

120
c. Helicopter Expedient Refueling System (HERS)
The Helicopter Expedient Refueling System refuels helicopters in forward areas and remote sites. It is normally used in Forward
Arming and Refueling Point (FARP) operations. It has a maximum capacity of 18,000 gallons (six 500-gallon and five 3,000-
gallon bladders) and a pumping capability of 125 GPM. It can operate four refueling points and may be deployed as a whole, in
part, or with other tactical fuel systems. Each MWSS has three HERS (see 3002c).

d. Expedient Refueling System (ERS)

The ERS refuels ground vehicles in advanced positions. It consists of a 125 GPM pump and several 500-gallon and/or 3,000 gallon
bladders and other components necessary to establish two refueling points.

e. Hose Reel System (HRS)

The hose reel system (TAMCN B1139) provides the bulk fuel transfer capability within the MAGTF. A full HRS has two base
units, two power units, 11 hose reels (four 600-foot sections of six-inch lay-flat lightweight hose per reel; or about five miles of
hose per HRS) and ancillary components necessary to interconnect with the other fuel systems. The HRS has a lay rate to 2 to 2.5
miles per hour in powered mode (or up to 5 miles per hour manually) and a retrieval rate of 0.5 to 0.75 miles per hour. An HRS can
transfer up to 600 gallon per minute or up to 720,000 gallons per 20 hour work day. A bulk fuel company is authorized one HRS
for each AAFS.

f. SIXCON Fuel Module System and Water Module System

The SIXCON fuel module system consists of steel framed modules containing either a 900-gallon collapsible tank or a pump
system (125 GPM). Modules are designated for either water or fuel. Six modules can be assembled into a package of the same
dimensions as an ISO 20-foot container (8 x 8 x 20) for shipboard transport or they can be moved individually by ground
vehicles or aircraft. A pump module and several bladder modules can make a static (or mobile, if mounted on vehicles) water or
fuel distribution point. The widely-deployed SIXCON fuel module system can refuel or de-fuel aircraft, ground vehicles, and
stationary equipment. (See 3002c for more info.)

g. Ground Expedient Refueling System (GERS)

The Ground Expedient Refueling System (GERS) stores and distributes fuel for ground vehicles and stationary support equipment.
HMMWV or larger tactical vehicles can transport and/or operate GERS or GERS can function as a stand alone system. GERS can
refuel multiple vehicles simultaneously while meeting specific host vehicle capabilities or mission profiles. It can operate the
pumping mechanism with either its own power source or the host vehicles. GERS is rapidly assembled from man-portable
components. It can be scaled as either a small or medium sized system. Both of these employ two 24 volt air compressors, fueling
and air hoses and other supporting hardware but the small system uses six 28-gallon fuel bladders while the medium system uses
four 155-gallon bladders.

h. Bulk Fuel Planning Considerations.

Refer to the following publications for guidance and planning purposes: MCWP 4-11.6, Petroleum and Water Logistics
Operations; TM 3835-OI/1A, Installation and Operations of Marine Corps Tactical Fuel Systems; Aircraft Refueling NATOPS
Manual (NAVAIR 00-80T-109), and MIL-STD-3004A DoD Standard Practice Quality Surveillance for Fuels, Lubricants, and
Related Products. Part of this information is summarized in Table 4-66.
Type Storage Cap Time to construct (earthwork)
Helicopter Expedient Refueling System (HERS) 10K gal No earthwork required
Fabric Tank Linear Tank Farm 20k gal 2 D7 Dozer Hours
Horse shoe Tank Farm Layout 120k gal 3 D7 Dozer Hours
AAFS with Side by Side Linear Tank Farm Berms 600k gal 12 D7 Dozer Hours
Fabric Fuel Tank Berm 50k gal 1 D7 Dozer Hours
Horse shoe Fuel Tank 50k gal 3 D7 Dozer Hours
Table 4-58. Time to construct various tank farm configurations

4020. Engineer Expeditionary Airfield Considerations

The storage of these assets on MPF ships have reduced the US deployment time to any theater of operations in the world from 9-10
weeks to 2-3 weeks. Edge clamps, cruciform stakes, and earth anchors are used to secure AM-2 matting to the ground. Portable
aircraft arresting gear and marking systems are installed to form a complete airfield that enables air activity at night, in inclement
weather conditions, and otherwise unprepared environments.

121
 CONFIGURATION GRAPHIC EQUIPMENT NEEDED TIME TO CONSTRUCT
(1 each) F70 Field Tool Kit
12 AM2 mat; 6 AM2 mat Crew of 16 can construct in 8
96 x 96 VTOL pad
Anchors and accessories hrs
H-Connectors
Site preparation: A crew of 15
working 10 hrs per day can
72 x 960 runway with 2 integral 96 x 96 complete in 5 days with:
VTOL pads. (1 each) F70 Field Tool Kit 2 graders
Parking hides for 11 MV-22 (designed for (224 pieces) F71 - 12 AM2 mat 2 dump trucks
25 x 102), no ordnance. (209 pieces) F72 6 AM2 mat 2 compactors
Sub-grade prepared to a minimum CBR (6 sets) F74 Anchors and 1 D7 dozer
of 25. accessories 2 TRAM w/ buckets
Stakes are installed as vertical (4 sets) F77 H-Connectors 6-10K forklifts
and horizontal load devices Installation: A Crew of 36
working 10 hrs per day can
complete in 3 days.
72 x 960 runway with 2 integral 96 x 96 Site preparation: A crew of 15
VTOL pads. working 10 hrs per day can
Parking hides for 11 AV-8B (designed for complete in 5 days with:
32 x 56). (1 each) F70 Field Tool Kit 2 graders
Net explosive weight of 3,000 lbs (267 pieces) F71 - 12 AM2 mat
2 dump trucks
considered for each aircraft. Sub-grade (267 pieces) F72 6 AM2 mat
2 compactors
prepared to a minimum CBR of 25. (6 sets) F74 Anchors and
1 D7 dozer
accessories
Note: If any other type aircraft operate on (6 sets) F77 H-Connectors 2 TRAM w/ buckets
this airfield, the configuration must be 6-10K forklifts
redesigned to accommodate new Installation: A Crew of 36
ordnance separation distance and aircraft working 10 hrs per day can
clearance zones complete in 3 days.
Note: Expeditionary airfields (EAF) can assume an infinite number of configurations. The three shown above are merely examples. There is no standard. Per the AM-2
Tech Manual, a 16 man crew can install 3,300 ft2 per hour.
Table 4-59. Time to construct various expeditionary airfield configurations
Type Minimum Parking Hide Requirements for Area Required
Time to Construct
Aircraft Drive-in/Drive Out (for 1 airframe) for 8 Airframes
Wing span w/missiles 41
Length 56
Forward Clearance 63 6 Crew of 16, working 10-hr days, can complete in
F-18 Aft Clearance 63 6
81, 984 ft
2.5 days.
Side Clearance 7 6
Overall Area Required 10,250 ft
Width (Rotors Turning) 52
Length (Rotors Turning) 85
Forward Clearance 25 Crew of 16, working 10-hr days, can complete in
CH-46 Aft Clearance 25
82,384 ft
2.5 days.
Side Clearance 13
Overall Area Required 14,136 ft

MV-22 Full information is not yet available; however this aircrafts footprint was designed to be similar to that of the CH-46.
Width (Rotors Turning) 79
Length (Rotors Turning) 85
Forward Clearance 25 Crew of 16, working 10-hr days, can complete in 6
CH-53 Aft Clearance 25
189,696 ft
days.
Side Clearance 13
Overall Area Required 23,712 ft
Width (Rotors Turning) 48
Length (Rotors Turning) 58
Forward Clearance 49 Crew of 16, working 10-hr days, can complete in 3
UH-1 Aft Clearance 49
91,104 ft
days.
Side Clearance 13
Overall Area Required 11,388 ft
Width (Rotors Turning) 48
Length (Rotors Turning) 58
Forward Clearance 49 Crew of 16, working 10-hr days, can complete in 3
AH-1 Aft Clearance 49
91,104 ft
days.
Side Clearance 13
Overall Area Required 11,388 ft
Wing Span w/missiles 32
Length 47
Forward Clearance 50 Crew of 16, working 10-hr days, can complete in 2
AV-8B Aft Clearance 50
55,200 ft
days.
Side Clearance 8
Overall Area Required 6,808 ft
Table 4-60. Time to construct expeditionary airfield parking hides for various aircraft

122
4021. Engineer Water Supply/Production Considerations
a. Tactical Water Purification System (TWPS)
The Tactical Water Purification System (TWPS) is a skid-mounted, generator-powered system able to produce potable water from
any available raw water source at a rate of 1,200-1,500 gallons of water per hour. The TWPS replaces the aging 600-gallon per
hour Reverse Osmosis Water Purification Unit (ROWPU), which has far exceeded its eight-year service life and cannot meet future
needs. Procurement of the TWPS is complete. The Marine Corps has transferred its ROWPU to the Army but in Iraq is using many
ex-USMC ROWPU on loan from the Army. TWPS supports not only to Army and Marine Corps units but also civilian agencies
and/or host nations during emergencies, disaster relief, and peacekeeping missions.
The TWPS can produce drinking water from a broad range of water sources including:
Fresh water containing dirt (dissolved solids) and micro-organisms.
Brackish water containing dirt, micro-organisms, salt and other dissolved solids.
Seawater containing dirt, micro-organisms and high concentrations of salt and other dissolved solids.
Water containing nuclear, biological, or chemical warfare (NBC) agents.
The TWPS is fielded in two versions: a Marine Corps version designated MC-TWPS and an Army version designated A-TWPS.
The differences between the two models centers primarily on the extended capability modules that are optional and packaged
separately for the MC-TWPS but that are standard and packed with the A-TWPS. There is an Air Force version similar to that of
the Marine Corps. Key differences between the Army and Marine Corps/Air Force versions of TWPS and ROWPU are
summarized in the table below.
MC-TWPS (1) A-TWPS (2) MC-ROWPU (3) A-ROWPU (3)
1,500 (fresh water) 1,500 (fresh water)
Production Rate (gallons per hour) (4) 600 (maximum) 600 (maximum)
1,200 (sea water) 1,200 (sea water)
Weight (lbs) (without fuel) 9,552 22,588 7,300 16,975
Length (feet) 13.75 20.00 9.45 19.01
Width (feet) 7.17 8.00 6.91 8.00
Height (feet) 6.50 8.00 5.68 8.08
Power source (5) 60-kw generator 60-kw generator 30-kw generator 30-kw generator
Notes: (1) The Marine Corps TWPS does not include its own generator and must obtain one separately. Extended capability modules (cold
weather, waste storage cleaning, ocean intake structure system, NBC treatment and NBC survivability) are also available separately.
(2) The Army TWPS is packed in an ISO shelter on a skid that houses a generator and all extended capability modules. It also includes an
extended distribution kit (not available for the Marine Corps version).
(3) The Army ROWPU includes a five-ton trailer and a generator. The skid-mounted Marine Corps ROWPU does not.
(4) These rates can be significantly reduced at low temperatures or when the water has a high content of dissolved solids. ROWPU cannot
remove chlorine contamination but TWPS can.
(5) A 60-kw generator powering a TWPS cannot simultaneously furnish power for any other purpose.
Table 4-61. Comparison of the TWPS and ROWPU water purification systems

b. Lightweight Water Purification System (LWPS)

The Lightweight Water Purification System (LWPS) is now entering service with the Marine Corps. It entered IOC with the Army
in FY05 and acquisition by the Army should be complete in FY09. The LWPS consists of a feed water pump, hoses, Reverse
Osmosis Water Purification Unit (ROWPU) elements, ultra filtration, high-pressure pump, control panel, 3-kilowatt tactical quiet
generator, and a 1,000-gallon water storage and distribution system. Like TWPS, the LWPS can purify NBC contaminated or salt
water. It is mounted on modular skids that can be lifted by four people and will normally be transported in a 2-door HMMWV,
though it can be lifted by helicopter or Osprey. It can supply 125 gallons per hour (GPH) of potable water from a fresh water source
or 75 GPH from a salt water source. In the Marine Corps it replaces the Medium Fresh Water Purification Unit (MFWPU), which
is now nearly useless because of its inability to purify NBC contaminated or salt water.

c. Load Handling System Compatible Water Tank Rack (Hippo)

The Load Handling System Compatible Water Tank Rack (Hippo) replaces
the 3K and 5K Semi-trailer Mounted Fabric Tanks (SMFT). Hippo consists
of a 2,000 gallon potable water tank in an ISO frame with an integrated
pump, engine, alternator, filling stand, and 70-foot hose reel with bulk
suction and discharge hoses. It has the capacity to pump 125 gallons of
water per minute.

Hippo is fully functional mounted or dismounted and is transportable when

full, partially full, or empty. It is designed to operate in cold weather environments and can prevent water from freezing at -25
degrees Fahrenheit. Hippo can be moved and set up rapidly. In addition, it can be established using minimal assets and personnel.
It can be used to fill small containers, to include canteens.

123
d. Water Supply Support Equipment
The water supply support system consists of modular components to provide flexible and responsive water support. The ability to
alter the system configuration and the interchangeability of components allows for the creation of limitless combinations of tailored
systems to meet any mission requirement. Table 4-67 lists major water supply support systems for each MEF and MPSRON.
TAMCN Nomenclature MPSRON 1 MPSRON 2 MPSRON 3 I MEF II MEF III MEF
B0071 Light-Weight water Purification System (1) 0 0 0 38 38 37
B0571 500 gallon water drum 42 42 42 66 48 66
Forward area water point supply support
B0676 7 7 7 12 9 11
system (FAWPSS)
B1581 Sixcon water pump module 43 43 43 119 82 53
B1582 350 GPM water pump 6 6 6 11 12 7
B2086 Sixcon water tank module 167 167 167 326 306 209
B2130 3,000 gal collapsible tank 123 123 123 748 804 489
B2131 Tank farm interconnection set 16 16 16 20 20 18
B2391 TWDS Pump station (2) 6 6 6 4 4 4
B2392 TWDS Storage assembly (2) 2 2 2 2 2 2
B2393 TWDS Distribution point (2) 2 2 2 2 2 2
B2394 TWDS 600 GPM water pump (2) 6 6 6 4 4 4
B2395 TWDS 5 mile segment kit (2) 1 1 1 2 2 2
B2605 1500 GPH TWPS 20 20 20 37 37 33
B2628 Medium Fresh Water Purification Unit (1) 0 0 0 38 38 37
B2631 50,000 gallon water tank 18 18 18 4 4 4
B2632 20,000 gal water tank 16 16 16 38 38 22
Notes: (1) The Light-Weight Water Purification System (LWPS) is replacing the Medium Fresh Water Purification Unit (MFWPU) on a one for
one basis. (2) TWDS = Tactical Water Distribution System
Table 4-62. Water supply support system allowances

4022. Movement Control Concept

32
8T
CP N 45

B IRCH GOMERVILLE
MSR

35
75

MARDIV 6T
CP
7

XXX
TC
P

MEF

LE
AP
RM
MS
H
AS
SR
M
P
C
5T

4
TC
P

MS

QUAKETOWN
R

JVILLE
OA
K

23

54

Figure 4-19. Movement Control diagram

124
4023. Movement Control Planning Factors
See MCRP 4-11.3F Convoy Operations Handbook, MCRP 3-11.3H (FM 4-01.45) Multi-Service Tactics, Techniques, and
Procedures for Tactical Convoy Operations, and FM 4-01.30 Movement Control.
Movements are measured by calculating how long it takes to move a given distance. The three methods of measurement are speed,
pace, and rate of march. They are defined as follows:
Speed is the actual rate at which a vehicle is the actual rate at which a vehicle is moving at a given time as shown on the
speedometer. It is expressed as KPH or MPH.
Pace is the regulated speed of a convoy or an element as set by a lead vehicle, the pacesetter. It is constantly adjusted to
suit road, terrain, and weather conditions. Pace is also expressed as KPH or MPH.
Rate of march is the average number of kilometers traveled in a specific time period. It includes short periodic halts and
short delays, but does not include long halts, such as those for eating meals or for overnight stops. It is expressed in KMH
or MPH. Rate of march is used in movement calculations.

a. Time-Distance Factors
Time and distance factors are used to perform a wide range of calculations for planning highway movements. They can be used to
develop movement tables and to conduct expedient planning and calculating to deconflict movement requests.

b. Distance Factors
Distance factors are expressed in kilometers or meters. The following terms are used to describe distance factors:
Length of any column or element of a column- length of a roadway which the column occupies. It is measured from the
front bumper of the lead vehicle to the rear bumper of the trail vehicle and includes all gaps inside the column.
Road space - length of a column, plus any space (safety factor), added to the length to prevent conflict with preceding or
succeeding traffic.
Gap - space between vehicles, march units, serials, and columns. Gap is measured from the trail vehicle of one element to
the lead vehicle of the following element. The gap between vehicles is normally expressed in meters. The gap between
march elements is normally expressed in kilometers.
Lead - linear spacing between the heads of elements in a convoy or between heads of successive vehicles, march units,
serials, or columns.
Road distance - distance from point to point on a route, normally, expressed in kilometers.
Road clearance distance - distance that the head of a column must travel for the entire column to clear the RP or any
point along the route. Road clearance distance equals the column's length or road space plus road distance.

c. Time Factors
Time is expressed in hours or minutes. The following terms are used to describe time factors:
Pass time (or time length) - time required for a column or its elements to pass a given point on a route.
Time space - time required for a column or its elements to pass any given point on a route plus any additional time (safety
factor) added to the pass time.
Time gap- time measured between vehicles, march units, serials, or columns as they pass a given point. It is measured
from the trail vehicle of one element to the lead vehicle of the following element.
Time lead - time measured between individual vehicles or elements of a column, measured from head to head, as they
pass a given point.
Time distance - time required to move from one point to another at a given rate of march. It is the time required for the
head of a column or any single vehicle of a column to move from one point to another at a given rate of march.
Road clearance time - total time required for a column or one of its elements to travel the road distance and clear a point
along the route or the RP. Road clearance time equals the column's pass time or time space plus time distance.

d. Distance, Rate, and Time Calculations

Distance, Rate, and time factors are used to make scheduling calculations for columns of any size. When two of the three factors
are known, the third can be found by using one of the equations shown in the following figure. These factors are determined using
the following formulas
Distance equals rate multiplied by time. If the rate of march is 40 KMPH and time is 4 hours, the distance is 160 kilometers.
40 x 4 = 160
Rate equals distance divided by time. If a convoy travels for 5 hours to complete a 190 kilometer trip, its rate of march is 38
KMPH.

125
 190 5 = 38
Time equals distance divided by rate. If the distance is 210 kilometers and the rate of march is 42 KMPH, the time is 5 hours.
210 42 = 5

Figure 4-20. Time and Distance factors

e. Finding an Unknown Factor of Distance, Rate, or Time

Divide a triangle as shown. To find an unknown factor, cover it. The uncovered portion of the triangle gives you D
the formula for finding the unknown.
For example, if the distance (D) is unknown, cover it and RT (rate x time) remains. If rate (R) is unknown, R T
covering R leaves D/T. Do the same for time (T), and you find D/R.

f. Arrive and Clear Time Calculations

Arrive and clear times are not the same as time factors. The time factors measure a quantity of time or distance. Arrive and clear
times represent actual time as displayed on a clock. The arrive time is the time the first vehicle in the column will arrive at an SP,
CP, or RP. It is derived from the time distance. The clear time is the time the last vehicle in the column will clear that SP, CP, or
RP.
Calculating Arrive Times. The arrive time at the SP is the same as the SP time. To calculate the arrive time at the first
CP, take the distance from the SP to the first CP, divide by the planned rate of march, and multiply by 60 (minutes). Add
this time to the arrive time at the SP to determine the arrive time at the first CP.
Example: Distance from SP to first CP: 10 km
March rate: 50 KMIH
Solution: 10 50 = .20 hrs x 60 = 12 min

126
 If the arrive time at the SP was 0800, then the arrive time at the first CP would be 0812.
To calculate the arrive time at the second CP, take the distance from the first CP to the second CP, divide by the rate of
march, and multiply by 60. Add the amount of time to the arrive time at the first CP to determine the arrive time at
the second CP.
Example: Distance from first to second CP: 15 km
March rate: 50 KMIH
Solution: 15 50 = .30 hrs x 60 = 18 min
If the arrive time at the first CP was 0812, then the arrive time at the second CP would be 0830. Continue this method
to calculate the arrive time at succeeding CPs through the RP.
Calculating Clear Times. To calculate the clear times at each CP, planner must determine the pass time. Calculating
pass time requires four calculations: density, time gaps, road space, and pass time. These four calculations are determined
using the following formulas:
Density = 1,000/Vehicle gap + average length of vehicle
Note: Vehicle gap is expressed in meters, representing the gap between vehicles. Average length of vehicle is expressed
in meters, representing the average length of the most common vehicle in the column.
Example: If the vehicle gap is 100 meters and the average vehicle length is 18 meters, then
Density = 1,000/100 + 18 = 1,000/118 = 8.5 vehicles per kilometer
Time gaps = [(number of march units 1) x (march unit time gap)] + [(number of serials - 1) x (serial time gap march
unit time gap)].
Example: If a column has two serials with two march units each and the gap between march units is 5 minutes and the
gap between serials is 10 minutes, then
Time gaps = [(4 - 1) x 5) + [(2 - 1) x 5] = [3 x 5] + [1 x 5] = 15 + 5 = 20 minutes
Road space = number of vehicles/density + time gaps rate/60 (minutes)

Example: number of vehicles = 87

Density = 8.5 per km
Rate = 50 KMH
Time gaps = 20
Road space = 87/8.5 + 20 x 50/60 = 10.2 + 16.8 = 26.9 km
Pass time = road-space x 60/rate
Example: Continuation from above.
Pass time = 26.9 x 60/50 = 1,614/50 = 32.2 or 33 minutes

In this example, the clear time at the SP is 33 minutes after the first vehicle crossed the SP. If the arrival time at the SP is
0800 the clear time at the SP will be 0833. If the arrival time at the first CP is 0812, the clear time at the first CP will be
0845. Use this same method to calculate the arrive and clear times at succeeding CPs to the RP. This movement can be
depicted as:
CP Arrive Time Clear Time
1 0800 0833
2 0812 0845
3 0845 0930
Table 4-63. Example of clear and arrive times 1.
The pass time will stay the same throughout the route as long as the march rate and density do not change. If the march
rate or density changes, then recalculate the pass time to determine the new clear time.
Rest Halts. The march rate allows for short halts, but not scheduled rest halts. Plan scheduled rest halts during the
movement planning process. When planning rest halts, allow time to get vehicles off the road and staged, time to rest,
and time to get vehicles back on the road. If you need 10 minutes for a rest halt, then schedule 15 minutes for the halt to
ensure time to get vehicles on and off the road.

127
 If a rest halt is scheduled at a CP, the arrive time at the CP does not change. What changes is the clear time at that CP
and the arrive and clear times at succeeding CPs. Adjust the clear time by the scheduled halt time. If a rest halt is
scheduled between CPs, adjust both the arrive and clear times at the next CP by the scheduled halt time. Continuing,
with the previous example, if you plan a 15-minute rest halt between CP 2 and CP 3, you must adjust the times as
follows:
CP Arrive Time Clear Time
1 0800 0833
2 0812 0845
3 0845 0918
Table 4-64. Example of clear and arrive times 2.
Note the 15-minute delay in arriving and clearing CP 3. If you planned the rest halt at CP2, your adjustments would be as
follows:
CP Arrive Time Clear Time
1 0800 0833
2 0812 0900
3 0845 0918
Table 4-65. Example of clear and arrive times 3.
Note the 15-minute delay in clearing CP 2, arriving at CP 3, and clearing CP3.
The pass time will stay the same throughout the route as long as the march rate and density do not change. If the march
rate or density changes, you must recalculate the pass time to determine the new clear time. Follow these guidelines to
simplify calculations:
Prepare and use conversion tables for changing US common distances to metric distances, number of vehicles to
time length, and distance to time.
Standardize variables to reduce calculation time. When possible, use standard march rates and density.

4024. Movement Planning Data

a. Unopposed Foot March
Rate of March Normal March Forced March
Visibility
(km/hr) (8 hrs-km) (12 hrs-km)
Day 4 32 48
Roads
Night 3 24 36
Day 2 16 24
Cross Country
Night 1 8 12
Note: Computed on a 50-minute hour, allowing 10 minute halt each hour.
Table 4-66. Movement planning for unopposed foot march

b. Unopposed Vehicle Movement Speed

Visibility M1/AAV/BFV Wheeled Vehicle
Day 40 km/hr 35 km/hr
Maximum Unopposed Road Speed
Night 30 km/hr 25 km/hr
Day 20 km/hr 10-15 km/hr
Maximum Unopposed Off-road Speed
Night 10 km/hr 5-10 km/hr
Table 4-67. Movement planning for unopposed vehicle movement

c. Opposed Vehicle Movement Speed (Delaying)

Visibility M1/AAV/BFV Wheeled Vehicle
Maximum Opposed Road Speed vs. Enemy Day 6-10 km/hr 6-10 km/hr
Delaying Night 2-4 km/hr 2-3 km/hr
Maximum Opposed Off-Road Speed vs. Day 4-6 km/hr 2-4 km/hr
Enemy Delaying Night 2-3 km/hr 1-2 km/hr

Table 4-68. Movement planning for enemy delaying vehicle movement

128
d. Opposed Vehicle Movement Speed (Defending)
Visibility M1/AAV/BFV Wheeled Vehicle
Maximum Opposed Road Speed vs. Enemy Day 1-2 km/hr 1-1.5 km/hr
Defending Night 1 km/hr 0.5-1 km/hr
Maximum Opposed Off-Road Speed vs. Day 1-1.5 km/hr .05-1 km/hr
Enemy Defending Night .05-1 km/hr .05 km/hr

Table 4-69. Movement planning for enemy defending vehicle movement

e. Typical Pass Times for a Tactical Road March (U.S. Army)

Heavy Division on One Route Brigade on One Route
Rate (km/hr) 40 30 25 40 30 25
Column Length (km) 301 245 180 70 55 40
Pass Time 7 hrs, 30 min 8 hrs, 15 min 7 hrs, 15 min 1 hr, 45 min 2 hrs 1 hr, 40 min

Table 4-70. Typical pass times for a tactical road march

f. Movement Planning
Speed miles/Km Rates of March Minutes to Meters per Minutes to Travel
per Hour Miles/Km per Hour * Travel 1 Km* Minute 1 Mile *
10/mi/hr 8 mi/hr
5 200 7.5
16 km/hr 12 km/hr
10/mi/hr 9 mi/hr
4 250 7.5
15 km/hr 15 km/hr
15 mi/hr 12 mi/hr
3 333 5
24 km/hr 20 km/hr
20 mi/hr 16 mi/hr
2.4 417 3.75
32 km/hr 25 km/hr
25 mi/hr 19/mi/hr
2 500 3
40 km/hr 30 km/hr
30 mi/hr 25 mi/hr
1.5 667 2.4
48 km/hr 40 km/hr
35 mi/hr 30 mi/hr
1.3 767 2
48 km/hr 46 km/hr
40 mi/hr 35 mi/hr
1.13 883 1.5
64 km/hr 53 km/hr
This table provides the time required to travel 1 km or 1 mile while using specified march speeds.
* The travel times are calculated based upon rates of march (miles/km in 1 hour) and include time for scheduled short halts and time
lost due to road and traffic conditions. The time for long halts must be added to the total time traveled (miles or km) by the travel time
factor for 1 mile or 1 km for the designated speed.
Pass Time Computation:
________Vehicles________
Number of Passage Points (PP) = Vehicles per Passage Point
Rate of Movement (MKPH)
Column Interval (X Km) = Vehicles per hour at PP
___Vehicles per PP___
= Pass Time
Vehicles per Hour at PP

Table 4-71. Movement planning

129
4025. Logistics Concept

Figure 4-21. Logistics concept diagram

4026. Logistics Planning Factors

a. Marine Expeditionary Force Supply Requirements
Daily 30 DOS 60 DOS
Class I 196 5,594 11,788
Class II 83 2,500 5,000
Class III (P) 40 1,200 2,400
Class III (B) 950,010 28,500,300 75,000,600
Class IV 139 4,183 8,366
Class V 1,600 74,000 96,000
Class VI 26 780 1,560
Class VIII 3 100 200
Class IX 41 1,240 2,480
Water 260,300 7,809,000 15,618,000
Mail 34 1,020 2,040

Table 4-72. Marine Expeditionary Force daily supply requirements

130
b. Class I (Food)
A-ration 2.54 lbs/meal
B-ration 1.278 lbs/meal
MRE 1.860 lbs/meal
Volume per case MRE 0.83 ft
Ration Cold Weather 2.750 PMD
Health Comfort Pack 0.146 PMD

125 cases per 500 personnel

17.64 lbs per case
52 cases per new pallet
48 cases per old pallet
32 pallets per LCAC (single stack -- to be used in 4-8 ft seas)
64 pallets per LCAC (double stack to be used in 0-4 ft seas)
17.64 lbs X 52 cases = 917 lbs per 52 case pallet
17.64 lbs X 48 cases = 847 lbs per 48 case pallet
917 lbs per new pallet X 32 pallets = 29,344 lbs per LCAC (in 4-8 ft seas) = 14.67 STONS
917 lbs per new pallet X 64 pallets = 58,688 lbs per LCAC (in 0-4 ft seas) = 29.34 STONS
847 lbs per new pallet X 32 pallets = 27,104 lbs per LCAC (in 4-8 ft seas) = 13.55 STONS
847 lbs per new pallet X 64 pallets = 54,208 lbs per LCAC (in 0-4 ft seas) = 27.10 STONS
Table 4-73. Class I (food) planning factors for LCAC cargo movement

c. Class I (Water) gallons per man (GPM)

Daily GPM Requirements
Function
Sustaining Minimum
Drinking 1.5 1.5
Personal Hygiene 1.7 1.0
Field Feeding 2.8 0.8
Level 1 Medical Treatment 0.4 0.4
Level 2 Medical Treatment 0.7 0.7
Subtotal 7.1 4.4
+10% waste 0.7 0.4
Total 7.8 4.8
Table 4-74. Class I (Water) requirements for temperate zones (MCWP 4-11.6)
Daily GPM Requirements
Function
Sustaining Minimum
Drinking 3.0 3.0
Personal Hygiene 1.7 1.0
Field Feeding 2.8 0.8
Heat Casualty Treatment 0.2 0.2
Level 1 Medical Treatment 0.4 0.4
Level 2 Medical Treatment 0.9 0.9
Subtotal 9.0 6.3
+10% Waste 0.9 0.6
Total 9.9 6.9
Table 4-75. Class I (Water) requirements for tropical zones (MCWP 4-11.6)
Daily GPM Requirements
Function
Sustaining Minimum
Drinking 2.0 2.0
Personal Hygiene 1.7 1.0
Field Feeding 2.8 0.8
Level 1 Medical Treatment 0.4 0.4
Level 2 Medical Treatment 0.7 0.7
Subtotal 7.6 4.9
+10% waste 0.8 0.5
Total 8.4 5.4

Table 4-76. Class I (Water) requirements for arctic zones (MCWP 4-11.6)

131
 Daily GPM Requirements
Function
Sustaining Minimum
Drinking 3.0 3.0
Personal Hygiene 1.7 1.0
Field Feeding 2.8 0.8
Heat Casualty Treatment 0.2 0.2
Level 1 Medical Treatment 0.4 0.4
Level 2 Medical Treatment 2.8 2.8
Centralized Hygiene 1.8 0.0
Construction 1.5 0.0
Vehicle Maintenance 0.2 0.2
Aircraft Maintenance 0.2 0.2
Laundry 2.1 0.0
Subtotal 16.7 8.6
+10% waste 1.7 0.9
Total 18.4 9.5
Table 4-77. Class I (Water) requirements for arid zones (MCWP 4-11.6)

d. Class II (PMD)* (*Per Man Day)

Southwest Asia (SWA) 2.091
Northeast Asia (NEA) 3.367
Per Institute of Defense Analysis study on Chemical defense equipment (CDE), 1986-1988, add the following CDE
modifiers for:
NATO + 2.205 PMD
NEA + 3.270 PMD
SWA + 4.038 PMD

e. Class III (P): 0.51 PMD

Assault Rate Sustained Rate
MEF 1,204,856 950,010
MPS 563,868 443,738
MEU 63,842 48,145
Table 4-78. Class III requirements (gallons per day) (MCWP 4-11.6 2005)
A recommended method for calculating the bulk fuel requirement of a given unit per day is to use a simple roll up starting with
each type of equipment end item that is a part of the units Table of Equipment. For example, the daily fuel consumption for
equipment of type i is shown in Table 4-94 below, computed for FY 2000 and FY 2010.
Baseline MEF (2000) Future MEF (2010)
Assault Rate (GPH) Sustained Rate (GPH) Assault Rate (GPH) Sustained Rate (GPH)
CE 25,700 19,300 42,500 29,000
GCE 134,100 77,900 328,900 168,900
ACE 931,900 929,400 1,281,100 1,276,100
LCE 101,600 122,500 128,700 148,500
Total 1,193,400 1,149,100 1,781,200 1,622,600
Table 4-79. Class III (POL) MEF-level planning factors (or estimated MEF fuel consumption rates from the
MAGTF Logistics Planning Factors Study, DCMC I&L 2007)

f. Class IV (PMD)
NEA SWA
Construction 3.67 3.80
Barrier 6.25 4.29
Total 9.92 8.09

Table 4-80. Class IV requirements (per man day)

132
g. Class V (W)
The primary source for ammunition planning is the 1997 Marine Corps Order 8010.1E Class V(W) Planning Factors
for Fleet Marine Force Combat Operations which is based enemy unit composition (i.e. armor, infantry, combined).
The table below was created using information from Marine Artillery in the Battle of Nairiyah by MAJOR Walker
M. Field in Field Artillery magazine, Nov-Dec 2003 and it provides a contrast with the plan compared the actual
ammunition usage in a urban environment.
ILA HE DPICM BBDPICM RAP SMK
Planned Used Planned Used Planned Used Planned Used Planned Used Planned Used
4% 1% 30% 55% 25% 33% 19% 6% 15% 4% 7% 1%
ILA = illumination HE = high explosive DPICM = Dual-purpose improved munition BBDPICM = base-bleed dual-pupose improved
conventional munition RAP = rocket assisted projectile SMK = smoke
Table 4-81. Class V usage example of 1997 planned vs. 2003 actual

h. Class VI (PMD) (After D + 60)

Temperate Trop/Arid
2.06 3.40
Table 4-82. Class VI requirements (after D+60) (per man day)

i. Class VIII (PMD)

NEA SWA
1.10 1.47
Table 4-83. Class VIII requirements (per man day)

4027. Maritime Prepositioning Force Employment Considerations

The following items are considered for MPF employment
A permissive environment.
Adequate strategic airlift.
Adequate aerial tanker support for Flight Ferry aircraft.
Adequate offload forces (OPP, LFSP, AAOG, NSE) at the POD.
Suitable road network between the port and/or beach and the associated airfield.
Recover and launch C-17 and C-5 military and commercial wide-body equivalent (WBE) aircraft, based on the
size/capacity of a B747-100.
Recover and launch 30 AMC transport aircraft per 24-hour period.
Provide for offloading of aircraft safely using available apron space.
Provide an overflow area for passengers and cargo.
Provide a helicopter buildup area.
Provide minimal air traffic control activities.
Operate tactical aircraft.
A rotary-wing site that is both VFR and IFR capable.
If a usable port is available, the following should be considered
Accommodate the ships stern ramp and vehicle weight to the pier.
Allow for maximum ship drafts at pier side (Maersk and Amsea classes draw 33 feet; Waterman class draws 34 feet; and
E Ships/LMSR class draw 35 feet).
Accommodate a surge offload of vehicles for staging or initial corrective maintenance at the MCC, as well as an area for
staging containers at the container operations terminal lot (preferably hard stand).
Accommodate the offloading of fuel, water, ammunition, and possible storage of same.
If no usable ports are available, the following alternatives should be considered
Instream offload of MPE/S with access to improved road networks.
Provide sufficient staging/maintenance areas suitable for the offload of MPE/S.
Increased offloading time and force standup.
Command relationships
MPS are operationally assigned to the FLTCDR or NCC of the appropriate unified combatant command.

133
 ADCON resides with COMSC.
Administrative direction and support of Navy and Marine Corps forces and the control of the MPE/S resides with the
type commander.
The initiating directive will specify the command relationships in the various MPF operational phases and ID the CNSF
and the OPCON of forces assigned to the MPF mission.
Sustainability
A combination of prepositioned material and airlifted elements associated with a MEF (Fwd) for up to 30 days.
A MEU sized MAGTF may be sustained for a greater amount of time depending on the size of the force and the number
of MPS in support of the operation.

4028. Maritime Prepositioning Force (Enhanced) Capabilities

a. Expeditionary Airfield
The expeditionary airfield (EAF) is consists of two hundred and eighty containers of equipment and provides the capability to build
a notional EAF 2000. This capability is designated to include: 96 foot wide by 3,850 foot long runway, 75 parking spaces for
tactical aircraft, 3 parking spaces for transport aircraft, fueling area and revetments, arresting gear, airfield lighting and visual
landing aids, and arresting gear. The EAF is normally spread to three ships in the squadron in three modules, which support the
following:
SHIP 1: 470,448 sqft parking; R/W fuel pit; accommodates parking hides and connecting surfaces to support 4-CH53, 4 MV-
22/CH46 and 4-A/UH1.
SHIP 2: 470,448 sqft parking; R/W fuel pit; accommodates parking hides and connecting surfaces to support 4-CH53, 4 MV-
22/CH46 and 4-A/UH1.
SHIP 3: 706,968 sqft parking; F/W fuel pit, accommodates parking hides and connecting surfaces to support 20-AV8B and 14-
F18.
Any reduction in the equipment identified will result in an equivalent reduction in capability (e.g., shorter/narrower runway, less
parking, or no arresting gear). Three ships together can be configured to support C-5 aircraft.

b. Naval Mobile Construction Battalion

The naval mobile construction battalion (NMCB) pack-up consists of tools and equipment to support a 750 man Naval Mobile
Construction Battalion aboard each squadron. Each battalion is divided into 5 capability sets: three core sets, one basic set, and one
heavy set. A core is designed to support 250 Seabees with their tools and an assortment of construction equipment including dump
trucks, dozers, graders, loaders, 5 tons, and an assortment of other construction gear. A basic module is designed to augment a core
with additional camp support and vertical construction assets. The heavy module augments a core with additional horizontal or
earth moving equipment. The NMCB(s) maintain their flexibility and can further deploy several detachments from a downloaded
MPF pack-up.
The Seabee gear is usually loaded on three ships in a core, core-basic, and core-heavy configuration. Class IV (construction
material) is not pre-positioned. Seabees have a wide array of construction capabilities that include: pre-engineered buildings,
bunkers, towers, water purification, power generation, runways, piers, surveying and planning and well drilling. With FOE assets
an NMCB can operate and construct batch plants, quarries, rock crushers, pile driving, and other specialized construction.

c. Fleet Hospital
Each MPF (E) squadron will contain a 273-bed Naval Fleet Hospital (NFH). This is a reduced version of the former 500-bed NFH.
The capabilities of the new NFH include 4 operating rooms, 63 intensive care holding beds and 210 standard holding beds. It
requires a 17-acre footprint for setup.
An Expeditionary Medical Facility (EMF) is currently in development. It will be scaleable and able to be set up in alternate
configurations of 10 to 50 beds, 50 to 150 beds, or from 150 to a maximum of 250 beds (EMF-250).

4029. Maritime Prepositioning Force Engineer Equipment (Extract) (1)

TACMN Nomenclature CE GCE ACE LCE Total MPSRON FIE
B0114 Bridge Erection Boat 0 0 0 3(2) 3(2) 0 3
B0152 Medium Girder Bridge 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
B0392 Kalmar Rough Terrain Container Handler 0 0 3 11 14 0 14
B0395 250cfm Air Compressor 0 2 2 6 10 8 2
B0443 25-ton HSHM Crane 0 1 2 5 8 1 7
B0446 7.5-ton Air Mobile Crane 0 1 4 7 12 6 6

134
 TACMN Nomenclature CE GCE ACE LCE Total MPSRON FIE
B0570 500-gal Liquid Fuel Fabric Drum 0 0 0 56 56 0 56
B0589 M9 Armored Combat Excavator 0 6 0 0 6 0 6
B0685 Amphibious Assault Fuel System (AAFS) 0 0 0 5 5 0 5
B0891 Generator Set 10KW/60Hz 9 11 5 3 28 28 0
B0921 Generator Set 10KW/400Hz 0 0 3 0 3 3 0
B0953 Generator Set 30KW/60Hz 9 26 12 22 69 19 50
B0971 Generator Set 30KW/400Hz 1 0 7 2 10 6 4
B1016 Generator Set 60KW/400Hz 0 0 5 0 5 5 0
B1021 Generator Set 60KW/60Hz 3 7 15 4 29 19 10
B1045 Generator Set 100KW/60Hz 1 1 10 4 16 16 0
B1082 Road Grader, motorized 0 1 2 3 6 1 5
B1135 Helicopter Expedient Refueling System 0 0 6 0 6 0 6
B1139 Hose Reel System 0 0 0 5 5 0 5
B1220 Kit, Assault Runway (MoMat) 0 24 0 6 30 0 30
B1298 Kit, launch line charge, trailer mounted. 0 18 0 0 18 4 14
B1625 Rafting Set, Ribbon Bridge 0 0 0 2 2 0 2
B1785 Roller, Compactor, Vibratory, self propelled 0 0 1 1 2 2 0
B1830 Chain Saw, one man, portable 0 14 6 7 27 14 13
B2085 Storage Tank Module (Fuel) SIXCON 2 32 22 40 96 96 0
B2086 Storage Tank Module (Water) SIXCON 0 2 9 156 167 14 153
B2130 Tank, Fabric, Collapsible, Water 3,000-gal 0 58 30 26 114(3) 0 114(3)
B2460 Tractor full track w/angle blade (T-5 light) 0 7 2 3 12 0 12
B2462 Tractor, Full Track, Medium (D7G) 0 2 2 13 17 11 6
B2464 Tractor, Full Track w/multipurpose bucket 0 2 0 3 5 3 2
B2482 Tractor, All Wheel Drive (SEE) 0 2 3 1 6 6 0
B2483 Loader, Backhoe (BHL) 0 2 3 2 7 7 0
B2561 Truck, Forklift, Variable Reach (5-ton) 0 4 23 19 46 12 34
B2566 Forklift, Rubber Tired, Light Capability (2.5t) 0 5 8 11 24 7 17
B2567 Tractor, Rubber Tire, Articulated Steer (TRAM) 0 7 12 16 35 20 15
B2605 Tactical Water Purification System 0 6 8 6 20 20
B2631 Tank, Fabric, Collapsible, Water 50,000-gal 0 0 0 18 18 0 18
B2632 Tank, Fabric, Collapsible, Water 20,000-gal 0 0 0 16 16 0 16
B2685 Welding Shop, Marine Corps Tactical 0 6 2 7 15(4) 3 12
D0235 Semi-Trailer, Low Bed 40T (M870A2) 0 4 3 8 15 9 6
D0881 Mk-18 Ribbon Bridge LVS Rear Body Unit 0 0 0 20 20 0 20
D1073 Truck, Dump w/winch MTVR 0 10 8 27 45 0 45
E0149 Bridge, Scissors F/AVLB 0 2 0 0 2 0 2
E0150 Armored Vehicle Launcher, Bridge 0 2 0 0 2 0 2
FZ710 AM-2 Mat, 2 x 12 panels (432 sq ft) 0 0 2,268 0 2,268 0 2,268
FZ720 AM-2 Mat, 2 x 6 panels (216 sq ft) 0 0 2,268 0 2,268 0 2,268
ZXXX (2) Arresting Gear Set 0 0 2 0 2 0 2
Notes (1) Estimated values only; should not be used for planning purposes; go to TFSMS web site (https://tfsms-appl.mccdc.usmc.mil) for current
information. Most MPSRON figures are for MPS 1 but FZ710 & FZ720 only apply to MPS 2 & 3.
(2) MPS-2 has four.
(3) MPS-2 and MPS-3 have 117 each (29 in LCE vice 26)
(4) MPS-2 has 16 (8 in LCE).
Table 4-84. Maritime Prepositioning Force engineer equipment (extract)

135
4030. Maritime Prepositioning Force Offload Planning Data
a. Time Requirements
Navy Day (Offload Day 1)
Hours
Offload Side Loadable Warping Tug (SLWT) and LCM-8s 1.5
Moor-Anchors 6.0
Offload Other Lighterage 5.0
Position Ships Ramp 0.5
Assemble Causeway Powered (CSP) and Non-powered (CSNP) 3.5
Install Fenders 1.5
Discharge AAVs 2.0
Install POL/Water Systems 9.0
Assemble Roll-On-Roll-Off Discharge Facility (RRDF) 36-40
Discharge Rough Terrain Container Handlers (RTCH) 3.0
Remove Hatch Cover 1.0
Table 4-85. Maritime Prepositioning Force offload time requirements

b. Lighterage Characteristics
CSP CSNP SLWT LCM-8
Length (ft) 90 82 82 74
Beam (ft) 21 22 21 21
Loaded draft (ft) 4 4 5.2 (aft) 4.85 (aft)*
Capacity (tons) 70 100 N/A 65
Speed (knots): Empty 10 N/A N/A 12
Loaded 7 N/A N/A 9
The Improved Navy Lighterage System (INLS) will be loaded during MPF Maintenance Cycle (MMC) Nine from June 2007 to
August 2010. INLS is more capable then the current lighterage and offers speeds of 8-10 knots and the ability to operate in sea
Notes: state three. It will make offload possible in a greater number of locations and weather conditions. Further details to be released.
*Steel version; aluminum version draws only 4.25-feet aft.
CSP = Causeway Section, Powered CSNP = Causeway Section, Not Powered SLWT = Side Loadable Warping Tug

Table 4-86. Lighterage characteristics

c. Causeway Ferry Capabilities

Vehicles Containers
CSP + 3 CSNP 18 23
CSP + 2 CSNP 13 16
CSP + 1 CSNP 8 9
LCM-8 2 0
Table 4-87. Causeway ferry capacities
Notes: The Navy Causeway Section, Powered (CSP) is the normal power unit for causeway ferries. Its propulsion
system is identical to that of the Side Loadable Warping Tug (SLWT); however, the Naval CSP is 5 feet longer than
the Navy SLWT, while the modular CSP is the same size as the modular warping tug. The CSP hull is 5 feet longer
and it does not have a winch, A-frame, or stern anchor installed.
The Causeway Section Powered (CSP) consists of three modules assembled into one integral unit; the powered-section, the non-
powered subsection and the water-jet propulsion plant subsection. When attached to three or four other standard causeway sections
the unit becomes a Self-Powered Causeway (SPC). The SPC is used to transport containers from the ship to shoreline. Steering in
any direction can be accomplished by rotating the waterjet nozzles. Speed of the CSP is ten knots. The CSP can be converted into a
SLWT by adding an A-frame and winch. The SLWT is used to perform boat functions similar to a tug.

d. Bulk Fluid Offload Times

5,000 feet from shore 700 gpm
10,000 feet from shore 300 gpm
Table 4-88. Bulk Fluid off-load times.

136
4031. Typical Principle End Items on MPSRON to Support a MEB
Ordnance MT/Comm Equipment Engineer Equipment
LAV AT 4 LVS Front Power Unit 109 TWPS 20
LAV 25 14 LVS Wrecker RBU 4 AVLB 2
LAV LOG 3 LVS Cargo Rear Body Units 105 Rough Terrain Container Handler 14
LAV RECOV 3 7-Ton Trucks 319 D7G Dozer 17
AAVC7 9 P-19 Fire Truck 8 Variable Reach Fork Lift 46
AAVR7 4 HMMVV troop/cargo 473 TRAM Rubber Tire Tractor 35
AAVP7 96 MRC-145 65 M9 ACE 6
M1A1 58 MRC-138 60 MC1150 Tractor 12
Armed HMMWV TOW/HMG 48/63 MRC-142 21 Line Charge 18
M198/M777 Howitzer 30 M970 Refueler Semi-Trailer 12 SIXCON water module 111

Table 4-89. Typical major principle end items aboard a MPSRON to support a MEB.

4032. Command, Control, Communications, and Computers Planning

Considerations
Communications planning is inextricably linked with operations planning. The goal of C4 planning is to support mission
accomplishment. The process C4 planners use is generally the same regardless of the mission or geographical area. The checklist
can be applied to other C4 staffssingle-Service, subordinate component, and multinational. Numerous sources of information
may be used to answer the checklist questions. The following list is representative:
Existing operation plans and operation orders.
The MAGTF and joint force commanders battlespace area evaluation (CBAE).
Area studies.
Unit files.
MCWP 3-40.1, MAGTF Command and Control.
MCWP 3-40.2, Information Management
MCRP 3-40.2A Tactics, Techniques and Procedures for JTF Information Management
MCWP 3-40.3, Communications and Information Systems
JP 5-0 Joint Operations Planning Dec 06
JP 6-0 Joint Communications System Jun 10
Joint Communications Support Element Planning Guide.
Contingency Planning for DoD Mission-Critical Information Systems Feb 08
Lessons-learned from previous operations and exercises to include Joint Universal Lessons Learned System (JULLS).
Time-Phased Force Deployment Data (TPFDD) schedule.

a. Common Questions
These questions apply to any mission. They elicit background information, and each serves as a data point to answer other
questions. This list of questions is not all-inclusive. These questions should be asked repeatedly throughout the planning process as
C4 planners adapt to an evolving operational and tactical situation. They provide a framework for supporting C4 planning for each
phase of an operation, focusing C4 planners on the mission and how the JFC intends to accomplish it.

Parameters
What is the JTF mission?
What is the signal and/or communications unit mission?
What is the geographic operational area?
What is the JFCs estimate of the mission and vision (intent and concept of operations) to accomplish it?
What are the JFCs communication requirements?
Who are the subordinate component and supporting forces? What are the command relationships?
How will the forces deploy (means of transport), and what is the deployment timeline?
Are there any transport and/or lift restrictions (availability of assets, departure and arrival locations)?
Are there any satellite landing rights?
When are the operations planning meetings scheduled? How will communications planning meetings fit into this
schedule?
Has DISA been involved regarding coordination of technical requirements?

137
 Are there any planning constraints?
Are there any special communications requirements? Who has them?
What national space-based assets are required and/or available to support the operation? Has a USSPACECOM Joint
Space Support Team been contacted?
What communications capabilities are available to the joint force: SHF and/or UHF commercial satellite, DSCS, fleet
satellite communications, MILSTAR satellite terminals, JWICS, MILSTAR, HF and VHF radio, tropospheric and LOS
microwave systems, LANs and WANs, AUTODIN, DISN, land mobile radio, personal communications systems?
What frequencies are available for the joint operations area?
What are the general communications security (COMSEC) requirements? Will the Inter-theater Communications
Security Package (ICP) be used? Who will draft the callout message?
Who is the potential adversary? What are their capabilities to conduct offensive information warfare? Does a joint force
plan exist to counter the threat?
What are the releasability requirements for multinational operations?

Subordinate Component Forces

Where will communications nodes be located?
What are their communications requirements?
What are their communications capabilities?
What type of communications systems do they have (power, frequency bands, interoperable and compatible with other
subordinate components equipment, mobility)?
Who is the component communications staff point of contact for planning and technical management and direction?
Are there any special communications requirements resulting from the mission and the JFCs estimate, intent, and
concept of operations?
Are subordinate and supporting communications plans consistent with the supported JFC communications plan?
Supporting Forces and Activities
What is the mission of the supporting forces and/or activities (this includes allies and coalitions)?
What are their communications capabilities?
What information does the supported JFC need from the supporting forces and/or activities (intelligence, weather,
imagery, mapping, deployment) and how will it be accessed?
What communications support will the supporting forces or activities require from the supported JFC?
Non-organic Communications
DISA
Does the operational area have a DISA Regional Control Center or field office?
Who is the DISA point of contact?
What is the DISN infrastructure in the operational area?
Are sufficient gateways available? What are the interface requirements to access the gateways? Is the equipment
available?
Is Telecommunications Service Provisioning and/or National Security Emergency Preparedness involving authority
provided and current?
What are the anticipated DSCS and commercial satellite requirements?
Has modeling of space networks been initiated by DISA?
Commercial Networks
Are commercial networks available for use? Who can approve access to them? Are funds available? Has DISA been
contacted to ensure required lead times for normal allocations? (1) Satellite (2) Data (3) Voice?
What special interfaces are required to access the commercial network and where are the access points?
What are the locations and types of switches in the commercial network? What are their technical parameters?
Where are the locations and types of systems providing the backbone transmission network?
What type of power is usedvoltage, current, commercial grid, or generator?
Does the operational area have a cellular network? What are the transmission media, frequency band, and interface
requirements?
What are the system standards? Is the system available for use?
CJCS Controlled C4 Assets.
What CJCS controlled assets are available?
What capabilities are available?
Will JCSE support be required in the operational area, or will other defense and commercial assets be sufficient?
Will JCSE support be needed for en route communications?

138
 Has a CJCSI 6110.01, CJCS-Controlled Tactical Communications Assets, support request for CJCS controlled C4
assets been submitted?
What are the JCSE logistic support and electrical power requirements?
What are the JCSE airlift considerations, allocations, and/or priority?
Other Communications Support
Is communications support needed from specialized communications units?
Who are the points of contact and what are the request procedures?
What are the units communications capabilities and limitations?

b. Planning Activities
This section assumes that the basic questions have been answered and covers high-level and detailed communications planning.
Although these functions are listed separately, they are concurrent rather than sequential actions. The planners interact to refine the
planning products, communications estimates, Annex K, and JCEOI.
High Level Planning
What nodes will be necessary to provide a global communications network and where will they be located?
Which nodes will have to be connected?
What transmission media will be used to interconnect the nodes?
What types of communications equipment will be located at each node (equipment strings, interoperability of the
equipment)?
What are the frequency requirements for each node? How will the frequencies be allotted (joint, multinational, and
subordinate components)? Are there potential frequency conflicts?
What are the call signs and/or words for each node?
What units will provide, install, operate, and maintain the equipment for each node? What is their operational readiness
status?
What lift assets are available to deploy these units? When will the units deploy and activate the nodes or network?
Is the deployment schedule of communications assets consistent with the phases of the plan? Will it permit the provision
of communications support when and where needed?
What is the phased buildup of communications in the operational area?
Has communications scheduling information been added to the time-phased force and deployment data and/or time-
phased force and deployment list?
Have the JFC and J-3 been informed of potential communications shortfalls and recommended solutions?
How will keying material be managed (ordering, generation, storing, distribution, transferal, and destruction)? What are
the procedures for handling compromises? Is a COMSEC logistics management activity needed in the joint operations
area? What access will allies have to U.S. COMSEC?
Are network and node diagrams available?
Have special communications requirements been addressed (search and rescue, SOF, en route communications,
embarkation and debarkation connectivity)?
How will the joint, JSOTF, subordinate component, and supporting forces networks interface with non-organic networks
(DISN, commercial, JCSE)?
When and where will the Joint Communications Control Center be established?
Are the subordinate component, JSOTF, and supporting communications plans consistent with the joint communications
plan?

Detailed Planning
Circuit Switches
Does a circuit switch network diagram exist that shows information about the switch and circuit switch network
connectivity (switch type, area code, trunk groups, capacity)?
How does the switch route calls: flood, deterministic, or circuit switch routing task execution plan?
Where do circuit switches need to be located? How will they be connected?
What special features or restrictions will be imposed on subscribers? Who will authorize and enforce these restrictions?
Where are the Defense Switched Network (DSN) interfaces? Are precedences authorized? By whom?
How will subscriber assistance be handled?
Where is the greatest anticipated traffic load? Does sufficient capacity exist to handle it?
What types of status reports are required, and when will they be submitted?
How will traffic metering and network loading be measured, modeled, and managed?
Who will publish telephone directories and how will they be distributed?
How will MWR calls be accommodated?

139
Data Networking
What are the anticipated JTF component data requirements?
Has automation been planned and/or engineered into the network (x.25, IEEE802.3, TCP/IP)?
What and/or where are the network identifications and gateways?
Will data of various classifications ride a secure tactical backbone? How will traffic of various classifications be
controlled and managed? Are multi-level information systems security initiative devices needed? Are resources
available?
What is the joint architecture topology?
Who is the joint data networks manager?
What are the NIPRNET, SIPRNET, and JWICS connectivity requirements?
What Integrated Tactical Strategic Data Networking points of presence will be used? Has a gateway access request been
submitted in accordance with DISA contingency and/or exercise plans?
What is the addressing scheme?
Message Switches
Where are message switches required?
What is the trunking plan?
What is the network connectivity of all message switches?
Have routing indicators been developed and routing tables established?
Is this an R and/or Y network?
Has a plain language address directory been created?
How will special category traffic be handled? Who will be authorized to have access?
What are the intra nodal and inter nodal terminals?
What types of status reports are required and when will they be submitted?
What AUTODIN Switching Centers are connected to the message switch?
Who is the Automated Message Process System Security Officer?
Who will act as the AUTODIN controller?
Transmission Systems
Are the circuit requirements, routing, channelization, and other parameters identified in high-level planning valid? Have
satellite access requests been submitted? Have frequency requests been approved and published?
What are the characteristics and connectivity of multi-plexers in the network? Are they compatible?
What are the timing requirements for the network components? How will timing be accomplished?
What types of status reports are required and when will they be submitted?
Video Teleconferencing
What data rate is to be used?
Who are the participants?
What is the schedule?
Who is providing the bridging and MCU?

c. Technical Management and Direction

Joint Communications Control Center
What are the operational procedures for the JCCC?
How will the JCCC be manned?
What reports will be required, how often will they be required, and when will they be submitted?
How will network reconfiguration be accomplished?
Who are the points of contact at the subordinate control centers?
Who will submit the Telecommunications Service Request and Telecommunications Service Order?
Who will coordinate changes to connectivity with the DISN? With the commercial networks?
What kind of statistics will be kept? Who will analyze them? What will be done with them?
How will changes caused by the evolving tactical situation be handled?
Can the JCCC direct changes within subordinate component networks to optimize C4 within the joint operations area?
Where is the boundary between technical direction and operational direction?
How will frequency deconfliction be managed? How can potential conflicts be anticipated?
Who will control frequency spares and authorize their use?
Who manages the allocated satellite bandwidth used by the geographic joint forces?

140
Joint Communications Support Element
Who is the JCSE POC?
How will JCSE participate in the technical management process?
Are there any special reporting requirements for systems provided by the JCSE?

d. Other Planning Functions

Spectrum Management
What are the provisions and procedures for frequency planning and use for opposed and/or unopposed entry operations
into an operational area?
What frequency allotments and assignments are available for the operational area?
Can the allotted and assigned frequencies support the equipment deployed to the operational area (communications,
computer LANs and/or WANs, sensors, surveillance radars, GPS, airspace control radars)?
Will the frequencies work (propagation and topographic analyses)?
Does the allocation and assignment of frequencies to subordinate component commands contribute to mission
accomplishment?
How can the enemy interfere with allotted and assigned frequencies? Does a joint plan exist to counter the threat?
How will meaconing, interference, jamming, and intrusion (MIJI) be reported?
Who will submit MIJI reports to the Joint Spectrum Center (JSC)?
Will the JCCC resolve electromagnetic interference issues? Will JSC support be required to resolve interference issues?
Are sufficient spare frequencies available?
What emission control measures will be applied?
Will the JFC implement an electronic deception plan? Are sufficient frequencies available to support this plan?

Security
Will the cryptographic equipment interoperate?
What are the keying material requirements?
Does a key management plan exist?
How will cryptographic compromises be detected and corrected?
What computer security measures will be employed on the LANs and WANs in the operational area?
How will access to the various networks be controlled (electronic and physical)?
Have COMSEC emergency destruction procedures been established?
What is the logistics plan for the cryptographic equipment?
Are equipment and keymat sufficient to support planned and unplanned operations?
Have key change times been established and promulgated?
Have provisions been made for over-the-air-rekeying where applicable?
Is an ICP available? Is it needed?
What will we transition to and when?
What is the foreign information warfare threat facing the communications system?
Are virus detection software applications installed and operational? Are passwords issued and in use? Has a contingency
plan been developed to guide recovery actions should data be modified or destroyed by unauthorized intrusions?
Do remotely accessed computer systems possess features to identify users and substantiate their identification before
allowing information to be processed?

e. Exercise Timeline
The below list is a suggested timeline for execution of tasks to be accomplished during exercises. While not as inclusive of the
items above, the timeline provides the planner with the relative relationship of key planning events.
TASK DATE
Assign communications planner D-365
Concept development conference D-355
Activate MAGTF plain language address D-350
Initial planning conference D-250
Identify initial host nation support D-250
Annex K (Draft) distributed at initial planning conference D-250
GMF architecture diagram (rough) D-250
Switching architecture diagram (rough) D-250
Data architecture diagram (rough) D-250
JECG architecture support D-250
Identify minimum C4 systems D-250
Activate exercise addressee indicator group (after initial planning conference) D-250

141
Identify reserve/Air National Guard requirements D-210
Draft combined/joint communications control center organization D-200
Main planning conference D-190
Decision on COMMEX D-180
Advanced concept technology demonstrations planned D-180
New system implementation plans (GBS, DMS, MSS, Medical (tele-medicine)) D-180
Designated approval authority assigned D-180
Identify personnel shortfalls D-180
Publish JCCC manning table of organization D-170
Publish software and protocols (e.g., JTAC, GTN, NTS/RPS, COP, TACCIMS) D-170
Final planning conference D-150
Finalize host nation support requirements D-150
TPFDD synchronization D-120
SIPRNET tunneling (joint staff waivers) to JFC (foreign connections to the SIPRNET including MLS D-120
Promulgate CMS intent-to-use message D-120
Annex K (Final Draft) (changes from final planning conference) D-120
Components provide frequency requirements D-120
Request for service D-100
Submit SIPRNET accreditation D-100
Components submit initial UHF/EHF/SHF satellite access request to JFC D-90
COMEX D-90
Consolidated frequency request from JFC to appropriate JFMO D-90
Submit Inter-theater Communications Security Package request D-90
JFC submit equipment shortfall request to combatant commander in CJCSI 6110.01 format D-90
Tactical area codes D-90
Technical control conference D-60
Master net list requirements D-45
Call sign/call words D-30
GMF architecture diagram (final) D-30
Switching architecture diagram (final) D-30
Data architecture diagram (final) D-30
Submit request for JCSE equipment D-30
Consolidated SHF/GMF satellite access request D-30
Consolidated UHF satellite access request D-30
Consolidated EHF satellite access request D-30
Request GENSER four-letter R/I D-30
Publish Annex K (final) D-20
Publish formal phone directory D-20
SAA/ODMs published D-20
ADVCOMs D-4/+5
Final COMEX on station D-2/3
Execute D-Dav
Redeployment plan D+5
Table 4-90. Exercise timeline

4033. Information Operations Considerations

a. Basic Considerations
Coordination with higher headquarters: the CCDR is the ultimate IO coordinator: What IO activities must be approved by
theater (or higher) authorities? Does the MEF have the Joint Force IO Plan? Does the MEF IO Plan conflict with the Joint
Force IO Plan? Has the MEF IO Cell coordinated IO Plans with the Joint Force IO Cell? Have all available assets been
considered for employment? Has the use of joint air assets been coordinated in a timely manner (Required to be in
ALLOREQ? Request received 24-30 hours prior to ATO to be executed [e. g. JPOTF, JSOTF, JFACC assets [EC-130H
Commando Solo, Leaflet drops, other (EW, Deception)])? Does the IO cell have fulltime intelligence support?
MEF IO Planning. Are all IO activities integrated into a single coherent IO plan that supports the MEF commanders
intent (e.g., concept of decisive action)? Has the MEF requested expertise from relevant supporting commands (e.g., Joint
Information Operations Center (JIOC), JWAC, FIWC, LIWA) to assist in IO planning? Are nodal analysis tools
available/employed for offensive IO planning?
MEF IO Execution. Has the MEF established IO representation in Current Operations with procedures that ensure receipt
of critical information? Has the MEF IO cell established measures of effectiveness and a means for branch/sequel
planning and tasking of relevant IO assets (e.g., physical destruction and EA)? Is there dedicated intelligence support to
the IO cell?

142
 As of 1 October 1999, USSPACECOM was tasked with providing IO support (especially computer network
attack/defense) to regional combatant commanders. USSPACECOM has since been re-designated as Air Force Space
Command (AFSPC). It retains the IO support mission.

b. Deception
Tools for deception planning: Objective, Target, Story, Means, Feedback. Limited Distribution (close-hold)? Has the MEF
conducted basic risk vs. gain analysis? Is the deception story feasible, and does the target have the ability to detect, assess, and
react to the deception story?

c. Psychological Operations
Greatest weapon is TRUTH: resist use of PSYOP to deceive (compromises PSYOP credibility.) The CCDR retains approval
authority for all themes; JPOTF and other components retains majority of assets. Maximize reachback capability for cultural
intelligence.

d. Electronic Warfare
Has the IO cell provided input to/coordination with the Joint Restricted Frequency List (JFRL), MEF Targeting Board? Has
intelligence gain/loss analysis been conducted with respect to targets selected for electronic attack?

e. Physical Destruction
Are IO targets integrated with the overall IO plan and presented at the Targeting Boards to be integrated with the plan for fires?
Has intelligence gain/loss analysis been conducted?

f. Information Assurance
Joint INFOCON determination
MEF vulnerability assessment
Active & passive information security measures.

g. Operations Security
COG/CV analysis contributes to identification of EEFI(s); analysis of threat collection capabilities, indicators of EEFI(s) linked
directly to active & passive OPSEC measures in relevant MEF plans?

h. Special Information Operations

Does the MEF have a means to coordinate with and employ national capabilities to ensure its success? Are these activities
coordinated with the IO concept of support and the MEF plan?

i. Civil Affairs
Is the MEF Civil Affairs Officer or representative engaged in IO planning? Are Civil Affairs actions coordinated with the IO
concept of support?

j. Public Affairs
Is the MEF Public Affairs Officer or representative engaged in IO planning? Are Public Affairs actions coordinated with IO
activities? Are Public Affairs and related considerations factored into the overall IO plan?

k. Legal Considerations
Is there appropriate legal expertise available at the MEF to resolve any of the various legal consequences of the IO concept of
support?

143
This page intentionally left blank.

144
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Part V

Key Terms and Graphics

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5001. Command Relationships

The authority vested in a commander must be commensurate with the responsibility assigned. The US armed forces recognize
seven different authority levels with which commanders (and certain others) may be vested. The first four are the command
relationships. The other three are administrative and coordinating relationships. Table 5-1 summarizes all seven of these command
relationships. A list of their JCS definitions follows.
Command How and Where
Authority Restrictions Remarks
Authority Exercised
COCOM (1) Organize & employ forces; (2) Assign Normally through Combatant Established by 10
tasks; (3) Designate objectives; (4) subordinate joint force, commanders only; USC 164; OPCON
Operations; (5) Joint training; (6) issue service and/or functional cannot be delegated & TACON are
logistics directives component commanders inherent
OPCON (1) Organize & employ forces; (2) Assign At any echelon at or Does not include OPCON is
tasks; (3) Designate objectives; (4) below a combatant admin., logistics, inherent within
Direct accomplishment of assigned command; normally discipline, internal COCOM; TACON
missions; (5) Direct operations & joint through subordinate organization or unit is inherent within
training; (6) May be delegated commanders training OPCON
TACON Detailed direction and control of the At any echelon at or No organizational or TACON is
movements or maneuvers of attached or below a combatant ADCON authority inherent within
assigned forces needed to accomplish command OPCON
assigned tasks or missions; may be
delegated
SUPPORT To aid, protect, complement or sustain Under a directive issued As prescribed by the This is a
another force as directed by a higher from a higher command higher command command
command for a specified mission relationship
ADCON (1) Organization of service forces; (2) Normally by Service or Does not include any May be modified
Control of resources/equipment; (3) component commanders matters relating to or restricted by
Personnel management; (4) Unit & directly over subordinate operational missions COCOM authority.
individual training plus readiness; (5) or other formations
Mobilization & demobilization; (6)
Discipline
Coordinating Coordinates specific functions or Normally used in Has no authority to Establishes a
Authority activities involving forces from two or connection with planning compel agreement; if consulting
more Services and/or joint force rather than operations. no agreement is relationship, not
components or two or more elements reached, must refer to command
from the same Service; can require the appointing authority authority
parties to consult each other
DIRLAUTH Authority granted by a commander (any Normally used in Granting commander A coordinating,
level) to a subordinate to directly consult connection with planning must be kept informed not a command
or coordinate with a command or agency rather than operations. relationship.
outside the granting command.

Table 5-1. Command relationships (JP 1-02 and MCWP 3-40.8)

a. Combatant Command (Command authority) (COCOM)

Nontransferable command authority established by Title 10 ("Armed Forces"), United States Code, Section 164. Combatant
command (command authority) or COCOM is exercised only by commanders of unified or specified combatant commands
unless otherwise directed by the President or the Secretary of Defense. COCOM cannot be delegated and empowers a
combatant commander to perform those command functions over assigned forces involving organizing and employing
commands and forces, assigning tasks, designating objectives, and giving authoritative direction over all aspects of military
operations, joint training, and logistics necessary to accomplish the missions assigned to the command. COCOM should be
exercised through the commanders of subordinate organizations. Normally this authority is exercised through subordinate
joint force commanders and Service and/or functional component commanders. COCOM provides full authority to organize
and employ commands and forces as the combatant commander considers necessary to accomplish assigned missions.
Operational control is inherent in COCOM. (JP 1-02)

145
b. Operational Control (OPCON)
Commanders at any echelon at or below the level of combatant command may exercise Operational Control
(OPCON). OPCON is inherent in combatant command (command authority) and may be delegated within the
command. When forces are transferred between combatant commands, the command relationship the gaining
commander will exercise (and the losing commander will relinquish) over these forces must be specified by the
Secretary of Defense. OPCON is the authority to perform those functions of command over subordinate forces
involving organizing and employing commands and forces, assigning tasks, designating objectives, and giving
authoritative direction necessary to accomplish the mission. OPCON includes authoritative direction over all aspects
of military operations and joint training necessary to accomplish missions assigned to the command. OPCON should
be exercised through the commanders of subordinate organizations. Normally this authority is exercised through
subordinate joint force commanders and Service and/or functional component commanders. OPCON normally
provides full authority to organize commands and forces and to employ those forces as the commander in OPCON
considers necessary to accomplish assigned missions; it does not, in and of itself, include authoritative direction for
logistics or matters of administration, discipline, internal organization, or unit training. (JP 1-02)

c. Tactical Control (TACON)

Command authority over assigned or attached forces or commands, or military capability or forces made available for
tasking, that is limited to the detailed direction and control of movements or maneuvers within the operational area
necessary to accomplish missions or tasks assigned. Tactical control (TACON) is inherent in operational control.
TACON may be delegated to, and exercised at any level at or below the level of combatant command. When forces
are transferred between combatant commands, the command relationship the gaining commander will exercise (and
the losing commander will relinquish) over these forces must be specified by the Secretary of Defense. TACON
provides sufficient authority for controlling and directing the application of force or tactical use of combat support
assets within the assigned mission or task. (JP 1-02)

d. Support
Support is a command authority. A support relationship is established by a superior commander between subordinate
commanders when one organization should aid, protect, complement, or sustain another force. (JP 1-02) Categories of
support include
General Support. That support which is given to the supported force as a whole and not to any particular
subdivision thereof. (JP 1-02)
Mutual Support. That support which units render each other against an enemy, because of their assigned
tasks, their position relative to each other and to the enemy, and their inherent capabilities. (JP 1-02)
Direct Support. A mission requiring a force to support another specific force and authorizing it to answer
directly the supported forces request for assistance. (JP 1-02)
Close Support. That action of the supporting force against targets or objectives which are sufficiently near
the supported force as to require detailed integration or coordination of the supporting action with the fire,
movement, or other actions of the supported force. (JP 1-02)

e. Other Authorities
Other authorities outside the command relations delineated above include:
Administrative Control (ADCON): Direction or exercise of authority over subordinate or other
organizations in respect to administration and support, including organization of Service forces, control of
resources and equipment, personnel management, unit logistics, individual and unit training, readiness,
mobilization, demobilization, discipline, and other matters not included in the operational missions of the
subordinate or other organizations. (JP 1-02)
Coordinating Authority: A responsibility assigned to a commander or individual for coordinating specific
functions or activities involving forces of two or more Military Departments, two or more joint force
components, or two or more forces of the same Service. The commander or individual has the authority to
require consultation between the agencies involved, but does not have the authority to compel agreement. In
the event that essential agreement cannot be obtained, the matter shall be referred to the appointing authority.
Coordinating authority is a consultation relationship, not an authority through which command may be

146
 exercised. Coordinating authority is more applicable to planning and similar activities than to operations. (JP
1-02)
Direct Liaison Authorized: That authority granted by a commander (any level) to a subordinate to
directly consult or coordinate an action with a command or agency within or outside of the granting
command. Direct liaison authorized is more applicable to planning than operations and always carries with it
the requirement of keeping the granting commander informed. Direct liaison authorized is a coordination
relationship, not an authority through which command may be exercised. (JP 1-02)

5002. Possible Command Relationships for MAGTF Units

Other Authorities
Coordinating
ADCON DIRLAUTH
Authority

Coordinate
D
el

e
at
eg

in
a

rd
te

oo
C
Assign Assign
UNIT
OPCON TACON
in question
Attach Attach

Es
Es
lish

tab
sh
tab
bli lish
tab

sta
lish
Es

Mutual Direct General Close

Support Support Support Support
Support Relationship

Figure 5-1. Command relationships for MAGTF units

5003. Tactical Tasks Definitions

The following are commonly assigned MAGTF tactical tasks that may be specified, implied, or essential tasks. These
tactical tasks define the actions that commanders may take to accomplish their mission. See MCRP 5-12A,
Operational Terms and Graphics, for more information. Examples of enemy oriented tactical tasks include
Ambush: A surprise attack by fire from concealed positions on a moving or temporarily halted enemy.
Attack by Fire: Fires (direct and indirect) to destroy the enemy from a distance, normally used when the
mission does not require or support occupation of the objective. This task is usually given to the supporting
effort during offensive operations and as a counterattack option for the reserve during defensive operations.
The assigning commander must specify the intent of firedestroy, fix, neutralize, or suppress. [A clear
purpose must accompany the assignment of the task attack.]
Block: To deny the enemy access to a given area or to prevent enemy advance in a given direction or on an
avenue of approach. It may be for a specified time. Units assigned this task may have to retain terrain. [A
force assigned the task of block should be assigned the degree of success to be achieved (the size of
force to be blocked) and/or a specified time frame in support of its purpose.]
Breach: To break through or secure a passage through a natural or enemy obstacle. [A force assigned the
task of breach should know what size force is to be passed through the breach.]
Bypass: To maneuver around an obstacle, position, or enemy force to maintain the momentum of advance.
Previously unreported obstacles and bypassed enemy forces are reported to higher headquarters. [A unit
assigned the task bypass should also be given bypass criteria. Bypass criteria are measures used
during the conduct of an offensive operation. Higher headquarters establishes them by specifying the
circumstances under which friendly units may avoid enemy contact.]
Canalize: The use of existing or reinforcing obstacles or fires to restrict enemy operations to a narrow zone.
[The tasked unit should be given the physical limits of the narrow zone, the size of the force to be
canalized, and desired duration of the task.]

147
 Contain: To stop, hold, or surround enemy forces, or to keep the enemy in a given area and prevent his
withdrawing any part of his forces for use elsewhere.
Cover: Offensive or defensive actions to protect the force.
Defeat: To disrupt or nullify the enemy commanders plan and overcome his will to fight, thus making him
unwilling or unable to pursue his adopted course of action and yield to the friendly commanders will.
[When assigning the task of defeat, a statement that describes end state conditions should be used to
define task completion (By defeat I mean ).]
Destroy: Physically rendering an enemy force combat-ineffective unless it is reconstituted. [The degree of
destruction should be specified in terms of observable enemy capabilities and not simply in terms of
numbers and percentages. Destroy as an interdiction objective (attack effect) calls for ruining the
structure, organic existence, or condition of an enemy target that is essential to an enemy capability
(MCRP 3-16A). Destroy as a fires effect requires that a target physically be rendered combat
ineffective or so damaged that it cannot function unless restored, reconstituted, or rebuilt. Setting
automated fire support default values for destruction such as 30% does not guarantee the achievement
of the commanders intent. The surviving 70% may still influence the operation. Destruction missions
are expensive in terms of time and material. Consider whether neutralization or suppression may be
more efficient.]
Disrupt: To integrate fires and obstacles to break apart an enemys formation and tempo, interrupt his
timetable, or cause premature commitment or the piecemealing of his forces. [A force assigned the task
disrupt should normally be assigned the degree of success to be achieved and/or the duration of the
disruption in relationship to its purpose. In targeting, we disrupt enemy plans by precluding effective
interaction or the cohesion of enemy combat and combat support systems. In Air Force interdiction
doctrine, disrupt forces the enemy into less efficient and more vulnerable dispositions.]
Exploit: Take full advantage of success in battle and follow up initial gains. Offensive actions that usually
follow a successful attack, designed to disorganize the enemy in depth. [A force assigned the task of
exploit should normally be assigned the degree of success to be achieved and/or the duration of the
exploitation in relationship to its purpose.]
Feint: An offensive action involving contact with the enemy to deceive him about the location or time of the
actual main offensive action.
Fix: To prevent the enemy from moving any part of his forces either from a specific location or for a specific
period of time by holding or surrounding them to prevent their withdrawal for use elsewhere. [The size of
the force to be fixed, the duration of the task, and where to fix the enemy should be specified.]
Guard: To protect the main force by fighting to gain time, while also observing and reporting information.
[A force is assigned the task to guard as one of the tasks in security force operations. Before
assigning a unit the task of guard, planners should ensure that they specify the scope of the task in
terms of time and terrain. A guard force normally operates within the range of the main body's
indirect fire weapons.]
Interdict: An action to divert, disrupt, delay, or destroy the enemys surface military potential before it can
be used effectively against friendly forces. [A force assigned the task of interdict should normally be
assigned the degree of success to be achieved (i.e., the effect desired relative to enemy capabilities)
and/or the duration of the interdiction in relationship to its purpose.]
Neutralize: To render the enemy or his resources ineffective or unusable. [A force assigned the task of
neutralize will normally be assigned a specific time frame or degree of neutralization to be achieved
in relationship to its purpose. Neutralization effects should be described in terms of observable enemy
activity. Planners should avoid articulating neutralization effects in terms of numbers or percentages
whenever possible. Neutralization fire results in enemy personnel or material becoming incapable of
interfering with an operation or COA. Key questions planners must ask are when and how long does
the commander want the target to be neutralized. Most planned fire missions are neutralization fires.]
Penetrate: To break through the enemys defense and disrupt his defensive system.
Protect: To prevent observation, engagement, or interference with a force or location. [A force assigned
the task protect should be assigned the degree of success to be achieved and/or the duration of the
protection in relationship to its purpose.]
Reconnoiter: To obtain, by visual observation or other methods, information about the activities and
resources of an enemy or potential enemy.
Rupture: To create a gap in enemy defensive positions quickly.

148
 Screen: To observe, identify, and report information, and only fight in self-protection. [A unit assigned the
task screen may be required to maintain surveillance; provide early warning to the main body; or
impede, destroy, and harass enemy reconnaissance within its capability without becoming decisively
engaged. The scope of task should be articulated in terms of time and terrain.]
Support by Fire: Where a force engages the enemy by direct fire to support a maneuvering force using
overwatch or by establishing a base of fire. The supporting force does not capture enemy forces or terrain.
Examples of terrain oriented tactical tasks include
Clear: The removal of enemy forces and elimination of organized resistance in an assigned zone, area, or
location by destroying, capturing, or forcing the withdrawal of enemy forces that could interfere with the
units ability to accomplish its mission. [The degree of success to be achieved should be specified by
describing what is meant by organized resistance (see bypass criteria above).]
Control: To maintain physical influence by occupation or range of weapon systems over the activities or
access in a defined area. [The area to be controlled and duration of the task should be specified.]
Occupy: To move onto an objective, key terrain, or other man-made or natural terrain area without
opposition, and control the entire area. [A unit assigned the task occupy should be assigned the
duration of the occupation in relationship to its purpose.]
Reconnoiter: To secure data about the meteorological, hydrographic, or geographic characteristics of a
particular area.
Retain: To occupy and hold a terrain feature to ensure it is free of enemy occupation or use. [A unit
assigned the task of retain should be given a specific timeframe in relationship to its purpose.]
Secure: To gain possession of a position or terrain feature, with or without force, and to prevent its
destruction or loss by enemy action. The attacking force may or may not have to physically occupy the area.
[The attacking force may or may not have to physically occupy the area. Conditions should be
established that define when a position or terrain feature is secured. Usually, conditions can be
expressed in terms of observable enemy activity.]
Seize: To clear a designated area and gain control of it. [A unit assigned the task of seize will usually
have to gain physical possession of a terrain feature from an enemy force. Note that the task clear is
imbedded within the definition of the task seize. See the definition of clear for specific planning
considerations.]
Examples of friendly force oriented tactical tasks include
Breach: To break through or secure a passage through a natural or friendly obstacle. [A unit assigned the
task of breach should know what size force is to be passed through the breach.]
Disengage: To break contact with the enemy and move to a point where the enemy cannot observe nor
engage the unit by direct fire.
Displace: To leave one position and take another. Forces may be displaced laterally to concentrate combat
power in threatened areas.
Exfiltrate: The removal of personnel or units from areas under enemy control.
Follow: The order of movement of combat, combat support, and combat service support forces in a given
combat operation. In special circumstances, the above tasks may be modified to meet the requirements of
METT-T. The commander must clearly state that he is departing from the standard meaning of these tasks.
One way this can be done is by prefacing the modified task with the statement, What I mean by [modified
task] is
Tactical tasks are assigned based on capabilities. The ground combat element has the inherent capability to execute
all the MAGTFs tactical tasks. The combat service support element has the capability to execute those tactical tasks
essential for it to provide sustainment to the MAGTF. The aviation combat element has the capability to execute many
of the MAGTFs tactical tasks. However, it cannot secure, seize, retain, or occupy terrain without augmentation by
the ground combat element. Weather and task duration may significantly affect the aviation combat elements ability
to execute assigned tactical tasks.
MCWP 0-1
5004. Selected Key Map Symbology
FM 1-02/MCRP 5-12A, Operational Terms and Graphics, establishes the procedures for the Army and Marine Corps in the use of
land-based warfighting symbology. The manual describes the use of symbols for maneuver command and control. The intent of

149
this section is to provide the user a ready reference for the use of routine and commonly used symbols. It is not intended to be a
replacement for, or as complete as the above mentioned manual.
Size Indicator Meaning
Installation
Team/Crew
Squad
Section
Platoon/Detachment
I Company/Battery/Troop
II Battalion/Squadron
III Regiment/Group
X Brigade
XX Division
XXX Corps/Force
XXXX Army
XXXXX Army Group/Front
XXXXXX Region
Table 5-2. Unit size and installation indicators

a. Unit Symbol Modifiers

The following unit symbols are for use on situation maps, overlays, and annotated aerial photographs. A symbol is composed of
three components: a frame (geometric border), a fill, and an icon. Frames are geometric shapes used to display affiliation.
Affiliation refers to whether the warfighting object being represented is a threat. The basic affiliation categories are friendly,
unknown, neutral, and enemy. The unknown frame shape is normally used only for aircraft and ships.

Figure 5-2. Unit, installation and site symbol frames

Fill refers to the area within the frame. If color is used in a symbol, it shall indicate affiliation. Generally, black is used for the
frame, icon, and modifiers when symbols are displayed on a light background. White is used for these elements when displayed on
a dark background. A color fill can be used if an icon is displayed within the area of the frame. The icon is a role indicator that
shows the warfighting function the unit performs either on the ground, in the air, or at sea. An example is the crossed rifles which
represent an infantry unit.
Affiliation Hand-Drawn Computer-Generated
Friend, Assumed Friend Blue Cyan
Unknown, Pending Yellow Yellow
Neutral Green Green
Enemy, Suspect, Joker, Faker Red Red
Table 5-3. Fill colors

b. Friendly Unit Symbols

Unit symbol modifiers are combined with basic unit function (branch) symbols to create a composite symbol that represents a
unique type of unit. All modifiers are placed in either the center of the frame, upper half, or above the basic function symbol. In
addition to the modifier symbols, text may be used inside the symbol frame to further clarify the symbol. The following are
examples of friendly unit symbols with modifiers. (See Figure 5-3, next page)

150
 Infantry Armor Artillery HIMARS Reconnaissance

Chemical Air Defense Engineer Airborne Motorized

Supply Communication Amphibious Unmanned Air Vehicle Rotary Wing

Fixed Wing Maintenance (Motor) Transportation Mechanized Infantry Airborne Infantry

Anti-Terrorist Infantry Air Defense Missile Air Assault Infantry ANGLICO Anti-armor

Air Defense Radar Artillery Radar Air Defense Gun & Amphibious Assault Wheeled Armored
Missile (Avenger) Vehicle Reconnaissance (LAR)

Military Police Force Reconnaissance Mortar Civil Affairs Group MEF Headquarters Group

Special Operations Service Radio General Support Direct Support

Training Group Communications Communications

Combat Logistics Personnel Service General Support Motor General Support Motor Transport
Transport Maintenance Maintenance

Electronic Maintenance Engineer Maintenance Ordnance Maintenance Engineer Support Engineer Bridge

Ammunition Supply Medical Supply Ration Supply Bulk Fuel Landing Support

Beach & Terminal Landing Support Medical Dental

Operations Equipment Infantry (Hostile)

Figure 5-3. Unit symbols (for a full list see MCRP 5-12A)

151
c. Tactical Mission Graphics
Tactical task graphics are for use in course of action sketches, synchronization matrixes, and maneuver sketches. They
do not replace any part of the operation order or operations overlay. The graphics should be scaled to fit the map scale
and size of unit for which they are being used. Where practical, the tactical mission graphic should connect with the
decision graphic or unit graphic at the center of the bottom of the symbol.

Figure 5-4. Tactical mission graphics

152
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Appendix A

References
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A-1. Useful Web Pages

a. Department of Defense
Secretary of Defense www.dtic.mil/defenselink
Joint Chiefs of Staff www.dtic.mil/jcs
U. S. Marine Corps www.usmc.mil
U. S. Navy www.navy.mil
U. S. Air Force www.af.mil
U. S. Army www.army.mil
USJFCOM www.jfcom.mil
USCENTCOM www.centcom.mil
USEUCOM www.eucom.mil
USPACOM www.pacom.mil
USSOUTHCOM www.southcom.mil
USSOCOM www.socom.mil
USSTRATCOM www.stratcom.mil
USTRANSCOM www.transcom.mil
USSPACECOM www.fas.org/spp/military/program/nssrm/initiatives
Def Fuel Sup Center www.desc.dla.mil
DISA www.disa.mil
DLA www.dla.mil
DOD Terms & Dictionary www.dtic.mil
DOD Information Center www.dtic.mil

b. Doctrine
USMC Doctrine www.doctrine.usmc.mil
MSTP www.mstp.usmc.mil
Joint Doctrine www.dtic.mil/doctrine
USA Doctrine www.tradoc.army.mil
USN Doctrine www.nwdc.navy.mil
USAF Doctrine www.usafdoctrine.maxwell.af.mil
Center for Army Lessons Learned http://usacac.army.mil/cac2/call/index.asp

c. Government
White House www.whitehouse.gov
DOS www.state.gov
DOT www.dot.gov
FAA www.faa.gov
FEMA www.fema.gov
FHWA www.fhwa.dot.gov
GSA www.gsa.gov
Maritime Administration www.marad.dot.gov

d. Marine Corps Bases

MCLB Barstow www.bam.usmc.mil
MCAGCC www.29palms.usmc.mil
MCB Camp Pendleton CA www.cpp.usmc.mil/jpao/home.htm
MCRD San Diego CA www.mcrdsd-usmc.mil
MCAS Miramar www.miramar.usmc.mil
MCAS Yuma www.yuma.usmc.mil

153
MARFORRES www.marforres.usmc.mil
MCLB Albany www.ala.usmc.mil
MCB Quantico www.quantico.usmc.mil
MARFORLANT www.marforlant.usmc.mil
MARFORPAC www.mfp.usmc.mil
MCAS Cherry Point www.cherrypt.usmc.mil
MCAS New River www.lejeune.usmc.mil/mcasnr
MCB CP Lejeune www.lejeune.usmc.mil
MCAS Beaufort www.bft.usmc.mil
MCRD PI SC www.parrisisland.com
MCB Hawaii www.iwakuniusmc.mil
MCAS Futenma www.futenma.usmc.mil
MCB CP Butler www.okr.usmc.mil

e. Marine Corps Units

I MEF www.cpp.usmc.mil/IMEF/imef%20home%main.htm
II MEF www.iimef.usmc.mil/
III MEF www.iiimef.usmc.mil/
11th MEU www.usmc.mil/11meu
13th MEU www.usmc.mil/13meu
15th MEU www.usmc.mil15meu
22nd MEU www.usmc.mil/22ndmeu
24th MEU www.usmc.mil/24thmeu
26th MEU www.usmc.mil/26thmeu
31st MEU www.usmc.mil/31stmeu

f. U. S. Transportation Command
USTRANSCOM (PAO) www.transom.mil/
AMC www.msc.navy.mil
MTMC www.mtmc.army.mil

g. Miscellaneous
Aircraft Distance Calculator www.aviationexplorer.com/airport_distances.htn
Airfield Suitability www.amc.af.mil/do/doa.htm
AMOC Briefs www.amwc.af.mil
Amphibious Ships www.chinfo.navy.mil/navpalib/factfile
Blount Island Command www.matcombic.usmc.mil
GTN www.gtn.transcom.mil
GTN Classified www.transcom.smil.mil
MIT (MPF Info Tool) http://mit.altservices
MAPS http://maps.yahoo.com/yahoo
Per Diem Rates www.dtic.mil/perdiem/
PORTS www.portguide.com
Systems mcsd.ala.usmc.mil
TCAIMS www.tcaimsii.belvoir.army.mil
Travel Claims www.psasd.navy.mil/travel.html

154
A-2. Planning Quick Reference Matrix
Marine Corps Planning Process: Problem framing, COA Development, COA War Game, COA Comparison and
Decision, Orders Development, Transition.
Actions Upon The CG and C/S consider the division of labor between the G-3 and the G-5:Time: Relative to what is being
Receipt of executed in current operations and what is future operations planning horizon. Purpose: Is the purpose the
Mission same for future tasks, within the current or subsequent phases, such that G-3, Future Operations is the logical
choice for planning. Major Tactical Tasks: Major tasks (Linkup, RIP, POL, JLOTS, etc.), of such complexity, that
require long lead-time and coordination with forces external to the MEF. Area of Operations: Change in area of
operations requiring a different set of considerations with respect to terrain and enemy. Command
Relationships: Changes in command relationships requiring coordination beyond that of what is currently in
place. CGs guidance to C/S, G-3, and G-5 may include decisions on the following: Assessment of division
of labor between G-5 and G-3 in order to prevent duplication of effort. Where does the CG want the G-5 to focus
his planning efforts? Does the CG want the G-5 to think beyond the next MEF mission? What are the CGs future
concerns? What should the G-5 produce and hand off to G-3, FOPS. Planning Horizon based on Time Available:
Is it better to have the G-5 coordinate and shape issues for the MEF or dedicate time to detailed planning that
may be best planned by G-3 FOPS. Planning Horizon based on achieving the assigned purpose: While G-3
plans and executes towards one purpose, G-5 plans towards the next purpose.
Commanders The commander provides forming guidance to his staff. This can include information that the commander has
Orientation: received from higher headquarters and the commanders own initial thoughts about the situation. Once this
orientation is complete the staff can prepare for subsequent design discussions.
Problem Establish Time Line. In his discussions with his staff the commander considers a wide variety of factors affecting
Framing: the environment and his mission. The commander provides initial guidance to his staff as he gains insight into the
nature and purpose of his mission. The staff then identifies specified and implied tasks (annotate reference/page
number); determines essential tasks; drafts the mission statement; determines the Area of Interest (AOI) in
relation to AO; reviews restraints (cannot do) and constraints (must do) (annotate reference/ page number); and
reviews significant assumptions required to continue planning. It also determines requests for information (RFI),
priority intelligence requirements (PIR), recommended CCIR(s), and reviews resource shortfalls.
Determine subject matter expert shortfall. Enemy and Friendly COG/CV analysis (Enemy COG prevents you from
achieving your purpose). Throughout planning allow OPT members time to brief respective Commanders and
staff principals. G-2 develops HVT(s).
Problem Review commanders initial guidance. Situation update, AO/AOI, Intel estimate (Terrain, weather, threat,
Framing Brief: COA[s]). HHQ Mission and Intent. Review purpose, specified, implied, and essential tasks (with
references/page). Proposed mission statement. Review shortfalls. Have G2 present enemy COA models. Review
Enemy and Friendly COG. Recommend CCIR(s). Issues for the commander. Once the mission statement is
approved, draft and issue warning order (mission, commanders intent, task organization, earliest time of
movement, etc.). Start incorporating planning products within the JOPES basic orders format. Begin staff
estimates and convene the Red Cell.
COA Commander issues planning guidance with respect to COA development, and decisive (results beyond itself) and
Development: shaping actions. Review MCOO, doctrinal and situation template, and ENCOA models. Graphically array friendly
and enemy forces. Develop the relative combat power assessment. Develop initial COA(s) by working
backward from the PURPOSE of the operation, the ENDSTATE conditions that achieve the purpose, EN
COG/CV, to decisive (ME) and shaping (SE/Lethal and non-lethal) actions and Reserves. Consider Types
of Offensive Operations and Forms of Maneuver that can lead you to a Decision. Think Time and Space at
the MEF leveldeep, close, rear operations. Determine which forms of maneuver best exploit the combined
arms of the MAGTF across the entire battlespace. Where do you want to force, accept, or refuse battle. Develop
HVT(s) into HPT(s). Review the commanders planning guidance against the COA. Ensure that the COA is
Suitable (accomplishes the mission [purpose] and complies with the commanders guidance). Feasible
(accomplish mission with available time, space and resources). Distinguishable (significant different from other
COA(s) in forms of maneuver or attacking EN COG through CVs). Acceptable (accomplishes an advantage that
justifies the cost in resources), Complete (accomplishes the all tasks in accordance with the commanders
guidance). Brief the initial COA to the commander, ensure that reps from the Red Cell are present. Make
necessary modifications. Refine graphics (boundaries, LD, phase lines, ground and air axis, assembly areas fire
support measures, ME/SE/Res) and write COA narratives (write broad overview of the operation as a CONOPS
(MSC ACE,GCE, FSSG tasks) as conducted in phases or stages with end state for each. Tasks and Purpose
of the ME/SE/Res). Reserves should be organized based on anticipated capabilities.
COA Review Commanders Planning Guidance, Intel update, Mission, Intent, Updated facts and assumptions, Relative
Development Combat Power Assessment, COA graphics and narratives (read the narrative and have a pointer work the map),
Brief: recommended additions to CCIR(s) and PIR(s). Pending Issues for the commander, Recommended war gaming
analysis and evaluation criteria.
COA War Commander updates intent, guidance, CBAE, and CCIR(s) as part of the commanders war game guidance.
Game: Includes friendly and threat COA(s) to be war gamed against specific (most likely and dangerous) enemy
COA(s). List of critical events (decisive action, shaping, link up, passage of lines, enemy counter attack) that
need to be war gamed, and level of the war game (one or two levels down). The commander establishes the
evaluation criteria based upon principles of war (MOOSE MUSS), main effort, EN COG, Purpose of the
operation. Red Cell and OPT prepare Synchronization Matrixes for their COA(s). Review the commanders
guidance and evaluation criteria with the OPT and Red Cell. Evaluate the friendly COA(s) against enemy COA(s)
and not against other friendly COA(s). Review war game rules and techniquepost the designated enemy COA

155
 overlay on the map, post the friendly COA overlay on the map, determine if events are simultaneous or
chronological, determine the affects of shaping (CCDR and Enemy) on the forces. Begin the war game by
establishing time of the event and weather conditions; then conduct as many moves as necessary to achieve
desired results. Record the time and results of the friendly and enemy moves, and collect data to satisfy the
commanders evaluation criteria. Update synchronization matrix and decision support template and matrix (event
template with projected enemy positions, NAI(s), TAI(s), and DP(s)). Identify and record, time, critical events,
decision points, branches, and sequels. Validate HPT(s). Identify resource shortfalls, and additional RFI, PIR(s),
and CCIR(s). Identify and develop measures of effectiveness for assessment. Validate Assessment Criterias
and MOEs for Tasks. Brief respective staff sections to develop and refine staff estimates.
COA Mission, Intent, Cdrs evaluation criteria, war gamed COA, narrative and task organization, war gamed significant
War Game events and results (just the facts), decision points, any branches and sequels, validated assumptions, additional
Brief: CCIR(s) and PIR(s), resource shortfalls, commanders issues (track the ones resolved), commanders evaluation
criteria as it pertains to each COA.
COA The commander, principle staff, and subordinate commanders examine and evaluate the COA(s) using the
Comparison commanders evaluation criteria, staff estimates, and estimates of supportability. The commander may select a
and COA, modify a COA, develop a new COA by combining favorable elements of all the COA(s), or discard and
Decision: begin staff planning anew. Upon making a decision, the commander reviews the COA in detail (critical events
and decision points) with subordinate commanders and principle staff. Issue Warning Order.
Orders The C/S coordinates the principle staff to assist the G-3 in developing the OPORDER. The mission statement
Development: (goes in para. 2 of the OPORDER), commanders intent (para. 3a), COA narrative (refined into a concept of
operations [para. 3b]), CCIR(s) (para 3e), staff estimates (refined into appropriate annexes), specified and
implied tasks (with a purpose assigned to subordinates in para 3c), synchronization matrix (refined into an
execution matrix), and other products from the planning process become the basis of the OPORDER. Conduct
an Orders Reconciliation to review the entire order to ensure that the basic order and all its annexes are properly
linked and in agreement. Conduct an orders crosswalk to ensure that the order is also linked to higher and
adjacent. Identified branches are further planned to become FRAGO(s). Decision Support Template and Matrix
along with other Intelligence and IPB products are provided to subordinate commands.
Transition: Designed to shift from planning to execution. The commander or C/S provide transition guidance. During
transition, the commander conducts a transition/execution drill to envision flow of events with subordinate
commanders. The commander may require the subordinate commanders to give a confirmation brief of their
understanding of the mission and intent and their CONOPS. In internal transition, the plan is transitioned by
future ops to current ops. The OPT reviews the detailed plan or order with all the staff section current ops reps.
This brief may consist of an orientation, intelligence update, IPB, HHQ mission and intent, mission, commanders
intent, CCIR(s), T/O, and concept of operations, subordinate tasks, coordinating instructions, identified branches
and sequels, decision support tools, pending issues. Current Ops should conduct an execution drill.
Red Cell: Convene the red cell as soon as possible. As the thinking enemy, the red cell receives threat COA(s) (most
Supports the dangerous/most likely) from the G-2 and prepares these COA(s) for the war game. Based on threat capabilities,
CIC. the red cell should have the following representation: maneuver, fires, and intelligence. The red cell team leader
is designated by the commander and does not necessarily have to be an intelligence officer. The red cell and the
OPT must constantly exchange information during the planning process.
Warfighting Maneuver, Intelligence, Logistics, Command and Control, Force Protection, Fires
Functions:
Center of COG is a source of strength (MCDP series & 0-1) a COG may shift by phase or by COA. For example if the
Gravity: enemy is defending, his COG may be artillery; whereas, if the enemy is delaying, his COG maybe his
counterattack forcearmor. At the tactical level, if the EN COG does not prevent you from achieving your
purpose, then it may not be a COG. Remain focused on the purpose, the attack of the EN COG is only
important if it leads you to that purpose.
Cdrs Intent: Purpose, Method, and End State
Commanders An item of information required by the Cdr that directly affects his decisions and the successful execution of his
Critical operational or tactical operations. The two key elements in a CCIR are: Priority Intelligence Requirements
Information (PIR) and Friendly Force Information Requirements (FFIR) (see JP 1-02). A CCIR should be linked to
Requirement decisions, assessment criteria and branch plans. To better focus collection assets the Cdr should designate as
(CCIR): few CCIR as possible.
On-order; Be An On-order mission is a mission to be executed, except that the exact time and place may not be known.
Prepared The force assigned the mission is a committed force, it will develop plans, allocate resources, task organize,\ and
Missions position forces for execution. It must be mentioned in the CONOPS. A Be-prepared mission is a mission
assigned that might be executed. It will be executed only if something else has or has not been successful;
linked to an event. No resources are allocated for a BPT mission. In the priority of planning, it will be planned
after any other assigned on-order missions.
Forms of Forms of Maneuver: Frontal Attack--Flank Attack Envelopment (single/double)Turning Movement-
Maneuver and PenetrationInfiltration. Types of Offense: Movement to Contact, Attack (Hasty, Deliberate, Spoiling,
Types of Counterattack, Raid, Feint, Demonstration), Exploitation, Pursuit. Types of Defense: Mobile (orients on the
Operations: destruction of the enemy through offensive action) and Position Defense (deny enemy access to critical terrain
for a specified period of time). Forms of Defensive Maneuver: defend and retrograde. Forms of Retrograde:
Delay, Withdrawal (under pressure and not under pressure), Retirement. Forms of Reconnaissance: Zone,
Area, Point, Route, Recon in Force. Forms of Security: Screen (observe and report), Guard (T/O to operate
apart and protect the main force), Cover (prevent surprise and deceive the enemy).

156
Defense Security area (FLOT[no screening or guard forces forward ofshould have a BHL for these forces]FEBA [area
Operations: where ground combat units are deployed, excluding screening and covering forces]). Main Battle Area (FEBA
Rear Boundary of forward subordinate units). Rear Area (area forward from the assigned rear boundary to the
rear boundary of the main battle area). Position Defense: Denies the enemy access to terrain. Mobile Defense:
Orients on the enemy force. Defend in sector or battle position. Task Organized Counterattack Force and
Reserves.
Phases of an JP 3-0 September 06 with Change one (February 08) recognizes six phases in a campaign or major operation.
Operation These are shape, deter, seize the initiative, dominate, stabilize and enable civil authority.
Amphibious Types: Assault, Demonstration, Raid, Withdrawal. Assault Forces and Assault Follow on Echelon. PERMA;
Operations: Planning, Embarkation, Rehearsal, Movement, Assault. Considerations: Mission (Purpose of amphibious
assault fix, deceive, or fight in depth, are operations sequenced or simultaneous), Objectives, who is the CATF
and does he have the ability to control the AOA, if established. If no AOA how and who controls the battlespace.
AOA (immature theater) / AO (mature theater), Command Relations, Air Control, Supporting Ops, Boundaries,
Linkup, Deception, Pre-Assault Ops, Advance Force Ops, MPF, Logistics (AFLOAT or JLOTS). What are the
conditions for transfer of authority ashore. Is NAVFOR the supported or supporting commander during execution
of the amphibious operation? Advance Force Operations (Org within the ATF that precedes to prepare the obj
arearecon, mines), Pre-Assault Operations (conducted in obj area before the assault phase begins by the
ATF forces), Supporting Operations (Coordinated by the CATF to shape the enemy by joint forcesdeception,
battlespace dominance, mines outside the AOA, MIO, special operations). SHIPS: LPD4: (700 Marines, 1 LCAC,
2 Helo spot4 CH 46), LPD17 (700 Marines, 2 LCAC, 2 Helo spots 4 CH-46), LSD41: (400 Marines, 4 LCAC,
2 Helo spot0 CH 46), LSD49: (400 Marines, 2 LCAC, 2 Helo spot0 CH 46), LHD: (1,890 Marines, 3 LCAC, 9
Helo spot 42 CH 46), LHA: (1,900 Marines, 1 LCAC, 9 Helo spot43 CH46), LCC-19, Blue Ridge Command
Ship (200 Marines, 1 Helo spot). 5-inch Guns: 22,000k HE, WP, illum.
Stability Principles: Objective, Unity of Effort, Security, Restraint, Perseverance, and Legitimacy. Types: Arms Control,
Operations: Combating Terrorism, DOD Support to Counterdrug Operations, Enforcement of Sanctions/Maritime Intercept
Operations, Enforcing Exclusion Zones, Ensuring Freedom of Navigation and Overflight, Humanitarian
Assistance, Military Support to Civil Authorities, Nation Assistance/Support to Counterinsurgency, NEO(s), Peace
Operations (Peace Enforcement, Peace Keeping Operations, Operations in Support of Diplomatic Efforts),
Protection of Shipping, Recovery Operations, Show of Force Operations.
Linkup Conducted during an amphibious operation by forces landed by surface or aviation means, relief of an isolated
Operations: unit, join other US or allied forces. May be conducted to complete an encirclement of envelopment of an enemy
force, join an attacking force with a force inserted in the enemy rear. Assist in the breakout of an encircled
friendly force, Forces may be moving towards each other, or may be stationary. May be part of an offensive or
defensive operation. HQ directing the linkup must establish the command relationships and responsibilities of the
forces involved. Liaison is established through planning and continues throughout the operation. Coordinate the
scheme of maneuver and control measures. Location of primary and alternate linkup points. Fire support
measures increase or decrease as the forces converge. Actions following the linkup. G2 must employ R/S assets
near linkup points. Axis of advance of the moving force must intersect the security element of the stationary
force. Stationary force removes obstacles, provides guides, and establishes assembly areas for the
reorganization of the linkup forces. A restrictive fire line (RFL) may be required to preclude fires from the
convergence of forces affecting each other. As the linkup become imminent, the RFL is moved as close to the
stationary force as possible to allow maximum freedom of action for the linkup force (moving force should control
fires). Both FSCC should clear fires not observed or under terminal control. Upon linkup, responsibility for fire
support is transferred to the designated commander. If the linkup force is to continue operations with the
stationary force, then a single commander for the overall force must be designated. FM 71-100 Div Ops
Obstacle Natural or Manmade. Hasty or Deliberate. Suppress, Obscure, Secure, and Reduce. Support Force to isolate
Crossing: the obj, Breach force creates lanes within the obstacle belt. Assault force dislodges the enemy. M-155 MICLIC:
100m x 16m. Expect 50% equipment loss for the breach force. Mechanical Reduction 10 minutes per 100m
minefield.
Passage of Must facilitate another tactical operation. Conducted to continue and attack, envelop an enemy force, pursue a
Lines: fleeing enemy, or withdraw a security or main battle force area. Use multiple passage lanes. Should be rapid to
minimize vulnerability. Stationary unit conducts aggressive counter recon. Engineer support from stationary unit
to guide the passing force through obstacles along the FLOT. Control measure (Battle Handover Line, Axis of
Advance, Rearward Assembly Areas). Passing unit FSC coordinates the fires. Stationary unit assists in
CASEVAC, EPW(s), civilian control, route priority and traffic control. Higher command coordinates responsibility
of control of zone or sector or mutually agreed by stationary and passing commanders. Deception and smoke are
planned. Combat support is integrated into the plan to support the movement of the passing unit. Route priority is
given to the passing unit. Exchange intelligence, tactical plans, SOPs, security measure during passage,
priorities of route and facilities and provisions for movement control, exchange of LNO(s), and obstacle plan.
Relief in Place Can be conducted simultaneously over the entire sector or staggered over time. Executed from front to back or
back to front, given METT-T and the amount of forces employed along the FLOT (minimum forces along the
FLOT, relief rear to front and vice versa). Time of relief, sequence of units, advance parties, fire support
coordination, air defense, passage control (initially unit being relieved has TACON upon relieving unit, exchange
of equipment).
Maritime Secure area with adequate ports (drafts, overhead clearance, and throughput [roads]), and adequate strategic
Prepostioning: airlift. One MPSRON supports a brigade size MAGTF force of approx. 18,800 Marines and sailors for 30 days. All
classes of supplies except IV, VI and X. MPSRON-1 Mediterranean Sea, MSPRON-2 Indian Ocean (Diego
Garcia), MSPRON-3 Pacific Ocean (Guam). M1A1: 58; LAV: 25; AAV:109; HMMWV weapon carriers:111 (48

157
 w/TOW), TWPS: 20; ROWPU:41; Trucks (7 ton cargo): 319, MHE: 121; 30 days sustainment. Sorties for MEF
(Fwd) Fly in Echelon: CMD (CE) 12; GCE 35; CSSE 30; ACE 151. Naval Support Element (NSE) 6. Offload 7-9
days dependent on ship type. Backload 9-10 days.
Rear Functions: Communications, Intelligence, Movement, Area Management, Security, Sustainment,
Operations: Infrastructure Development, HN Support. Dedicate intelligence assets to rear area.. Todays deep fight may be
tomorrows rear area. MACE CG generally assigned as the RAC (rear area commander/coordinator). Reserve
Regt assigned as the TCF. Levels: 1. (Agents, terrorists, saboteurs.) Threat can be defeated by base/base
cluster self-defense. 2. (Small tactical units, unconventional forces.) Beyond base self-defense capability but
can be defeated by response forces (MP) with supporting arms. 3. (Large tactical unitsair/heliborne,
amphibious.) Requires commitment of combined arms tactical combat forces (TCF). Active and Passive
Defensive Measures. SROE and LNO to FOPS. If FSSG is the RAC than they must have assets assigned for
fire coordination and security.
IPB: Doctrinal Template: En Order of Battle. Situation Template: Enemy based on terrain and environment. Event
Template: NAI with EN COA for developing a collection plan. Combined Event Template: Red and Blue Forces
COA. Decision Support Template: A product of war gaming, projected EN COA with DP(s)/NAI/TAI. MCOO:
Modified Combined Obstacles Overlay: mobility corridors, objectives avenues of approach, likely location of EN
obstacle system, defensible terrain, likely engagement area, key terrain, built up areas & civil infrastructure, etc.
HVT: Essential for the enemy to accomplish the mission. Developed by the G-2. HPT: Enemy targets, when
destroyed, help us accomplish the mission. Developed by the G-3.
IO/IW/C2W: Integrated plans to degrade enemy decision making capabilities while protecting ones own IO/IW/C2W includes:
Deception, Psychological Operations, Physical Destruction, Electronic Warfare, Operational Security,
Civil Affairs. Defensive IO/IW/C2W methods include: OPSEC, Information Assurance, CI, Counter
PSYOPS, and Counter Deception. C2W implies tactical measures while IW is operational information
operations.
MOPP 1: Over garment worn, carry the rest of the protective gear. 2: Wear boots. 3: Protective mask and hood. 4:
Conditions: Gloves, liners and over garment are closed and hoods pulled down. Joint Service Lightweight Integrated Suit
Technology MOPP suit lasts 30 days and 24 hrs contaminated. Account for a factor of 1.5 longer to accomplish
this under MOPP conditions. FM 3-4, NBC Protection.
Air Defense Weapons Free: Weapons fired at any target not positively recognized as friendly. Weapons Tight: Fired at
Weapons targets recognized as hostile. Weapons Hold: Fired in self-defense.
Control Status:
Levels of COCOM: non-transferable command authority established by law. OPCON: transferable authority to accomplish
Authority: assigned missions; does not include authority for logistics, administration, discipline, internal organization, or unit
training. TACON: local direction to accomplish assigned tasks. ADCON: administrative and logistics. DS: Support
another force and to answer directly to the supported forces request for assistance. GS: Support given to the
supported force as a whole and not any subdivision thereof. GSR: Arty mission, support the force as whole while
providing reinforcing fires for another arty unit. Attached: Temporary placement of units or personnel in an
organization. Mutual Support and Close Support
LNO(s): Liaisons: represent the sending units capabilities, plans, and concerns. He must be able to understand how his
REP(s): commander thinks, and convey his commanders intent, mission, concept of operations, and concerns. LNO(s)
Augments: should have the requisite rank, authority, clearances and communication connectivity to function properly.
LNO(s) should have the depth in personnel to conduct sustained operations. REP(s): Work for the sending unit
and provide short term, as required input into the planning process. They are expected to be the SME for the
function they represent. Augments: Work for the receiving commander or staff and usually fill an MOS/TE
shortfall requirement for the gaining unit.
Fire Support FSCL: Established by the land or amphibious commander to coordinate fires of air, ground, or sea weapons
systems. Must be coordinated with appropriate air commander (keep in mind the ATO cycle its impact to rapidly
change FSCL(s)). Supporting elements may fire beyond the FSCL without coordination but should inform
appropriate ground commander. Coordination required behind the line. CFL: A line beyond which conventional
fire support means may fire at any time without additional coordination. RFL: Established between two
converging forces, established by the next higher common commander. RFA: Fires that exceed imposed
restrictions may not be delivered without approval.
Days: C-day: deployment to commence; D-day: commencement of hostilities; R-day: redeployment; S-day: 200,000
Hours: selected reserve to active duty for 90 days; T-day: National Emergency 1,000,000 reserve call up for 24 months;
W-day: hostile government may commence operations. Hours: H: commencement of operation on D-day; L:
hour at which deployment commences on C-day. (ref: JP1-02, under Time)
Collaborative GCCS: Global Command and Control System. JDISS: Joint Deployable Intelligence System (fed by GCCS
Planning requires SIPRNET). JMCIS/UB: Joint Maritime Command Information System/Unified Build. IAS: Intelligence
Systems: Analysis System. TCO: Tactical Combat Operations. C2PC: Command and Control Personal Computer. CTAPS:
Contingency Theatre Automated Planning System. TBMCS: Theater Battle Management Core Systems
(Replacing CTAPS). AFTADS: Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Systems. TMS: Target Management System.
JOTS: Joint Operational Tactical System. JOTS 1 (TDBM): Track Database Manager. COP: Common Operating
Picture (CCDR). CTP: Common Tactical Picture (Component and Below). DII COE: Defense Information
Infrastructure Common Operating Environment.
Classes of I Rations, II Individual Equipment, III POL, IV Construction, V Ammunition, VI Sundry Items, VII Major End Items,
Supply: VIII Medical/Dental, IX Repair parts, X Materials for Non-Military Programs.

158
Weapons MIAI: 300 miles (505 gal), weight 70 tons, 120mm gun, range 3,000m, 14 per company; M2 BFV: 300 miles (175
Systems: gal) 25mm chain gun 14 per company; LAV: (basic version) 410 miles (79 gal), 25mm chain gun, 14 (+4 antitank,
2 mortar, 1 command, 3 logistics and 1 recovery variants) per company TOW: 3750 m range, Hellfire: 7000 m
range; Longbow 20Km range; Javelin: 2,000 m range; 60mm Mortar 3,500 m range; 81mm Mortar 5,800 m
range; 105mm Arty 14,000 m range; 155mm Arty 18,000 Rap 30,000; MLRS 32Km 100Km (ATACMS);
Stinger missile: 15,000m; Patriot: 160 km; Hawk: 80 km; JSTARS: approx. 200miles by 200miles coverage.
TLAM: 1,000 lb warhead; JDAM: Joint Direct Attack Munitions Satellite Guided.
Army Heavy M1A1 tank: 58 (14 per tank co); CFV M3: 29; IFV M2: 61 (14 per infantry co); IFV M2 (Engineer): 18 (9 per
Brigade engineer co); IFV M7 (FIST): 11; Javelin: 36; M1064 SP 120mm mortar: 14; M109A6 155-mm SP: 16; M992
Combat Team: armored ammunition vehicles: 16; ACE: 6; M88 recovery vehicles: 27; AN/TPQ-36/37 artillery radars: 2
Army Stryker M1126 Stryker Infantry ICV: 127; M1127 Recon ICV: 51; M1128 MGS ICV (planned): 27; M1129 Mortar ICV:
Brigade 36; M1130 Command ICV: 16; M1131 FIST ICV: 13; M1132 Engineer ICV: 9; M1133 Medical ICV: 16; M1134
Combat Team: Antitank ICV: 9; M1135 NBC ICV: 3; 155-mm how: 12; Javelin: 121; AN/TPQ-36/37 artillery radars: 2
Army 3d M1A1 tank: 123; CFV M3: 125; IFV M2 (Engineer): 12; IFV M7 (FIST): 12; Fox NBC Recon vehicles: 6;
Armored Javelin: 58; M1064 SP 120-mm mortar: 18; AH64: 24; UH60: 10; M109A6 155mm SP: 18; M992 armored
Cavalry Regt. ammunition vehicles: 18; ACE: 6; M60 bridge armored vehicle: 15; M88 recovery vehicles: 30
USMC Tank M1A1: 58 (66-72 tons). Co 14 x 4; M88 recovery vehicles: 8; M60A1 bridge armored vehicles: 4; TOW
Battalion: HMMWV: 26;HMG HMMWV: 10; MTVR: 48; LVS: 10; Tank Bn = H&S co, 4 tank co
USMC LAR LAV-25: 74 (14 per LAR co); LAV-AT: 20 (4 per LAR co); LAV-Mortar: 10 (2 per LAR co); LAV-C2: 9 (1 per LAR
Battalion: co); LAV-L: 19 (3 per LAR co); LAV-R: 7 (1 per LAR co); MTVR: 40; LVS: 5; LAR Bn = H&S Co, 5 LAR co
USMC AAV AAVP7: 213, AAVC7: 14; AAVR7: 6; MTVR 22; LVS 13; AAV Bn = H&S co, 4 AAV co. CO: 43P; 3C; 1R. CO D
Battalion: in 29 Palms. Combat Assault Bn in Okinawa has 1 AAV CO
Air Defense Patriot: 160 km. Patriot Radar Alt 80K, Acquisition Range 160K. Engagement Range 60K. Should be
employed no more than 20K from unit. Mutual Support 15K. BN: 5 Btry; 8 Launchers per Btry; 32 Missiles per
Btry. AVENGER Acquisition Range 10K; Engagement Range 5K. Mutual Support Distance 3K. 8 Missiles per
vehicle. Stinger Missile: 15000m. Hawk: 80 km.
Intelligence Rivet Joint: Communications Intelligence and Electronic Intelligence. Quickfix: EH 60 Tactical
Collection Communication Intelligence and Electronic Intelligence; DF and Electronic attack in low frequency spectrums.
Platforms: Compass Call: Jammer. Commando Solo: C-130 Psychological operations and broadcaster.
Tactical SCUD B: Range:300K, Payload:2,200lbs, CEP: 400 to 1000m, Warhead: Conv/Chem. SCUD C: Range:500K,
Ballistic Payload:1,500 lbs, CEP: 400 to 1000m, Warhead: Conv/Chem. Nodong 1: Range:1000K, Payload:2,200lbs,
Missiles Warhead: Conv/Chem. Nodong 2: Range:1500 - 2000K, Payload:2,200lbs, Warhead: Conv/Chem. M18:
Range:1000K, Payload: 880lbs. M9: Range: 600K, Payload 1100lbs, CEP: 300m, Warhead: Conv. CSS-2/DF-3:
Range: 3000K, Payload: 3000lbs, CEP: 1000m, Warhead: Conv/Nuc. Jericho 1 (Israel): Range:500K,
Payload:1,100lbs, Warhead: Conv/Chem. Frog 7: Range:70K, Payload:960lbs, CEP: 400m, Warhead:
Conv/Chem. Sakr-80 (Egypt): Range:80K, Payload:440lbs, Warhead: Conv. Vector (Egypt): Range: 600K,
Payload:1000lbs, Warhead: Conv. BGM 109 TOMAHAWK: Range:1300K, Payload:1000lbs, CEP: 10m,
Warhead: Conv/Nuc. (Ref CGSC ST 100-3).
Attack AH1: Missiles: 8/ 20mm, Range: 480k; AH64: Missiles: 16/30mm, Range: 480kaux tanks 800k; OH58:
Helicopters Missiles: 4/.50cal, Range: 413k. (Ref CGSC ST 100-3).
Utility UH60: Troop: 13 (20 without seats), Range: 592K, Internal: 2,600lbs, External: 8000lbs. CH47: Troop: 33 (100
Helicopter without seats), Range: 717K, Internal: 20,200lbs, External: 30,000lbs. CH53E: Troop: 35 (55 with center seats),
Range: 620m, refueling Indefinite, Internal: 31,000lbs, External: 33,000lbs. CH53D: Troop: 35 (55 with center
seats), Range: 690m, takeoff weight: 19,000lbs. CH46: Troop: 14 (24 combat), Range: 190K, Internal: 2,600lbs,
External: 8000lbs. UH1: Troop: 9, Range: 200K, Internal: 1,500lbs. (Ref CGSC ST 100-3).
Functions of Offensive Air Support (CAS & DAS); Anti-air Warfare (Offensive AAW and Air Defense); Assault Support;
Marine Aviation Air Reconnaissance; Electronic Warfare; Control of Aircraft and Missiles

A-3. Combat Service Support Considerations in Intelligence Preparation of the

Battlespace
a. Terrain Implications
Can the terrain support CSS operations?
Are host nation (HN) assets available for logistics operations?
Any existing structures/built-up areas present?
Any usable medical facilities
Is there any overhead storage/work areas?
What are the ground avenues of approach (AA) that could interfere with CSS operations? Offensive operations could
produce by-passed or stay behind enemy elements that must be recognized and averted by CSS assets to be able to
maintain continuous support.

159
Where are the infiltration lanes that could be used by the enemy?
Identify and locate the routes the enemy could use to move insurgents, light infantry, and/or unconventional
warfare units into the CSS AOR.
Is there any area in the CSS AOR that could provide concealed positioned to these enemy units?
Identify possible AAs, LZs, DZs, and MSR ambush locations in the CSS AO.

b. Weather Implications
What will be the effect on the entire road network (hard surfaced and unimproved road surfaces) as a result of
different types of precipitation (rain, snow, fog/mist, ice) and temperature?
Will a rain soaked unimproved dirt road support the weight of fuel
LVSs or 5K tankers? How about a HET loaded with a M1A1 weighing 135 tons?
How will an iced over hard surface MSR effect LOGPAC operations?
Will an unplowed, snowed over MSR affect CSS travel time?
Will the temperature have any effect on
Friendly forces CL II (Clothing)
Classes of supply
Storage of CL I and VIII
Consumption of CL III (Bulk & Packaged) or IX (filters, tire chains, batteries, starters)?
Production of potable water (frozen pipes, iced over ponds, creeks, etc)?
How would poor visibility/illumination affect
Enemy infiltration.
Force protection.
Driving/resupply activities (slower convoy speeds, accidents).

c. Other Implications
Security
Does the area offer adequate cover/concealment?
Do we have observation/overwatch positions along possible AA(s)/LZ(s)?
Can we disperse our assets to reduce possible collateral damage?
Can we minimize our units signature?
General
Does the area afford good communications?
Is the road network adequate and trafficable? Can the terrain support movement within the AO for the
vehicles that will occupy it?
Is the AO in proximity to the MSR, not on the MSR but near it? By doing so it reduces unit signature and
might take the unit off an AA.
Potable water/raw water source location (available, frozen over).
Access to MEDEVAC LZ?
Existing bridges capable of handling fully loaded LVS(s), 5K tankers and HET(s) evacuating M1(s)?
What is the height clearance for overhead bridges?
Any water/rail capability.

d. Considerations in Developing the Modified Combined Obstacle Overlay

Does the terrain offer an area suitable for logistics operations?
Is it away from possible AA(s) and mobility corridors?
Is this area close to a useable road network?

160
 Does the MSR travel through primary or secondary engagement areas?
Are there any obstacles that could restrict/divert CSS operations such as bridge restrictions, choke points,
road surface/trafficability concerns?

A-4. Combat Service Support Considerations in the Problem Framing

The questions logistics planners and operators should always be able to answer are
Where are we on the battlefield?
Why are we here?
How do we support from here?
How do we get support from here?
How long do we need to provide support for?
When, to where, and in what sequence do we displace to ensure continuous operations?
The following is a type of methodology for logistics planners at all levels. It is based on a requirement,
capability, shortfall, analysis, and solution model. This methodology can be used in logistics course of
action (COA) development when the unit is developing its concept of support. This process is meant to
complement the Marine Corps Planning Process.
a. Requirements
What method is used to determine logistics requirements? [For example, personnel density, equipment
density, planning factors, operating tempo, combination, etc.]
What is the source of the requirements determination calculations? [For example, Marine Corps Orders,
casualty estimator historical data, etc.]
What units are you supporting for this mission? Will it change during the operation?
Identify implied logistics tasks based on the tactical plan. What are the ramifications of river crossings,
pauses, deep attacks, etc.?
Is there an NBC threat?
What do you need?
How long will you need it?
Where do you need it?
What do you need to put it there? (For example, fuel bladders/bags, materiel handling equipment, etc.)
How will you get it there?
When do you need it there?
How long will it take to get it there?
How soon will it be available to move there?
Where is it coming from?
What do you need to do with it before moving it where you need it? (For example, does it have to be
containerized, broken down, segregated, separated, disassembled, configured, or reconfigured before
movement?)
o How long will that take?
o What are the requirements for that?
Does it have to move again after it gets there? Who will move it from there?
What are the competing demands for this requirement?
What is required to offload it when it gets there?
Does anything need to be done with it once it gets there? (For example, does it have to be unpacked,
assembled, etc.?)
What has to be done to move it once it is there?
Does this requirement have special employment considerations? (For example, require a large, level area of
land or a fresh water source; be located near an MSR; need refrigeration; require dedicated transportation;
etc.)
How often will the commodity, supply, or service be required? How often must it be replenished?

161
 Does the requirement have preparatory activities? [For example, engineers to make berms for fuel bags,
airfield matting for forward arming and refueling points (FARPs), road and pad construction for a CSSA]
o What is the expected duration of the required preparation?
o How do you request the preparation and who approves it? (For example, engineer work has to be
approved through channels.)
o What support is required for the preparatory activities?

b. Capabilities
What are the units available that have the capability to fulfill the requirement?
Is more than one unit required to provide the capability?
What are the overall receipt, storage, and issue requirements for my area of support for this particular
commodity, supply, or service?
Will this capability be used to weight the battle logistically?
What is the total short ton (STON)/gallon/other distribution capability by mode? Line haul? Local haul?
Other? What distribution planning factors were used?
How many locations require this capability?
Are any units with this capability already committed?
Are any units with this capability due in? When?
Can a unit deploy elements (sections or detachments) to place the capability where it is required?
Does the unit have unique management/employment considerations?

c. Comparison/Shortfall
If there is no shortfall, go to the analysis portion of this methodology.
Which requirements exceed capabilities?
For requirements that exceed capabilities, is it overall or in a particular area, region, or time?
How much is the shortfall in terms of units of measurement (STONs, gallons, square feet)?
What does the shortfall equate to in terms of days of supply?
At what point in the battle is the requirement expected to exceed the capability?
What is the type of shortfall? Is it a supply availability shortfall, a resource [equipment, materials handling
equipment (MHE), personnel, facilities, man-hours, etc.] shortfall, or a distribution shortfall?

d. Analysis
The analysis process has to occur for all support operations even if there is no shortfall. The logistic planner has to
determine how to support the operation.
What is the earliest the support operation can begin?
What is the latest the support operation can begin?
Is it better to be early or late?
What is the purpose of the support? (For example, is the purpose to build stocks at GS, to sustain a force for a
given period of time at DS, or to resupply a user?)
Will support be provided from a fixed location or from a forward logistics detachment?
What is the significance of the shortfall?
What is the potential impact of the shortfall?
What is the expected duration of the shortfall?
What is the cause of the shortfall (battle loss, time-phased force deployment sequence, etc.)?
If the shortfall is a supply availability shortfall, consider the following:
o Is the shortfall only at this level or is at higher levels as well?
o Is it a result of higher commands' efforts and support priorities?
o Is the supply available at other echelons and, if so, where?
o How long will it take to get here?
o Is there an acceptable alternative, a substitute, or an alternative source of supply?

162
 If the shortfall is a resource shortfall (equipment, MHE, personnel, facilities, man-hours, etc.), consider the
following:
o Can similar resources be diverted or obtained from somewhere else?
o Is HNS a viable alternative?
o How specialized is the shortfall resource?
o Can a secondary military occupational specialty (MOS) be used?
o Does a sister service or coalition partner have the capability?
If the shortfall is a distribution shortfall, consider the following:
o Is the shortfall due to a lack of assets or to a time-distance problem?
o Does the shortfall capability require special handling or any special distribution requirements?
o Are there any alternative distribution modes?
o Are host nation distribution assets available?
o Are sister service/coalition assets available? Are they compatible? (For example, European and
SWA host nation fuel tankers are metric and require a coupler adapter to interface fuel bags or US
tankers.)
o Are there any airfields, field landing strips, or helipads near the requirement?
How will logistics capability be echeloned forward? Which units will be tasked to establish forward logistics
bases?

e. Solutions
Determine the most workable solutions based on analysis.
Ensure support plan is fully integrated into concept of operations.

A-5. Combat Service Support Considerations in Course of Action Development

Focus on logistical factors that constrain the tactical operations
Key is to identify and eliminate any COA that is not supportable.
Identify limitations that planners must be concerned with
(CL IV availability for barrier plans or CL V CSR Vs RSR)
Identify the cost or risk in terms of resources for each COA
Update logistics, personnel, and casualty estimates as additional information becomes available
Key questions for the CSS planners are:
Will CSS support be required to relocate during the operation?
Are the line haul or local haul distance factors exceeded?
Specific items to focus on for COA development
CSSA, BSA locations
MSR plan for resupply of the units
Barrier plan and its effect on resupply; location of the CL IV point
Will the CSSA need to move to support the COA?
Are any Mobile Detachments required?

A-6. Combat Service Support Considerations in Course of Action Wargaming

Focus on ensuring critical CSS items are included on the synchronization matrix
Update logistics, personnel, and casualty estimates as additional information is obtained.
The war game will validate, change, or invalidate parts of or the entire logistics, personnel, and casualty
estimate.
The logistics estimate is validated and completed as part of the COA war game process.
Estimates applied during wargaming help to ensure COA(s) are supportable and feasible.
Wargaming helps CSS planners synchronize tactical logistics functions to support a tactical operation.

163
 It determines the timeframe support must be provided to enable the combat forces to accomplish their
mission.
During the war game, the CSS planner can prepare the logistics portion by function of the synchronization
matrix. This ensures all critical CSS actions are addressed.
Wargaming helps determine specific events that are critical before the battle and provides estimates of peak
consumption, times and distances supply convoys must travel, battle losses and casualties.
Wargaming also helps to deconflict terrain.
Determine adjustments to consumption factors based on war game results.

A-7. Combat Service Support Considerations in Course of Action

Comparison/Decision
Develop meaningful and descriptive criteria for comparing COA(s)
Which COA has higher/lower casualty estimates and subsequent need for replacements?
Which COA has higher/lower consumption rates of CL V?
Which COA has higher/lower consumption rates of CL III (Bulk)?
Which COA has higher/lower battle damage estimates requiring increased recovery and evaluation of
combat/CS/CSS systems?
Which COA has longer LOCs requiring possibly more transportation assets?
Which COA has increased sustainment requirements (CL IV, Combat Health Spt)
Which COA presents higher degree of risk in the potential loss or destruction of CSS assets and resources?
When determining decision criteria, CSS planners must
Provide the commander information to properly weigh all issues before making a decision.
Ensure the commander fully understands the costs and risks that exist in a COA.

A-8. Comparison of Marine Corps Planning Process to Other Planning Processes

Marine Corps Military Decision JOPES Crisis

Joint Task Force NATO
Planning Process Making Process Action Planning
Problem Receipt of Mission Situation
Initiation
Framing Mission Analysis Development

Mission Planning Crisis

Orientation
Analysis Guidance Assessment

COA COA COA COA Concept

Development Development Development Development Development

COA COA COA

War Game Analysis Analysis

COA Comparison COA COA COA Plan

and Decision Comparison Comparison Selection Development

COA COA
Approval Selection

Orders Orders Execution

Development Production Planning

Transition Execution Plan Review

Note: Like steps of each planning process are shaded in the same manner

Figure A-1. Comparison of the Marine Corps Planning Process to other planning processes

164
A-9. Frequency Bands
Abbreviation Band Frequency Range
ELF Extremely Low Frequency Below 3 KHz
VLF Very Low Frequency 3 to 30 KHz
LF Low Frequency 30 to 300 KHz
MF Medium Frequency 300 KHz to 3 MHz
HF High Frequency 3 to 30 MHz
VHF Very High Frequency 30 to 300 MHz
UHF Ultra High Frequency 300 MHz to 3 GHz
SHF Super High Frequency 3 to 30 GHz
EHF Extremely High Frequency Over 30 GHz
Notes: KHz = kilohertz (one thousand cycles per second)
MHz = megahertz (one million cycles per second)
GHz = gigahertz (one billion cycles per second)

Table A-1. Frequency bands

A-10. Customary Metric Conversion Factors

English System Metric System
Linear Measure
1 inch = 2.54 centimeters
1 foot = 0.3048 meters
1 yard = 0.9144 meters
1 mile = 1.6093 kilometers
0.3937 inches = 1 centimeter
1.0936 yards = 1 meter
0.6137 miles = 1 kilometer
Liquid Measure
1 fluid ounce = 29.573 milliliters
1 quart = 0.94635 liters
1 gallon = 3.7854 liters
0.33814 fluid ounce = 1 milliliter
0.26417 gallon = 1 liter
Weight Measure
1 troy pound = 0.37324 kilograms
1 avoirdupois pound = 0.45359 kilograms
1 short ton (0.8929 long tons) = 907.18 kilograms (0.90718 metric tons)
1 long ton (1.12 short tons) = 1,016.0 kilograms (1.016 metric tons)
2.2046 avoirdupois pounds = 1 kilogram
1.1023 short tons (0.98421 long tons) = 1 metric ton
Square Measure
1 square foot = 9.2903 square decimeters
1 square yard = 0.83613 square meters
1 square mile = 2.590 square kilometers
1.1960 square yards = 1 square meter
0.38608 square miles = 1 square kilometer
Cubic Measure
1 cubic foot = 0.28317 cubic meters
1 cubic yard = 0.76455 cubic meters
1 cubic mile = 4.16818 cubic kilometers
1.3079 cubic yards (35.315 cubic feet) = 1 cubic meter
0.23990 cubic miles = 1 cubic kilometer

Table A-2. Conversion factors

165
This page intentionally left blank.

166
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Appendix B

Abbreviations
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

B-1. National Distinguishing Letters

The following letters are used wherever it is necessary to identify a units nationality (e.g., 1 (UK) Armd Div):
AF Afghanistan
AS Australia
BE Belgium
CA Canada
DA Denmark
FR France
GE Germany
GR Greece
IC Iceland
IN India
IT Italy
JA Japan
LU Luxembourg
NL Netherlands
NZ New Zealand
NO Norway
PK Pakistan
PO Portugal
RP Philippines
SP Spain
TI Tajikistan
TU Turkey
TX Turkmenistan
UK United Kingdom
US United States
UZ Uzbekistan
Note: The national distinguishing letters for Canada are not used to identify Canadian Army units which have the
words Canada or Canadian in their official title.

B-2. Abbreviations
AAFS amphibious assault fuel system ASW antisubmarine warfare
AAV assault amphibious vehicle ATARS advanced tactical airborne reconnaissance system
ABCCC airborne battlefield command & control center ATC air traffic control
ABT air breathing threat ATDL Army tactical data link
ACE Aviation combat element ATF amphibious task force
armored combat earthmover ATLASS Asset Tracking Logistics and Supply System
ACP Allied Communications Publication ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ADA air defense artillery ATO air tasking order
ADA TOC air defense artillery tactical operations center AUTODIN Automatic Digital Network
ADAM area denial artillery munitions AVLB armored vehicle launched bridge
ADCON administrative control AWACS airborne warning and control system
ADCP air defense command post BDA battle damage assessment
ADNS automated digital network system BDZ base defense zone
ADP automated data processing BFV Bradley fighting vehicle
AFATDS Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System BPSK binary phase shift key
AIS automated information system BVR beyond visual range

167
AL administrative loss C2W command and control warfare
AM amplitude modulation CAP combat air patrol
ANDVT advanced narrow band digital voice terminal CAS close air support
AO area of operations CBAE commander's battlespace area evaluation
AOC air operations center CBIRF Chemical/Biological Incident Response Force
AOI area of interest CCIR commander's critical information requirements
APOD aerial port of debarkation CEC cooperative engagement capability
ASC(A) assault support coordinator (airborne) CEOI communications-electronics operating
instructions
ASLT air support liaison team CFV cavalry fighting vehicle
ASOC air support operations center CGS common ground station
ASUW antisurface warfare CI counterintelligence
CID combat identification FIWC Fleet Information Warfare Center
CIWS close in weapons system FLIR forward looking infrared
CJCSI Chairman Joint Chiefs of Staff Instruction FLTSAT fleet satellite
CJCSM Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual FLTSATCOM fleet satellite communications
CMS communications security material system FM frequency modulation
COA course of action FMC full mission capable
COC combat operations center FO forward observer
COCOM combatant command FSCC fire support coordination center
COE common operating environment FSCL fire support coordination line
COG center of gravity FSE fire support element
COP common operational picture FSK Frequency shift key
COTS commercial off the shelf FSSG force service support group
CPOG chemical protective overgarment GBAD ground based air defense
CPU central processing unit GBDL ground based data link
CRC control and reporting center GBS Global Broadcast System
CRE control and reporting element GCCS Global Command and Control System
CSNP causeway section non-powered GCE ground combat element
CSP causeway section powered GCI ground controlled intercept
CSSE combat service support element GCSS Global Combat Support System
CTAPS contingency theater automated planning system GENSER general service (message)
CTT commander's tactical terminal GMF ground mobile forces
CV critical vulnerability GOTS government off the shelf
CWAR continuous wave acquisition radar GPS global positioning system
DACT data automated communications terminal GTN Global Transportation Network
DAMA demand assigned multiple access HEMTT heavy expanded mobile tactical truck
DASC direct air support center HERS helicopter expeditionary refueling system
DASC(A) direct air support center (airborne) HPT high payoff target
DEERS Defense Eligibility Enrollment Reporting System HST helicopter support team
DII defense information infrastructure HVT high value target
DIRLAUTH direct liaison authorized IAS Intelligence Analysis System
DISA Defense Information Systems Agency IFF identification friend or foe
DISN Defense Information Systems Network IFSAS interim fire support automated system
DMS Defense Message System INMARSAT International maritime satellite
DNS Domain Name System IO information operations
DNVT digital non-secure voice terminal IOS Intelligence Operations System
DOCC deep operations coordination cell IP internet protocol
DOW died of wounds IW information warfare
DP decision point JANAP Joint Army, Navy, Air Force publication
DSCS Defense Satellite Communications System JCATS Joint Conflict and Tactical Simulation
DSN Defense Switched Network JCCC joint communications control center
DSVT digital subscriber voice terminal JCS Joint chiefs of staff
DTC digital technical control JCSE Joint Communications Support Element
DWTS Digital Wideband Transmission System JDISS Joint Deployable Intelligence Support System
EAF expeditionary airfield JIC Joint Intelligence Center
EEFI essential elements of friendly information JMCIS Joint Maritime Command Information System
EFST essential fire support task JOPES Joint Operation Planning and Execution System
EFV Expeditionary Fighting Vehicle JSTARS Joint Surveillance Target Attack Radar System
EMCON emission control JTF joint task force
EPLRS enhanced position location reporting system JTIDS Joint Tactical Information Distribution System
EPW enemy prisoners of war JWICS Joint Worldwide Intelligence Communications System

168
EW/C early warning/control KIA killed in action
FAC(A) forward air controller (airborne) LAAD low altitude air defense
FACP forward air control post LCAC landing craft air cushioned
FARP forward arming and refueling point LCC amphibious command ship
FASCAM family of scatterable mines LCM landing craft, mechanized
FFCC force fires coordination center LCU landing craft, utility
FFIR friendly force information requirement LHA general purpose amphibious assault ship
FH frequency hopping LOS line-of-sight
CGS common ground station LPD amphibious transport dock
CI counterintelligence LPH amphibious assault ship
FIE fly in echelon LSD landing ship dock
FIST fire support team LST landing ship, tank
LVS logistics vehicle system PMD pounds per man per day
MACCS Marine air command and control system POTS plain old telephone system
MACG Marine air control group PPDL point to point data link
MAFC MAGTF all-source fusion center PSK phase shift key
MAGTF Marine air-ground task force PTM personnel transport module
MANPAD man-portable air defense RAAMS remote anti-armor mines system
MARFORAFRICA Marine Corps Forces, Africa Command RCS radar cross section
MARFORCOM Marine Corps Forces, Forces Command RFI request for information
MARFORPAC Marine Corps Forces, Pacific ROC rehearsal of concept
MATCD Marine air traffic control detachment ROWPU reverse osmosis water purification unit
MCPP Marine Corps planning process RRDF roll-on/roll-off discharge facility
MDMP military decision making process RRS remote receive station
MEF Marine expeditionary force RRT radio relay team
MEWSS mobile electronic warfare support system RT receiver-transmitter
MIAG modular integrated avionics group RTD returned to duty
MLG Marine Liaison Group SAAWC sector anti-air warfare facility
MMT Marine air traffic control mobile team SAR search and rescue
MOE measures of effectiveness SAR/FTI synthetic aperture radar/fixed target indicator
MOPP mission-oriented protective posture SATCOM satellite communications
MOS military occupational specialty SCI sensitive compartmented information
MOU memorandum of understanding SCR single channel radio
MP military police SIDS secondary imagery dissemination system
MPF maritime pre-positioning force SINCGARS single-channel ground and airborne radio system
MPF(E) maritime pre-positioning force (enhanced) SIPRNET SECRET Internet Protocol Router Network
MPS maritime pre-positioning ships SLCP ships loading characteristics pamphlet
MPSRON maritime pre-positioning squadron SLRP survey, liaison, and reconnaissance party
MRAC Marine rear area coordinator SLWT side loadable warping tug
MRACOM Marine rear area commander SMART-T Secure Mobile Anti-Jam Reliable Tactical Terminal
MRC mobile radio communications SPIRIT special purpose integrated remote intelligence terminal
MSC major subordinate command SPOD seaport of debarkation
MSCS multiple source correlation system SSM surface to surface missile
MSE mobile subscriber equipment SWA southwest Asia
MSR main supply route SYSCON systems control
MTACCS Marine tactical command and control sections T/E table of equipment
MTBF mean time before failure T/O table of organization
MTWS MAGTF Tactical Warfare Simulation TAC(A) tactical air coordinator (airborne)
MWCS Marine wing communications squadron TACC tactical air command center
MWSG Marine wing support group TACON tactical control
MWSS Marine wing support squadron TACP tactical air control party
NAI named area of interest TADC tactical air direction center
NAVMACS Naval Modular Automated Communications TADIL tactical digital information link
NBI non-battle injury TAFDS tactical airfield fuel dispense system
NCC naval component commander TAI target area of interest
NEA northeast Asia TAOC tactical air operations center
NEMSS naval expeditionary medical support system TARGET Theater Analysis and Replanning Graphical
NIIRS National imagery interpretation ratings scale Execution Toolkit
NIPRNET Non-secure Internet Protocol Router Network TASS tactical automated switching system
NOC network operations center TBM theater ballistic missile
NSSMS NATO Sea Sparrow Missile System TBMCS theater battle corps management system
OIR other information requirements TCO tactical combat operations

169
OPCON operational control TCP tactical control party
OPSEC operations security TEG tactical exploitation group
OSCC operational systems control center TERPES Tactical Electronic Reconnaissance Processing
OTH over the horizon and Evaluation System
PCS portable control station TTY teletype
PEI principle end item UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
PGM precision guided munitions ULCS unit-level circuit switch
PIR priority information requirement URL uniform resource locator
PLA plain language address VLS vertical launch system
PLAD plain language address directory WAS/MTI wide area surveillance/moving target indicator
PLGR precise lightweight GPS receiver WIA wounded in action
PLRS Position Location Reporting System

170
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Appendix C

Operations Orders Formats (Pull-Out Pages)

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

171
This page intentionally left blank.

172
CLASSIFICATION. As appropriate, centered at page top and
bottom. OPERATION PLAN/ORDER FORMAT HEADING

HEADING
Changes from Oral Orders. Used when oral orders regarding this
operation previously issued. Enclosed in parentheses.
Example: (No change from oral orders except paragraphs 3b and
3f.) Omitted in plans. Omitted in orders when no oral orders issued.
Title. Numbered consecutively for a calendar year. Two or more
issued on same day are given consecutive numbers. Joint operation
plan or order is so designated. Code name if any, as shown.
References. Documents (maps, charts, photomaps, or SOPs )
necessary for understanding must be available to recipients. Entry
always included (use References: None when applicable). Map
entries include series number, country, sheet names or numbers,
edition, and scale.
BODY
CLASSIFICATION Copy Number. Assigned by issuing headquarters to each copy. Log
(No change from oral orders) maintained of specific copies issued to addressees.
Copy no.__ of __ copies
I MEF Official Designation of Command. Use code name if required for
security.
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
17 Apr 2010
ABD-1 Place of Issue. May be code name, postal designator, or geographic
location (including map coordinates). Always capitalized.
OPERATION ORDER 0002-10 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)
BASIC ORDER (U) Date/Time. Day, month, and year order is signed, issued, and
becomes effective, unless specified otherwise in paragraph 3f
(Coordinating Instructions).
(U) REFERENCES:
(a) Maps and Charts: Series ONC, sheet G-2 (ORANGELAND, BLUELAND), edition 12
Message Reference Number. Allows acknowledgement in the clear.
(b) USPACOM Planning Directive, 27 March 2010 Assigned by originator. Consists of letters, numbers, or a
combination. Has no connection with message center numbering
(U) TIME ZONE: Zulu system. Annexes issued separately are assigned different numbers.

Time Zone. If same for the place of issue and execution, and will be (U) TASK ORGANIZATION. Annex A
same throughout execution, then entry may be omitted. If time zone
is different in area of execution ,which frequently occurs in 1. (U) Situation
amphibious or air-transported operations,then state when indicated
a. (U) General. With the failure of deterrence, Blueland forces crossed the Orangeland border
time zone becomes effective.
and have been successful in their initial battles.
Task Organization. May be shown in the following ways: b. (U) Battlespace. See Appendix 18 to Annex C.
1. As an unnumbered entry before paragraph 1, (Situation). Used
when entire command of issuing headquarters is organized into task c. (U) Enemy Forces. See Annex B and current intelligence summaries.
organizations for a particular operation and task organizations are BODY
too complicated to be shown using other methods. d. (U) Friendly Forces.
2. If there is no change to previous task organization, show No Paragraph 2. Clear concise statement of tasks and purpose of the
Change. e. (U) Attachments and Detachments operation. State the who, what, when, where, why, and as
3. Under the proper subparagraph of paragraph 3; simplest, and much of the how as necessary. No subparagraphs. Always stated
therefore preferred, method in continuing ground combat situation. 2. (U) Mission. On order, I MEF, as the main effort, conducts offensive operations to defeat enemy here even if shown on operation overlay or map.
Show No Change except paragraph 3b... forces in zone in order to restore the Blueland border. Be prepared to continue offensive operations
4. As an annex when lengthy; e.g., division or higher. Used in into Orangeland to destroy remaining Orangeland offensive military capabilities.
amphibious operations permits early dissemination and assists Commanders Intent. The Commanders personal statement of the
concurrent planning. Also used where planning precedes operation 3. (U) Execution purpose of the operation.
by a considerable period of time.
(In numbers 1 and 4 above, the organization of the issuing a. (U) Commander's Intent
headquarters, including service and administrative groupings which Concept of Operations. A summary statement of how the operation
will perform normal functions, is the first entry. Following that, each b. (U) Concept of Operations. This operation will be conducted in three phases. will be accomplished. It amplifies Paragraph 2. It may be shown
task grouping that is to receive a tactical mission is shown in the graphically or published as appendixes to Annex C. Specific unit
sequence in which the missions are assigned in paragraph 3.
c. (U) Tasks designations are not used.
st
(1) (U) 1 Marine Division (REIN)
General. For plans only; describe the general politico-military Tasks to Subordinate Elements
rd
environment which would establish the probable preconditions for (2) (U) 3 Marine Division (-) (REIN) 1. Each unit, organic or attached, or tactical grouping that is
execution of the plan. rd
executing a tactical task is assigned a separate numbered
(3) (U) 3 Marine Aircraft Wing subparagraph. All tactical tasks must be listed in the body of basic
st orders.
Battlespace. The higher commanders area of operation and the (4) (U) 1 Marine Logistics Group (-) (REIN) 2. List tasks for major subordinate elements as follows:
commands area of interest, influence, and operations described by Offensive order: Ground combat units (infantry first followed by
the physical area and the forces of concern. (5) (U) Special Purpose MAGTF-B artillery and combat support units numerically or alphabetically);
aviation combat units or elements (aircraft units, combat support,
d. (U) MEF Reserve
combat service support), combat service support units or
e. (U) Commanders Critical Information Requirements elements.
Defensive order: Units or elements closest to the enemy are
Enemy Forces. Show enemy information vital to entire command or f. (U) Coordinating Instructions listed first. Ground and aviation combat units in the forward
likely to affect accomplishment of mission. May refer to intelligence defense area are then listed in numerical order followed by other
annex, operation overlay (if enemy information is shown), or 4. (U) Administration and Logistics units alphabetically.
intelligence summarie. Contains disposition, intent, objectives, 3. Each tactical task assignment may show first the assets
vulnerabilities, COG(s), and COA(s). 5. (U) Command and Signal (Attached or in support) available to the unit or element for the
operation. Then tasks are enumerated.
a. (U) Command Relationships. See Annex J (COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS). 4. Priority must be stated if missions are multiple and priority of
Friendly Forces. Information on own forces having bearing on
accomplishment is desired.
operation (higher, adjacent, and supporting). Artillery listed as first b. (U) Command Posts and Headquarters 5. If all instructions to unit are shown on operations overlay, list the
supporting unit and then others are listed alphabetically. May
unit after proper subparagraph number and reference Operation
reference annex operation overlay. c. (U) Succession to Command Overlay Appendix.
d. (U) Signal. See Annex K (COMBAT INFORMATION SYSTEMS)
Paragraph 4. Logistics and personnel information and instructions for
the operation. Usually refers to appropriate annexes. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT Commanders Critical Information Requirements. Identify information
the commander has deemed critical to maintaining his situational
awareness, planning future activities, and assisting in timely and
Paragraph 5. Instructions to establish and maintain command and GERALD C. THOMAS informed decision-making.
signal procedures. Lieutenant General, USMC
1. Command Relationships. Used when a large operation, or Commanding
relationships are unusual. Otherwise omitted. Coordinating Instructions. Final subparagraph in paragraph 3.
2. Command Posts and Headquarters. May reference operations Contains instructions common to two or more units, coordinating
Annexes: details and control measures applicable to the command as a whole,
overlay for locations.
3. Succession to Command. Designates the succession of command and time or conditions when plan is to be executed. Refers to
A - Task Organization annexes or references for coordinating details when appropriate.
for the operation.
4. Signal. Usually references Annex K and other communication
B - Intelligence Communications instructions shown in paragraph 5 only.
publications such as SOP or communications-electronics operating C - Operations
instructions. Includes instructions or restrictions or pyrotechnic D - Logistics
signals.
E - Personnel
5. Use additional subparagraphs to show location and time of ENDING
opening communication centers, recognition and identification F - Public Affairs
instructions, code words and names, and liaison. G - Civil Military Operations Acknowledgement Instructions. Included in every order and
H - Meteorological and Oceanographic Operations separately issued portions. Ensures that recipients receive and
Annexes. Appended to and form a portion of the completed J - Command Relationships understand the order.
plan/order. They pertain to a particular concept, subject, or K Combat Information Systems
coordination aspect too voluminous, of insufficient general interest, L - Environmental Considerations Signature. Original signed by the commander or chief of
or in irregular form, such as overlays, graphs, or tables for body of
M - Geospatial Information and Services staff/executive officer.
plan/order. They contribute to the brevity and clarity of parent
document. Sequence and lettering must chang. Annexes may be N - Space Operations 1. Original signed by Commander.
omitted when not required. Annexes are designated by capital letter, P - Host Nation Support
amplified where necessary by appendices to annexes, tabs to Name
appendices, and enclosures to tabs. Q - Medical Services Rank, USMC
S - Special Technical Operations Commander
U - Information Management 2. Original signed by chief of staff/executive officer
V- Interagency Coordination BY COMMAND OF COLONEL X
W - Aviation Operations
Name
X - Execution Checklist Rank, USMC
Z Distribution Title

OFFICIAL: Authenticated by G/S-3 when commanders or executive officers

To satisfy JOPES format requirements, titles of paragraphs and s/ signature is on original only; G/S-3 authentication appears on all
subparagraphs must remain as shown in this example. M.B. TWINING other copies.
Colonel, USMC
AC/S G-3

CLASSIFICATION

173
Organization for Combat is a commanders visualization of how he
will group organic and attached combat, combat support, and GUIDE FOR TASK ORGANIZATION ANNEX HEADING
combat service support elements for employment with other
supporting forces to support his scheme of maneuver, and the Copy Number. Assigned by issuing headquarters to each copy. Log
CLASSIFICATION
command relationships to most effectively control his organization. It maintained of specific copies issued to addressees.
is determined after consideration of the units mission, missions
assigned to subordinate units, terrain and enemy strength in each Copy no.__ of __ copies
subordinate unit area, and the amount of combat power, including I MEF Official Designation of Command. Use code name if required for
maneuver and fire support units, available to the unit commander. security.
GREENTOWN, BLUELAND
The organization for combat and the scheme of maneuver are
17 Apr 2001
developed concurrently. The task organization graphically portrays Place of Issue. May be code name, postal designator, or geographic
the command relationships and the assignment of means for the ABD-1
location (including map coordinates). Always capitalized.
accomplishment of the mission. The G/S-3 prepares the task
organization after considering the recommendation of appropriate ANNEX A TO OPERATION ORDER 0002-01 (OPERATION SHARP SWORD) (U)
unit commanders. Its purpose is to establish groupings into which the TASK ORGANIZATION (U) Date/Time. Day, month, and year order is signed, issued, and
command will be divided to accomplish its mission and to establish becomes effective, unless specified otherwise in Coordinating
command relationships. These groupings may be shown, if simple, in (U) REFERENCES: None Instructions paragraph.
paragraph 3 of the Basic Order. If complex, the task organization will
be shown in a separate annex or just before paragraph 1 of the (U) TIME ZONE: Zulu
Basic Order. Message Reference Number. Allows acknowledgement in the clear.
(All attachments effective 170001Z Apr 2001) Assigned by originator. Consists of letters, numbers, or combination.
Has no connection with message center numbering system.
BODY I Marine Expeditionary Force (MEF) LtGen Thomas Annexes issued separately are assigned different numbers.
HqSvc Bn, I MEF
The task organization is always Annex A. The capital letter 9th Comm Bn (-), I MEF
designation is followed by the title of the Basic Order, and then by 1st Intel Bn (-), I MEF BODY
the annex title. 1st Radio Bn (-), I MEF
3d Force Reconnaissance Co Indicate names of commanders of the parent organization and
principal units included in paragraph 3 of the Basic Order.
References. Documents (SOPs, etc) necessary for understanding, 1st Marine Division (REIN) MajGen Vandegrift
must be available to recipients. Entry always included (use 1st Marine Regiment Terms such as RLT, MEU, and MEF (Fwd) are task organizations. If
References: None when applicable). 5th Marine Regiment no such term is used, a unit that has been task organized is
7th Marine Regiment indicated by the addition of (-) (Rein), as appropriate, to its normal
Time Zone. If same for the place of issue and execution, and will be 11th Marine Regiment (REIN) unit designator, such as 1st Marine Division (-) (REIN). The (-)
same throughout execution, entry may be omitted. If time zone is 1st Tank Battalion indicates that a substantial part of an organic unit (or units) has been
different in area of execution (frequently occurs in amphibious or air- 4th Tank Battalion (-) detached. The (Rein) indicates that a substantial part of a non-
transported operations), entry must state when indicated time zone organic unit (or units) has been attached.
becomes effective.
1st Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion
4th Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion (-) Notice that units are depicted in different forms in this task
3d Assault Amphibian Battalion (-) organization:
Time attachment and detachment effective shown here and in 4th Assault Amphibian Battalion 1. In this particular task organization, the 7th Marine Regiment has no
subparagraph 3f (Coordinating Instructions) of Basic Order. 1st Combat Engineer Battalion (-) attachments or detachments; thus, it appears simply as 7th Marine
st
1 Reconnaissance Battalion (-) Regiment.
2. Whenever a unit detaches any part of itself to another for
The first entry is the organization of the issuing headquarters attachment, a parenthetical minus is inserted after its title. In this
(underlined). Unless indicated by BLT, etc., the normal unit
3rd Marine Division (-) (REIN) BGen Henderson
3d Marine Regiment example, 4th Light Armored Reconnaissance Bn has detached a
designator should be used with (REIN) and/or (-) to indicated platoon to the reserve, thus, the designation 4th Light Armored
attachments and/or detachment. 4th Marine Regiment
Reconnaissance Bn (-).
24th Marine Regiment
3. Conversely, several units have been attached to 12th Marine
12th Marine Regiment (REIN) Regiment; thus, it appears in the task organization as 12th Marine
Those units to which no specific tactical mission is to be assigned,
4th Tank Battalion (-) Regiment (REIN). The parenthetical note is place immediately after
and which are not assigned to any other tactical groupings are
shown at the beginning of the task organization indented under the 3d Light Armored Reconnaissance Battalion (-) the title of the specific unit receiving reinforcement. Whenever an
issuing headquarters. 3d Combat Assault Battalion (-) (REIN) organization attaches another, the augmented unit is reinforced.
3d Reconnaissance Battalion (-) 4. An organization can be both minus and reinforced. In this
example, CLR 15 deployed without all of its organic units, but it has
Units attached to a task group are indented under task group 3rd Marine Aircraft Wing MajGen Geiger also been reinforced with reserve units, thus its complete
heading. MWHS 3 designation becomes CLR 15 (-) (REIN).
MAG 11 5. A unit may be assigned operational or tactical control over another
The task organization can include major weapon systems. This MALS 11 unit. This relationship is indicated by the use of OPCON or TACON
information may be useful to other Services and nations. VMFA 232 following the title of the subordinate unit.
6. A tactical mission of general support (GS) or direct support (DS)
VMFA 314
may also be assigned.
Artillery units are similarly listed. Terms such as DS and GS, VMFA 323
however, have additional meaning to these units. (See MCWP 3-16, VMGR 352 Careful cross-checking is mandatory in task organizing to ensure
Marine Artillery Support. VMFA(AW) 121 that no unit is lost in the shuffle. As a rule, insert a minus whenever a
VMFA(AW) 242 detachment is made, and IMMEDIATELY record the corresponding
attachment assignment to the unit receiving the attachment.
VMFA(AW) 225
Common commander for reserve is listed opposite Reserve MAG 12
group heading. MAG 13 For units with no table of organization (e.g., task groups, aircraft
MAG 16 wings and groups) list all subordinate units.
Reserve variations:
1. If there is no common commander and units have separate MAG 39
MACG 38 Each unit tasked with a tactical mission in the Basic Order is listed
missions:
MWSG 37 and underlined. The commander of each underlined unit is indicated
MEF Reserve
by name. Successive subordinate echelons of particular tactical
1st Bn, 6th Mar LtCol Jones
1st Marine Logistics Group (-) (REIN) BGen Pate groupings are indicated by indentations beneath the underlined unit.
3d Bn, 25th Mar LtCol Roberts
2. If a unit is going to be in reserve in some foreseeable time, it will HQ, 1st MLG
be listed under the Reserve as well as being listed in its normal CLR 1 Subordinate units which are assigned tactical missions are
sequence. CLR 3 (REIN) underlined and listed in appropriate sequence. This sequence will
3. If task organization of unit were to remain the same: CLR 15 (-) (REIN) depend on two factors: the type of units being assigned missions
MEF Reserve CLR 35 (-) (REIN) and the type of mission (offensive or defensive). This sequence
1st Bn, 6th Mar (Eff on relief) LtCol Jones CLR 17 (REIN) should parallel the sequence of mission assignments in paragraph 3
4. If task organization of unit were to change: of the Basic Order. The sequence of listing major subordinate
3rd Naval Construction Regiment (OPCON)
MEF Reserve elements of a command is as follows:
1st Bn (REIN), 6th Mar (Eff on relief) LtCol Jones MEF Reserve TBD 1. Offensive Order. Ground combat units (infantry first followed by
1st Plt, 2d Tank Bn artillery and combat support units numerically or alphabetically);
1st Plt, 2d LAR Bn aviation combat units or elements (aircraft units, combat support,
combat service support); combat service support units or elements.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT 2. Defensive Order. Units or elements closest to the enemy are listed
Acknowledgement Instructions. Included in every order and first. Ground and aviation combat units in the forward defense area
separately issued portions. Ensures that recipients receive and are then listed in numerical order followed by other units
understand the order. BY COMMAND OF LIEUTENANT GENERAL THOMAS alphabetically.
3. Reserve. Always listed last.
EDWARD SNEDECKER
Signature. Original signed by the commander or chief of Brigadier General, USMC
staff/executive officer. Deputy Commander
1. Original signed by Commander. OFFICIAL:
Name s/
Rank, USMC M.B. TWINING
Commander Colonel, USMC
AC/S G-3
2. Original signed by chief of staff/executive officer
BY COMMAND OF COLONEL X CLASSIFICATION
Name
Rank, USMC
Title

Authenticated by G/S-3 when commanders or executive officers

signature is on original only; G/S-3 authentication appears on all
other copies.

174
175